Catalogue Norme Ul

Multistandard protection
UL, CSA, IEC, CCC
Catalogue 2017
schneider-electric.com
Green Premium TM
Endorsing eco-friendly products in the industry
Schneider Electric’s Green Premium ecolabel is

committed to offering transparency, by disclosing
extensive and reliable information related to
the environmental impact of its products:
Green Premium is the only RoHS

label that allows you to Schneider Electric products are subject to RoHS requirements at
effectively develop and a worldwide level, even for the many products that are not required
promote an environmental
to comply with the terms of the regulation. Compliance certificates are
policy whilst preserving
your business efficiency.
available for products that fulfil the criteria of this European initiative,
This ecolabel guarantees which aims to eliminate hazardous substances.
compliance with up-to-date
environmental regulations, REACh
but it does
Schneider Electric applies the strict REACh regulation on its products
more than this.
at a worldwide level, and discloses extensive information concerning
the presence of SVHC (Substances of Very High Concern) in all of
these products.
PEP: Product Environmental Profile

Over 75% of Schneider Electric publishes complete set of environmental data,
Schneider Electric including carbon footprint and energy consumption data
for each of the lifecycle phases on all of its products, in compliance
manufactured products with the ISO 14025 PEP ecopassport program. PEP is especially useful
have been awarded the for monitoring, controlling, saving energy, and/or reducing
Green Premium ecolabel carbon emissions.
EoLI: End of Life Instructions

Available at the click of a button, these instructions provide:
• Recyclability rates for Schneider Electric products.
• Guidance to mitigate personnel hazards during the dismantling of
Discover what we products and before recycling operations.
mean by green …. • Parts identification for recycling or for selective treatment, to mitigate
environmental hazards/ incompatibility with standard recycling processes.
Check your products!
Three catalogs: Three chapters:
Modulares devices
Multi 9 TM
Multistandard protecion for OEM
2 Life is On | Schneider Electric Multistandard protection catalogue - 02/2017
PowerPact B
PowerPact B TM
Multistandard
Circuit breakers from 15 to 125 A
PowerPact
PowerPact TM
Multistandard
Multi 9 TM
Multistandard protecion for OEM
Multi 9TM
Modular protection for OEMs
Multi 9™ is a range of DIN rail modular devices, a solution offering great performance. Multi 9 range
is a Schneider Electric global offer dedicated to equipment manufacturers (OEMs), meeting the
major standards for industry applications. Designed to meet your needs for most types of machines,
offering a wide range of modular devices it provides protection, signaling functions and accessories.
Multistandard protection catalogue - 02/2017 Life is On | Schneider Electric 3

Time to optimize
your control panel
A comprehensive range to protect against
electricalthreats, including short circuits,
overloads, and earth leakages
Renowned quality
World leader’s proven
technology and
experience.
Available worldwide
Sold under the same
commercial reference.
Optimized
Small footprint to
reduce your panel size,
cost effective, less
commercial references
Its new performances and the multiple choices of field installable

accessories allow you to adapt easily to any configuration, any time.
Multi 9 fits perfectly in Schneider Electric solutions allowing you to build
your panel with a global specialist in energy management and automation.
The Multi 9 offer complies with UL, IEC®, CCC or CSA and sets a new
standard of reliability and high performance. Every product of the range
has a single global part number, simplicity starts with full availability.
You order. We ship, worldwide.

Range Highlights
C60BP
• UL 489, CSA, IEC and CCC certified,
• UL 489 performances: up to 35 A in 480Y/277V and up to 63 A in 240 V,
• New optimized design and smaller footprint (103 mm / 4,05 in): each
references up to 35 A, cover both 480Y/277V and 240 V power supplies,
• In addition to the accessories range, the UL cuttable combs are
now available.
C60BPR
• UL 489, CSA, IEC and CCC certified,
• UL 489 performances: up to 35 A in 480Y/277V and up to 63 A in 240 V,
• New optimized design and smaller footprint: each references up to 35 A
cover both 480Y/277V and 240 V power supplies,
• Ring tongue terminal connection ability,
• Ready to wire as terminal are delivered open.
C60H-DC
• UL1077, IEC, CCC certified,
• To protect your direct current applications up to 500 V DC.

Multi 9
Multistandard circuit protection for OEM
Miniature circuit breakers p.10
UL/CSA + IEC/EN 60947-2 + GB
C60BP - UL 489 - Z, C, D curves – Tunnel terminals p. 10
1
C60BPR - UL 489 - Z, C, D curves – Ring-tongue terminals p. 12
C60SP - UL 1077 - B, C, D curves – Tunnels terminals p. 14
C60H-DC - UL 1077 – B, C, K curves – Tunnels terminals - For DC circuits only p. 17
IEC/EN 60947-2
C60N - B, C, D curves p. 20
C60H - B, C, D curves p. 22
C60L - C curve p. 24
C60CTRL - Z, C curves – For control circuits protection p. 26
N40N - C curve p. 28
Residual Current Devices p. 30

UL + IEC/EN
GFP - UL 1053 & IEC/EN 61008 - Ground fault protector p. 30
2
IEC/EN
RCCB ID - IEC/EN 61008-1 - Residual Current Circuit Breakers – AC, A-SI types p. 32
RCCB ID - IEC/EN 61008-1 - Residual Current Circuit Breakers – B type p. 34
Vigi C60 - IEC/EN 61009-1 & 61009-2-1 - Residual current devices - Add-on for C60 p. 36
Vigi N40 - IEC/EN 61009-1 - Residual Current Devices - Add-on for N40 p. 38
N40 Vigi - IEC/EN 61009-1 - Residual Current Circuit Breakers with Overcurrent protection p. 40
Auxiliaries and accessories p. 43

Common electrical auxiliaries p. 43 3
Common accessories p. 48
Comb busbars for C60BP (UL489) p. 53
Comb busbars for C60SP (UL1077) p. 55
Comb busbars for C60N, C60H, C60L (IEC/EN, 18 mm pitch) p. 56
Comb busbars for N40N, N40 Vigi (IEC/EN, 9 mm pitch) p. 58
Linergy DS screw distribution blocks p. 60
Technical information p. 64
Breaker standards p. 64 4
The standards and their applications p. 65
Circuit breakers tripping curves p. 66
Influence of ambient temperature p. 68
Dissipated power, Impedance and Voltage drop p. 72
Short-circuit current limiting p. 73
Control panel technical guides library p. 80

5

Miniature circuit breakers
C60BP - UL 489 - Z, C, D curves – Tunnel terminals
UL 489 / CSA C22.2 No 5 / IEC/EN 60947-2 / GB 14048-2

DB105727
DB105728
DB405227
C60BP are multi-standard miniature circuit breakers and branch circuit protection as
IEC defined by UL 489. It combines following functions:
bb circuit protection against short-circuit currents
bb circuit protection against overload currents
bb tripping and fault indication by the addition of auxiliaries.
PB116664-40
Number of Rating (A) Breaking capacity (kA rms)

18 mm (0.71 in.) 25°C/77°F AIR Icu
poles UL 489 / CSA C22.2 No 5 IEC 60947-2
Voltage (Ue) 277 V a 240 V a 120 V a 60 V c 440 V a 415 V a 240 V a 60 V c
1P 0.5 to 35 10 14 14 10 - 3 10 20
40 to 63 - 10 10 10 - 3 10 20
Voltage (Ue) 480Y/277 V a 240 V a 125 V c 440 V a 415 V a 240 V a 125 V c
2P 1 to 25 10 14 10 6 10 20 -
30 to 35 10 14 - 6 10 20 -
3P 1 to 35 10 14 - 6 10 20 -
2P/3P 40 to 63 - 10 - 6 10 20 -
Electrical diagrams
PB116665-40
1P 2P 3P
DB408609
60 V c
DB408610
DB408611
1 3 5
2 4 6
Catalogue numbers
Tunnel terminal connection
Type UL489 and 1P 2P 3P
CSA voltages
Auxiliaries Remote indication and tripping, see page 43
Curve Width in Curve Width in Curve Width in
9 mm 9 mm 9 mm
Rating (In) Z C D (=K) modules C D (=K) modules C D (=K) modules
C60BP
0.5 M9F44170 M9F42170 M9F43170 2 - - 4 - - 6
1 M9F44101 M9F42101 M9F43101 M9F42201 M9F43201 M9F42301 M9F43301
2 M9F44102 M9F42102 M9F43102 M9F42202 M9F43202 M9F42302 M9F43302
3 M9F44103 M9F42103 M9F43103 M9F42203 M9F43203 M9F42303 M9F43303
4 M9F44104 M9F42104 M9F43104 M9F42204 M9F43204 M9F42304 M9F43304
5 M9F44105 M9F42105 M9F43105 M9F42205 M9F43205 M9F42305 M9F43305
6 480Y/277 V M9F44106 M9F42106 M9F43106 M9F42206 M9F43206 M9F42306 M9F43306
8 and 240 V M9F44108 M9F42108 M9F43108 M9F42208 M9F43208 M9F42308 M9F43308
10 M9F44110 M9F42110 M9F43110 M9F42210 M9F43210 M9F42310 M9F43310
15 M9F44115 M9F42115 M9F43115 M9F42215 M9F43215 M9F42315 M9F43315
20 M9F44120 M9F42120 M9F43120 M9F42220 M9F43220 M9F42320 M9F43320
25 M9F44125 M9F42125 M9F43125 M9F42225 M9F43225 M9F42325 M9F43325
30 M9F44130 M9F42130 M9F43130 M9F42230 M9F43230 M9F42330 M9F43330
35 M9F44135 M9F42135 M9F43135 M9F42235 M9F43235 M9F42335 M9F43335
40 M9F44140 M9F42140 M9F43140 2 M9F42240 M9F43240 4 M9F42340 M9F43340 6
45 M9F44145 M9F42145 M9F43145 M9F42245 M9F43245 M9F42345 M9F43345
240 V only
50 M9F44150 M9F42150 M9F43150 M9F42250 M9F43250 M9F42350 M9F43350
63 M9F44163 M9F42163 M9F43163 M9F42263 M9F43263 M9F42363 M9F43363
Accessories See page 48

C60BP - UL 489 - Z, C, D curves – Tunnel terminals (cont.)
Conformity with product standards

bb UL 489 branch circuit protection, document #E215117. 1
bb CSA C22.2 No 5 branch circuit protection, document #E179014.
bb IEC/EN 60947-2.
bb GB 14048-2.
UL 486A connections for copper cables,

Without accessory
document #E216919
Rating Tightening torque Copper cables
DB409742
Rigid, flexible or with ferrule

14 mm
6.5 mm
DB122945
DB122946
IEC 60947-2 UL 486A-B
PZ2 0.5 to 25 A 2.5 N.m (22 lb.in) 1 to 25 mm2 AWG #18 to #8
30 to 63 A 3.5 N.m (31 lb.in) 1 to 35 mm2 AWG #18 to #2
Weight (g / oz) Dimensions (mm / inches)

Circuit-breaker mm
DB407313
3P 54
in 2.13
Type C60BP
2P 36 5.5 72
1P 130 g / 4.58 oz 1.42 2.22 2.83
2P 260 g / 9.17 oz 1P 18 48 12
3P 390 g / 13.76 oz 0.71 1.89 0.47
103 81 45
4.06 3.19 1.77
5
0.2
C60BPTunnel terminal
Technical data
DB118767
Main characteristics
Insulation voltage (Ui) 500 V
Service breaking capacity (Ics) In alternating current 75 % of Icu
In direct current 100 % of Icu
Pollution degree 3
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) 6 kV
Clips onto 35 mm DIN rail.
Thermal tripping Reference temperature 25°C / 77°F
Magnetic tripping Z curve In alternating current 3 In ± 20 %
DB122831
In direct current 4.2 In ± 20 %

C curve In alternating current 8.5 In ± 20 %
In direct current 12 In ± 20 %
D curve In alternating current 12 In ± 20 %
(=K curve) In direct current 17 In ± 20 %
Additional characteristics
Degree of Device only IP20
Any installation position. protection Device in modular enclosure IP40
(IEC 60529) Insulation class II
Endurance (O-C) Electrical 10,000 cycles
IP20 IP40
DB123314-LIO
Mechanical 20,000 cycles

Operating temperature -30°C to +70°C / -22°F to 158°F
Storage temperature -40°C to +80°C / -40°F to 176°F
Tropicalization (IEC 60068-1) Treatment 2
(relative humidity 95 % at 55°C / 131°F)
Dissipated power See page 68

C60BPR - UL 489 - Z, C, D curves – Ring-tongue terminals
UL 489 / CSA C22.2 No 5 / IEC/EN 60947-2 / GB 14048-2

DB105727
DB105728
DB405227
C60BPR are multi-standard miniature circuit breakers and branch circuit protection as
IEC defined by UL 489. It combines following functions:
bb tripping and fault indication by the addition of auxiliaries
bb IP2X ring tongue terminal connection.

PB116667-40
PB116668-40
18 mm (0.71 in.) 25°C/77°F AIR Icu

1P 1 to 35 10 14 14 10 - 3 10 20
40 to 63 - 10 10 10 - 3 10 20
Voltage (Ue) 480Y/277 V a 240 V a 125 V c 440 V a 415 V a 240 V a 125 V c
2P 1 to 25 10 14 10 6 10 20 -
30 to 35 10 14 - 6 10 20 -
3P 1 to 35 10 14 - 6 10 20 -
2P/3P 40 to 63 - 10 - 6 10 20 -
PB116669-40
Electrical diagrams
1P 2P 3P
DB408609
60 V c
DB408610
1 3 5
DB408611
2 4 6
Catalogue numbers
Ring tongue terminal connection
Type UL489 and 1P 2P 3P
CSA voltages
Curve Width in Curve Width in Curve Width in
9 mm 9 mm 9 mm
Rating (In) Z C D (=K) modules C D (=K) modules C D (=K) modules
C60BPR
1 M9F54101 M9F52101 M9F53101 2 M9F52201 M9F53201 4 M9F52301 M9F53301 6
2 M9F54102 M9F52102 M9F53102 M9F52202 M9F53202 M9F52302 M9F53302
4 M9F54104 M9F52104 M9F53104 M9F52204 M9F53204 M9F52304 M9F53304
6 M9F54106 M9F52106 M9F53106 M9F52206 M9F53206 M9F52306 M9F53306
8 M9F54108 M9F52108 M9F53108 M9F52208 M9F53208 M9F52308 M9F53308
480Y/277 V
10 M9F54110 M9F52110 M9F53110 M9F52210 M9F53210 M9F52310 M9F53310
and 240 V
15 M9F54115 M9F52115 M9F53115 M9F52215 M9F53215 M9F52315 M9F53315
20 M9F54120 M9F52120 M9F53120 M9F52220 M9F53220 M9F52320 M9F53320
25 M9F54125 M9F52125 M9F53125 M9F52225 M9F53225 M9F52325 M9F53325
30 M9F54130 M9F52130 M9F53130 M9F52230 M9F53230 M9F52330 M9F53330
35 M9F54135 M9F52135 M9F53135 M9F52235 M9F53235 M9F52335 M9F53335
40 M9F54140 M9F52140 M9F53140 2 M9F52240 M9F53240 4 M9F52340 M9F53340 6
45 M9F54145 M9F52145 M9F53145 M9F52245 M9F53245 M9F52345 M9F53345
240 V only
50 M9F54150 M9F52150 M9F53150 M9F52250 M9F53250 M9F52350 M9F53350
63 M9F54163 M9F52163 M9F53163 M9F52263 M9F53263 M9F52363 M9F53363

C60BPR - UL 489 - Z, C, D curves – Ring-tongue terminals (cont.)

bb UL 489 branch circuit protection, document #E215117. 1
bb CSA C22.2 No 5 branch circuit protection, document #E179014.
bb IEC/EN 60947-2.
bb GB 14048-2.
UL 486A connections for copper wires,

document #E216919
Without accessory
Rating Tightening torque Screw-on connection for ring
terminal
12 mm
DB407263
ØA (0.47 in) max.
Ø 5.5 mm
(0.22 in) min.
Thickness: 3 mm (0.12 in) or

2 x 1.5 mm (0.06 in) max.
1 to 63 A 2 N.m (18 lb.in) Ø A: 5 mm (#10)

Circuit-breaker mm 54
DB407314
3P
in 2.13
Type C60BPR 36
2P 5.5 72
1P 130 g / 4.58 oz 1.42 2.22 2.83
2P 260 g / 9.17 oz 1P 18 48 12
0.71 1.89 0.47
3P 390 g / 13.76 oz
127 81 45
5.00 3.19 1.77
5
0.2
C60BPR Ring tongue terminal
DB118767
Technical data
Clips onto 35 mm DIN rail.
Pollution degree 3
DB122831

Magnetic tripping Z curve In alternating current 3 In ± 20 %
Any installation position.
protection Device in modular enclosure IP40
IP20 IP40 (IEC 60529) Insulation class II
DB123314-LIO


C60SP - UL 1077 - B, C, D curves – Tunnels terminals
UL 1077 / CSA C22.2 No 235 / IEC/EN 60947-2 /

DB105730
DB105729
DB405227
GB 14048-2
IEC C60SP are multi-standard miniature circuit breakers and supplementary protection
as defined by UL 1077. It combines following functions:
PB116660-40

18 mm (0.71 in.) 25°C/77°F AIR Icu
1P 0.5 to 32 10 14 14 10 - 3 10 20
40 to 63 5 10 10 10 - 3 10 20
Voltage (Ue) 480Y/277 V a 240 V a 125 V c 440 V a 415 240 V a 125 V c
2P 1 to 25 10 14 10 6 10 20 -
32 10 14 - 6 10 20 -
3P/4P 2 to 32 10 14 - 6 10 20 -
2P/3P/4P 40 to 63 5 10 - 6 10 20 -
PB116661-40
Electrical diagrams
1P 2P 3P 4P
65 V c
DB408642
DB408610
DB408611
DB408643
1 3 5 1 3 5 7
2 4 6 2 4 6 8
Catalogue numbers
Tunnel terminal connection
Type 1P 2P
Curve Width in 9 mm Curve Width in 9 mm
modules modules
Rating (In) B C D (=K) B C D (=K)
C60SP
0.5 M9F21170 M9F22170 M9F23170 2 - - - 4
1 M9F21101 M9F22101 M9F23101 M9F21201 M9F22201 M9F23201
2 M9F21102 M9F22102 M9F23102 M9F21202 M9F22202 M9F23202
3 M9F21103 M9F22103 M9F23103 M9F21203 M9F22203 M9F23203
4 M9F21104 M9F22104 M9F23104 M9F21204 M9F22204 M9F23204
5 M9F21105 M9F22105 M9F23105 M9F21205 M9F22205 M9F23205
6 M9F21106 M9F22106 M9F23106 M9F21206 M9F22206 M9F23206
8 M9F21108 M9F22108 M9F23108 M9F21208 M9F22208 M9F23208
10 M9F21110 M9F22110 M9F23110 M9F21210 M9F22210 M9F23210
13 M9F21113 M9F22113 M9F23113 M9F21213 M9F22213 M9F23213
16 M9F21116 M9F22116 M9F23116 M9F21216 M9F22216 M9F23216
20 M9F21120 M9F22120 M9F23120 M9F21220 M9F22220 M9F23220
25 M9F21125 M9F22125 M9F23125 M9F21225 M9F22225 M9F23225
32 M9F21132 M9F22132 M9F23132 M9F21232 M9F22232 M9F23232
40 M9F21140 M9F22140 M9F23140 M9F21240 M9F22240 M9F23240
45 M9F21145 M9F22145 M9F23145 M9F21245 M9F22245 M9F23245
50 M9F21150 M9F22150 M9F23150 M9F21250 M9F22250 M9F23250
63 M9F21163 M9F22163 M9F23163 M9F21263 M9F22263 M9F23263

C60SP - UL 1077 - B, C, D curves – Tunnels terminals (cont.)

bb UL 1077 supplementary protection , document #E90509. 1
bb CSA C22.2 No. 235 supplementary protection, document #E179014.
bb IEC/EN 60947-2.
bb GB 14048-2.

Without accessory
document #E216919
DB123537

14 mm
6.5 mm
DB122945
DB122946
IEC 60947-2 UL 486A-B
F
O-OF
F
O-OF
0.5 to 25 A 2.5 N.m (22 lb.in) 1 to 25 mm2 AWG #18 to #8

PZ2

Circuit-breaker mm 72
DB407311
4P
in 2.83
Type C60SP 54
3P
1P 120 g / 4.23 oz 2.13
2P 240 g / 8.46 oz 2P 36 5.5 72
1.42 2.22 2.83
3P 360 g / 12.70 oz
1P 18 44 16
4P 480 g / 16.93 oz 0.71 1.73 0.63
81 45
3.19 1.77
5
0.2
C60SP Tunnel terminal connection
3P 4P

modules modules
B C D (=K) B C D (=K)
- - - 6 - - - 8
- - - - - -
M9F21302 M9F22302 M9F23302 M9F21402 M9F22402 M9F23402
- - - - - -
- - - - - -
- - - - - -
M9F21306 M9F22306 M9F23306 M9F21406 M9F22406 M9F23406
M9F21308 M9F22308 M9F23308 M9F21408 M9F22408 M9F23408
M9F21310 M9F22310 M9F23310 M9F21410 M9F22410 M9F23410
M9F21313 M9F22313 M9F23313 M9F21413 M9F22413 M9F23413
M9F21316 M9F22316 M9F23316 M9F21416 M9F22416 M9F23416
M9F21320 M9F22320 M9F23320 M9F21420 M9F22420 M9F23420
M9F21325 M9F22325 M9F23325 M9F21425 M9F22425 M9F23425
M9F21332 M9F22332 M9F23332 M9F21432 M9F22432 M9F23432
M9F21340 M9F22340 M9F23340 M9F21440 M9F22440 M9F23440
M9F21345 M9F22345 M9F23345 M9F21445 M9F22445 M9F23445
M9F21350 M9F22350 M9F23350 M9F21450 M9F22450 M9F23450
M9F21363 M9F22363 M9F23363 M9F21463 M9F22463 M9F23463

C60SP - UL 1077 - B, C, D curves – Tunnels terminals (cont.)
Technical data
DB118767
Pollution degree 3
Clips onto 35 mm DIN rail. Magnetic tripping B curve In alternating current 4 In ± 20 %
DB122831

protection Device in modular enclosure IP40
(IEC 60529) Insulation class II
Any installation position. Operating temperature -30°C to +70°C / -22°F to 158°F
IP20 IP40
DB123314-LIO

C60H-DC - UL 1077 - B, C, K curves – Tunnels terminals
for DC circuits only
IEC/EN 60947-2, GB 14048.2, UL1077
1
DB105730
DB405227
IEC C60H-DC are multi-standard miniature circuit breakers and supplementary protection
as defined by UL 1077 dedicated to direct current. It combines following functions:
bb circuit protection against short-circuit currents,
bb circuit protection against overload currents,
PB116681-40

18 mm (0.71 in.) 25°C/77°F AIR Icu
poles UL 1077/CSA IEC 60947-2
Voltage (Ue) 12...250 V c 110 V c 220 V c 250 V c
1P 0.5 to 63 5 20 10 6
Voltage (Ue) 12...500 V c 220 V c 440 V c 500 V c
2P 0.5 to 63 5 - 20 10 6
PB116682-40
Electrical diagrams
1P 2P
DB116587
DB116588
Supply from above or below, observing the polarity Supply from above or Supply from below
Catalogue numbers
C60H-DC
Type 1P 2P
modules modules
Rating (In) B C K (=D) B C K (=D)
C60H-DC
0.5 - M9U21170 - 2 - M9U21270 - 4
1 - M9U21101 - - M9U21201 -
2 - M9U21102 - - M9U21202 -
3 - M9U21103 - - M9U21203 -
4 - M9U21104 - - M9U21204 -
6 - M9U21106 - - M9U21206 -
10 - M9U21110 - - M9U21210 -
13 - M9U21113 - - M9U21213 -
16 - M9U21116 - - M9U21216 -
20 - M9U21120 - - M9U21220 -
25 - M9U21125 -- - M9U21225 -
32 - M9U21132 - - M9U21232 -
40 - M9U21140 - - M9U21240 -
50 - M9U21150 - - M9U21250 -
63 - M9U21163 - - M9U21263 -

C60H-DC - UL 1077 - B, C, K curves – Tunnels terminals
for DC circuits only (cont.)
Technical data
DB123310
Insulation voltage (Ui) 500 V DC
Rated service breaking capacity (Ics) 75 % of Icu
Pollution degree 3
Clip on DIN rail 35 mm. under frame
Thermal tripping Reference 25°C / 77°F
temperature
DB123312
Magnetic tripping (Ii) B curve Between 3 and 7 In

C curve Between 7 and 10 In
D curve (=K curve) Between 10 and 14 In
Degree of protection Device only IP20
(IEC 60529) Device in modular IP40
enclosure Insulation class II
Indifferent position of installation.
Endurance (O-C) Electrical 3,000 cycles (where L/R=2 ms)
6,000 cycles where the circuit is resistive
IP20 IP40
DB123314-LIO

Utilization category A (no delay in accordance with IEC/EN 60947-2
standards)
Operating temperature -25°C to 70°C / -13°F to 158°F
Storage temperature -40°C to 85°C / -40°F to 185°F
d
DB409064
Failure to match polarity during connection

may lead to a fire hazard and/or serious injury.
b The connection polarity must be observed
(marked on the front panel).
b Use only with direct current.
b If two poles are used in series for
the American network, use at least
a 12 inch / 30 cm cable.
Connection Without accessory

DB123537

14 mm
6.5 mm
DB122945
DB122946
F
O-OF
IEC 60947-2 UL 486A-B

F
O-OF
PZ2 0.5 to 25 A 2.5 N.m (22 lb.in) 1 to 25 mm2 AWG #18 to #8


Circuit-breaker
DB116740
Type C60H-DC
1P 128 g / 4.51 oz
2P 256 g / 9.03 oz
C60H-DC

1

IEC/EN 60947-2
C60N - B, C, D curves
IEC/EN 60947-2
DB405227
IEC bb C60N circuit breakers are circuit breakers which combine the following functions:
vv circuit protection against short-circuit currents,
vv circuit protection against overload currents,
vv breaking and industrial disconnection as per standards IEC/EN 60947-2.
bb The presence of the green strip guarantees physical opening of the contacts and
allows operations to be performed on the downstream circuit in complete safety.
PB111746-40
PB111751-40
bb Increased product service life thanks:

vv overvoltage resistance,
vv high performance limitation,
vv to fast closing independent of the speed of actuation of the toggle.
bb Upstream or downstream connection.
Positive contact indication

bb Suitability for isolation in accordance with the IEC/EN 60947-2 standard.
Alternating current (AC) 50/60 Hz

C60N 1P C60N 3P
Ultimate breaking capacity (Icu) as per IEC/EN 60947-2 Service
Voltage (Ue) breaking
PB111749-40
PB111754-40
Ph/Ph (2P, 3P, 4P) 240 V 415 V - 440 V capacity

(Ics)
Ph/N (1P) - 240 V 415 V -
Rating (In) 1 to 63 A 20 kA 10 kA 3 kA(*) 6 kA 75 % of Icu
iIT 1.2 x 12 In
(*) Breaking capacity under 1 pole with IT isolated neutral system (case of double fault).
Direct current (DC)

Breaking capacity (Icu) according to IEC/EN 60947-2 Service
C60N 2P C60N 4P Between +/- y 72 V y 125 V y 125 V y 250 V
capacity
(Ics)
Number of poles 1P 2P 3P 4P
Rating (In) 1 to 63 A 15 kA 20 kA 30 kA 40 kA 100 % of Icu
Catalogue numbers
C60N circuit breaker
Type 1P 2P 3P 4P
E45092
E45094
E45095
E45097
Auxiliaries See page 43

Vigi C60 See page 36
Rating (In) Curve Curve Curve Curve
B C D B C D B C D B C D
1A M9F10101 M9F11101 M9F12101 M9F10201 M9F11201 M9F12201 M9F10301 M9F11301 M9F12301 M9F10401 M9F11401 M9F12401
10 A M9F10110 M9F11110 M9F12110 M9F10210 M9F11210 M9F12210 M9F10310 M9F11310 M9F12310 M9F10410 M9F11410 M9F12410
50 A M9F10150 M9F11150 - M9F10250 M9F11250 - M9F10350 M9F11350 - M9F10450 M9F11450 -
63 A M9F10163 M9F11163 - M9F10263 M9F11263 - M9F10363 M9F11363 - M9F10463 M9F11463 -
Width in 9-mm 2 4 6 8
modules

IEC/EN 60947-2
C60N - B, C, D curves (cont.)

1
DB123060

14 mm
DB122945
DB122946
6.5 mm

32 to 63 A 3.5 N.m (31 lb.in) 1.5 to 35 mm2 AWG #16 to #2
PZ2
Technical data
DB118767
According to IEC/EN 60947-2

Insulation voltage (Ui) 500 V AC
Pollution degree 3
Magnetic tripping (Ii) B curve in alternative current 4 In ± 20 %
Clip on DIN rail 35 mm. in direct current 5.7 In (± 20 %)
C curve in alternative current 8.5 In ± 20 %
in direct current 12 In (± 20 %)
DB123312
D curve in alternative current 12 In ± 20 %

According to current frequency 50/60 Hz
Utilization category A
(IEC 60529) Device in modular enclosure IP40
Indifferent position of installation. Insulation class II
IP20 IP40
DB123314-LIO
Service temperature -30°C to +70°C / -22°F to 158°F

Weight (g / oz)
Circuit-breaker
Type C60N
1P 120 g / 4.23 oz
2P 240 g / 8.46 oz
3P 360 g / 12.70 oz
4P 480 g / 16.93 oz
Dimensions (mm / inches)

mm 72
DB406067
in 2.83
54
2.13
36 5.5 72
1.42 0.22 2.83
18 44 16
0.71 1.73 0.63
81 45
3.19 1.77
5
0.2

IEC/EN 60947-2
C60H - B, C, D curves
IEC/EN 60947-2
DB405227
IEC bb C60H circuit breakers are circuit breakers which combine the following functions:
PB111747-40
PB111752-40



C60H 1P C60H 3P
PB111750-40
PB111755-40

(Ics)
Ph/N (1P) - 240 V 415 V -
iIT 1.2 x 12 In
Direct current (DC)

C60H 2P C60H 4P Between +/- y 72 V y 125 V y 125 V y 250 V
capacity
(Ics)
Catalogue numbers
C60N circuit breaker
Type 1P 2P 3P 4P
E45092
E45094
E45095
E45097

Rating (In) Curve Curve Curve Curve
B C D B C D B C D B C D
Width in 9-mm 2 4 6 8
modules

IEC/EN 60947-2
C60H - B, C, D curves (cont.)

1
DB123060

14 mm
DB122945
DB122946
6.5 mm

32 to 63 A 3.5 N.m (31 lb.in) 1.5 to 35 mm2 AWG #16 to #2
PZ2
Technical data
DB118767

Pollution degree 3
Magnetic tripping (Ii) B curve in alternative current 4 In ± 20 %
Clip on DIN rail 35 mm. in direct current 5.7 In (± 20 %)
C curve in alternative current 8.5 In ± 20 %
DB123312
D curve in alternative current 12 In ± 20 %

Indifferent position of installation. Insulation class II
IP20 IP40
DB123314-LIO

Weight (g / oz)
Circuit-breaker
Type C60H
1P 120 g / 4.23 oz
2P 240 g / 8.46 oz
3P 360 g / 12.70 oz
4P 480 g / 16.93 oz

mm 72
DB406067
in 2.83
54
2.13
36 5.5 72
1.42 0.22 2.83
18 44 16
0.71 1.73 0.63
81 45
3.19 1.77
5
0.2

IEC/EN 60947-2
C60L - C curve
IEC/EN 60947-2
DB405227
IEC bb C60L circuit breakers are circuit breakers which combine the following functions:
PB111748-40
PB111753-40


C60L 1P C60L 3P Alternating current (AC) 50/60 Hz

PB111763-40
PB111756-40

(Ics)
Ph/N (1P) - 240 V 415 V -
iIT 1.2 x 8.5 In
Direct current (DC)

C60L 2P C60L 4P Voltage (Ue) breaking
Between +/- y 72 V y 125 V y 125 V y 250 V
capacity
(Ics)
Catalogue numbers
C60L circuit breaker
Type 1P 2P 3P 4P
E45092
E45094
E45095
E45097

Rating (In) Curve C Curve C Curve C Curve C
1A M9F17101 M9F17201 M9F17301 M9F17401
2A M9F17102 M9F17202 M9F17302 M9F17402
3A M9F17103 M9F17203 M9F17303 M9F17403
4A M9F17104 M9F17204 M9F17304 M9F17404
6A M9F17106 M9F17206 M9F17306 M9F17406
10 A M9F17110 M9F17210 M9F17310 M9F17410
16 A M9F17116 M9F17216 M9F17316 M9F17416
20 A M9F17120 M9F17220 M9F17320 M9F17420
25 A M9F17125 M9F17225 M9F17325 M9F17425
Width in 9-mm modules 2 4 6 8

IEC/EN 60947-2
C60L - C curve (cont.)

1
DB123060

14 mm
DB122945
DB122946
6.5 mm
PZ2
Technical data
DB118767

Pollution degree 3
Magnetic tripping (Ii) C curve in alternative current 8.5 In ± 20 %
Clip on DIN rail 35 mm. Additional characteristics
DB123312
Insulation class II
Indifferent position of installation. Dissipated power See page 68
IP20 IP40
DB123314-LIO
Weight (g / oz)
Circuit-breaker
Type C60L
1P 120 g / 4.23 oz
2P 240 g / 8.46 oz
3P 360 g / 12.70 oz
4P 480 g / 16.93 oz

mm 72
DB406067
in 2.83
54
2.13
36 5.5 72
1.42 0.22 2.83
18 44 16
0.71 1.73 0.63
81 45
3.19 1.77
5
0.2

IEC/EN 60947-2
C60CTRL - Z and C curves – For control circuits protection
IEC/EN 60947-2.
"C60CTRL circuit breakers for the protection of control circuits" protect and isolate:
PB112742-40
PB112743-40
bb control circuits for industrial equipment with contactor coils, transformers, small
motors, etc.
bb programmable controllers (PLCs), voltage presence indicators, measuring and
monitoring instruments, etc.
bb single-phase auxiliary circuits such as solenoid valves, battery chargers, etc.
bb C60CTRL circuit breakers combine the following features:

vv protection of circuits against short-circuit and overload currents,
vv breaking and isolation capability in the industrial sector to IEC/EN 60947-2.
bb The presence of the green strip guarantees that the contacts open physically and
C60CTRL 1P C60CTRL 2P allows work to be carried out safely on the downstream circuit.
bb The service life of the products is improved by:

vv good overvoltage withstand capacity,
vv fast closure, independent of handle operating speed.
bb They can be connected upstream and downstream.

Breaking capacity (Icu) to IEC/EN 60947-2 Service breaking
Voltage (Ue) capacity (Ics)
Ph/Ph (2P) 240 V 415 V
Ph/N (1P) - 240 V
Rating (In) 1 to 4 A 100 kA 100 kA 50 % of Icu
Direct current (DC)

Breaking capacity (Icu) to IEC/EN 60947-2 Service breaking
Voltage (Ue) capacity (Ics)
Between +/- 60 V 125 V
Number of poles 1P 2P
Rating (In) 1 to 4 A 25 kA 30 kA 100 % of Icu
Catalogue numbers
C60CTRL circuit breakers for the protection of control circuits
Type 1P 2P
E45092
E45094

Rating (In) C curve Z curve C curve Z curve
1A M9C01101 M9C02301 M9C01201 M9C02401
2A M9C01102 M9C02302 M9C01202 M9C02402
3A M9C01103 M9C02303 M9C01203 M9C02403
4A M9C01104 M9C02304 M9C01204 M9C02404
Width in 9 mm modules 2 4

IEC/EN 60947-2
C60CTRL - Z and C curves – For control circuits protection (cont.)

1
DB123060

14 mm
DB122945
DB122946
6.5 mm
PZ2
Technical data
DB118767

Pollution degree 1
Magnetic tripping (Ii) C curve in alternative current 8.5 In ± 20 %
Z curve in alternative current 3 In ± 20 %
in direct current 4.2 In (± 20 %)
Clip on DIN rail 35 mm. According to current frequency 50/60 Hz
DB123312

Insulation class II
Indifferent position of installation. Tropicalization (IEC 60068-1) Treatment 2
IP20 IP40
DB123314-LIO
Weight (g / oz)
Circuit breakers
Type C60CTRL
1P 120 g / 4.23 oz
2P 240 g / 8.46 oz

mm 2P 36 5.5 72
DB406222
in 1.42 0.22 2.83

1P 18 44 16
0.71 1.73 0.63
81 45
3.19 1.77
5
0.2

IEC/EN 60947-2
N40N - C curve
IEC/EN 60947-2
PB111757-40
PB111758-40
bb N40N circuit breakers are circuit breakers which combine the following functions:



Ph/Ph (3P+N) 415 V capacity (Ics)
Ph/N (1P+N) 240 V
Rating (In) 1 to 40 A 10 kA 75 % of Icu
iIT 1.2 x 8.5 In
Catalogue numbers
N40N circuit breakers
10 kA
Type 1P+N 3P+N
DB123661
DB123389

Vigi See page 38
Rating (In) C curve C curve
1A M9P22601 -
2A M9P22602 -
3A M9P22603 -
4A M9P22604 -
6A M9P22606 M9P22706
10 A M9P22610 M9P22710
16 A M9P22616 M9P22716
20 A M9P22620 M9P22720
25 A M9P22625 M9P22725
32 A M9P22632 M9P22732
40 A M9P22640 M9P22740
Width in 9-mm 2 6
modules

IEC/EN 60947-2
N40N - C curve (cont.)
Connection
Rating Tightening Copper cables
1
DB123947
torque
13 mm Rigid Flexible or with ferrule
5.5 mm
DB122945
DB122946
PZ2 1 to 40 A 2 N.m (18 lb.in) 0.75 to 16 mm2 AWG #18 to #6 0.33 to 10 mm2 AWG #22 to #8
bb Connection by comb busbar or cables (as per EN 50027).
Technical data
DB123310
Insulation voltage (Ui) Phase-to-phase 240...415 V AC
Magnetic tripping C curve 8.5 In (± 20 %)
Clips on to 35 mm DIN rail. Pollution degree 3
DB123312

Insulation class II
Endurance (O-C) Electrical y 20 A 20,000 cycles
u 25 A 10,000 cycles
Indifferent position of installation. Tropicalization (IEC 60068-1) Treatment 2
IP20 IP40
DB123314-LIO

mm 3P+N 54 78
DB406070
in 3.07
1P+N 18 2.13 44
0.71 1.73
4.5
0.18
81 45
3.19 5.5 1.77
0.22
4.5
0.18
Weight (g / oz)
Circuit breakers
Type N40N
1P+N 115 g / 4.06 oz
3P+N 322 g / 11.35 oz

Residual Current Devices
UL + IEC/EN
GFP - UL 1053 & IEC/EN 61008 - Ground Fault Protector
IEC/EN 61008-1
DB105727
IEC UL 1053
UL 1053 residual current circuit breakers already protected upstream by a short-
circuit and overload protection device are used for:
b control and disconnection of electric circuits
b protection of people against electric shock by direct and indirect contacts
PB116670-40
b protection of installations against insulation faults

b enhanced continuity of supply, during a series of close lightning strokes, IT earthing
system, equipment including interference suppression filters, variable speed
controllers, frequency converters, electronic ballasts for lighting
b enhanced earth leakage protection: in presence of harmonics or high frequency
rejections.
They comply with RCD standards UL 1053 and IEC/EN 61008.
A-SI type GFPs are ideal for operation in environments with a humid atmosphere
and/or polluted by aggressive agents: swimming pools, marinas, agri-food
industries, water treatment stations, industrial sites, etc.
Catalogue numbers
PB116671-40
GFP UL 1053 type A-SI

A-SI type Rating Sensitivity Cat. no. Width in
(A) (mA) mod.
UL IEC/ 120 or 240 V 240 V of 9 mm
1053 EN 61008 230 or 240 V 480Y/277 V (0.354 in.)
230/400 or
240/415 V
Auxiliaries Pas de compatibilité avec les auxiliaires
2P
25 26 30 M9R81225 M9R41225 4
86 100 M9R12225 M9R44225
260 300 M9R84225 -
40 26 30 M9R81240 M9R41240
260 300 M9R84240 -
63 26 30 M9R81263 -
4P
25 26 30 - M9R81425 8
86 100 - M9R12425
260 300 - M9R84425
40 26 30 - M9R81440
260 300 - M9R84440
63 26 30 - M9R81463
86 100 - M9R12463
100 86 100 - M9R12491
260 300 - M9R84491
Voltage rating (Ue) 2P 230 - 240 V
4P 400 - 415 V
Operating frequency 50Hz/60Hz

Without accessory
document #E216919
DB123537

14 mm
6.5 mm
DB122945
DB122946
IEC/EN 61008-1 UL 486A-B

PZ2 25 to 100 A 3.5 N.m (31 lb.in) 1 to 35 mm2 AWG #18 to #2

UL + IEC/EN
GFP - UL 1053 & IEC/EN 61008 - Ground Fault Protector (cont.)
Technical data
Technical data
Pollution degree 3
Making and breaking capacity: 1 500 A
rated residual current (IDm)
Utilisation category AC 23A
Level of immunity In current wave 8/20 µs: 3 kÂ
In dampened recurrent current wave
0.5 µs/100 kHz: 200 A
Short-circuit current withstand (IΔc = Inc) 10 kA with 100 A gG upstream fuse
Test button minimum 2P 113 V AC
operating voltage 4P 189 V AC
Phase-to-phase test circuit To avoid external bridging on use on
three-phase network without neutral
2
DB123310
Locking possible in "tripped" position By padlocking facility (not supplied)

Release with fixed sensitivity for all ratings Instantaneous release:
UL 1053: ±15 %
IEC/EN 61008: +0 %, -50 %
Behaviour in case of Residual current protection down to 0 V
voltage drop according to IEC/EN 61008-1 § 3.3.4
Earth fault indication On front face by red mechanical indicator

Clips on to 35 mm DIN rail. Number of cycles (O-C) 20,000 cycles
DB123312


IP20 IP40
DB123314-LIO
Weight (g / oz)
Type GFP
2P 220 g / 7.76 oz
4P 450 g / 15.87 oz

mm
DB124109
in
4P 72 6 60 9
2.83 0.24 2.36 0.35
36 44
2P 1.42 1.73
81 45
3.19 1.77

IEC/EN
RCCB ID - IEC/EN 61008-1 – Residual Current Circuit Breakers
– AC, A-SI types
IEC/EN 61008-1
IEC bb RCCB-ID residual current circuit breakers offer the following functions:
vv protection of persons against electric shock by direct contact (30 mA),
vv protection of persons against electric shock by indirect contact (300 mA),
vv protection of installations against fire risks (300 mA).
A-SI type
PB111761-40
PB111762-40
The A-SI type offers enhanced immunity to electrical disturbances.
Catalogue numbers
RCCB-ID residual current circuit breakers
Type AC A-SI Width in 9-mm modules
2P Sensitivity 30 mA 300 mA 30 mA 300 mA s
Rating 25 A M9R11225 - - - 4
DB122476
40 A M9R11240 M9R14240 M9R31240 M9R35240
4P Sensitivity 30 mA 300 mA 30 mA 300 mA s

Rating 40 A M9R11440 M9R14440 M9R31440 M9R35440 8
DB122477
63 A M9R11463 M9R14463 M9R31463 M9R35463

4P 400 - 415 V
Operating frequency 50 Hz
Connection
Rating Tightening Copper cables
DB123947
torque Rigid Flexible or with ferrule

15 mm
5.5 mm
DB122945
DB122946
25 to 63 A 3.5 N.m (31 lb.in) 1 to 35 mm2 AWG #18 to #2 1 to 25 mm2 AWG #18 to #4
PZ2

IEC/EN
– AC, A-SI types (cont.)
Window
bb Test button bb Tripping upon fault is indicated by
a red mechanical status indicator on
the front panel
bb Clip-on terminal markers
bb Clip allowing dismounting

with comb busbar in place
bb Suitability for isolation in industrial sector 2
bb The presence of the green strip
guarantees physical opening of the contacts
and allows operations to be performed on
the downstream circuit in complete safety.
Technical data
DB123310
Pollution degree 3
Clips on to 35 mm DIN rail. Making and breaking capacity (Im/IΔm) 10 In

Impulse current AC type 250 Â
withstand (8/20 μs) A-SI type 3 kÂ
without tripping
DB123312
Rated conditional With fuse 10,000 A

short-circuit current
(Inc/IΔc)
Behaviour in case of voltage drop Residual current protection down to 0 V
according to IEC/EN 61008-1 § 3.3.4
Any installation position. Degree of protection Device only IP20
IP20 IP40 Insulation class II
DB123314-LIO
Endurance (O-C) Electrical 2000 cycles

Operating AC type -5°C to +40°C / 23°F to 104°F
temperature A-SI type -25°C to +40°C / -13°F to 104°F


mm 73
Residual current circuit breakers
DB406069
in 2.87
4P 72 5.5 60
Type ID 2.83 0.22 2.36
2P 36 44
2P 230 g / 8.11 oz 1.42 1.73
4P 450 g / 15.87 oz
81 45
3.19 1.77
7.5
0.29

IEC/EN
– B types
IEC/EN 61008-1
IEC VDE 0664
bb The RCCB-ID 125 A residual current circuit breakers provide:
vv protection of persons against electric shock by indirect contact (u 300 mA),
PB111261-35
PB107510-33
vv protection of installations against the risk of fire (300 mA or 500 mA).
B type
The RCCB-ID B type residual current circuit breakers provide:
bb protection in the event of a continuous fault current on three-phase networks
generated by:
vv controllers and variable speed drives,
vv battery chargers and inverters,
vv backed-up power supplies.
16766 16940
bb They include and also guarantee protection against fault currents:
vv sinusoidal AC residual currents (AC type),
vv pulsed DC residual currents (A type).
PB100572-18
They can be adapted to all the application cases defined in standards IEC 60364 and
EN 50178.
16939 bb Schneider Electric guarantees that the type B RCCB-ID works correctly in
combination with the variable speed drives manufactured by Schneider Electric.
OFsp auxiliary
bb Electrical indication: by OFsp auxiliary mounted to the left.
It has a double changeover switch indicating the "open" or "closed" position of the
RCCB-ID B type.
Accessories
bb 4P sealable screw shield.
Catalogue numbers
RCCB-ID B type residual current circuit breakers
Type B Width in 9 mm
module
4P Sensitivity 30 mA 300 mA 300 mA s 500 mA
Rating 25 A 16750 16751 - - 8
DB123726
40 A 16752 16753 16754 16755

63 A 16756 16757 16758 16759
80 A 16760 16761 16762 -
125 A 16763 16764 16765 16766
Voltage rating (Ue) 230/400 V

Auxiliary
Type Width in 9 mm
module
Contact OFsp Contact Voltage
1A 110 V DC 16940 1
E91415
22 14
12 6A 230 V AC (AC15)
21
11
Accessory
Type Number of pole
Screw shield (set of 10) for upstream or downstream 4P 16939

IEC/EN
– B types (cont.)
Connection
Type Tightening Copper cables
DB123736
torque Rigid Flexible or with ferrule

11 mm
6.5 mm
DB122945
DB122946
RCCB-ID B type 3 N.m (27 lb.in) 1 x 1.5 to 50 mm2 1 x AWG #16 to #1 1 x 1.5 to 35 mm2 1 x AWG #16 to #2
2 x 1.5 to 16 mm2 2 x AWG #16 to #6 2 x 1.5 to 16 mm2 2 x AWG #16 to #6
OFsp 0.8 N.m (7 lb.in) 1 to 1.5 mm2 AWG #18 to #16 1 to 1.5 mm2 AWG #18 to #16
PZ2
OFsp contact status, depending on the Technical data

position of the residual current circuit breaker Electrical characteristics
Type Insulation voltage (Ui) 440 V
RCCB-ID
B type
Closed
Open
bb
-
-
bb
-
-
Pollution degree
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp)
3
4 kV
2
Tripped on fault - - bb According to IEC/EN 61008-1
Contact 22/21 Open Closed Closed Making and breaking 25/40 A 500 A
OFsp 12/11 capacity (Im/IΔm) 63 A 630 A
14/11 Closed Open Open 80 A 800 A
125 A 1250 A
Surge current withstand No selective s 3 kÂ
DB122842
(8/20 μs) without tripping Selective s 5 kÂ

Conditional rated short 25/40 A with FU 80 A gG fuse 10,000 A
circuit current (Inc/IΔc) 63 A with FU 100 A gG fuse 10,000 A
80/125 A with FU 125 A gG fuse 10,000 A
Insulation class II
Endurance (O-C) Electrical > 2 000 cycles
Indication of the status of the RCCB-ID Mechanical > 5 000 cycles
Range of test button 30 mA 250...400 V AC
B type via the 3-position toggle and operating voltage 300, 500 mA 185...400 V AC
front panel indicator Operating temperature -25°C to +40°C / -13°F to 104°F
bb Closed (red indicator) Storage temperature -40°C to +85°C / -40°F to 185°F
bb Tripped on fault (green indicator) Tropicalization (IEC 60068-1) Treatment 2
bb Open (green indicator) (relative humidity 95 % at
55°C / 131°F)
Weight (g / oz) Dielectric test

E63606
DB109414
Residual current circuit breakers and auxiliary

Type RCCB-ID B type OFsp
4P 450 g / 15.87 oz 40 g / 1.41 oz
d To perform the dielectric test,

disconnect terminals 3, 5, 7 and 4, 6, 8.
mm 76 76
mm
DB122838
DB124102
2.99 2.99
in 60.5 in 60.5
2.38 2.38
72 6 44
2.83 1.73 9 6 44
0.24 0.35 0.24 1.73
86 45 86 45 86
3.39 1.77 3.39 1.77 3.46
RCCB-ID B type Contact OFsp

IEC/EN
Vigi C60 - IEC/EN 61009-1 – Residual current devices
– Add-on for C60
IEC/EN 61009-1
IEC bb Combined with C60 circuit breaker, the Vigi C60 provide:
vv protection of persons against electric shock by indirect contact (300 mA),
vv protection of installations against the risk of fire (300 mA).
bb The A-SI type provides increased immunity from electrical interference and
polluted or corrosive environments.
DB406509-40
DB406510-40
DB406511-40
Catalogue numbers
Vigi C60 add-on residual current devices
2P Sensitivity 30 mA 300 mA 30 mA
Rating 63 A M9V11263 M9V14263 M9V31263 4
DB406518
Rating 63 A M9V11363 M9V14363 M9V31363 7
DB406519
Rating 63 A M9V11463 M9V14463 M9V31463 7
DB406520

3P-4P 400 - 415 V
Operating frequency 50/60 Hz
Connection
Tightening Copper cables
DB406159
torque
Rigid Flexible or with ferrule
5.5 mm
DB122945
DB122946
14 mm
PZ2
3.5 N.m (31 lb.in) 1 to 35 mm2 AWG #18 to #2 1 to 25 mm2 AWG #18 to #4

IEC/EN
Vigi C60 - IEC/EN 61009-1 – Residual current devices
– Add-on for C60 (cont.)
bb Reinforced cable pull-out strength:
serrated terminals
bb Automatic cable guiding in the correct
position: terminals with guard
DB406909-55
bb Test button
bb Every circuit breaker combined with a
Vigi module remains compatible with the
indication and tripping auxiliaries
Technical data
DB123310
Insulation voltage (Ui) Phase-to-phase 500 V AC
Pollution degree 3
Impulse current AC types 250 Â
withstand (8/20 μs) A-SI types 3 kÂ
Clip on DIN rail 35 mm.
without tripping
Behaviour in case of Residual current protection down to 0 V
voltage drop according to IEC/EN 61009-1 § 3.3.8
DB123312
Operating temperature A-SI types -25°C to +60°C / -13°F to 140°F

AC type -5°C to +60°C / 23°F to 140°F
IP20 IP40 (relative humidity 95 % at 55°C / 131°F)
DB123314-LIO
Weight (g / oz)
Vigi modules
Type
2P 150 g / 4.29 oz
3P 210 g / 7.40 oz
4P 210 g / 7.40 oz

mm 72 117 135 74
186-0704
in 2.83 4.60 5.31 2.91

36 36 54 63 72 63 5.5 44 16
1.42 1.42 2.13 2.48 2.83 2.48 0.22 1.73 0.63
2P 3P 4P
87 87 87 92 45
3.43 3.43 3.43 3.62 1.77

IEC/EN
Vigi N40 - IEC/EN 61009-1
– Residual current devices – Add-on for N40
IEC/EN 61009-1
IEC The Vigi N40 modules, to be combined with a circuit breaker, incorporate in
a single enclosure the residual current relay and the toroid.
bb The residual current tripping device is electromechanical and operates without
an auxiliary source.
Earth leakage protection devices can ensure: bb A homogeneous unit in compliance with the EN 61009-1 and EN 61009-2-1
b protection of electrical installations against standards, a residual current device retains all the characteristics of the circuit
insulation faults breaker alone; in particular, the thermal tripping threshold of the circuit breaker
b protection for people against direct and is retained in the presence of the earth leakage module.
indirect contact
b protection of the installations against fire risks. Operation
bb When an earth fault occurs, the Vigi module causes automatic opening of the
circuit breaker with which it is combined. Fault indication is performed by a red strip
on the operating handle for Vigi module resetting.
PB111760-40
bb Resetting of the earth leakage module is performed, at the user's choice:

vv either by the reset handle of the circuit breaker (in one operation),
vv or independently of the circuit breaker (in 2 operations).
A-SI type
The A-SI type offers enhanced immunity to electrical disturbances.
Catalogue numbers
Vigi N40 add-on residual current devices
3P+N Sensitivity 30 mA 300 mA 30 mA 300 mA
N N Rating 40 A M9Y11740 M9Y14740 M9Y31740 M9Y34740 4
DB123671
N N
Voltage rating (Ue) 400 - 415 V

Connection
Tightening torque Copper cables
DB406159

5.5 mm
DB122945
DB122946
13 mm
PZ2
2 N.m (18 lb.in) 0.75 to 16 mm2 AWG #18 to #2 0.33 to 10 mm2 AWG #18 to #4
bb Where there is a comb busbar tooth, the connection of cables of cross section
16 mm2 remains possible.
bb Connection:
vv upstream: direct by comb busbar,
vv downstream: by cables.

IEC/EN
Vigi N40 - IEC/EN 61009-1
– Residual current devices – Add-on for N40 (cont.)
bb Reinforced cable pull-out strength:
serrated terminals bb Test button
bb Automatic cable guiding in the correct
position: terminals with guard
PB111760-45
bb Every circuit breaker combined with a

Vigi module remains compatible with the
indication and tripping auxiliaries
2
Technical data
DB123310
Insulation voltage (Ui) Phase-to-phase 440 V AC
Pollution degree 3
Behaviour in the event of a phase-to-earth fault Residual breaking and making capacity (IΔm)
Clip on DIN rail 35 mm. in TN-S earthing system identical to the rated breaking capacity (Icn)
DB123312
Operating temperature AC type -5°C to +60°C / 23°F to 140°F
A-SI types -25°C to +60°C / -13°F to 140°F
IP20 IP40 (relative humidity 95 % at 55°C / 131°F)
DB123314
Weight (g / oz)
Vigi modules
Type
3P+N 210 g / 7.40 oz

mm 69
DB406072
in 2.71
54 36 44 16
2.13 1.42 1.73 0.63
5
0.2
5.5
91 0.22 45 81
3.58 1.77 3.19

IEC/EN
N40 Vigi - IEC/EN 61009-1
– Residual current circuit breakers with overcurrent protection
IEC/EN 61009-1
IEC
bb The N40 Vigi residual current device provides complete protection for final circuits
(against overcurrents and insulation faults):
vv protection for people against electric shocks by direct contacts (30 mA),
vv protection for people against electric shocks by indirect contacts (300 mA),
vv protection of installations against risk of fire (300 mA).
PB111759-40
Catalogue numbers
N40 Vigi 6 kA
Type AC Width in 9-mm
modules
1P+N C curve Sensitivity 30 mA 300 mA
Rating 6A M9D11606 - 4
DB123871
(In) 10 A M9D11610 M9D14610

16 A M9D11616 M9D14616
20 A M9D11620 M9D14620
25 A M9D11625 M9D14625
40 A M9D11640 M9D14640
Voltage rating (Ue) 240 V AC

bb Test button

bb A green strip on the toggle guarantees
opening of all the poles in safety conditions bb Fast closing
(padlocking possible) for work to be carried
out on live parts
bb Display of earth fault on the front panel

by position of toggle

IEC/EN
N40 Vigi - IEC/EN 61009-1
– Residual current circuit breakers with overcurrent protection (cont.)
Connection
Tightening torque Copper cables
DB406159

13 mm
5.5 mm
DB122945
DB122946
2 N.m (18 lb.in) 0.75 to 16 mm2 AWG #18 to #2 0.33 to 10 mm2 AWG #18 to #4
PZ2
Technical data
DB123310
Insulation voltage (Ui) 400 V AC 2
Pollution degree 3
Setting temperature for ratings 50°C / 122°F
Earth leakage protection with instantaneous tripping 30, 300 mA
Clip on DIN rail 35 mm. Magnetic tripping C curve 8.5 In (± 20 %)
8/20 µs impulse withstand current 250 Â
Limitation class 3
Rated breaking capacity (Icn) 6000 A
DB123312
Rated residual breaking and making capacity (IΔm) 6000 A


Breaking capacity (Icu) 6 kA
Service breaking capacity (Ics) 75 % Icu
Indifferent position of installation. Additional characteristics
Endurance (O-C) Electrical N40 Vigi ≤ 20A 20,000 cycles
IP20 IP40
DB123314
N40 Vigi ≥ 25A 10,000 cycles

Overvoltage category (IEC 60364) IV
Operating temperature -5°C to +60°C / 23°F to 140°F

44
Residual current device mm 36 5.5 16
DB122729
in 1.42 0.22 1.73 0.63

Type N40 Vigi
1P+N 125 g / 4.41 oz 4.5
0.18
81 45
3.19 1.77
3.5
0.14
70
2.76

Auxiliaries and accessories
Common electrical auxiliaries
Compliance with electrical auxiliaries standards

DB105727
DB105730
DB105728
DB105729
IEC bb For UL 489 Branch circuit protection File #E215117.
bb For CSA C22.2 No. 5 Branch circuit protection File #179014.
bb For UL 1077 Supplementary Protection File #E90509.
DB405227_1
bb For CSA C22.2 No. 235 Supplementary Protection File #179014.

bb For IEC 60947-1 and IEC 60947-5-1 circuit breakers.
bb CE Marked.
Indication Tripping
b The electrical auxiliaries provide the remote tripping
DB405975
or position (open/closed/tripped) indication functions of

these devices in the event of a fault.
b They clip on (no tool required) to the left-hand side
of the associated device.
b The SD+OF auxiliary is a two-in-one product:
a mechanical selector switch is used to select one
of two contacts: SD or OF.
Combination table
Indication auxiliaries Tripping auxiliaries Devices 3
PB116665-18
+ + +
1 SD+OF maxi 1 SD+OF maxi 1 maxi
PB111749-19, PB111759-19
1 OF maxi 1 (SD+OF or SD or OF) maxi 2 maxi
C60, N40N, N40 Vigi

None 1 (SD+OF or OF) maxi 2 maxi
P100628_SE-18
PB111761
1 OF maxi 1 OF maxi 1 maxi
OF.S + RCCB-ID, GFP

None 1 OFsp None
PB111261-18
PB107510-18
RCCB-ID B type
d
Tripping devices must be installed first.
If two tripping devices are used: the MN undervoltage release must be installed first
Indication auxiliaries: install the SD auxiliary first

Common electrical auxiliaries (cont.)
Tripping
Auxiliaries MN MNs
Type Undervoltage release
Instantaneous Delayed
PB100203_SE-30
PB100202_SE-30
Function
bb Causes the device with which it is associated to trip when its input voltage decreases
(between 70 % and 35 % of Un). Prevents the device from closing until its input voltage has been restored
bb No tripping in the
event of transient
voltage dips (up to
0.2 s)
Wiring diagrams
DB118804
Utilization
bb Emergency stop via a normally-closed pushbutton
bb Ensures the safety of the power supply circuits of several machines by preventing accidental startups
Catalogue numbers M9A27108 M9A27107 M9A26960 M9A26961 M9A26959 M9A26963
Technical specifications
Rated voltage (Ue) V AC 24 120 220…240 48 115 220…240
V DC 24 48 –
Operating frequency Hz 50/60 400 50/60
Pollution degree 3 3
Mechanical state indicator light, On front face On front face
red
Test function – –
Width in 9 mm modules 2 2
Operating current – –
Number of contacts – –
Operating temperature -25…+50°C / -13...122°F -25…+50°C / -13...122°F
Storage temperature -40…+85°C / -40...185°F -40…+85°C / -40...185°F
Standards
IEC/EN 60947-1 bb bb
IEC/EN 60947-5-1 – –
EN 60947-2 bb bb
EN 62019-2 – –
bb bb
bb bb
bb bb
– –
bb bb

MNx MX MX+OF
Shunt release
Independent of the supply voltage With open/closed auxiliary contact

PB100205_SE-30
PB100199_SE-30
PB100198_SE-30
bb Tripping of the associated device by opening of the control bb Trips the associated device when it is powered on
circuit (e.g. push-button, dry contact)
bb A drop in the supply voltage does not trip the associated bb Includes an open/closed contact (OF contact)
device to indicate the "open" or "closed" position of the
bb A locking push-button control allows the circuit protected associated device
(e.g. machine control) to be placed in safety configuration
U< U>
DB406947
DB123012
E1 E2 N/ L/
L1 L2
bb Fail-safe emergency stop bb Emergency stop via a normally-open bb Emergency stop via a normally-open
bb Insensitive to the variation in the control circuit voltage to pushbutton. pushbutton
improve continuity of service
Important: Before any servicing operation switch off the
mains power supply (voltage presence at terminals E1/E2)
bb Remote indication of the position of the
associated device 3
M9A26969 M9A26971 M9A26476 M9A26477 M9A26478 M9A26946 M9A26947 M9A26948
230 400 100…415 48 12…24 100…415 48 12…24

– 110…130 48 12…24 110…130 48 12…24
50/60 50/60 50/60
3 3 3
On front face On front face On front face
– – –
2 2 2
– – 3 A / 415 V AC
6 A / y 240 V AC
– – 1 NO/NC
-25…+50°C / -13...122°F -25…+50°C / -13...122°F -25…+50°C / -13°F...122°F
-40…+85°C / -40...185°F -40…+85°C / -40...185°F -40…+85°C / -40°F...185°F
bb bb bb
– – –
– – –
– – –
– bb bb
– bb bb
– bb bb
– – bb
bb bb bb

Signalisation
Auxiliaries OF.S OFsp OF SD SD+OF
Type Open/closed auxiliary contact Open/closed auxiliary Fault indicating contact Double open/closed or
contact fault indicating contact
PB100628_SE-30
PB107510-30
PB100626_SE-30
PB100627_SE-30
PB100625_SE-30
Function
bb Changeover contact indicating the bb Changeover contact bb Changeover contact bb The SD+OF auxiliary is a
"open" or "closed" position of the indicating the "open" or indicating the position of two-in-one product: choice
associated device "closed" position of the the associated device of OF or SD contact via the
associated device in the event of: selector switch
d Compulsory
vv electrical fault
vv action on the tripping auxiliary
for the addition of
tripping or
indication d Not compatible with
auxiliaries on a a GFP UL 1053 residual
residual current current circuit breaker,
circuit breaker use a SD+OF
GFP UL 1053 in the SD position
Wiring diagrams
22 14
DB409611
DB118810
DB118809
DB118812
DB118813
12
DB118811
21
11
14 12 11
OF position SD position
Utilization
bb Remote indication of the position of bb Remote indication of the bb Remote fault tripping bb Remote position and/or
the associated device position of the associated indication of the associated fault tripping indication of
device device the associated device
Catalogue numbers 26923 16940 M9A26924 M9A26927 M9A26929
Rated voltage (Ue) V AC 24…415 230 240…415 240…415 240…415
V DC 24…130 110 24…130 24…130 24…130
Operating frequency Hz 50/60 50 50/60 50/60 50/60
Pollution degree 3 3 3 3 3
Mechanical state indicator light, _ _ _ On front face On front face
red
Test function – _ On front face On front face On front face
Width in 9 mm modules 1 1 1 1 1
Operating current 3 A /415 V AC 1 A /110 V DC 3 A /415 V AC
6 A / y 240 V AC 6 A / y 230 V AC 6 A / y 240 V AC
Number of contacts 1 NO/NC 1 NC + NC/NO 1 NO/NC 1 NO/NC 1 NO/NC + 1 NO/NC
Operating temperature -25…+50°C / -25…+50°C / -25…+50°C / -25…+50°C / -25…+50°C /
-13°F...122°F -13°F...122°F -13°F...122°F -13°F...122°F -13°F...122°F
Storage temperature -40…+85°C / -40…+85°C / -40…+85°C / -40…+85°C / -40…+85°C /
-40°F...185°F -40°F...185°F -40°F...185°F -40°F...185°F -40°F...185°F
Standards
IEC/EN 60947-1 – – – – –
IEC/EN 60947-5-1 bb bb bb bb bb
EN 60947-2 – – – – –
EN 62019-2 bb bb bb bb bb
– – bb bb bb
– – bb bb bb
– – bb bb bb
– – bb bb bb
– – bb bb bb

Connection
Type Tightening torque Copper cables
DB1261475
Rigid
4 mm (0.16 inch)
DB122946
PZ1
Indication and 1 N.m (9 lb.in) 2 cables, 1.5 mm2 / #16 AWG
DB405990
tripping auxiliaries
or
9 mm
(0.35 inch) 1 cable, 2.5 mm2 / #14 AWG
OFsp 0.8 N.m (7 lb.in) 1 cable, 1.5 mm2 / #16 AWG

mm 68 68 68
DB407309
in 5.5 60 2.68 5.5 60 2.68 5.5 60 2.68

0.22 44 2.36 9 0.22 44 2.36 18 0.22 44 2.36
9 0.35
0.35 1.73 1.73 0.71 1.73
85 81 90 81 82.5 81 45
3.35 3.19 45 3.54 3.19 45 3.25 3.19
1.77 1.77 1.77
OF.S, OF, SD SD+OF MX, MN, MN S , MX+OF, MNx
mm 76
3
DB124102
in 3.00
61
2.40
9 6 44
0.35 0.24 1.73
DB123309
45 88
1.77 3.46
OFsp
Clip on DIN rail 35 mm.

DB123311
Weight (g / oz)
Electrical auxiliaries
Type
Indifferent position of installation. MN 66 g / 2.32 oz
MNs 66 g / 2.32 oz
MNx 73 g / 2.57 oz
IP20 IP40
DB123313-LIO
MX 60 g / 2.32 oz
MX+OF 65 g / 2.12 oz
OF.S 33 g / 1.16 oz
OF 30 g / 1.06 oz
OFsp 40 g / 1.41 oz
SD 30 g / 1.06 oz
SD+OF 38 g / 1.34 oz

Common accessories
Installation
Accessories Rotary handle Plug-in base
PB100138_SE-24
PB111764-40
PB100137_SE-24
Function
Front or side control of 2, 3 and 4-pole circuit breakers Allows a circuit breaker to be quickly removed or
bb Degree of protection: IP40 replaced, without touching the connections
bb A complete rotary handle consists of: bb Degree of protection: IP20
vv a circuit-breaker operating sub-assembly, cat. no. 27046, bb It consists of:
vv a handle cat. no. 27047 or a handle cat. no. 27048 vv a base to be fixed to a rail (or panel)
bb Installation: vv 2 "blades" to be fixed in the device terminals
vv the circuit-breaker operating sub-assembly cat. no. 27046 is fixed to the circuit bb Connection: tunnel terminals for cables up to
breaker 50 mm² (rigid) or 35 mm² (flexible)
vv the removable handle cat. no. 27047 is mounted on the removable front panel bb Installation:
or on the enclosure door vv on backplate
vv the fixed handle cat. no. 27048 is fixed to the front or side panel of the enclosure vv on a horizontal rail
bb Centreline between two rows: 200 mm
bb Only on the circuit breaker, without a Vigi device
or auxiliary
bb Padlocking option (8 mm dia. padlock not supplied)
Cat. numbers 27047 27048 27046 26996
Removable extended Fixed handle Operating (1 per pole)
handle sub-assembly
Set of 1 1 1 1
Suitable for the following devices:
C60BP UL489,
bb 2P, 3P –
C60BPR UL489
C60SP UL1077 bb 2P, 3P, 4P bb
C60H-DC bb 2P bb
GFP UL1053 – bb
C60N, H, L, bb 2P, 3P, 4P bb
C60CTRL
N40N bb 3P+N –
RCCB-ID
– –
(AC, A-SI types)
RCCB-ID B type – –
N40 Vigi – –
Operating -35°C to +70°C / -35°C to +70°C /
température -31°F to 158°F -31°F to 158°F

Common accessories (cont.)
Accessories Padlocking device

Front Side
DB409566-25
A9A26380-40
A9A26381-40
057209J_SE-20
Function
Used to padlock a circuit breaker Used to padlock a circuit breaker Can be used to padlock a circuit breaker in
in the "open" or "closed" position in the "open" position open position
bb Locking in the ON position does not bb Isolation: in conformity bb Attached directly to the circuit breaker, it cannot be lost
prevent the circuit breaker from tripping with UL 489/CSA C22.2 No 5 Listed bb Padlock diameter: 6 mm
in the event of a fault and UL 1077 Reconized.
bb Isolation: in conformity bb Diameter of the padlock: 8 mm max.
with IEC/EN 60947-2.
bb Diameter of the padlock: 8 mm max.
Cat. numbers 26970 M9PAF MGN26380 MGN26381

Left-hand mounting Right-hand mounting
Set of 2 1 1 1 3
C60BP UL489,
bb bb bb bb
C60BPR UL489
C60SP UL1077 bb bb bb bb
C60H-DC bb bb bb bb
GFP UL1053 bb – – –
C60N, H, L, bb bb bb bb
C60CTRL
N40N bb bb bb bb
RCCB-ID
bb – – –
(AC, A-SI types)
RCCB-ID B type – – – –
N40 Vigi bb – – –
Operating -35°C to +70°C / -35°C to +70°C / -35°C to +70°C / -35°C to +70°C /
température -31°F to 158°F -31°F to 158°F -31°F to 158°F -31°F to 158°F

Installation (continued)
Accessories Front mounting kit Pole filler Front mounting bracket
Front mounting kit DIN rail support
DB409568
DB409569
DB409567
DB409570
Function
bb Consists of a transparent, bb DIN rail with support for bb Used to fill empty panels spaces bb Provides a convenient way to mount
hinged, weatherproof cover front mounting kit cat. no. bb They clip into space circuit breakers, supplementary protectors
bb Allows installation of up to 14210 bb They may be snapped apart in or accessories
twenty modules (10 poles of bb Allows installation of up to 9 mm increments bb Allows the C60 devices to be clipped
C60) of circuit breakers or twenty modules (10 poles of onto it in a standard manner
supplementary protectors C60) of circuit breakers or bb In 480 V AC UL 1077 applications, cat.
and accessories supplementary protectors no. 26981 terminal screw shield should be
bb A DIN rail with support is and accessories used for increased isolation between the
also available terminal screws of the device and the
bb Degree of protection as mounting bracket. These shields are
per IEC 529: IP55 included with the mounting bracket kits
bb Includes a 10-Module bb 1P bb 2P bb 3P bb 4P
divisible blanking plate and
mounting template
Cat. numbers 14210 14211 M9PF4 M9PF5 MG26983 MG26984 MG26985 MG26989
4 strips of 4 by 4 strips of 5 by
18 mm pole filler 18 mm pole filler
Set of 1 1 4 4 1
C60BP UL489, bb For multi-pole mounting kit For multi-pole mounting kit bb
C60BPR UL489 cat. no.14210 cat. no.14210
C60SP UL1077 bb bb
C60H-DC bb bb
GFP UL1053 bb bb
C60N, H, L, bb bb
C60CTRL
N40N bb bb
RCCB-ID bb bb
(AC, A-SI types)
RCCB-ID B type – –
N40 Vigi bb bb
Operating -35°C to +70°C / -35°C to +70°C /
température -31°F to 158°F -31°F to 158°F

Safety
Accessories Screw shield Terminal shield Interpole barrier Spacer
PB100572-07
PB124114
DB122950
DB123898
PB104483-35
Function
Prevents all contact with the fixing screws Prevents all contact with Improves the bb Used to:
bb The degree of protection becomes IP40 the terminals insulation between vv complete the rows
bb Sealable, max. diameter 1.2 mm bb Degree of protection the connections: vv separate the devices
becomes IP40 cables, terminals, bb Width: 1 x 9 mm
bb Dividable bb Sealable, max. diameter lugs, etc. module
1.2 mm bb Allows that 2 cables
bb 1P bb 2P are routed from one row
to another (above and
bb 3P: 1 x 26975 + 1 x 26976 below), up to 6 mm²
bb 4P: 2 x 26976
Cat. numbers 26981 16939 26975 26976 27001 27062
Set of 2 (4P dividable) 10 2 (for upstream/downstream 10 1
terminal)
C60BP UL489, – – – – – bb
C60BPR UL489
C60SP UL1077 bb – bb bb bb bb
C60H-DC bb – bb bb bb bb
GFP UL1053
C60N, H, L,
C60CTRL
bb
bb
–
–
–
bb
–
bb
bb
bb
bb
bb 3
N40N – – – – – bb
RCCB-ID bb – bb bb bb bb
(AC, A-SI types)
RCCB-ID B type – bb – – – bb
N40 Vigi – – – – – bb
Operating -35°C to +70°C / -35°C to +70°C / -35°C to +70°C / -35°C to +70°C / -35°C to +70°C /
température -31°F to 158°F -31°F to 158°F -31°F to 158°F -31°F to 158°F -31°F to 158°F

Common accessories
Connection
Accessories Multi-cable terminal 50 mm² / #1 AWG Connection kit for ring terminals
Al terminal
Function
For 3 copper cables: For 16 to 50 mm² aluminium For terminal up to 63 A, front or rear access (screw Ø 5 mm)
bb Rigid up to 16 mm² cables b It incorporates a "conductive" part and an "insulating" part
bb Flexible up to 10 mm² which ensures the phase-to-phase clearance
Cat. numbers 19091 19096 27060 M9A17400

Set of 4 3 1 24
C60BP UL489, – – – –
C60BPR UL489
C60SP UL1077 y 25 A – – – bb
C60SP UL1077 > 25 A bb bb – bb
GFP UL1053 bb bb – –
C60N, H, L, y 25 A – – – bb
C60CTRL
C60N, H, L, > 25 A bb bb bb bb
C60CTRL
C60H-DC y 25 A – – – bb
C60H-DC > 25 A bb bb bb bb
N40N – – – –
RCCB-ID bb bb bb –
(AC, A-SI types)
RCCB-ID B type – – – –
N40 Vigi – – – –
Tightening torque 2 N.m (18 lb.in) 10 N.m (89 lb.in) 2 N.m (18 lb.in)
Stripping length 11 mm (0.43 in) 13 mm (0.51 in) –
Tools to be used Diameter 5 mm (0.2 in) or PZ2 Hc 1/5" or 5 mm (0.2 in) Diameter 5 mm (0.2 in) or PZ2
Operating -35°C to +70°C / -35°C to +70°C / -35°C to +70°C /
température -31°F to 158°F -31°F to 158°F -31°F to 158°F
Identification
Accessories Clip-on terminal marker strip
031204D_SE-23
Function For connection identification

Cat. numbers 0: AB1-R0 A: AB1-GA K: AB1-GK U: AB1-GU
1: AB1-R1 B: AB1-GB L: AB1-GL V: AB1-GV
2: AB1-R2 C: AB1-GC M: AB1-GM W: AB1-GW
3: AB1-R3 D: AB1-GD N: AB1-GN X: AB1-GX
4: AB1-R4 E: AB1-GE O: AB1-GO Y: AB1-GY
5: AB1-R5 F: AB1-GF P: AB1-GP Z: AB1-GZ
6: AB1-R6 G: AB1-GG Q: AB1-GQ +: AB1-R12
7: AB1-R7 H: AB1-GH R: AB1-GR -: AB1-R13
8: AB1-R8 I: AB1-GI S: AB1-GS Blank: AB1-RV
9: AB1-R9 J: AB1-GJ T: AB1-GT
Set of 250
C60BP UL489 –
C60BPR UL489 –
C60SP UL1077 bb 4 repères maxi. par pôle
C60H-DC bb 4 repères maxi. par pôle
GFP UL1053 bb 4 repères maxi. par pôle
C60H-DC bb 4 repères maxi. par pôle
C60N, H, L, C60CTRL bb 4 markers max. per pole
N40N bb 4 markers max. per pole
RCCB-ID (2P) (AC, A-SI types) bb 4 markers max. per pole
RCCB-ID B type –
N40 Vigi bb 4 markers max. per device

Comb busbars for C60BP (UL489)
These comb busbars are aimed to be used only with C60BP circuit-breakers.
DB105730
IEC They perform distribution and subdistribution of the electric power supply and
allow rapid assembly and disassembly of equipment.
Comb busbars
Connection Comb busbars
accessories
Function
bb The comb busbars make it easier to install C60BP UL 489 circuit breakers
bb They must not be cut
Use
bb Power supply by insulated connector
Standard comb busbars
PB116672-14
PB116673-16
Number of poles 1P 2P 3P
Catalogue numbers M9XUP106 M9XUP112 M9XUP206 M9XUP212 M9XUP306 M9XUP312
Number of 18 mm modules 6 12 6 12 6 12
Set of 1 1 1
Cuttable comb busbars

PB116674-17
PB116675-18
PB116676-18
L L
Aux. L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
Aux. Aux.
With spare spaces of 9 mm for 9 mm electrical auxiliary

Number of poles 1P 2P 3P 1P+Aux 3P+Aux
Catalogue numbers M9XCP157 M9XCP256 M9XCP357 M9XCA137 M9XCA348
Number of 18 mm modules 57 56 57 37 48
Set of 1 1 1 1 1
Acceptable current at 40°C Standard comb busbars: 115 A
(Ie) Cuttable comb busbars: 80 A
Resistance to short-circuit Compatible with the breaking capacity of Schneider Electric modular circuit breakers
currents
Voltage rating (Ue) 480Y/277 V
Pollution degree 3
Fire resistance Self-extinguishability 960°C 30 s/30 s
Colour RAL 7035
Standards UL508

Comb busbars for C60BP (UL489) (cont.)
These comb busbars are aimed to be used only with C60BP circuit breakers.
DB105730
IEC They perform distribution and subdistribution of the electric power supply and allow
rapid assembly and disassembly of equipment.
Accessories
Connection Insulated connectors Tooth covers End-piece
accessories
Function
bb Comb busbar power supply bb Insulation of teeth remaining free bb Essential to ensure the correctly comb
bb Vertical incoming feeder busbars insulation
Use
bb Rigid and flexible copper cable:
6 to 35 mm2 (AWG #10 to #2)
bb Tightening torque: 3.5 N.m (31 Ib.in).
Standard comb busbars
-
PB116679-28
PB116680-18
Number of poles All All -

Catalogue numbers M9XUPC04 M9XCTC15 -
Number of 18 mm modules - - -
Set of 4 5x3 -
Cuttable comb busbars

PB116680-18
PB116677-20
PB116678-27
Number of poles All All All

Catalogue numbers M9XCPC04 M9XUTC15 M9XCEC10
Number of 18 mm modules - - -
Set of 4 5x3 10
Acceptable current at 40°C - - -
(Ie)
Resistance to short-circuit Compatible with the breaking capacity of Compatible with the breaking capacity of Compatible with the breaking capacity of
currents Schneider Electric modular circuit Schneider Electric modular circuit Schneider Electric modular circuit
breakers breakers breakers
Voltage rating (Ue) 480Y/277 V 480Y/277 V 480Y/277 V
Insulation voltage (Ui) 1000 V AC 1000 V AC 1000 V AC
Pollution degree 3 3 3
Fire resistance Self-extinguishability 960°C 30 secondes Self-extinguishability 960°C 30 secondes Self-extinguishability 960°C 30 secondes
Colour RAL 7035 RAL 1021 RAL 7035
Standards UL486E - -

Comb busbars for C60SP (UL1077)
The comb busbars are used only for C60SP circuit breakers UL 1077 supplementary
DB105730
DB105729
DB405227
IEC
protection in conformity with standards:
UL 1077 / CSA C22.2 No. 235 / IEC 60947-2 / GB 14048-2.
They perform distribution and subdistribution of the electric power supply and allow
rapid assembly and disassembly of equipment.
Comb busbars Accessory

Connection Comb busbar Tooth cover end-piece
accessories
058963N-15
62233-10
Function
bb The comb busbars make it easier to install Schneider Electric circuit breakers bb The Tooth Caps are insulated protectors which
UL 1077 supplementary protection may be slipped onto the unused teeth of the comb
bb Power supply directly in the cage of the circuit breaker busbar
bb They come in strips with 1-pole spacing, but
can be snapped apart to be used individually
Number of poles 1P 2P 3P All
Voltage rating (Ue) 480Y/277 V AC 480Y/277 V AC 480Y/277 V AC –
Catalogue numbers 10285 10286 10287 60488
Number of 18 mm modules 12 (8.5 inches/216 mm) 12 (8.5 inches/216 mm) 12 (8.5 inches/216 mm) –
Set of 1 1 1 20
Insulation voltage (Ui) 690 V –
Impulse withstand voltage
(Uimp)
12 kV under 240 V
5 kV under 480Y/277 V or 277 V
–
3
Acceptable current at 40°C (Ie) 63 A with 1 central power supply point 100 A with 2 power supply points –
DB110396
DB110397
bb Power supply via cable directly in the cage of the device:

vv cross section maxi: 3 AWG (25 mm2)
vv cross section mini: 10 AWG (5.27 mm2)
Resistance to short-circuit Compatible with the breaking capacity of C60SP Schneider Electric circuit breakers UL 1077 supplementary protection
currents
Pollution degree 3
Fire resistance Self-extinguishability 960°C 30 secondes
Colour RAL 7035 RAL 1021

mm 216 11.2
DB405991
8.5 0.44
in
22
35 0.87
1.4
3.8 13 1.5
18 0.5
0.7 0.15 0.06
198
7.8

Comb busbars for C60N, C60H, C60L
(IEC/EN, 18 mm pitch)
IEC 60947-7-1, IEC 61439-2

IEC
18 mm
C60 18 mm poles, cuttable

Number of poles 1P 2P 3P 4P 3 (N+P)
L1 L1 L2 L1 L2 L3 N L1 L2 L3 N L1 N L2 N L3
Type L1… L1L2… L1L2L3... NL1L2L3… NL1NL2NL3…

Set of 1 1 1 1 1
Catalogue numbers
6 modules of 18 mm A9XPH106 - A9XPH306 - -
12 modules of 18 mm A9XPH112 A9XPH212 A9XPH312 A9XPH412 A9XPH512
18 modules of 18 mm - - - - A9XPH518
Technical data
Operating current (Ie) 100 A
at 40°C
Short circuit (Isc) Compatible with the breaking capacity of Schneider Electric circuit breakers
current
Rated insulation (Ui) 500 V AC
voltage
Operating voltage (Ue) 415 V AC
Pollution degree 3
Fire resistance IEC 695-2-1 Self-extinguishing at 960°C 30 secondes
Color RAL 7016 (anthracite grey)
Accessories
Number of poles 1P 2P 3P 4P - -
End-pieces Tooth covers Connectors

Monoconnect
Lateral end-pieces providing IP20 protection Insulate teeth that have been Comb busbar power supply. Horizontal
left free incomer on each side. For 35 mm2 cable.
Tightening torque 4 N.m
Set of 10 10 10 10 20 4
Catalogue numbers A9XPE110 A9XPE210 A9XPE310 A9XPE410 A9XPT920 A9XPCM04

Comb busbars for C60N, C60H, C60L
(IEC/EN, 18 mm pitch) (cont.)
Cuttable comb busbars, 18 mm modules, with 9 mm auxiliary

Aux+1P Aux+2P Aux+3P Aux+4P 3 (Aux+1P) 3 (Aux+N+1P)
L1 L2 N L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
L1 L1 L2 L3 N L1 N L2 N L3
Aux. Aux.
Aux. Aux. Aux. Aux. Aux. Aux. Aux. Aux.
AuxL1... AuxL1L2… AuxL1L2L3… AuxNL1L2L3… AuxL1AuxL2AuxL3… AuxL1AuxL2AuxL3…

1 1 1 1 1 1
- - - - - -
- - - - - -
- - - - - -
- - - - - -
3
A9XAH157 A9XAH257 A9XAH357 A9XAH457 A9XAH657 A9XAH557

Comb busbars for N40N, N40 Vigi
(IEC/EN, 9 mm pitch)
IEC 60439-1
IEC
9 mm
N40N, N40 Vigi 9 mm poles, cuttable

Number of poles 1P + N 3P + N
N L N L1 N L2 N L3
Number of 18 mm modules 12 18 24 48 12 18 24 48
Supplied accessories Tooth covers 1 1 2 - 1 1 2 -
(for 3 modules of 18 mm)
End-pieces 4 4 4 - 4 4 4 -
Catalogue numbers 21501 19512 21503 21089 21505 19516 21507 21093
Technical data
Operating current at 40°C (Ie) 80 A
Short circuit current (Isc) Compatible with the breaking capacity of Schneider Electric circuit breakers
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) 440 V AC
Operating voltage (Ue) 230 V AC (P + N) - 400 V AC (3P + N)
Degree of protection IP20
Pollution degree 3
Color RAL 7035
Accessories
Number of poles 1P + N 3P + N
End-pieces Tooth covers (3 x 18 mm modules) Tooth covers (1 x 18 mm module) Connectors (grey)

Set of 40 12 10 4
Catalogue numbers 021094 021095 021096 010405 021098

Comb busbars for N40N, N40 Vigi
(IEC/EN, 9 mm pitch) (cont.)
IEC 60439-1
IEC
9 mm
+ +
Comb busbar for 1P+N circuit breaker with 9 mm auxiliary OF, SD

N40N, N40 Vigi 9 mm poles, cuttable
Number of poles Aux., N, L Aux. NL1, Aux. NL2, Aux., N, L1 Aux. NL1, Aux. NL2,
Aux. NL3 Aux. NL3
18 mm 18 mm 18 mm
N L N L1 N L2 N L3 N L N L N L1 N L2 N L3
Aux. Aux. Aux. Aux. Aux. Aux. Aux. Aux. Aux.
N40N comb busbar N40 Vigi comb busbar

Number of 18 mm modules
Catalogue numbers
56
A9N21035
56
A9N21036
56
A9N21037
56
A9N21038 3
Technical data
Operating current at 40°C (Ie) 63 A
Short circuit current (Isc) Compatible with the breaking capacity of Schneider Electric circuit breakers
Operating voltage (Ue) 230 V AC (P + N) - 400 V AC (3P + N)
Degree of protection IP20
Pollution degree 3
Color RAL 7035
Accessories
Number of poles Aux., N, L Aux. NL1,
Aux. NL2,
Aux. NL3
End-pieces Connectors (grey) Neutral connectors (bleu) Tooth covers (1 x 18 mm module)

Set of 20 10 10 10
Catalogue numbers A9N21039 A9N21040 A9N21041 A9N21042 A9N21050

Linergy DS screw distribution blocks
IEC/EN 60947-7-1, IEC/EN 61439-1 & 2

PB111254-30_1.eps
Description
bb Single-pole or four-pole distribution block that can be installed on a standard DIN
rail or on a mounting plate.
bb Compatible with Prisma G and P, Pragma, Mini Pragma and Resbo series
switchboards.
bb Incomers and feeders are connected to screw terminals that accept rigid or
flexible cables with ferrule.
bb Optional: additional neutral terminal strip for four-pole distribution block.
PB111253-30_1.eps
Advantages
bb Simplified power supply for main incomers.
bb Easy phase balancing.
bb Easy, effortless cabling due to excellent accessibility.
bb Visible cabling.
bb Insulation between phases.
bb The single-pole distribution blocks are adjacent and bridgeable via the second
incoming hole for parallel connection.
Screw distribution blocks

Number of poles 1P 4P
PB111250-20_1.eps
PB111251-20_1.eps
PB111243-20_1.eps
PB111252-20_1.eps
Rated operational current 125 A 160 A 250 A 100 A

Total connections capacity 10 13 14 4x7
Terminal capacity
Diameter 2 x Ø 9.5 mm 2 x Ø 12 mm 1 x Ø 15.3 mm 2 x Ø 7.5 mm
2 x Ø 7.5 mm 3 x Ø 7.5 mm 1 x Ø 10 mm 5 x Ø 5.5 mm

6 x Ø 5.8 mm 8 x Ø 5.8 mm 4 x Ø 6 mm -
- - 8 x Ø 7.5 mm -
Rated peak Ipk/60 ms 25 kÂ 36 kÂ 60 kÂ 14 kÂ
withstand current Ipk/6 ms - - - 24 kÂ
(Ipk)
Rated short-time withstand 4.2 kA rms/1 s 8.4 kA rms/1 s 14.4 kA rms/1 s 3 kA rms/1 s
current (Icw)
(IEC/EN 60947-7-1)
Width 3 4 5 8
(number of 9 mm pitches)
Dimension (H x W x D) 85 x 27 x 50.5 85 x 36 x 50.5 85 x 45 x 50.5 100 x 71 x 50.5
Weight (g) 125 163 239 210
Neutral terminal strip (optional) - - - LGYN1007
References LGY112510 LGY116013 LGY125014 LGY410028

Linergy DS screw distribution blocks (cont.)
Technical data
Common characteristics
To IEC/EN 60947-7-1 and IEC/EN 61439-1 & 2
Rated operational voltage (Ue) 230 V AC (Ph/N)
440 V AC (Ph/Ph)
DB406005_1.eps
Rated conditional short-circuit current of an Up to the breaking capacity of

assembly Schneider Electric feeder circuit breakers,
even in cascading configuration
Network frequency 50/60 Hz
Pollution degree 3
Overvoltage category III
Additional technical characteristics
Reference temperature 40 °C
On LGY412560 and LGY416048 references. Operating temperature -25 °C to 55 °C
Input cabling facilitated by side terminals. Dielectric withstand (IEC/EN 60947-1) 2500 V AC
Neutral terminal strip

PB111244-20_1.eps
PB111245-20_1.eps
PB111246-20_1.eps
PB111247-20_1.eps
PB111248-20_1.eps
PB111249-20_1.eps
125 A 160 A 100 A 125 A
4 x 12 4 x 15 4 x 12 7 12 15
1 x Ø 9 mm 1 x Ø 9.5 mm 1 x Ø 12 mm 2 x Ø 7.5 mm 1 x Ø 9 mm 1 x Ø 9.5 mm

3
7 x Ø 7.5 mm 3 x Ø 8.5 mm 3 x Ø 9 mm 5 x Ø 5.5 mm 7 x Ø 7.5 mm 3 x Ø 8.5 mm
4 x Ø 6.5 mm 11 x Ø 6.5 mm 8 x Ø 7.5 mm - 4 x Ø 6.5 mm 11 x Ø 6.5 mm
- - - - - -
18 kÂ 18 kÂ 22 kÂ - - -
26 kÂ 28 kÂ 36 kÂ - - -
4.2 kA rms/1 s 4.2 kA rms/1 s 8.4 kA rms/1 s - - -
14 20 18 7 14 17
100 x 126 x 50.5 100 x 162 x 50.5 100 x 174 x 50.5 20 x 70 x 35 20 x 125 x 35 20 x 155 x 35
390 559 567 63 111 149
LGYN12512 LGYN12515 LGYN12512 - - -
LGY412548 LGY412560 LGY416048 LGYN1007 LGYN12512 LGYN12515
Terminal technical data

Type PZ2 screw
Diameter Ø 5.5 mm Ø 5.8 mm Ø 6 mm Ø 6.5 mm Ø 7.5 mm Ø 8.5 mm Ø 9 mm Ø 9.5 mm
Section rigid cable 1.5 to 16 mm² 1.5 to 16 mm² 1.5 to 16 mm² 1.5 to 16 mm² 2.5 to 25 mm² 6 to 35 mm² 10 to 35 mm² 10 to 35 mm²
Section flexible cable 1.5 to 10 mm² 1.5 to 10 mm² 1.5 to 10 mm² 1.5 to 10 mm² 1.5 to 16 mm² 4 to 25 mm² 4 to 25 mm² 6 to 35 mm²
or with ferrule
Tightening torque 2 N.m 2 N.m 2 N.m 2 N.m 2 N.m 2 N.m 2.5 N.m 2.5 N.m
Type Hc screw
Diameter Ø 9.5 mm Ø 10 mm Ø 12 mm Ø 15.3 mm
Section rigid cable 10 to 35 mm² 1.5 to 50 mm² 25 to 70 mm² 35 to 120 mm²
Ø y 15 mm
Section flexible cable 6 to 35 mm² 1.5 to 35 mm² 16 to 50 mm² 25 to 95 mm²

or with ferrule
Tightening torque 8 N.m 4 N.m 1P: 9 N.m 4P: 5 N.m 14 N.m

Linergy DS screw distribution blocks (cont.)
Dimensions (mm)
95
DB405953
27 36 45 5.5 45
85
LGY112510 LGY116013 LGY125014
70 125 155 35
DB405954
20 20
3.5
LGYN1007 LGYN12512 LGYN12515
126
DB405954
71 126 162 174 5 45
100
LGY410028 LGY412548 LGY412560 LGY416048

3
Technical information
Breaker standards
The setup of circuit protective devices depends on

the electrical installation standard. Multi 9 devices UL 489
(designed for machinery and equipment
manufacturers, integrators, panelbuilders, etc.) Branch circuit protection
are tested in accordance with the UL (Underwriter The UL 489 standard applies primarily to the protection of circuits installed, in
Laboratories) product standard in order to meet the accordance with the NEC (National Electric Code):
requirements of the NEC (National Electric Code) bb upstream of a device or a machine (branch circuit protection)
installation standard, in force in the United States. bb inside the device or a machine, for certain loads (ventilation, air conditioning,
To allow the most extensive possible use worldwide, heating, etc.)
Multi 9 "UL" products are also tested to ensure bb to power loads external to the device (motors, power sockets, etc.).
compliance with IEC and CSA standards.
The CE Marking is an administrative formality for

free circulation and sale on the territory of UL 1077
the European Union.
Made compulsory by a European directive, the CE Supplementary protection - Internal protection of electrical
Marking of products complies with the administrative equipment
and legal requirements. The UL 1077 standard applies to circuit breakers for electrical equipment, in
Designed for the European supervisory authorities accordance with the NEC. These circuit breakers are considered as components
(customs authorities), the "CE Marking" declarations forming part of the equipment but can in no case replace a UL 489 protective device.
and dossiers are produced under the sole responsibility Their use is limited to the protection of specific loads exclusively inside the machine
of the manufacturer and undergo no conformity check or equipment. Where the machine or equipment is powered upstream by a control
by a third-party organization. panel, the UL 1077 protection must be combined with a UL 489 protective device in
Only the quality marks, issued and inspected by an that panel.
independent third-party organization, provide a full
guarantee of operation, compatibility and safety in
accordance with national and international standards.
CSA C22.2 No. 5-02
Branch circuit protection

The requirements of this standard cover circuit breakers that are specifically
intended to provide service entrance, feeder and branch circuit protection in
accordance with the National Installation Codes.
This standard is close to UL489.
CSA C22.2 No. 235-04

Supplementary protection - Internal protection of electrical
equipment
This Standard applies to supplementary protectors that are intended for use as
components within appliances or other electrical equipment where branch-circuit
protection is already provided (or is not required), in accordance with the Rules of the
Canadian Electrical Code.
This standard is close to UL1077.
IEC 60947-2
The IEC 60947-2 standard is an international product standard concerning circuit

breakers; it is used for industrial circuit protection applications. It meets the
requirements of the IEC 60364 installation standard.
GB 14048-2
The GB 14048-2 standard is close to the IEC 60947-2 standard for installations on
Chinese territory.

The standards and their applications
Example of use of UL 489 circuit breakers and UL 1077

electrical equipment internal protective devices
UL 489
Distribution circuit 1
“Branch circuit protection”
2
UL 489 Internal External
None if protection power socket power socket
by secondary
Miscellaneous circuit breaker
devices
1 External
UL 489 3 motor
UL 1077
Electronics
2
UL 1077
Other
sensitive Heating,
devices
4
ventilation and
UL 489 air conditioning
equipment
Equipment case
UL 1077 UL 489
Applications allowing the use of electrical Applications requiring branch circuit protection
equipment internal protective devices UL 489 1
UL 1077 1 Equipment incoming end protection.
Supplements an existing protective device or provides
additional protection inside equipment UL 489 2
UL 1077 2 Power socket circuit protection (internal or external).

Used for the protection of internal circuits such as:
bb Computers and microprocessors UL 489 3
bb Telecommunications equipment
Protection of an external circuit (e.g. motor).
bb Electronic controllers
bb Power supply sources 4
bb Transformers
bb Small motors.
UL 489
Protection of heating, ventilation and air conditionning equipment
4
(HACR/HVAC).

Circuit breakers tripping curves
t The following curves show the total fault current breaking time, depending on
DB124179-LIO
its amperage. For example: based on the curve on 67, a C60 circuit breaker of
curve C, 20 A rating, will interrupt a current of 100 A (5 times the rated current In) in:
Thermal tripping limits bb 1 second at least
bb 7 seconds at most.
The circuit breakers’ tripping curves consist of two parts:

bb tripping of overload protection (thermal tripping device): the higher the current, the
shorter the tripping time
bb tripping of short-circuit protection (magnetic tripping device): if the current exceeds
Electromagnetic the threshold of this protection device, the breaking time is less than 10 milliseconds.
tripping limits For short-circuit currents exceeding 20 times the rated current, the time-current
curves do not give a sufficiently precise representation. The breaking of high
short-circuit currents is characterized by the current limiting curves, in peak current
and in energy. The total breaking time can be estimated at 5 times the value of the
ratio (I2t)/(Î)2.
min. max.
Verification of the discrimination between two
circuit breakers
By superimposing the curve of a circuit breaker on that of the circuit breaker installed
In upstream, one can check whether this combination will be discriminating in cases of
overload (discrimination for all current values, up to the magnetic threshold of the
upstream circuit breaker). This verification is useful when one of the two circuit
breakers has adjustable thresholds; for fixed-threshold devices, this information is
provided directly by the discrimination tables.
To check discrimination on short circuit, the energy characteristics of the two devices
must be compared.

Circuit breakers tripping curves (cont.)
Alternative current 50/60 Hz

C60
According to IEC/EN 60947-2 (reference temperature 50°C)
Curves Z, B, C, D
DB408502-LIO
3600 s for I/In= 1.3

3600 s
for
I/In = 1.05
1000
100
10
t(s)
0,1
Z B C D
0,01
1
4±20% 8.5±20% 12±20%
3±20%
I / In
Direct current
C60H-DC C60
According to IEC/EN 60947-2 (reference temperature 25°C) According to IEC/EN 60947-2 (reference temperature 50°C)
Curves B, C, K Curves Z, B, C, D
DB406178-LIO
DB408503-LIO
3600 s for I/In = 1.3 3600 s for I/In = 1.3

3600 s 3600 s
for for
I/In = 1.05 I/In = 1.05
1000 1000
100 100 4
10 10
t(s) t(s)
1 1
0.1 0.1
Z B C D
B C K
0.01 0.01
1 1
3...7 10...14 5.7±20% 12±20%
7...10 4.2±20% 17±20%
I / In I / In

Influence of ambient temperature
Influence of temperature on the operation

Devices Characteristics Temperature
influenced by
temperature
Mini Maxi
C60BP, C60BPR, C60SP, C60N, C60H, Tripping on overload -30°C +70°C
C60L, C60CTRL circuit breakers
N40N circuit breakers Tripping on overload -25°C +70°C
C60H-DC circuit breakers Tripping on overload -25°C +70°C
Circuit breakers Vigi AC Type Tripping on overload -5°C +60°C
with Vigi A-SI Type -25°C +60°C
N40 Vigi Tripping on overload -5°C +60°C
GFP A-SI Type Maximum operating current -25°C +60°C
ID AC Type Maximum operating current -5°C +40°C
A-SI Type -25°C +40°C
B Type -25°C +40°C
Note: the temperature considered is the temperature viewed through the device.
Circuit breakers
High temperatures
bb A rise in temperature decreases the tripping current of the thermal protection.
bb Protection is still ensured: the tripping threshold remains lower than the current
acceptable by the cable (Iz)
bb To prevent nuisance tripping, it should be checked that this threshold remains
higher than the maximum operating current (IB) of the circuit, defined by:
vv the rated load currents,
vv the coefficients of expansion and simultaneity of use.
If the temperature is sufficiently high for the tripping threshold to become lower than
the operating current IB, switchboard ventilation should be provided for.
Low temperatures
bb A fall in temperature increases the tripping current of the thermal protection.
bb There is no risk of nuisance tripping: the threshold remains higher than the
maximum operating current of the circuit (IB) demanded by the loads.
bb It should be checked that the cable remains suitably protected, i.e. that its
acceptable current (Iz) is higher than the values shown in the following tables
(in amperes).
When the ambient temperature could vary within a broad range, both these aspects
must be taken into account:
bb the difference between the maximum operating current of the circuit (IB) and the
tripping threshold of the circuit breaker for the minimum ambient temperature,
bb the difference between the strength of the cable (IZ) and the maximum tripping
threshold of the circuit breaker for the maximum ambient temperature.

Influence of ambient temperature (cont.)
Maximum permissible current

bb The maximum current allowed to flow through the device depends on the ambient
temperature in which it is placed.
bb The ambient temperature is the temperature inside the enclosure or switchboard
in which the devices are installed.
bb The reference temperature is in a halftone colour for the different devices.
bb When several devices operating simultaneously are mounted side by side in a
small enclosure, a temperature rise in the enclosure results in a reduction in the
operating current. A reduction coefficient of 0.8 will then have to be assigned to the
rating (already derated, if applicable, depending on the ambient temperature).
bb Example:
Depending on the ambient temperature and the method of installation, the table
below shows how to determine, for a C60, the operating currents not to be exceeded
for ratings 25 A, 32 A and 40 A (reference temperature 50°C).
Operating current not to be exceeded (A)

Installation C60 alone Several C60 in the same enclosure
conditions (calculate with the reduction coefficient
(IEC 60947-2) indicated below)
Ambient 35 °C 50 °C 65 °C 35 °C 50 °C 65 °C
temperature (°C)
Type Nominal Actual rating (A)
rating (A)
C60 25 26.7 25 23.2 26.7 x 0.8 = 21.4 25 x 0.8 = 20 23.2 x 0.8 = 18.6
32 34 32 29.9 34 x 0.8 = 27 32 x 0.8 = 25.6 29.9 x 0.8 = 24
40 42.9 40 36.9 42.9 x 0.8 = 34.3 40 x 0.8 = 32 36.9 x 0.8 = 29.5

C60BP, C60BPR, C60SP derating table

C60BP, Ambient temperature (°C)
C60BPR,
C60SP
Rating -30 -25 -20 -15 -10 -5 0 +5 +10 +15 +20 +25 +30 +35 +40 +45 +50 +55 +60 +70
0.5 A 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4
1A 1.4 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.0 1.0 1.0 0.9 0.9 0.8 0.8 0.7 0.7 0.6
2A 2.5 2.5 2.4 2.4 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.2 2.2 2.1 2.1 2.0 1.9 1.9 1.8 1.8 1.7 1.6 1.6 1.4
3A 3.7 3.7 3.6 3.6 3.5 3.4 3.4 3.3 3.2 3.1 3.1 3.0 2.9 2.8 2.8 2.7 2.6 2.5 2.4 2.2
4A 5.0 4.9 4.8 4.8 4.7 4.6 4.5 4.4 4.3 4.2 4.1 4.0 3.9 3.8 3.7 3.6 3.4 3.3 3.2 2.9
5A 6.2 6.1 6.0 5.9 5.8 5.7 5.6 5.5 5.4 5.2 5.1 5.0 4.9 4.8 4.6 4.5 4.3 4.2 4.1 3.7
6A 7.8 7.6 7.5 7.3 7.2 7.0 6.9 6.7 6.5 6.4 6.2 6.0 5.8 5.6 5.4 5.2 5.0 4.8 4.5 4.0
8A 9.9 9.8 9.6 9.5 9.3 9.1 8.9 8.8 8.6 8.4 8.2 8.0 7.8 7.6 7.4 7.2 6.9 6.7 6.5 6.0
10 A 12.4 12.2 12.0 11.8 11.6 11.4 11.2 10.9 10.7 10.5 10.2 10.0 9.7 9.5 9.2 9.0 8.7 8.4 8.1 7.4
13 A 15.6 15.4 15.2 15.0 14.7 14.5 14.3 14.0 13.8 13.5 13.3 13.0 12.7 12.5 12.2 11.9 11.6 11.3 11.0 10.4
15 A 18.1 17.8 17.6 17.3 17.0 16.7 16.5 16.2 15.9 15.6 15.3 15.0 14.7 14.4 14.0 13.7 13.4 13.0 12.7 11.9
16 A 18.9 18.6 18.4 18.1 17.9 17.6 17.4 17.1 16.8 16.6 16.3 16.0 15.7 15.4 15.1 14.8 14.5 14.2 13.9 13.2
20 A 24.6 24.3 23.9 23.5 23.1 22.7 22.2 21.8 21.4 20.9 20.5 20.0 19.5 19.0 18.5 18.0 17.5 16.9 16.4 15.2
25 A 30.1 29.7 29.3 28.8 28.4 27.9 27.5 27.0 26.5 26.0 25.5 25.0 24.5 23.9 23.4 22.8 22.3 21.7 21.1 19.8
30 A 38.2 37.6 36.9 36.2 35.5 34.7 34.0 33.2 32.5 31.7 30.8 30.0 29.1 28.2 27.3 26.4 25.4 24.4 23.3 21.0
32 A 40.2 39.5 38.8 38.1 37.4 36.7 36.0 35.2 34.4 33.6 32.8 32.0 31.1 30.3 29.4 28.4 27.5 26.5 25.4 23.2
35 A 42.5 41.9 41.2 40.6 39.9 39.3 38.6 37.9 37.2 36.5 35.7 35.0 34.2 33.5 32.7 31.8 31.0 30.1 29.2 27.4
40 A 48.9 48.1 47.4 46.6 45.9 45.1 44.3 43.4 42.6 41.8 40.9 40.0 39.1 38.2 37.2 36.2 35.2 34.2 33.1 30.9
45 A 54.7 53.9 53.1 52.2 51.4 50.5 49.7 48.8 47.8 46.9 46.0 45.0 44.0 43.0 42.0 40.9 39.8 38.7 37.5 35.1
50 A 59.8 59.0 58.2 57.3 56.5 55.6 54.7 53.8 52.9 51.9 51.0 50.0 49.0 48.0 47.0 45.9 44.8 43.7 42.6 40.2
63 A 80.0 78.6 77.2 75.7 74.2 72.7 71.2 69.6 68.0 66.4 64.7 63.0 61.2 59.4 57.5 55.6 53.5 51.4 49.2 44.5
C60N, C60H, C60L, C60CTRL derating table

C60N, C60H, Ambient temperature (°C)
C60L,
C60CTRL
Rating -30 -25 -20 -15 -10 -5 0 +5 +10 +15 +20 +25 +30 +35 +40 +45 +50 +55 +60 +65 +70
1A 1.31 1.3 1.28 1.27 1.25 1.23 1.21 1.19 1.17 1.15 1.13 1.11 1.09 1.07 1.05 1.02 1 0.98 0.95 0.93 0.91
2A 2.55 2.59 2.56 2.52 2.49 2.45 2.41 2.37 2.34 2.3 2.26 2.22 2.17 2.13 2.09 2.04 2 1.95 1.91 1.88 1.84
3A 3.81 4.04 3.98 3.92 3.85 3.79 3.73 3.66 3.59 3.52 3.45 3.38 3.31 3.23 3.16 3.08 3 2.92 2.83 2.82 2.76
4A 4.9 4.86 4.81 4.76 4.7 4.65 4.59 4.54 4.48 4.42 4.37 4.31 4.25 4.19 4.13 4.06 4 3.94 3.87 3.81 3.74
6A 7.93 7.82 7.71 7.6 7.49 7.38 7.27 7.15 7.03 6.91 6.79 6.66 6.54 6.41 6.27 6.14 6 5.86 5.71 5.56 5.42
10 A 13.3 13.2 13 12.8 12.6 12.4 12.2 12 11.8 11.6 11.4 11.2 10.9 10.7 10.5 10.2 10 9.8 9.5 9.2 9
13 A 17 16.9 16.6 16.4 16.2 15.9 15.7 15.4 15.2 14.9 14.7 14.4 14.1 13.9 13.6 13.3 13 12.7 12.4 12.1 11.8
16 A 20 19.8 19.5 19.3 19.1 18.8 18.6 18.4 18.1 17.9 17.6 17.3 17.1 16.8 16.6 16.3 16 15.7 15.4 15.1 14.8
20 A 26.9 26.6 26.2 25.8 25.4 25 24.6 24.2 23.7 23.3 22.9 22.4 22 21.5 21 20.5 20 19.5 18.9 18.4 17.9
25 A 32.9 32.5 32.1 31.6 31.1 30.7 30.2 29.7 29.2 28.7 28.2 27.7 27.2 26.7 26.1 25.6 25 24.4 23.8 23.2 22.6
32 A 41.5 41.1 40.5 40 39.4 38.9 38.3 37.7 37.1 36.5 35.9 35.3 34.7 34 33.4 32.7 32 31.3 30.6 29.9 29.1
40 A 53.7 52.9 52.2 51.4 50.6 49.8 49 48.2 47.3 46.5 45.6 44.7 43.8 42.9 42 41 40 39 37.9 36.9 35.8
50 A 65 64.3 63.5 62.6 61.7 60.8 59.9 59 58.1 57.1 56.2 55.2 54.2 53.2 52.1 51.1 50 48.9 47.8 46.7 45.5
63 A 85.5 84.6 83.3 82 80.7 79.4 78 76.7 75.3 73.9 72.4 70.9 69.4 67.9 66.3 64.7 63 61.3 59.5 57.8 56

N40N, N40 vigi derating table

N40N, Ambient temperature (°C)
N40 Vigi
Rating -25 -20 -15 -10 -5 0 +5 +10 +15 +20 +25 +30 +35 +40 +45 +50 +55 +60 +65 +70
1A 1.66 1.62 1.59 1.55 1.51 1.47 1.43 1.39 1.35 1.3 1.26 1.21 1.16 1.11 1.06 1 0.94 0.88 0.81 0.73
2A 2.64 2.6 2.56 2.52 2.48 2.44 2.4 2.36 2.32 2.28 2.23 2.19 2.14 2.1 2.05 2 1.95 1.9 1.85 1.79
3A 3.97 3.91 3.86 3.8 3.74 3.68 3.61 3.55 3.49 3.42 3.36 3.29 3.22 3.15 3.07 3 2.92 2.85 2.77 2.68
4A 5.19 5.12 5.05 4.98 4.9 4.83 4.75 4.67 4.6 4.52 4.43 4.35 4.27 4.18 4.09 4 3.91 3.81 3.72 3.62
6A 7.42 7.34 7.25 7.16 7.07 6.98 6.89 6.8 6.7 6.61 6.51 6.41 6.31 6.21 6.11 6 5.89 5.78 5.67 5.56
10 A 12.9 12.7 12.5 12.3 12.2 12 11.8 11.6 11.4 11.2 11 10.8 10.6 10.4 10.2 10 9.8 9.6 9.3 9.1
16 A 20.4 20.1 19.8 19.6 19.3 19 18.7 18.5 18.2 17.9 17.6 17.3 17 16.7 16.3 16 15.7 15.3 15 14.6
20 A 25.7 25.3 25 24.6 24.3 23.9 23.6 23.2 22.8 22.4 22 21.7 21.3 20.8 20.4 20 19.6 19.1 18.7 18.2
25 A 31.6 31.2 30.8 30.4 30 29.6 29.2 28.7 28.3 27.8 27.4 26.9 26.5 26 25.5 25 24.5 24 23.5 22.9
32 A 41.1 40.5 40 39.4 38.9 38.3 37.7 37.1 36.5 35.9 35.3 34.7 34 33.4 32.7 32 31.3 30.6 29.9 29.1
40 A 52 51.3 50.6 49.8 49.1 48.3 47.6 46.8 46 45.2 44.4 43.5 42.7 41.8 40.9 40 39.1 38.1 37.1 36.1
C60H-DC derating table

C60H-DC Ambient temperature (°C)
Rating -25 -20 -15 -10 -5 0 +5 +10 +15 +20 +25 +30 +35 +40 +45 +50 +55 +60 +65 +70
0.5 A 0.62 0.61 0.6 0.59 0.58 0.56 0.55 0.54 0.53 0.51 0.5 0.49 0.47 0.46 0.44 0.43 0.41 0.39 0.38 0.36
1A 1.17 1.15 1.14 1.12 1.1 1.09 1.07 1.05 1.04 1.02 1 0.98 0.96 0.94 0.92 0.9 0.88 0.86 0.84 0.82
2A 2.5 2.45 2.41 2.36 2.31 2.26 2.21 2.16 2.11 2.06 2 1.94 1.88 1.82 1.76 1.7 1.63 1.56 1.48 1.41
3A 3.71 3.65 3.58 3.51 3.45 3.38 3.3 3.23 3.16 3.08 3 2.92 2.84 2.75 2.66 2.57 2.48 2.38 2.27 2.17
4A 4.99 4.9 4.81 4.71 4.62 4.52 4.42 4.32 4.22 4.11 4 3.89 3.77 3.65 3.53 3.4 3.27 3.13 2.98 2.83
5A 5.92 5.83 5.74 5.66 5.57 5.48 5.39 5.29 5.2 5.1 5 4.9 4.8 4.69 4.58 4.47 4.36 4.24 4.12 4
6A 7.15 7.04 6.94 6.83 6.71 6.6 6.48 6.37 6.25 6.12 6 5.87 5.74 5.61 5.47 5.33 5.19 5.04 4.89 4.73
10 A 12.4 12.2 11.9 11.7 11.5 11.3 11 10.8 10.5 10.3 10 9.7 9.5 9.2 8.9 8.6 8.3 7.9 7.6 7.2
13 A 15.3 15.1 14.9 14.6 14.4 14.2 14 13.7 13.5 13.3 13 12.8 12.5 12.2 12 11.7 11.4 11.1 10.8 10.5
15 A 18.3 18 17.7 17.4 17.1 16.7 16.4 16.1 15.7 15.4 15 14.6 14.3 13.9 13.5 13 12.6 12.2 11.7 11.2
16 A 19.1 18.9 18.6 18.3 18 17.6 17.3 17 16.7 16.3 16 15.7 15.3 14.9 14.6 14.2 13.8 13.4 13 12.5
20 A 23.7 23.4 23 22.7 22.3 21.9 21.6 21.2 20.8 20.4 20 19.6 19.2 18.7 18.3 17.9 17.4 16.9 16.4 15.9
25 A
30 A
29.9
36.7
29.5
36.1
29
35.5
28.5
34.9
28.1
34.2
27.6
33.5
27.1
32.9
26.6
32.2
26.1
31.5
25.5
30.7
25
30
24.5
29.2
23.9
28.5
23.3
27.7
22.7
26.8
22.1
26
21.5
25.1
20.9
24.2
20.2
23.2
19.6
22.3 4
32 A 37.9 37.4 36.8 36.2 35.7 35.1 34.5 33.9 33.3 32.6 32 31.4 30.7 30 29.3 28.6 27.9 27.1 26.3 25.5
40 A 48.2 47.4 46.7 45.9 45.1 44.3 43.5 42.6 41.8 40.9 40 39.1 38.2 37.2 36.2 35.2 34.2 33.1 32 30.8
50 A 59.1 58.3 57.4 56.5 55.6 54.7 53.8 52.9 52 51 50 49 48 46.9 45.9 44.8 43.6 42.5 41.3 40.1
63 A 76.9 75.6 74.3 73 71.7 70.3 68.9 67.5 66 64.5 63 61.4 59.8 58.2 56.5 54.7 52.9 51.1 49.1 47.1
RCCB
bb In all cases, the RCCB are correctly protected against overloads by a circuit breaker with a lower or equal rating, operating at the same
ambient temperature.

Dissipated power, Impedance and Voltage drop
Multi 9 products The following table indicates the average dissipated power per pole in W for a
current equal to the rating of the device and at the operating voltage.
Rating (A) 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 13 15 16 20 25 30 32 35 40 45 50 63 80 100 125

Circuit breakers
C60BP, C60BPR, C60SP 2.6 1.3 1.7 1.9 2.0 2.2 1.2 1.7 1.9 2.4 2.3 2.6 2.2 3.4 2.5 2.8 3.5 3.6 3.9 4.8 4.8
C60N, C60H, C60L, 1.3 1.7 1.9 2.0 1.2 1.9 2.4 2.6 2.2 2.7 3.2 3.6 4.8 4.3
C60CTRL
N40N 2.5 1.9 2.1 2.6 2.7 2.7 3.2 4.7 4.7 4.6 5.8
C60H-DC 2.6 1.3 1.7 1.9 2.0 1.2 1.9 2.4 2.6 2.2 2.7 3.2 3.6 4.8 4.3
RCCB
GFP A-SI Type 1,4 3.6 4.4 18
ID AC / A-SI Type 1.4 3.6 4.4
ID B Type 1.2 2.9 7.2 12 28
RCBO
N40 Vigi 4.1 3.2 3.9 4.4 4.5 6.4
Add-on residual current devices
Vigi C60 AC / A-SI Type 3.0
Vigi N40 AC / A-SI Type 2.1
Note: RCBO dissipated power per pole is the sum of circuit breaker dissipated power per pole + add-on residual current device dissipated power per pole.
Example: C60N (63 A) + Vigi C60 (63 A) = 4.3 + 3.0 = 7.3 W.
Impedance calculation: Voltage drop calculation:

Z = P / I² U=P/I
Z: impedance in Ohms U: voltage drop in Volts
P: dissipated power in Watts (table values) P: dissipated power in Watts (table values)
I: rating in Amperes I: rating in Amperes

Short-circuit current limiting
Isc Definition
DB125768
Prospective The limiting capacity of a circuit breaker is its ability to lessen the effects of a short
peak Isc circuit on an electrical installation by reducing the current amplitude and the
dissipated power.
Prospective Isc
Benefits of limiting
Long installation service life
Thermal effects
Limited
peak Isc Lower temperature rise at the conductor level, hence increased service life for
cables and all components that are not self-protected (e.g. switches, contactors, etc.)
Mechanical effects
Limited Isc Lower electrodynamic repulsion forces, hence less risk of deformation or breakage
of electrical contacts and busbars.
Electromagnetic effects
tc t
Less interference on sensitive equipment located in the vicinity of an electric circuit.
Prospective current and real limit current.
Savings through cascading
Cascading is a technique derived directly from current limiting: downstream of a
current-limiting circuit breaker it is possible to use circuit breakers of breaking
I²sc capacity lower than the prospective short-circuit current (in line with the cascading
DB125767-LIO
tables). The breaking capacity is heightened thanks to current limiting by the

Prospective upstream device. Substantial savings can be achieved in this way on switchgear and
A² energy enclosures.
100%
Discrimination of protection devices
The circuit breakers' current limiting capacity improves discrimination with the
protection devices located upstream: this is because the required energy passing
through the upstream protection device is greatly reduced and can be not enough to
cause it to trip. Discrimination can thus be natural without having to install a
time-delayed protection device upstream.
Limited
energy
100%

Short-circuit current limiting (cont.)
Representation: Current limiting curves

The current limiting capacity of a circuit breaker is reflected by 2 curves which give,
as a function of the prospective short-circuit current (current which would flow in the
absence of a protection device):
bb the real peak current (limited)
bb the thermal stress (in A²s), this value, multiplied by the resistance of any element
through which the short-circuit current passes, gives the power dissipated by
this element.
The straight line "10 ms" representing the energy A²s of a prospective short-circuit
current of a half-period (10 ms) indicates the energy that would be dissipated by
the short-circuit current in the absence of limiting by the protection device
(see example).
Example
1000000
What is the energy limited by a C60N 25 A circuit breaker for a prospective
DB409741-LIO
10 ms
short-circuit current of 10 kA rms. What is the quality of current limiting?
100000
> as shown in the graph opposite:
b this short-circuit current (10 kA rms) is likely to dissipate
50 - 63
43 kA2s 32 - 40
20 - 25
Thermal stress (A²s)
10 - 16
up to 1,000 kA2s
10000
6
b the C60N circuit breaker reduces this thermal stress to:
4
3
2
43 kA2s, which is 23 times less.
1000
1
100
Example of use: Stresses acceptable by the cables
The following table shows the thermal stresses acceptable by the cables depending
on their insulation, their composition (Cu or Al) and their cross section. Cross-section
10
values are expressed in mm² and stresses in A²s.
0.01 0.1 1 10 100
Prospective short-circuit current (kA eff.) S (mm²) 1.5 2.5 4 6 10
PVC Cu 2.97 x 104 8.26 x 104 2.12 x 105 4.76 x 105 1.32 x 106
C60N Thermal stress (380-415 V AC)
Al 5.41 x 105
PRC Cu 4.10 x 104 1.39 x 105 2.92 x 105 6.56 x 105 1.82 x 106
Al 7.52 x 105
S (mm²) 16 25 35 50
PVC Cu 3.4 x 106 8.26 x 106 1.62 x 107 3.21 x 107
Al 1.39 x 10 6
3.38 x 10 6
6.64 x 10 6
1.35 x 107
PRC Cu 4.69 x 106 1.39 x 107 2.23 x 107 4.56 x 107
Al 1.93 x 106 4.70 x 106 9.23 x 106 1.88 x 107
Example
Is a Cu/PRC cable of cross section 6 mm² protected by a C60N 40 A device?
DB409740-LIO
The above table shows that the acceptable stress is 6.56 x 105 A²s. Any short-circuit
current at the point where a C60N 40 A device (Icu = 25 kA) is installed will be limited,
100
with a thermal stress of less than 5.7 x 105 A²s.
The cable is therefore always protected up to the breaking capacity of
Peak current (kA)
the circuit breaker.
10
63
5.7 kA 40
16 - 25
10
6
4
1
1 10 100
Prospective short-circuit current (kA eff.)
C60N Peak current (380-415 V AC)

Ue: 380-415 V AC
Limitation curves for network

Ue: 380-415 V AC (Ph/N 220-240 V AC)
C60BP, C60BPR, C60SP
1P / 2P / 3P
Peak current Thermal stress
1000000
DB409734
DB409735
10 ms
100000 50 - 63
100 32 - 40
20 - 25
10 - 16
Peak current (kA)

10000 6
4
3
2
10 1000
63 1
40
16 - 25
10
6
≤4 100
0.5
1
1 10 100 10
0.01 0.1 1 10 100
Prospective short-circuit current (kA eff.) Prospective short-circuit current (kA eff.)
C60N
1P / 2P / 3P / 4P
1000000
DB409736
DB409737
10 ms
100000
100 50 - 63
32 - 40
20 - 25
Peak current (kA)
10 - 16
10000
6
4
3
2
10 1000
1
63
40
16 - 25
10
6 100
≤4
1
1 10 100 10
0.01 0.1 1 10 100
4

Ue: 380-415 V AC

Ue: 380-415 V AC (Ph/N 220-240 V AC)
C60H
1P / 2P / 3P / 4P
1000000
DB409730
DB409731
10 ms
100000 50 - 63
100 32 - 40
20 - 25

10 - 16
Peak current (kA)
10000 6
4
3
2
10 1000
63 1
40
16 - 25
10
6
≤4 100
1
1 10 100 10
0.01 0.1 1 10 100
C60L
1P / 2P / 3P / 4P
1000000
DB409732
DB409733
10 ms
100000
100 20 - 25
10 - 16
Peak current (kA)
6
10000
4
3
2
10 1000 1
16 - 25
10
6
≤4 100
1
1 10 100 10
0.01 0.1 1 10 100

Ue: 380-415 V AC

Ue: 380-415 V AC (Ph/N 220-240 V AC)
N40N, N40 Vigi
1P+N / 3P+N
1 000 000
DB124271
DB124270
10 ms
100
100 000

Peak current (kA)
32 - 40
16 - 25
10
10
10 000
32 - 40 6
16 - 25
10
3-4
6
3-4
2
1 2
1 000
1
1
0,1
0,01 0,1 1 10 100
0,01 0,1 1 10

Direct current network
Limitation curves for direct current network
C60H-DC C curve
1P (250 V DC) - 2P (500 V DC)
DB409738
DB409739
1000000
100
10 ms
100000
Peak current (kA)

10
50 - 63
50 - 63
10000 32 - 40
32 - 40 20 - 25
20 - 25 16
16
10 10
6 6
1 4
3 4
2 1000 3
0.5 - 2
≤1
0.1 100
0.01 0.1 1 10 100 0.01 0.1 1 10 100

4

Control panel technical guides library
Discover our How to reduce damage to How to protect a machine

components through effective thermal from malfunctions due to
technical guides
management inside an enclosure electromagnetic disturbances
collection.
They are
dedicated to
frequent issues
faced when
designing an
installing a
control panel.
Ref.: CPTG001_EN Ref.: CPTG003_EN
Click on Click on
QR code QR code
to download to download
How to prevent machine How to ensure trouble-free

malfunctions and electronic approval of your UL-compliant
damage due to voltage surges control panels
Click on Click on
QR code QR code
Free download on www.schneider-electric.com with the document reference or from the QR codes.

Discover our How define the right outdoor How to choose the circuit
enclosure and optimize breaker and transfer switch
technical guides
its durability for a generator set
collection.
They are
dedicated to
frequent issues
faced when
designing an
installing a
control panel.
Click on Click on
QR code QR code
How to select the appropriate How to prevent condensation

motor starters for your inside an enclosure
HVAC equipments
Ref.: CPTG007_EN Ref.: UE12MK03EN
Click on Click on
QR code QR code
5

Discover our How to choose the contactors

for elevator machinery?
technical guides
collection.
They are
dedicated to
frequent issues
faced when
designing an
installing a
control panel.
Ref.: CPTG009_EN
Click on
QR code
to download
How to select the appropriate

motor control system for
your pump
Ref.: CPTG010_EN
Click on
QR code
to download

PowerPact B TM
Multistandard
Efficiency that clicks.
PowerPactTM B Multistandard
circuit breakers
Schneider Electric introduces a new family member of the PowerPactTM Multistandard range
of circuit breakers, the 125 A PowerPact B.
The PowerPact Multistandard range benefits from 100 years of Schneider Electric’s background
and leadership in industrial circuit breakers based on roto-active breaking technology.
As well as offering proven performance, flexibility, and reliability, the PowerPact B features new
innovations such as EverLinkTM patented connections and integrated DIN rail-mounting capability.
Production of fuses FA Square D PowerPact New PowerPact B

in cases and fuse circuit-breaker 100th anniversary Multistandard Multistandard
switches in boxes launch range H/J/L
1903 1965 2003 2011 2016
schneider-electric.com/powerpactb
Your efficiency is our first concern.
I design and build machines.

Optimize your solution.
• Best combination of size and performance

• Same footprint, accessories, and auxiliaries
for both multistandard (UL/IEC) and IEC range
• Benefit from working with one single worldwide
equipment provider (PowerPact, TeSys , TM
Altivar , Modicon , etc.)

TM TM
PowerPact B offers a flexible platform

to meet customer needs for many types
of applications.
Built-in DIN rail and plate-mounting capabilities
make installation a snap. Multiple field-installable
power connections and accessories allow for
easy adaptation at any time. Just click it in!
Applications: Designed for machine

control and electrical distribution.
PowerPact B Multistandard circuit breakers are

equipped with a thermal-magnetic trip unit with
a fixed tripping threshold. They are available
with three levels of breaking capacity: 18, 35,
and 65 kA at 480 volts and in 1-, 2-, 3-, and
4-pole constructions to protect most applications.
They feature a new premium terminal with

patented EverLink technology, and have a wide
range of accessories, including a variety of (81 mm wide for
rotary handles. a 3 pole). Feeder
protection and circuit
disconnect solutions.

PowerPact B circuit breakers:
Optimized for your needs
Multistandard PowerPact B circuit breakers are a 125 A molded-case
circuit breaker solution offering great performance in a compact
frame size. PowerPact Multistandard circuit breakers are a
Schneider Electric global offering of UL listed, CSA, IEC, CCC,
and EAC circuit breakers.
PowerPact B main features and innovations:

• Up to 125 A and 100 kA
• Fixed thermal-magnetic trip unit integrated
• Auxiliaries externally visible
• EverLink connectors
• Built-in DIN rail and plate mount
• A variety of operating mechanisms
EverLink patented technology
The PowerPact B features a new cable connection method with patented

creep‑compensating technology built directly into the terminal — EverLink:
• With EverLink connectors, save space and time during panel assembly.
EverLink technology compensates for the loosening of cables over time. More than 35
• Bare cable connections are as safe as compression lug ones, including new patents
fine stranded cable.
were registered
for PowerPact B.
Installation Tightening Over time
Space for spring effect In contact Creep-compensating Spring maintains

Untightened Tightened effect contact pressure:
Creep compensation

Efficiency that clicks.
PowerPact B accessories are available to answer all your needs
from power connection to operating mechanism, including electrical
auxiliaries. All of them are easily field installable.
Mounting: DIN rail and plate

Embedded DIN rail- and plate-mounting
capabilities for every circuit breaker;
no extra parts required.
Auxiliaries: Field-installable offer

All electrical auxiliaries (contacts OF/SD and
voltage release MN/MX) can be easily installed
in the product by simply opening the front cover
and snapping them into cavities.
Their presence in the breaker is externally visible

through flags or a window.
Power connection: Flexible

PowerPact B circuit breakers come with EverLink
or compression lug/bus bar connector. As an
option, you can get EverLink connectors with
control wire terminal.
New torque-limiting breakaway bits can be used

to tighten power connections in the field.
A wide range of operating mechanism

A wide range of rotary handles enables
the PowerPact B to meet all standards and
applications. They are available as direct,
extended, and side mount. We also feature
an open door shaft operator (NFPA79 code),
which allows you to operate the breaker safely
when the panel door is open.

Reference Three levels of breaking capacities
240 V AC 480 V AC 600Y/347 V AC
BD 25 kA 18 kA 14 kA
BG 65 kA 35 kA 18 kA
BJ 100 kA 65 kA 25 kA
Reference Power terminals

F Terminal nut both ends
L EverLink lugs
Reference Number of poles

3 1 – 1P 3 – 3P
2 – 2P 4 – 4P
Reference Voltage
6 6 – 600 Y/347 V
Reference Current range

6 015 = 15 A 035 = 35 A 070 = 70 A 110 = 110 A
020 = 20 A 040 = 40 A 080 = 80 A 125 = 125 A
025 = 25 A 050 = 50 A 090 = 90 A
030 = 30 A 060 = 60 A 100 = 100 A
Reference Connectors type

LU EverLink 2P, 3P, and 4P with control wire termination (CWT)
EverLink 1P – no CWT

PowerPact B circuit breakers:
Select and order
1 Design
3 Build
Multistandard certification Build faster

One design for the world, One-click installation with
wherever you ship your the embedded DIN rail and
equipment, the circuit breaker flexibility with field installable
is UL listed and, CSA, IEC, accessories and auxiliaries.
CCC, and EAC certified.
CAD Library
Get quick access to all 2-D
and 3-D models to easily
4
design your control cabinet.
Operate
and maintain
Get quick access

to product information
Auxiliaries are externally visible.
2 Configure and order

Scan the QR code to get
information on the product and
quick access to the customer
MyPact care center.
Configure and order

PowerPact B to save time Ensure continuity of service
and ensure accuracy. With EverLink, no need
config.schneider-electric.com for periodic retightening
of terminals.

General contents
PowerPact B Multistandard
Functions and characteristics

A
Installation recommendations
B
Dimensions
C
Wiring diagrams
D
E
Catalogue numbers and order forms

F
Glossary
G

Introduction A
PowerPact B Multistandard circuit breakers overview..................... A-2
Characteristics and performance..................................................... A-6
Trip units ........................................................................................... A-8
Installation......................................................................................... A-9
Accessories and auxiliaries

Overview......................................................................................... A-10
Power connections......................................................................... A-12
Insulation of live parts..................................................................... A-14
Selection of electrical auxiliaries.................................................... A-15
Indication contacts.......................................................................... A-16
Remote tripping.............................................................................. A-17
Rotary handles................................................................................ A-18
Locks and sealing accessories...................................................... A-20
Other chapters
Installation recommendations..................................................................... B-1
Dimensions.................................................................................................C-1
Wiring diagrams..........................................................................................D-1
Additional characteristics........................................................................... E-1
Catalogue numbers.................................................................................... F-1
Glossary.....................................................................................................G-1
Multistandard protection catalogue - 02/2017 Life is On | Schneider Electric A-1

Introduction
PowerPact B Multistandard circuit breakers overview
A
Introduction
bb The PowerPact Multistandard circuit breakers are designed and certified to
PB114874_L32.eps
multiple standards in order to meet the needs of customers who have global designs
or build and sell in various standard regions. One product can be used and sourced
globally. B-frame circuit breakers have the smallest footprint in the PowerPact family
of products.
bb PowerPact B-frame circuit breakers are designed to protect electrical systems

from damage caused by overloads and short circuits. They are available with
thermal-magnetic trip units from 15 A to 125 A, with a breaking capacity up to 65 kA
at 480 V AC.
bb The B-frame product offers a flexible platform in which customer needs for various
types of mounting and terminations can be accommodated with simple alterations of
the base product. Field installable features empower the customer to configure the
product to their exact needs for control panel or power panel applications.
bb B-frame circuit breakers with thermal-magnetic trip units contain individual thermal
(overload) and instantaneous (short circuit) sensing elements in each pole. The
amperage ratings of the thermal trip units are calibrated at 40 °C (104 °F) free air
ambient temperature. Per the National Electric Code® (NEC®) and the Canadian
Electrical Code, standard circuit breakers may only be applied continuously at up to
80 % of their rating.
A-2 Life is On | Schneider Electric Multistandard protection catalogue - 02/2017

Introduction
A
Dual-break rotating contacts
All PowerPact Multistandard circuit breakers are equipped with dual-break rotating
contacts that reduce the amount of peak current during a short circuit fault.
This reduces the let-through currents and enhances equipment protection.
DB419675.eps
DB419674.eps
Reduced let-through currents
The moving contact has the shape of an elongated “S” and rotates around
a floating axis. The shape of the fixed and moving contacts are such that the
repelling forces appear as soon as the circuit reaches approximately 15 times In.
Due to the rotating movement, repulsion is rapid and the device greatly limits
short-circuit currents, whatever the interrupting level of the unit. The fault current is
extinguished before it can fully develop. Lower let-through currents provide less
peak energy, reducing the required bus bar bracing, lowering enclosure pressure,
and delivering improved series or combination ratings.
DB419676.eps
Internal operating mechanism
PowerPact Multistandard circuit breakers have an over-center toggle mechanism
providing quick-make, quick-break operation. The operating mechanism is also OFF
trip-free, which allows tripping even when the circuit breaker handle is held in the
“ON” position.
Internal cross-bars provide common opening and closing of all poles with a single
operating handle.
Trip
All PowerPact circuit breakers have an integral push-to-trip button in the cover to
Trip
manually trip the circuit breaker. This should be used as part of a regular preventive
maintenance program.
Push-to-trip.
Handle position indication
DB418565.eps
The circuit breaker handle can assume any of three positions, ON, tripped or OFF as OFF
shown.
The center tripped position provides positive visual indication that the circuit breaker
has tripped.
The circuit breaker can be reset by first pushing the handle to the extreme “OFF” ON
position. Power can then be restored to the load by pushing the handle to the “ON”
Trip
Trip
Trip
position.
OFF position Tripped position ON position DB423009.eps
t
t
t
se
se
se
Re
Re
Re
4 8
4
4 8
8
Trip
Trip
Trip
OFF position Tripped position ON position

Introduction
A B
BJ125
C
BJL36125LU
A Circuit breaker
Interruptor Automatico
isjoncteur
Disjoncteur
Interrupting
terrupting Rating
Valor
alor de interrupcion
40°C
50/60Hz
Codes and standards
aleur d’interruption
Valeur 75°C wire only B-frame circuit breakers are manufactured and tested in accordance
DB419673.eps
with the following standards.

D 240
40 Note: apply circuit breakers according to guidelines detailed in the National Electric Code
480
80 (NEC) and other local wiring codes.
600Y/347
00Y/347 HACR
S1
Issue Nb:186 E Standards and certifications marks

PowerPact B Multistandard circuit breakers
LR69561
F
125A UL 489 [1]
CSA C22.2 No. 5 [2]
NMX J-266
Everl
IEC/EN 60947-2
ectio
n sy
stem IEC/EN 60947-5-1
Conn
SD
GB 14048-2
CCC
OF
EAC
OFF
NOM
CE Marking
[1] PowerPact B-frame circuit breakers are in UL File E63335.
[2] PowerPact B-frame circuit breakers are in CSA File 177007.
Marine type approval certification

Conn
ectio
n sy
stem
PowerPact B circuit breakers comply with most of all marine classification

companies specifications, including:
LV426974 bb American Bureau of Shipping (ABS)
In≤100A: CU/AL bb Bureau Veritas (BV)
In>100A: CU ONLY
AWG lb-in G bb China Classification Society (CCS)
#14 - #8 CU/AL
C bb Det Norske Veritas / Germanisher Lloyd (DNV / GL)
#6 - #3/0 CU/AL bb Korean register of Shipping (KROS)
Approved for use
se with fine stranded class K
#6 - #2/0 CU ONLY bb Lloyds Register of Shipping (LROS)
H IEC/EN60947-2
4
47-2 40°C bb Nippon Kaiji Kyokai (NK)
I
AIR/Anom.I Cat.A
J bb Registro Italia Navale (RINA)
Ui 800V Uimp 8kV
bb Russian Maritime Register of Shipping (RMROS).
Ue(V)
e(V) Icu(kA) Ics(kA)
220/240
380/440 K
500/525
660/690
Note: when the circuit breaker is equipped with an

extended rotary handle, the door must be opened to view
the faceplate.
Characteristics indicated
on the faceplate label:
A Circuit breaker type
B Circuit breaker symbol
C Commercial reference
D UL interrupting rating
E Certification marks
F Circuit breaker rating
G Termination characteristics
H Reference standard
I Ui: rated insulation voltage
J Uimp: rated impulse withstand voltage
K IEC interrupting ratings:
b Icu: ultimate breaking capacity,
b Ics: service breaking capacity, depending on
the operating voltage Ue.

Introduction
A
Applications
Industrial control panels
PowerPact B circuit breakers are used in industrial control panels.
They serve as an incoming device, branch (feeder circuit) or can be combined with
starters to protect motor feeders:
bb compliance with worldwide standards including IEC 60947-2 and UL 489 /
CSA C22.2 N° 5
bb overload and short-circuit protection
bb installation in universal and process-specific type enclosures.
The accessories for the PowerPact B circuit breakers are suitable for the special
needs of these applications.
Electrical distribution
PowerPact B circuit breakers are also used in electrical distribution for building
applications. They can be used as feeder or incomer and are compliant with
worldwide standards, providing short-circuit and overload protection.
They are both back-pan / plate and DIN-rail mount, compatible with all kinds of
enclosures and offering a whole range of operating handles and accessories.
Grounded B-phase systems (corner-grounded delta)

Circuit breakers suitable for corner-grounded circuits are marked Ø1-Ø3.
Three-phase 240 V AC corner-grounded delta system.

DB421986.eps
Two-Pole
Circuit Breaker
Load
2P Frame
BD BG BJ
Ampere Rating (A) 15 - 125
Voltage Rating (V AC) 240
UL Interrupting Rating (kA) 18 35 65

Introduction
Characteristics and performance
A Circuit breaker ratings

The interrupting rating is the highest current at rated voltage the circuit breaker is
designed to safely interrupt under standard test conditions. Circuit breakers must be
PB114863.eps
selected with interrupting ratings equal to or greater than the available short-circuit
current at the point where the circuit breaker is applied to the system (unless it is a
branch device in a series rated combination). Interrupting ratings are shown on the
front of the circuit breaker.
Reverse feeding of circuit breakers

The standard unit-mount Multistandard circuit breakers have sealed trip units and
may be reverse fed.
Circuit breaker
Circuit breaker type
Number of poles
Amperage range (A)
UL 489 circuit breaker ratings
UL/CSA/NOM 208Y/120 V AC
PB114869.eps
(kA rms) 240 V AC

480Y/277 V AC
480 V AC
600Y/347 V AC
IEC/EN 60947-2 circuit breaker ratings
Ultimate breaking capacity 220...240 V AC
(Icu) (kA rms) 380...415 V AC
440 V AC
500...525 V AC
690 V AC
Service breaking capacity 220...240 V AC
(Ics) (kA rms) 380...415 V AC
440 V AC
500...525 V AC
PB114874_L32.eps
690 V AC
Rated insulation voltage (V) Ui
Rated implulse withstand voltage (V) Uimp
Rated operational voltage (V) Ue
Rated current (A) In (40 °C)
Utilization category
Suitability for isolation
Pollution degree
Durability operations (Open-Close cycles)
Mechanical durability [1]
Electrical durability [1] 240 V AC - In (1P)
440 V AC - In (2P/3P/4P)
Protection
Overload/short-circuit protection Thermal-Magnetic
PB114877.eps
Dimensions/ Weight / Connections

Dimensions 3P Height
(unit mount) Width
mm. (in) Depth
Weight 3P - kg (lb.)
Connections / Terminations EverLink™
Crimped lug/busbar
Optional lugs
[1] Durability (C-O cycles) as per IEC947-1 annex K.

Introduction
Characteristics and performance
Special Ratings A
The B-frame circuit breaker also complies with the following special ratings:
bb HACR rating
bb SWD switch duty rating (applies only to 15 A and 20 A; 347 V AC or less; 1P, 2P
and 3P)
bb HID high intensity discharge lighting rating (15 - 30 A; 347 V AC or less; 1P, 2P
and 3P).
125 A B-Frame
BD BG BJ
1 2-4 1 2-4 1 2-4
15-125 15-125 15-125 15-125 15-125 15-125
25 25 65 65 100 100
25 25 65 65 65 100
18 18 35 35 65 65
- 18 - 35 - 65
14 14 18 18 25 25
25 25 65 65 65 100
- 18 - 35 - 65
- 18 - 35 - 65
- 14 - 18 - 25
- - - - - 10
25 25 65 65 65 100
- 18 - 35 - 65
- 18 - 35 - 65
- 14 - 18 - 25
- - - - - 2.5
800
8k
240 690 240 690 240 690
15-125
A
Yes
3
15000
10000
10000
137 (5.39)
81 (3.19)
80 (3.1)
1.07 (2.87)

Introduction
Trip units
A PowerPact B-frame thermal-magnetic trip

units are factory sealed. Available trip units
PowerPact Multistandard circuit breakers offer a range of thermal-magnetic trip
units. They are designed to open automatically under overload or short circuit.
B-frame thermal-magnetic circuit breakers contain individual thermal (overload) and
instantaneous (short circuit) sensing elements
in each pole.
Thermal-magnetic trip units

B-Frame Trip Curve
t
(ln) Fixed threshold thermal protection against
DB418859.eps
overload.
(li) Fixed threshold instantaneous protection
against short-circuits.
i
In Ii
Circuit breaker and trip units

Distribution Protection: Thermal-Magnetic TM
DB419677.eps
tem
n sys
ectio
Conn
SD
MN
250V
OF
ct
erPa
Pow ul
LV42
6974
OFF
olo/se lb-in
only/s
75°C 44
80
AWG Cu
- #6
#14 Cu N.m
#2/0
#4 - 5
9
125
2
mm
6 Cu
BJ 125LU 2.5-1 Cu
0 40°C
BJL36
it brea
ker
mati
co
25-7
N609
47-2
Cat.A
8kV
Circuruptor Auto R IEC/Enom.I Uimp )
Inter ncteur HAC AIR/A Ics(kA
0Hz )
Disjo
Ratin
g 50/6 Ui 8kV Icu(kA 100
upting upcion 40°C ) 100 65
Interr Ue(V
de interr on 240 65 25
Valor d’interrupti 220/
Valeu
r 440 25 5
380/
525 10
100 500/
65 690
660/
240 25
S1
480
/347
600Y
PPYYWWD-N
t
61
LR695
125A
li= ----A
t
A
li=1250
PPYYWWD-N
i
Ii
In
i
In Ii
Conn
ectio
n sys
tem
Non-adjustable trip unit
Magnetic level
Ii Rated current (A)
15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 125
Hold (A) 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 480 640 640 800 1000 1000 1000 1000
Trip (A) 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 720 960 960 1200 1500 1500 1500 1500

Introduction
Installation
A
Mounting
B-frame circuit breakers may be mounted vertically, horizontally, flat on their back or
on their side without any derating of characteristics. These circuit breakers can be
mounted on a DIN rail using the integrated 35 mm DIN rail mounting feature.
For backplate mounting, the circuit breakers are supplied with two mounting screws
(M4), washers and nuts.
These mounting screws can be inserted through mounting holes molded into the
circuit breaker case and threaded into the mounting enclosure, rails or plate.
DB418572.eps
DB419874.eps
DB418573.eps
Everl
Everl
em Everl
syst
nection
Con
em
ion syst
SD
nect
Con
SD
em
syst
nection
Con
OF
SD
OF
OF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Con Con
nection nect
syst ion syst
em em
Con
nection
syst
em
Mounting on DIN rail. Mounting on backplate Mounting on rails

(2 mounting screws). (2 mounting screws)

Overview
A A B
DB418574.eps
Interphase barriers Long terminal shield
C D E
Terminal spreaders Power distribution connectors Torque limiting

Ever
l breakaway bit
ref.
l Axial
Ever
F
OFF
Mechanical lug EverLink™ lug with control wire

Compression lug / busbar connector connector terminal connector or without
Ø
4..
.8
Ø
4..
.8
L Conn
ectio
n sy
stem
SD
Side rotary handle (right or left)

MN
250V
OF
OFF
75°C
AWG
only/solo
Cu
/seu
l LV4269
74
lb-in
44
80
G
- #6
#14 Cu N.m
#2/0
#4 - 5
125 mm
2 9
Cu
BJ 6125LU 2.5-16Cu 40°C
25-70
BJL3breakeromatico 60947-2
Cat.A
Circuit tor Aut 8kV

IEC/EN m.I Uimp
t
Interrup HACR
se
se
AIR/Ano A)
cteur
4P frame
4P frame
z Ics(k
Re
Re
Disjon ng 50/60HC Ui 8kV Icu(kA) 100

Rati 40°
ting ion ) 100 65
Interrup interrupc Ue(V
0
r de 65 25
220/240
ption
Valo d’interru
ur 25 5
Vale 380/445
Rear insulation screen

10
100 500/520
65 660/69
Ø 4...8 Ø 4...8
240 25
S1
480 47
600Y/3
561
LR69
Trip
Trip
125A
t
0A
li=125
i
7Q16193
Direct mounted rotary handle

Ii
In
Conn
ectio
n sy
stem
H
t
se
Open door
4P frame
Re
shaft operator
Trip
J
I On
p
Tri
Auxilliary contact Pre-wired Auxilliary Pre-wired Auxilliary

OF / SD Contact OF Contact SD Off
Re
se
t
Ø 4...8
MN MX
K MX
250V
~/=
250V
~/=
250V
~/=
On
p
Tri
Ø 4...8
Voltage releases Pre-wired Pre-wired Handle padlocking

Off
t
se
Re
Undervoltage Release Shunt Trip devices Extended rotary handle

Overview
Accessories overview
PowerPact B circuit breakers offer a whole range of accessories which are field
installable, giving the panel builders/customers the chance to modify the circuit
A
breaker at any time in the design/build cycle:
bb Power connections, including the patented EverLink lug and control wire terminal
feature.
bb Electrical accessories, internal to the circuit breaker, with quick snap-in features,
spring connections, and wires going out on all four corners of the product.
bb Insulation features, providing additional safety precautions between people,
equipment and circuit breaker.
bb Operating mechanisms, when through the door operation is a must, and including
a side mechanism.
bb Locking devices, to secure the safety of your personnel or the continuity of
service.
Everl
stem stem stem

n sy n sy n sy
ectio ectio ectio
Conn Conn Conn
SD
SD
SD
OF
OF
OF
OFF OFF OFF
EverLink with (shown) or Mechanical lug connector Compression lug /

without control wire terminal busbar connector
connector
1P 2P 3P 4P 1P 2P 3P 4P 1P 2P 3P 4P
A
B
C [1] [1]
F
G
H
J [2] [2] [2]

K
[1] B
y using part(s) of the 3P or 4P spreader kit.
[2] Only OF.

Power connections
A
Power connection (3 types)
Everl
Circuit breakers are delivered with EverLink™ lugs with control wire terminals on the
DB419678.eps
line side and EverLink lugs on the load side (except for single pole circuit breakers
which uses EverLink lugs on both sides).
Another factory-assembled power connection option is the terminal nut (for
compression lugs / bus bars).
Everl Aluminium mechanical lugs are also available as a kit. All lug options are field
installable. So, no matter which lugs are on the product, they can be removed and
replaced by any one of the 4 kinds of lugs available (EverLink™ lug with control wire
terminal, EverLink™ lug, compression / busbar lug, aluminum mechanical lug).
All lugs are UL Listed/CSA Certified for their proper application and marked for use
with aluminum and copper (Al/Cu) or copper only (Cu) conductors.
stem
n sy
ectio
Conn
SD
OF
I - EverLinkTM lug connector

DB419680.eps
DB419679.eps
This type of connection uses the EverLink™ system with creep compensation [1]
(Schneider Electric patent).
This technique makes it possible to achieve accurate and durable tightening torque,
Ever
l in order to avoid cable creep [1].
When ordered as standard, the upstream connector has control wire terminals
(except for 1 pole product) in order to make some measurement or control
system n sys
tem
ection ectio
Conn Conn
SD
MN
250V
connections (limited to 10 A maximum). Upstream and dowstream connectors can
OF
OF
~/=
be interchanged if needed.
OFF OFF
When ordered as spare parts, EverLink™ lug connectors always have control wire
terminals (except for 1 pole product).
2 Poles 3 Poles
EverLink™ lugs for use with Al or Cu wire for B-Frame circuit breaker
Frame (Number of wires) wire range Unit Kit Qty
DB419681.eps
Rigid Flexible mount per kit

Solid/stranded Fine stranded [4]
BD, BG, Power connection , 15-125 A (Cu),
[2] 1
Ever
l
BJ 15-100 A (Al)
n sys
tem
(1) 2.5 - 95 mm² (1) 2.5 - 70 mm²
ectio
SD
Conn
MNV
(1) 14 - 3/0 AWG (1) 6 - 2/0 AWG
250
Control wire terminal [3] up to 10 A (Cu)

OF
OFF
(1) 1.5 - 6 mm² (1) 0.5 - 6 mm²
(1) 20 - 10 AWG (1) 20 - 10 AWG
4 Poles [1] Creep: normal crushing phenomenon of conductors, that is accentuated over time.
[2] In y100 A CU7AL - In >100 A CU7 only. [3] CU7 only. [4] Class K.
DB418547.eps
II - Compression lug / busbar connection kits

The B-frame circuit breakers may be equipped with captive nuts and screws
for direct connection to busbars or to compression (crimp) lugs.
These are readily field-installable, simply by removing the EverLink™ lug and
em
syst
ec tion
Conn
SD
replacing with the appropriate terminal nut assembly.

They are also available factory-installed.
OF
OFF Compression lug / busbar connection kits for B-Frame circuit breakers
Frame Ampere Tap Unit mount Kit Qty
rating per kit
BD, BG, BJ 15-125 A M6 2 or 3
DB418860.eps
A A
D Bar and lugs dimensions
B B Dimension A B C D E
E mm 6.4 y 6.5 y 17 y7 17 to 20
= (in) (0.250) (y 0.25) (y 0.67) (0.27) (0.67 to 0.78)
D
== C
C

Power connections
A
Specific compression lugs can be ordered for copper and aluminum cable.
Lugs
Frame Cable section Cable type Qty per kit
BD, BG, BJ 70 mm² Cu 3 or 4
DB423064.eps
BD, BG, BJ 6 - 1/0 AWG Cu 2 or 3
BD, BG, BJ 8 - 1/0 AWG Al/Cu 2 or 3
Power distribution connectors [*]

These connectors are screwed directly to device terminals equiped with
compression lug/busbar connectors. Interphase barriers are supplied with power
distribution connectors, but may be replaced by long terminal shields.
Each connector can receive three or six cables. n syst
em
ectio
Conn
Power distribution connectors
SD
Frame Ampere rating (Number wires) Unit Kit Qty per kit
OF
wire range mount
BD, BG, BJ 15-125 A Al/Cu (3) 2.5 - 35 mm² - 3
(3) 14 - 2 AWG
BD, BG, BJ 15-125 A Al/Cu (6) 2.5 - 16 mm2 - 3
(6) 14 - 6 AWG
Spreaders
DB421599.eps
Spreaders can be used to increase the pitch of the cricuit breaker from 27 (1.063) to
35 mm (1.378 in.). They are delivered with interphase barriers and M8 screws, nuts
and washers.
Rear insulation screens may have to be used too, depending on the distance
between the live uninsulated parts and the grounded metallic back pan.
Customer holes for connection are Ø8 mm (5/16 in.).
stem
n sy
ectio
Conn
SD
Description Used with Qty per kit
OF
B-Frame 3 poles spreader B-Frame compression lug/ 1
busbar connector
OFF
B-Frame 4 poles spreader B-Frame compression lug/ 1
busbar connector
Note: For a 1 pole, you can use the middle part of a 3 pole spreader, and for a 2 pole,
DB419682.eps
the 2 middle ones of a 4 pole spreader.
III - Mechanical lug kits

The standard EverLink™ lugs can be removed for the installation of mechanical lugs
suitable for copper and aluminum conductors (made of tin-plated aluminum).
The mechanical lugs are fastened to the terminals with lug mounting screws inserted ectio
n sy
stem
from the bottom of the circuit breaker. The lug cover is held in place with built-in snap
Conn
SD
features. They are sold as field installable kits.

OF
Mechanical lug connection kits for B-Frame circuit breakers

OFF
Frame Ampere Number of wires Unit Kit Qty
rating and wire range mount per kit
BD, BG, BJ 15-125 A Al/Cu (1) 2.5 - 70 mm² - 2 or 3
(1) 14 - 2/0 AWG
Torque limiting breakaway bits

DB419683.eps
Torque limiting breakaway bits may be used, particularly in the field, to tighten at the
right torque EverLink™ lug, compression lug or busbar power connections.
Throwaway tips
stem
n sy
Frame Ampere rating Torque Qty per kit

ectio
Conn
SD
BD, BG, BJ 15-125 A 5 N.m 6 or 8

OF
BD, BG, BJ 15-125 A 9 N.m 6 or 8
*
[ ] Available Q3 2017. OFF

Insulation of live parts
A
For 2, 3 or 4 poles products, several accessories are available to ensure
insulation and IP:
DB418569.eps
bb long terminal shields IP40

bb interphase barriers
bb rear insulation screen (especially for spreader with a 35 mm pitch).
B
Long terminal shields IP40
nnectio
n system
Products can be equiped with long terminal shields. They can be mounted upstream
and downstream and are used for protection against direct contact with power
Co
SD
circuits. They provide IP40 degree of protection and IK07 mechanical impact
OF
OFF
protection. Moreover long terminal shield can be mounted after product installation
on plate or DIN rail, and can be removed and put in place even if there are auxiliary
wires.
Long terminal shield.
They are used for connection with cables or insulated bars.
They are comprised of two parts assembled with 2 locks and/or captive screws,
forming an IP40 cover.
bb The top part is transparent in order to be able to see the connection through it and
is equipped with sliding grids with break marks for precise adaptation to cables or
insulated bars.
bb The rear part completely blocks off the connection zone. Partially cut squares can
DB418570.eps
be removed to adapt to all types of connection for cables with lugs or copper bars.
B
Interphase barriers
Safety accessories for maximum insulation at the power-connection points:
Conne
ction
system
bb they clip easily onto the circuit breaker

SD
bb not compatible with long terminal shield

OF
bb 2 ways mounting: short / long insulation.

OFF
Rear insulating screens

Interphase barriers. Safety accessories providing insulation at the rear of the device.
Their use may be mandatory if no long terminal shield depending of the distance
between bare conductors and backplate (see table pages B-8 and B-9).
Insulation accessories 2, 3 and 4 poles products

Description Used with Dimension B Qty
mm (in.) per kit
DB418571.eps
B-Frame long terminal shield All B-Frame power 50 1

connections except (1.97)
B EverLink™ and when using
the spreader kit
B-Frame interphase barriers All B-Frame power 67/79 6
connections except (2.64/3.11)
EverLink™
system
ction
Conne
SD
B-Frame rear insulation screen All B-Frame products 84 2

OF
(35 mm (1.378 in.) pitch) (3.30)

OFF
Rear insulation screen.

Selection of electrical auxiliaries
A
All PowerPact Multistandard circuit breakers (except 1 pole) have slots for electrical
auxiliaries.
OF MN/MX
DB419689.eps
Indication contact(s):
DB419685.eps
bb 1 ON/OFF (OF)
bb 1 trip indication (SD).
OF
OF
1 voltage release:
bb either 1 MN undervoltage release I I
bb or 1 MX shunt trip.
O O
Slot for electrical auxiliaries
Trip
Trip
Used with Number of Quantity OF Quantity SD Quantity of
poles voltage release
MN or MX
B-Frame 1 - - - 2 Poles 2 Poles
2 1 - 1
3 1 1 1
4 1 1 1 OF SD MN/MX
DB419686.eps
DB419690.eps
OF/SD MN/MX
SD
OF
SD
OF
DB419684.eps
DB419688.eps
I I
O O
Trip
Trip
MN
250V
~/=
3 Poles 3 Poles
OF SD MN/MX
DB419687.eps
DB419691.eps
SD
OF
SD
OF
I I
O O
Trip
Trip
Accessory connections
Electrical accessories are fitted with numbered spring terminal blocks for wires. The
maximum wire size is 1.5 mm2 (16 AWG) for auxiliary switches (OF or SD), shunt trip 4 Poles 4 Poles
MX or undervoltage release MN.
Electrical accessory wire routing can be exited out any of the four corners of the
breaker, under the accessory cover even when using long terminal shield.
DB112162.EPS

Indication contacts
A
Auxiliary and alarm indication contacts
PB115684_12.eps
Indication contacts provide remote information of the circuit breaker status and can
thus be used for indications, electrical locking, relays, etc.
They are common point changeover type contacts, with a normaly open (NO)
contact and a normaly closed (NC) contact.
Open/Closed - Auxiliary switches (OF)

bb Indicates the position of the circuit breaker contacts.
Auxiliary Switch (OF) /

Trip indication - Alarm switch (SD)
Alarm Switch (SD). bb Indicates that the circuit breaker has tripped due to:
vv an electrical fault (overload, short circuit)
vv the operation of a shunt trip
vv undervoltage release
vv the “push-to-trip” button.
DB419917.eps
bb Resets when the circuit breaker is reset.

SD
OF
Installation and connection

bb The auxiliary switch (OF) and alarm switch (SD) indication contacts snap into
cavities behind the front accessory cover of the circuit breaker and their presence is
Everl
visible on the front face through green flags.
bb One model serves for all indication functions depending on where it is fitted in the
ectio
n sy
stem circuit breaker.
bb Each NO and NC spring terminal may be connected by one 0.5...1.5 mm²
Conn
SD
MN
(20...16 AWG) stranded copper wire and by two for the common point.
250V
OF
LV4269
74
Electrical characteristics of auxiliary contacts
Characteristics
l
OFF
/seu lb-in
only/solo
75°C 44
80
AWG Cu
- #6
#14 Cu N.m
#2/0
#4 - 5
9
5
2
mm
BJ12
Cu
Rated thermal current (A) 5

LU 2.5-16Cu
6125 25-70
40°C
Cat.A
8kV
Circuit tor Aut IEC/EN m.I Uimp
Interrup HACR AIR/Ano A)
cteur z Ics(k
Rati 40°
ting ion ) 100 65
Minimum load 5 mA at 17 V DC
r de 0 65 25
220/240
ption
Valo d’interru
ur 25 5
Vale 380/445
10
100 500/520
65 660/69
240 25
S1
480 47
600Y/3
125A
LR69
561
Utilization cat. (IEC 60947-5-1) AC12 AC15 DC12 DC13 DC14

Operational 24 V AC/DC 5 5 5 2.5 1
li=125
0A
t
i
current (A) 48 V AC/DC 5 5 2.5 1.2 0.2
7Q16193
Ii
In
110...127 V AC / 110 V DC 5 4 0.6 0.35 0.05

Conn
ectio
n sy
stem
220/240 V AC 5 3 - - -
250 V DC - - 0.3 0.05 0.03
380/440 V AC 5 2.5 - - -
660/690 V AC 5 0.11 - - -
UL489, CSA C22.2 No. 5 Ampere rating (A) Pilot duty standard (A)
48 V AC 5 -
120 V AC 5 3
240 V AC 5 1.5
480 V AC 5 0.75
600 V AC - 0.6
48 V DC 2.5 -
110 V DC 0.8 -
250 V DC 0.3 -
Standards
bb Auxiliary indicator contacts comply with UL 489, CSA C22.2 No. 5 and
IEC 60947-5-1 Standards.
bb Auxiliary contacts have also been tested according IEC 60 947-5-4 standard.
bb Auxiliary contacts are Listed for field installation per UL file E103955 and Certified
under CSA file 177007.

Remote tripping
MX
125V
~/=
PB114961_12.eps
Shunt trip (MX) and undervoltage release (MN)
A voltage release can be used to trip the circuit breaker using a control signal.
They serve primarily for remote, emergency-off commands. It is advised to test
the system every six months. MX or MN voltage release.
Shunt trip (MX)

bb Trips the circuit breaker when the control voltage rises above 70 % of its rated
DB421271.eps
Possible opening Failsafe opening
voltage (Un).
bb Impulse type u 20 ms or maintained control signals. 0
0.7 1.1 Un
bb Shunt trip 110...130 V AC is suitable for ground-fault protection when combined
with a Class I ground-fault sensing element. Opening conditions of the MX release.
bb Continuous duty rated coil [1].
Undervoltage release (MN)

bb Trips the circuit breaker when the control voltage drops below 35 % of its rated voltage.
DB421269.eps
bb Between 35 % and 70 % of the rated voltage, opening is possible but not guaranted. Failsafe opening Possible opening
bb Above 70 % of the rated voltage, opening does not take place.
bb Continuous duty rated coil. 0
0.35 0.7 1.1 Un
bb Circuit breaker closing is possible only if the voltage exceeds 85 % of the rated
voltage. If an undervoltage condition exists, operation of the closing mechanism of Opening conditions of the MN release.
the circuit breaker will not permit the main contacts to touch, even momentarily. This
DB421270.eps
Failsafe closing
is commonly called “Kiss Free”.
0
Time-delay unit for an undervoltage release (MN) 0.85 1.1 Un
bb A time delay unit for the MN eliminates the risk of nuisance tripping due to a
transient voltage dip lasting less than 200 ms for fixed delay units and up to 3 Closing conditions of the MN release.
seconds for adjustable units. For shorter micro-outages, a system of capacitors
provides temporary supply to the MN at U > 0.7 Un to ensure non tripping.
The correspondence between MN and time-delay units is shown below.
DB421268.eps
Power supply Corresponding MN
Unit with fixed delay 200 ms MN
250V
48 V AC 48 V DC
220 / 240 V AC 250 V DC
Unit with adjustable delay u 200 ms
Everl
48 - 60 V AC/DC 48 V DC
100 - 130 V AC/DC 125 V DC stem
n sy
ectio
220 - 250 V AC/DC

Conn
250 V DC
SD
Installation and connection MN
250V
OF
bb Auxiliary snap into cavity under the front accessory cover of the circuit breaker.
The presence and characteristics of the voltage release is visible from the front face
74
l LV4269
OFF
/seu lb-in
only/solo
75°C 44
80
AWG Cu
- #6
#14 Cu N.m
#2/0
through a window.
#4 - 5
9
5
2
mm
BJ12
Cu
LU 2.5-16Cu
6125 25-70
40°C
Cat.A
8kV
Circuit tor Aut
bb Each spring terminal may be connected by one 0.5...1.5 mm² (20....16 AWG)
IEC/EN m.I Uimp
Interrup HACR AIR/Ano A)
cteur z Ics(k
Rati 40°
ting ion ) 100 65
0
r de 65 25
220/240
ption
Valo d’interru
ur 25 5
Vale 380/445
stranded copper wire.

10
100 500/520
65 660/69
240 25
S1
480 47
600Y/3
561
LR69
Operation
125A
bb The circuit breaker must be reset locally after being tripped by shunt trip (MX) or li=125
0A
t
undervoltage release (MN).

i
7Q16193
Ii
In
bb Tripping by the shunt trip or undervoltage release has priority over manual closing;
Conn
ectio
n sy
stem
in the presence of a standing trip order such an action does not result in any closing,
even temporarily, of the main contacts. Operating voltages for MN/MX.
bb Endurance: 50 % of the rated mechanical endurance of the circuit breaker.
Electrical characteristics and wiring recommandations
of MN/MX
See page B-3.
Standards
bb MN/MX voltage releases comply with with UL 489, CSA C22.2 No. 5 and
IEC 60947-2 Standards.
bb MN/MX voltage releases are Listed for field installation per UL file E103955 and
Certified under CSA file 177007.
[1] Except for MX 24 V AC/DC (in case of continuous activation, may generate some minor
perturbation in sensitive environment).

Rotary handles
A
Ever
l
Direct rotary handles
DB421232.eps
system
Installation
The direct mounted rotary handle has to be mounted by 3 screws on the front
ection
Conn
SD
accessory cover.
OF
OFF Operation
The direct rotary handle maintains:
t
t
se
se
4P frame
4P frame
Re
Re
Ø 4...8 Ø 4...8 bb suitability for isolation

bb indication of the three positions OFF (O), ON (I) and tripped (Trip)
Trip
Trip
bb access to the “push-to-trip” button

system
ection
Conn
bb visibility of, and access to the trip unit.
Device padlocking
Directly mounted rotary handle.
The circuit breaker may be locked in the OFF position by using one to three padlocks
(not supplied) or in ON position after customer modification of the rotary handle
before installation, padlock shackle Ø4-8 mm (3/16-5/16 in.). Locking in the ON
position does not prevent the circuit breaker from tripping if a fault occurs. In this
case, the handle remains in the ON position after the circuit breaker trips. Unlocking
is required for the handle to go to the tripped then the OFF position.
Variations: door locking
Door locking built-in functionality can be activated by the customer to prevent
opening the door when the circuit breaker is ON or in trip position. For exceptional
situations, door locking can be temporarily disabled with a tool by qualified personel
to open the door when the circuit breaker is closed.
Models
bb Standard with black handle.
bb VDE type with red handle and yellow bezel for machine tool control.
Standards
The directly-mounted rotary operating handle is UL Listed under file E103955 and
CSA Certified under file 177007. Degree of protection IP40, IK07.
Extended rotary handles

DB421233.eps
l
Ever
Installation
Conn
ection
system
The door-mounted (extended) rotary handle is made up of:
SD
bb a unit that has to be screwed on the front accessory cover of the circuit breaker
On
ip
Tr
bb an assembly (handle mechanism and front plate) on the door that is always
OF
OFF Ø 4...8 secured in the same position, whether the circuit breaker is installed vertically or
t
Off
se
4P frame
horizontally
t
Re
se
Re
bb an adjustable extension shaft.

The handle mechanism is fixed with a nut (Ø22 mm) to make assembly easier. The
Trip
Laser Square tool (GVAPL01) can be used to accurately align the hole on the door
with the circuit breaker.
Conn
ection
system On
ip
Tr
Operation when door is closed

Off
Re
se
t
Ø 4...8
The door mounted handle makes it possible to operate a circuit breaker installed in
an enclosure from the front. The door mounted operating handle maintains:
bb suitability for isolation
Door-mounted rotary handle.
bb indication of the three positions OFF (O), ON (I) and tripped (Trip)
bb visibility of and access to trip unit when the door is open
bb degree of protection of the handle on the door: IP54 or IP65 as per IEC 529.
DB421644.eps
Mechanical door locking when device closed

A standard feature of the extended rotary handle is a locking function, built into the
shaft, that disables door opening when the circuit breaker is in the ON or tripped
Laser square tool. positions.
Door locking can be temporarily disabled with a tool by qualified personnel to open the
door without opening the circuit breaker. This operation is not possible if the handle is
locked by a padlock.
Device and door padlocking
Padlocking locks the circuit breaker handle and disables door opening:
bb standard situation, in the OFF position, using 1 to 3 padlocks, shackle Ø4-8 mm
(3/16 - 5/16 in.), padlocks are not supplied
bb for the black handle, with a voluntary modification of the door handle (to be done
by the customer during installation), in the ON and OFF positions. Locking in the ON
position does not prevent the circuit breaker from tripping if a fault occurs. In this
case, the handle remains in the ON position after the circuit breaker trips. Unlocking
is required for the handle to go to the tripped then the OFF position.

Rotary handles
A
Operation when door is opened
DB421234.eps
An open door shaft operator can be used to operate the circuit breaker when the Ever
l
door is opened. This accessory complies with UL508. ection

system
The indication of the three positions OFF (O), ON (I) and tripped (Trip) is visible on
Conn On
SD
p
Tri
OF
The circuit breaker itself may be locked in OFF position when the door is opened by OFF
Off
se
t
Ø 4...8
1 padlock / lockout hasp, shackle Ø4-8 mm (3/16 - 5/16 in.).

Re
t
se
4P frame
Re
Shaft length
The shaft length is the distance between the back of the circuit breaker and the door:
Trip
bb minimum shaft length is 200 mm (7.87 in.)
bb maximum shaft length is 600 mm (24 in.)
Conn
ection
system
On
bb shaft length must be adjusted.
p
Tri
Models Off
Ø 4...8
bb Standard with black handle (IP54).

t
se
Re
bb VDE type with red handle and yellow bezel for machine tool control (IP54).
bb IP65 with red handle and yellow bezel. Door-mounted rotary handle with open door shaft
IP54 models can be used in NEMA 12 enclosure applications, and IP65 in NEMA 12, operator.
3R and/or 4X ones.
Standards
The door-mounted rotary operating handle is UL Listed under file E103955 and CSA
Certified under file 177007.
Side rotary handles (left or right)

Installation
The side-mounted rotary handle is made up of:
DB421235.eps
bb a unit that has to be screwed on the front accessory cover of the circuit breaker
bb an assembly (handle and front plate) on the side (left or right) of the enclosure
l
Ever
bb an adjustable extension shaft. Conn

ection
system
The handle mechanism is fixed with a nut (Ø22 mm) to make assembly easier.
SD
Ø
4..
.8
Operation
OF
ref.
Axial
The side mounted rotary handle makes it possible to operate a circuit breaker OFF
installed in an enclosure from the side. The side mounted rotary handle maintains:
OFF
bb indication of the three positions OFF (O), ON (I) and tripped (Trip). Moreover, the
position is visible on the circuit breaker itself.
bb visibility of and access to the trip unit when the door is open
Conn
ection
system
bb degree of protection of the handle on the side: IP54 or IP65 as per IEC 529.
4..
.8
Device padlocking
The circuit breaker may be locked in the OFF position, or, for the black rotary handle
only, in the ON position after voluntary modification of the side handle (to be done by Side mounted rotary handle.
the customer during installation), by using one to three padlocks, padlock shackle
Ø4-8 mm (3/16-5/16 in.); padlocks are not supplied.
Locking in the ON position does not prevent the circuit breaker from tripping if a fault
occurs. In this case, the handle remains in the ON position after the circuit
breaker trips. Unlocking is required for the handle to go to the tripped then the OFF
position.
Shaft length
The shaft length is the distance between the side of the circuit breaker and the side
of the enclosure:
bb maximum shaft length is 480 mm (18.90 in.)
bb shaft length must be adjusted.
Models
bb Standard with black handle (IP54).
bb VDE type with red handle and yellow bezel for machine tool control (IP54).
bb IP65 with red handle and yellow bezel (by ordering a standard one and an IP65
universal handle).
IP54 models can be used in NEMA 12 enclosure applications, and IP65 in NEMA 12,
3R and/or 4X ones.
Standards
The side-mounted rotary operating handle is UL Listed under file E103955 and CSA
Certified under file 177007.

Locks and sealing accessories
A
Locks
Handle padlocking device [1] Padlocking systems can accept up to three padlocks with diameters of 5-8 mm
Fixed Fixed Removable (3/16-5/16 in.); padlocks not supplied. Locking in the OFF position provides isolation
(OFF only) (OFF or ON) (OFF only) as per IEC 60947-2.
Control device Function Means Required

DB418590.eps
DB418591.eps
DB418592.eps
Everl Everl Everl
Con
nection
syst
em
Con
nection
syst
em
nection
syst
em accessories
SD
Con
SD
SD
Toggle Lock in OFF position Padlock Removable device

OF
OF
OF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Lock in OFF or ON Padlock Fixed device
position
Lock in OFF position Padlock
Direct rotary handle Lock in Padlock -
Con
nection
syst Con
em nection
syst
em Con
nection
syst
bb OFF position
em
bb OFF or ON position [1]

[1] Rotary handle has integral padlocking capability.
Extended/side Lock in Padlock -
rotary handle bb OFF position
bb OFF or ON position [2]
with door opening
prevented for extended
For extended, door Padlock
opened, lock in OFF
position
[1] Following a simple modification of the mechanism.
[2] Following a simple modification of the mechanism - black handle only.
Sealing accessories
DB423018.eps
Sealing accessories are available. Each bag of accessories contains all the parts
required for the types of sealing indicated below.
A bag contains:
bb 6 sealing accessories
bb 6 plastic seals.
Sealing accessories.
Types of seals and corresponding functions

Protected operations
Control type bb Front removal bb Access to power
bb Access to auxiliaries. connections
Toggle
DB419692.eps
DB419693.eps
Everl
em
ion syst
nect
Con
SD
OF
OF
OFF
SD
OF
Con
OFF
nect
ion syst
em
Rotary
DB419695.eps
DB419694.eps
Everl
handle Con
nect
ion syst
em
SD
OFOF
pact
Com 160H
OFF
t
NSXm
se
4P frame
3456
Re
LV12 Uimp 8kV

Ui 800V (kA)Ics
Icu 100
Ue(V) 100 70
210 70 65
415 65 ??
SD
440 ?? ??
500 ?? ??
525 ??
690
.8
Cat.A
Ø 4..
50/60Hz 0947-2
IEC/EN6 .2
GB14048
HIC (kA)
OF
AB1 100
NEMA 65
35
Trip
240V
460V
600V
pact
Com 160H
OFF
t
NSXm
se
4P frame
3456 8kV
Re
LV12 Uimp
Con Ui 800V (kA)Ics
nect Icu 100
ion syst Ue(V) 100 70
em 210 70 65
415 65 ??
440 ?? ??
500 ?? ??
525 ??
690
.8
Cat.A
Ø 4..
50/60Hz 0947-2
IEC/EN6 .2
GB14048
HIC (kA)
AB1 100
NEMA 65
35
Trip
240V
460V
600V

Operating and installation conditions...............................B-2

Voltage release wiring rules.............................................................. B-3
Installation in equipment
Safety clearances and minimum distances..................................... B-7
B-Frame safety clearance, UL standard.......................................... B-8
B-Frame safety clearance, IEC standard......................................... B-9
B
Other chapters
Functions and characteristics..................................................................... A-1
Dimensions.................................................................................................C-1
Glossary.....................................................................................................G-1
Multistandard protection catalogue - 02/2017 Life is On | Schneider Electric B-1

Operating and installation conditions
Ambient temperature
PowerPact Multistandard circuit breakers may be used between -25 °C and +70 °C
(-13°F and 158°F).
For temperatures higher than 40 °C (104°F) inside the enclosure, devices must be
B derated.
Circuit breakers should be put into service under normal ambient, operating-
temperature conditions.
Exceptionally, the circuit breaker may be put into service when the ambient
temperature is between -35 °C and -25 °C (-31°F and -13°F).
The permissible storage-temperature range for PowerPact Multistandard circuit
breakers in the original packing is -50 °C and +85 °C (-67°F and 185°F).
Altitude derating
Everl
Altitude does not significantly affect the characteristics of PowerPact Multistandard
Conn
ectio
n syste
m
circuit breakers up to 2000 m (6560 ft). Above this altitude, it is necessary to take into
account the decrease in the dielectric strength and cooling capacity of air.
SD
MN
250V
OF
The following table gives the corrections to be applied for altitudes above 2000 m
erPact
D
AL100Fpo
Pow
wire
Al/Cu Ib-in/pulg/
75°C 44
Use
AWG 80
Al/Cu
- #4 N-m
#14 Al/Cu
#3/0
#8 - 2
5
mm 9
BJ 125
Al/Cu
OFF
2-21 Al/Cu
breaker tico 27-95
40°C
Circuit tor Automa 947-2
Interrupteur IEC/EN60 .I 8kV
LE
DB419696.eps
Uimp
Disjonc 40°C AIR/Anom
6125 Ui 800V
Ics(kA)
BJL3 g Rating Icu(kA)
(6560 ft).
50/60Hz 100
on
Ue(V)
100 65
Interruptin
de interrupci
tion 65 25
Valor d’interrup (kA) 220/240 25
Valeur 380/440 5
50/60Hz 100 10
(V) 500/525
65
660/690
240 14
480
600/347
CB
LISTED
No:186
Issue
E10027
S1 Cat.A
125A
The breaking capacities remain unchanged.

HACR
TM 125D
Im 160A
PPYYWWD-N
Im
Ir
1250A
Conn
ectio
n syste
m
Altitude (m) 2000 3000 4000 5000

(6560 ft) (9840 ft) (13120 ft) (16400 ft)
Impulse withstand voltage (kV) 8 7.1 6.4 5.6
Insulation voltage (V) Ui 800 710 635 560
Maximum operational voltage (V) Ue 690 690 635 560
Average current capacity (A) In x 1.0 0.98 0.96 0.94
at 40 °C (104 °F)
DB419697.eps
Everl
Vibrations
Conn
ectio
n syste
m
PowerPact B Multistandard devices resist mechanical vibrations.

SD
They meet following levels of IEC 60068-2-6:

MN
250V
OF
erPact
D
AL100Fpo
bb 2.0 to 25 Hz and amplitude ±1.6 mm

Pow
wire
Al/Cu Ib-in/pulg/
75°C 44
Use
AWG 80
Al/Cu
- #4 N-m
#14 Al/Cu
#3/0
#8 2- 5
mm 9
BJ 125
Al/Cu
OFF
2-21 Al/Cu
breaker tico 27-95
40°C
Disjonc LE 40°C AIR/Anom
Uimp
6125 Ui 800V
Ics(kA)
BJL3 g Rating 50/60Hz
Icu(kA)
100
on
Ue(V)
100 65
Interruptin
de interrupci
tion 65 25
bb 25 to 100 Hz acceleration ±4 g.
Valeur 380/440 5
50/60Hz 100 10
(V) 500/525
65
660/690
240 14
480
600/347
CB
LISTED
No:186
Issue
E10027
S1 Cat.A
125A
HACR
Excessive vibration may cause tripping, breaks in connections or damage to

TM 125D
Im 160A
PPYYWWD-N
Im
Ir
1250A
Conn
ectio
n syste
mechanical parts.
m
Climatic withstand
The materials used in PowerPact B circuit breakers will not support the growth of
fungus and mold.
PowerPact B circuit breakers have passed the test defined below for extreme
atmospheric conditions.
DB419698.eps
Dry cold and dry heat:

bb IEC 60068-2-1-dry cold at -55 °C
bb IEC 60068-2-2-dry heat at +85 °C.
Damp heat (tropicalization)
bb IEC 60068-2-30–damp heat (temperature + 55 °C and relative humidity of 95 %).
bb IEC 60068-2-52 severity 2 - Cycling salt mist.
Electromagnetic disturbances
Everl
m
n syste
ectio
Conn
SD
PowerPact B Multistandard devices have successfully passed the electromagnetic-

MN
250V
OF
erPact
D
AL100Fpo
Pow
wire
compatibility tests (EMC) defined by the following international standards:

Al/Cu Ib-in/pulg/
75°C 44
Use
AWG 80
Al/Cu
- #4 N-m
#14 Al/Cu
#3/0
#8 - 2
5
mm 9
BJ 125
Al/Cu
OFF
2-21 Al/Cu
breaker tico 27-95
40°C
Disjonc LE 40°C AIR/Anom
Uimp
6125 Ui 800V
Ics(kA)
BJL3 g Rating 50/60Hz
Icu(kA)
100
on
Ue(V)
100 65
Interruptin
de interrupci
tion 65 25
Valeur 5
IEC/EN 60947-2: Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear, part 2: circuit

50/60Hz
380/440 10
100 500/525
(V) 65
660/690
240 14
480
600/347
CB
LISTED
No:186
Issue
E10027
S1 Cat.A
125A
HACR
breakers.
TM 125D
Im 160A
PPYYWWD-N
Im
Ir
1250A
Conn
ectio
n syste
m
B-2 Life is On | Schneider Electric Multistandard protection catalogue - 02/2017

Voltage release wiring rules
Shunt trip (MX) and undervoltage release (MN) (+)
Recommended maximum cable lengths

In certain circumstances, high cable capacitance due to an excessive cable length C
could prevent an undervoltage release MN from dropping out resulting in safety
issues. In case of a shunt trip MX, an untimely trip may occur due to capacitive
current leak. D2
(L)
B
To avoid these dysfunction due to cable capacitance C, the maximum cable length
MN
(L) is defined by the following table for a 1.5 mm² cable (16AWG).
DB421650.eps
D1
Power supply voltage Maximum cable length Shunt trip (MX) [1] (-)
(Un) undervoltage trip (MN) [1]
24 V AC 1 243 m (4,078 ft) 3 653 m (11,985 ft)
24 V DC unlimited > 3653 m (11,985 ft)
(+)
DB421651.eps
48 V AC 583 m (1912 ft) 1 667 m (5,469 ft)
48 V DC unlimited > 1667 m (5,469 ft)
110...130 V AC 126 m (413 ft) 913 m (2,995 ft) C
110...130 V DC unlimited > 913 m (2,995 ft)
(L)
208-240 V AC 109 m (358 ft) 160 m (525 ft) C2
250 V DC unlimited > 160 m (525 ft)
277 V AC 98 m (322 ft) 120 m (394 ft) MX
380-415 V AC 86 m (282 ft) 80 m (262 ft) C1

440-480 V AC 56 m (184 ft) 67 m (220 ft) (-)
[1] Make sure auxiliaries supply voltage is within working range (0.85 Un mini...1.1 Un maxi).
If a longer cable length is required, several solutions are possible to counteract

DB421652.eps
excessive cable capacitance:

bb use DC operated auxiliaries
bb use lower control voltage (make sure auxiliaries supply voltage is within working
range: 0.85 Un minimum...1.1 Un maximum)
bb if high voltage and long control cables are required for an AC undervoltage release
(L) Supply
(MN), add a rectifier bridge (ref LV426899 – DIN rail compatible) in the control circuit. 50/60Hz
It will prevent drop out problems but increase operating time. D2
MN
Electrical characteristics of MN/MX D1

Characteristics
AC DC
Rated voltage (V) 24, 48, 110...130, 24, 48, 125, 250
208...240, 277,
380...415, 440... 480
Power requirements MX Pickup < 6 VA < 10 W
(< 50 ms)
Seal-in < 4 VA <1W
MN < 7 VA <2W
Clearing time (ms) < 50 < 50
Operating range up to 1.1 Un

(A) Derating and correction factor depending of

110
temperature
The overload protection is calibrated at 40 °C in the lab. This means that when the
B 100 ambient temperature is less or greater than 40 °C, the In protection pick-up is slightly
modified.
90
Choosing the right rating depending of the temperature
Over the reference temperature of 40°, the circuit breaker has to be derated
80 following the table below:
DB421531.eps
Correction factor table for thermal magnetic (TM-D)
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 (°C) PowerPact B circuit breakers
Rating Temperature
(A) In (°C / °F )
40 / 104 45 / 113 50 / 122 55 / 131 60 / 140 65 / 149 70 / 158
15 15 14 14 13 12 12 11
20 20 19 19 18 18 17 16
25 25 24 24 23 22 21 20
30 30 29 28 27 26 25 24
35 35 34 33 32 31 31 30
40 40 39 38 37 36 35 33
45 45 44 42 41 39 37 36
50 50 49 47 45 44 42 40
60 60 58 56 55 53 51 48
70 70 67 64 61 59 55 53
80 80 77 73 70 67 63 59
90 90 87 83 80 76 72 68
100 100 99 96 92 85 80 69
110 110 107 103 99 94 89 76
125 125 121 117 112 109 104 100

Calculating the tripping time for a given temperature: 10000

8000
After having determine the corrected ratio I/In, the tripping time at 40°C (104°F) is
6000
defined with the tripping curves (see page E-2 and page E-6).
Then to obtain the tripping time at a different temperature, the ratio I/In has to be 4000
3000
B
corrected with the correction factor below:
2000
Correction factor table for thermal magnetic (TM-D) 1500
PowerPact B circuit breakers 1000
Rating Temperature 800
(A) In (°C / °F ) 600
10 / 15 / 20 / 25 / 30 / 35 / 40 / 45 / 50 / 55 / 60 / 65 / 70 / 400
300
50 59 68 77 86 95 104 113 122 131 140 149 158
200
15 1.21 1.18 1.15 1.11 1.08 1.04 1 0.96 0.92 0.87 0.83 0.78 0.72
150
20 1.16 1.13 1.11 1.08 1.06 1.03 1 0.97 0.94 0.91 0.88 0.85 0.81
100
25 1.15 1.13 1.11 1.08 1.05 1.03 1 0.97 0.94 0.91 0.88 0.85 0.82 80
30 1.16 1.14 1.11 1.08 1.06 1.03 1 0.97 0.94 0.91 0.87 0.84 0.80 60
50
35 1.13 1.11 1.09 1.07 1.05 1.02 1 0.98 0.95 0.93 0.90 0.87 0.85 40
30
40 1.14 1.12 1.10 1.07 1.05 1.03 1 0.97 0.95 0.92 0.89 0.86 0.83
20
45 1.17 1.15 1.12 1.09 1.06 1.03 1 0.97 0.94 0.90 0.87 0.83 0.79 15
50 1.16 1.14 1.11 1.08 1.06 1.03 1 0.97 0.94 0.91 0.87 0.84 0.80 10
60 1.16 1.14 1.11 1.08 1.06 1.03 1 0.97 0.94 0.91 0.88 0.84 0.81 8
6
70 1.18 1.15 1.13 1.10 1.06 1.03 1 0.96 0.91 0.88 0.84 0.79 0.75
4
80 1.19 1.15 1.12 1.09 1.06 1.03 1 0.96 0.92 0.88 0.83 0.79 0.74 3
90 1.19 1.15 1.12 1.10 1.06 1.04 1 0.96 0.92 0.89 0.84 0.80 0.75 2
100 1.21 1.18 1.15 1.12 1.09 1.05 1 0.99 0.96 0.92 0.85 0.80 0.69 1.5
110 1.19 1.16 1.13 1.10 1.07 1.04 1 0.98 0.94 0.90 0.85 0.80 0.70 1
.8
125 1.17 1.14 1.12 1.09 1.06 1.03 1 0.96 0.94 0.90 0.87 0.83 0.80
.6
.4
Example: What is the tripping time of a PowerPact B 100 A for an overload of 500 A? .3
bb At 40 °C, I/In = 5/1 = 5, tripping time is between 7 and 35 seconds. 70 A, 80 A, 100 A
.2
bb At 20 °C, I/In = 5/1.15 = 4.35, tripping time is between 9 and 50 seconds.
.15 60 A
bb At 60 °C, I/In = 5/0.85 = 5.88, tripping time is between 5 and 25 seconds.
.1 90 A
.08
.06
.04
.03
.02
.015
DB421530.eps
.01
.008
.006
1.5
10
15
20
30
40
60
80
100
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
.5
.7

DB419658.eps
DB421245.eps
system
nection
system
Protection degree
Protection degree of the product, according to IEC60259, depends of its
Con
nection
SD
Con
SD
configuration:
OF
MN
250V
OF
B
974
LV426
OFF
Colours Definition
lo/seul lb-in
only/so
75°C 44
act
OFF
80
AWG Cu
Comp
t
- #6
se
#14 Cu 59
4P frame
N.m
#2/0
LV4265
#4 -
Re
5
mm
2 9
BJ12525LU 6 Cu
2.5-1 Cu 40°C
361 25-70 Cat.A
40°C
BJLit breaker atico 60947-

2
8kV
947-2
Cat.A
8kV
Circuuptor Autom
IEC/EN60 Uimp
IEC/ENom.I Uimp 50/60Hz Ics(kA)
Interr cteur HACR AIR/An Ics(kA) Ui 8kV Icu(kA) 100
Hz ) 100 70
Disjon 50/60 Ui 8kV Icu(kA 100 Ue(V)
240 70 65
IP 54/65: side / front extended rotary handle

Rating 40°C
pting pcion Ue(V) 100 65 415 65 30
Interru interru 30
40 65 440 22
Ø 4...8
de
Valor d’interruption 220/2 25 500 22 6
Valeur 40 25 5 525 10
380/4 690
25 10
100 500/5
65 90
660/6
240 25
S1 48.2
GB140
480 AB1
/347 NEMA HIC
600Y 100
65
240 25
480
600Y/347
Trip
LR69561
IP 40: front cover, side, back, long terminal shield, direct rotary handle
125A
t
50A
li=12
i
7Q16193
IP20: power connection cover

Ii
In
Con
nection
Con system
nection
system
may be IP20 or less depending of the kind of power connections and cable
size used
DB421246.eps
l
Ever
system
nection
Con
SD
OF
act
Comp
OFF
t
se
4P frame
59
Re
LV4265
40°C
Cat.A
947-2
8kV
IEC/EN60 Uimp
50/60Hz Ics(kA)
Ui 8kV Icu(kA) 100
100 70
Ue(V)
240 70 65
415 65 30
440 30 22
500 22 6
525 10
690
48.2
GB140
AB1 HIC
NEMA 100
65
240 25
480
Trip
600Y/347
On
ip
Tr
Ø 4...8
Off
set
Re
Reverse feeding
DB419699.eps
PowerPact B Multistandard circuit breakers can be supplied from either the top or
the bottom without any reduction in performance giving the designer/installer
flexibility in choosing the mounting location for the breaker and feed cables.
Everl All connection and insulation accessories can be used on circuit breakers supplied
Con
nection
syst
em
either from the top or bottom.
SD
OF
OFF
Con
nection
syst
em
Weight
The table below presents the weights of the circuit breakers.
Type of device Circuit breakers
B-frame 1P 510 g / 1.1 lbs
2P 770 g / 1.7 lbs
3P 1070 g / 2.4 lbs
4P 1440 g / 3.2 lbs

Safety clearances and minimum distances
General rules
When installing a circuit breaker, minimum distances (safety clearances) must be
maintained between the device and panels, busbars and other protection devices
installed nearby. These distances are defined by tests carried out in accordance with
UL standards.
If installation is not checked by type tests, it is also necessary to:
B
bb use insulated bars for circuit-breaker connections
bb segregate the busbars using phase barriers.
For PowerPact Multistandard devices, terminal shields and interphase barriers are
recommended and may be mandatory depending on type of installation (unit-mount,
drawout, etc.).
Power connections
The table below indicates the connection requirements for PowerPact B
Multistandard devices to ensure insulation of live parts for the various types of
connection.
Connection accessories such as spreaders and some crimp lugs are supplied with
interphase barriers. Long terminal shields provide a degree of protection of IP40.
PowerPact-B Multistandard: rules to be respected to ensure insulation of live parts

EverLink connector with or Mechanical lug connector Compression lug /
without control wire terminal busbar connector
DB418826.eps
DB418827.eps
DB418828.eps
l
Ever
system system
ction system ction
Conne ction Conne
Conne
SD
SD
SD
OF
OF
OF
OFF OFF OFF
Insulation accessory options per conductor type

Type of conductor No Interphase Long No Interphase Long No Interphase Long
insulating barriers terminal insulating barriers terminal insulating barriers terminal
accessory shield accessory shield accessory shield
Cables
DB419248.eps
Possible - - Possible Possible Possible - - -
Insulated bars
DB419249.eps
- - - - - - Possible Possible Possible
Cables + crimp
DB419250.eps
lugs
- - - - - - Forbidden Mandatory Possible [1]
Cables + crimp
DB419251.eps
lugs with
heat-shrinkable - - - - - - Possible Possible Possible
sheath
Extension
DB419252.eps
terminals:
spreader - - - - - - Forbidden Mandatory -
Extension
DB419253.eps
terminals:
cables + power - - - - - - Forbidden Mandatory Possible [1]
distribution
connector
[1] Instead of phase barriers.
Note: For uninsulated bar connections, please consult us.

B-Frame safety clearance, UL standard
Minimum clearance between backplate and uninsulated power connections

For all types of PowerPact B-frame circuit breakers that use uninsulated power connections (for example, busbars,
spreaders, or uninsulated crimped lugs), the minimum clearance distance with the enclosure backplate is shown below.
When using uninsulated connectors be sure to maintain the proper clearance between live parts and grounded metallic
back pan or use the insulation screen.
B
UL standard
R
Minimum enclosure dimensions

Operating voltage U y 690 V
DB418788.eps
A1 For devices Clearance (mm)

equipped with: Between Between device and sheet metal
devices Painted sheet metal Bare sheet metal
A1 A2 B A1 A2 B
SD
OF
bb no accessories 0 30 mm 5 mm 0 40 mm 5 mm 5 mm
461 0 1.18 in. 0.19 in. 0 1.57 in. 0.19 in. 0.19 in.
I
OFF
18.13 O
bb interphase 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 mm
Trip
barriers 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.19 in.

bb long terminal 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 mm
shields 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.19 in.
B A2 B
219 105
8.63 4.13
Minimum safety clearances to bare busbars

E E Operating voltage U y 690 V
DB419289.eps
Clearances to live bare busbars [1]

Spacing E y 60 mm (2.36 in.) Spacing E > 60 mm (2.36 in.)
D1
D1 D2 D1 D2
200 mm 100 mm 120 mm 60 mm
7.87 in. 3.94 in. 4.72 in. 2.36 in.
SD
OF
[1] These clearances can be reduced for special installations as long as the configuration is
checked by tests.
Trip
D2
Compression lug safety clearance

0 An insulating screen or long terminal shield is required if:
DB421645.eps
C bb for 2, 3, 4 poles C < 9.5 mm (< 0.37 in.),

0
bb for 1 pole C < 12.7 mm (<0.5 in.).

B-Frame safety clearance, IEC standard
IEC standard
Minimum safety clearances
Operating voltage U y 690 V
DB419287.eps
DB419286.eps
B
A1 A1 For devices Clearance (mm)
equipped with: Between Between device and sheet metal
devices Painted sheet metal Bare sheet metal
A1 A2 B A1 A2 B
SD
OF
SD
OF
bb no accessories 0 30 mm 5 mm 0 40 mm 5 mm 5 mm
0 1.18 in. 0.19 in. 0 1.57 in. 0.19 in. 0.19 in.
Trip
Trip
bb interphase 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 mm
barriers 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.19 in.
bb long terminal 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 mm
A2 shields 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.19 in.
A2
B B
B B
DB419288.eps
A1
SD
OF
Trip
A2
B B
Minimum safety clearances to bare busbars

E E Operating voltage U y 690 V
DB419289.eps
Clearances to live bare busbars [1]

Spacing E y 60 mm (2.36 in.) Spacing E > 60 mm (2.36 in.)
D1
D1 D2 D1 D2
200 mm 100 mm 120 mm 60 mm
7.87 in. 3.94 in. 4.72 in. 2.36 in.
SD
OF
[1] These clearances can be reduced for special installations as long as the configuration is
checked by tests.
Trip
D2
Compression lug safety clearance

0 An insulating screen or long terminal shield is required if:
DB421645.eps
C
0 bb for 2, 3, 4 poles C < 9.5 mm (< 0.37 in.),
bb for 1 pole C < 12.7 mm (<0.5 in.).

B

Dimensions
PowerPact B-Frame Circuit Breakers......................................

Circuit breaker dimensions............................................................... C-2
Connectors dimensions.................................................................... C-3
Terminal shield dimensions.............................................................. C-4
Interphase barrier dimensions......................................................... C-5
Insulation screen............................................................................... C-6
Mounting on backplate..................................................................... C-7
Mounting on DIN rail......................................................................... C-8
Direct rotary handle.......................................................................... C-9
Extended rotary handle dimensions.............................................. C-10
Front -panel cutout.......................................................................... C-10
Lateral rotary handle dimensions................................................... C-11
C
Connection with accessories.......................................................... C-12
Other chapters
Glossary.....................................................................................................G-1
Multistandard protection catalogue - 02/2017 Life is On | Schneider Electric C-1

Dimensions
PowerPact B-Frame Circuit Breakers
mm
Circuit breaker dimensions in.
1P 2P
DB419779.eps
DB419828.eps
l
Ever
DB419854.eps
system Connection system

nection
Con
SD
OF
OF
137 X 137 X
5.39 5.39
Trip
Trip
68.5 68.5
Con
nection
system
2.70 2.70
Connection system
13.5
0.53
13.5
0.53 54
2.12
27
1.06
Y
Y
3P 4P
DB419780.eps
DB419829.eps
SD
OF
OF
SD
137 X 137 X
5.39 5.39
Trip
Trip
68.5 68.5
2.70 2.70
40.5 40.5
1.59 1.59
81 108
3.18 4.25
Y Y
Side view
DB419778.eps
101.9
4.01
6.5 8.5
0.25 80 0.33
3.14
C-2 Life is On | Schneider Electric Multistandard protection catalogue - 02/2017

Dimensions
mm
Connectors dimensions in.
EverLink with control wire terminal connector

DB419851.eps
DB419856.eps
DB419826.eps
l
Ever
system
nection
Con
10.5
SD
SD
OF
0.41
OF
Trip
system
nection
Con
10.5
0.41 33.3
C
1.31
Everlink without control wire terminal connector

DB421904.eps
DB421906.eps
DB421905.eps
l
Ever
system
nection
Con
SD
OF
10.5
SD
OF
0.41
X
Con
Trip
nection
system
33.3
10.5 1.31
0.41
Mechanical lug connector

DB419853.eps
DB419858.eps
DB419825.eps
system
nection
Con
SD
6.3
SD
OF
0.25
OF
X
Trip
6.3
Con
nection
system
0.25 36.3
1.43
Compression lug / busbar connector

DB419852.eps
DB419857.eps
DB419827.eps
system
14.8
nection
Con
SD
SD
OF
0.58
OF
X
Trip
system
nection
Con
14.8
0.58
33.3
1.31

Dimensions
mm
Terminal shield dimensions in.
2P 3P 4P
81 108
DB421744.eps
54
DB419782.eps
DB419781.eps
4.25
DB421743.eps
2.12 3.19
tem
n sys
ectio Connection system
Conn
SD
OF
SD
OF
OF
SD
OF
X X X
Trip
Trip
Trip
Conn
ectio
n sys
tem
Connection system
Y Y Y
Side view
DB421745.eps
72.3
2.85
50
1.97

Dimensions
Interphase barrier dimensions mm

in.
84.5
DB419783.eps
DB419784.eps
3.33
72.3 78.8
2.85 3.10
73.3 79 66.8
n sys
tem
2.89 3.11 OR 2.63
C
ectio
Conn
SD
OF
137 X 137 X
5.39 5.39
Conn
ectio
n sys
tem
68.5 68.5
2.70 2.70

Dimensions
mm
Insulation screen in.
2P 3P
DB419785.eps
75 110
DB421604.eps
DB419786.eps
2.95 4.33
34 55
1.34 2.17
10.5 10.5 14.5 14.5
0.41 0.41 0.57 0.57
l
Ever
C
tem
n sys
ectio
Conn
SD
84 84
OF
3.31 3.31
OFF
SD
OF
OF
Conn
ectio
n sys
tem
137 X 137 X
5.39 5.39
Trip
Trip
66.5 66.5
2.62 2.62
Y Y
4P
145
DB421605.eps
5.71
59
2.32
18.5 18.5
0.73 0.73
84
3.31
OF
SD
137 X
5.39
Trip
66.5
2.62

Dimensions
mm
Mounting on backplate in.
1P
2 Ø4
DB419788.eps
2 M4
DB419787.eps
2 Ø0.15
OFF
162
6.37
X
C
81
3.18
2P
DB419791.eps
DB419792.eps
2 Ø4.5
2 Ø0.18 2 M4
OF
114
4.48 X
57
2.24
13.5
0.53
Y
3P/4P 3P 4P
2 Ø4.5 2 Ø4.5
DB419795.eps
2 Ø0.18 2 M4 2 M4
DB419796.eps
2 Ø0.18
DB419797.eps
l
Ever
SD
OF
114 X 114
4.48 X
4.48
57 57
2.24 2.24
13.5 40.5
0.53 1.59
13.5 13.5
0.53 0.53
27 54
1.06 2.12
Y Y

Dimensions
mm
Mounting on DIN rail in.
1P, 2P, 3P, 4P

DB419794.eps
DB419793.eps
l
Ever
SD
OF
73.5
2.87

Dimensions
mm
Direct rotary handle in.
3P 4P
DB419802.eps
DB419800.eps
OF
SD
SD
OF
2.5 2.5
31.5 31.5
0.09 0.09
t
t
se
se
Re
Re
1.24 1.24
I I
OFF
4 8 68 X OFF
4 8 68 X
2.67 2.67
O 36.5 O 36.5
1.43 1.43
Trip
Trip
Trip
Trip
7 7
0.27 0.27
40.5 40.5 40.5
1.59 1.59 1.59
81
Y
3.18
Side view Door cutout for 3P/4P

109 max.
DB419804.eps
DB419801.eps
4.29 max.
29 max.
1.14 max.
2.5
37.5
0.09 1.48
X 70
2.76 X
32.5
1.28
42.5 42.5
80 1.67 1.67
3.14
85
151.3 3.35
5.95

Dimensions
mm
Extended rotary handle dimensions in.
3P 4P
DB419808.eps
DB419806.eps
Connection system
OF
SD
OF
SD
2.5 2.5
31.5 31.5
0.09 0.09
1.24 1.24
I I
OFF
68 X
OFF
68 X
2.67 2.67
O 36.5 O 36.5
1.43 1.43
C
Trip
Trip
Connection system Connection system
7 7
0.27 0.27
40.5 40.5
1.59 1.59
81 108
3.18 4.25
Y
Y
3P/4P
DB419807.eps
194 min. / 594 max.

7.63 min. / 23.38 max.
200 min. / 600 max.
7.87 min. / 23.62 max.
Front -panel cutout

60 48
DB421607.eps
1.89
DB421606.eps
2.36
24 15.9
On
0.94 0.63 4 Ø4.5
4 Ø0.18
p
Tri
t
2.5
se
Re
0.09 60 Ø4.5
Ø4...8
4 8 2.36 Ø0.18
Off X
Rese
t
15.9
48 0.63
1.89
Trip
7 Ø22
0.27 Ø0.87
Y

Dimensions
mm
Lateral rotary handle dimensions in.
3P
DB419809.eps
Connection system
OF
SD
Axial ref.
2.5
PowerPact
0.09 31.5
1.24
I
OFF
OFF 68 X
2.67
36.5
C
O
1.43
Trip
Trip
45 min. / 480 max.

1.77 min / 18.90 max.
Connection system
7
0.27
40.5
1.59
81
3.18
4P 3P / 4P
DB419812.eps
DB419811.eps
Connection system
OF
SD
Axial ref.
2.5
On
2.5 Tri
p
0.09 31.5 0.09 60

I
1.24 68 Ø4...8 2.36 X
OFF
OFF
X Off
2.67 Reset
O 36.5
1.43
Trip
Trip
45 min. / 480 max. 60

1.77 min / 18.90 max. 2.36
Connection system
46.2
7 1.82
0.27
126.2
40.5 4.97
1.59
108 156
4.25

Dimensions
mm
Connection with accessories in.
Power distribution connectors

6 holes
DB421975.eps
DB421974.eps
tem
n sys
ectio
Conn
SD
33.5
OF
erPa
ct 1.32
C
Pow
Conn
ectio
n sys
tem
3 holes
DB421977.eps
DB421976.eps
tem
n sys
ectio
Conn
38.6
SD
1.52
OF
ct
erPa
Pow
Conn
ectio
n sys
tem
Spreaders 3P 4P Side view

DB421978.eps
90
DB421979.eps
DB421980.eps
DB421981.eps
125
3.54 4.92
35 35 9 35 35 35 9
1.38 1.38 0.35 1.38 1.38 1.38 0.35 33.3
Conn
ectio
n sys
tem
Ø8.4 Ø8.4 1.31

SD
OF
OFF
24.5 24.5
OF
SD
SD
OF
0.96 0.96
X X X
Conn
ectio
n sys
tem
Trip
Trip
Y
Y

Wiring diagrams
PowerPact B-Frame Auxiliaries...........................................D-2
Other chapters
Dimensions.................................................................................................C-1
Glossary.....................................................................................................G-1
Multistandard protection catalogue - 02/2017 Life is On | Schneider Electric D-1

Wiring diagrams
PowerPact B-Frame Auxiliaries
Indication contacts OF and SD
Indication contacts
DB419268.eps
OF Device ON/OFF indication contacts

Closed Fault
SD Trip indication contact
12
14
92
94
Color code for auxiliary wiring

YE PU GN RD RD: Red
YE: Yellow
BK: Black
GN: Green
OF SD PU: Purple
GY: Grey
D GY BK
91
11
Remote operation (MN/MX voltage release)

a (+)
Remote operation
DB419267.eps
MN Undervoltage Release
or
MX Shunt trip Release

OR: Orange
BL: Blue
D2
C2
WH: White
BL OR
MN MX
or
WH WH
D1
C1
a (-)
The diagram is shown with circuits de-energized, relays in normal position, and all devices open, connected, and charged.
Terminal connections shown as O must be connected by the customer.
D-2 Life is On | Schneider Electric Multistandard protection catalogue - 02/2017

PowerPact Multistandard thermal-magnetic trip circuit

breakers
PowerPact B-Frame 15/20 A thermal-magnetic trip..........................E-2
PowerPact B-Frame 60/100 A thermal-magnetic trip........................E-5
PowerPact B-Frame 110/125 A thermal-magnetic trip......................E-6
Distribution system
Plates for mounting on busbars
Short-circuit withstand capability......................................................E-9
Other chapters
Dimensions.................................................................................................C-1
Glossary.....................................................................................................G-1
Multistandard protection catalogue - 02/2017 Life is On | Schneider Electric E-1

PowerPact B-Frame 15/20 A thermal-magnetic trip
Multiples of rated current

DB421648.eps
100
1.5
10
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
1
4
5
6
7
8
9
BD, BG, BJ, BK MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
10000 10000
9000 9000 CHARACTERISTIC TRIP CURVE NO. 8194
8000 8000
7000 7000
6000 6000 CIRCUIT BREAKER INFORMATION
5000 5000 Circuit Breaker Continuous Maximum Number
Prefix Ampere Rating AC Voltage of Poles
4000 4000
BD, BG, BJ, BK 15–20 600Y 1, 2, 3, 4
3000 3000
This curve is to be used for application and coordination purposes only.
The EZ-AMP overlay feature at the bottom of the page should be used
2000 2000 during coordination studies.
All time/current characteristic curve data is based on 40°C ambient cold start.
1500 1500
Terminations are made with conductors of appropriate length and ratings.
1000 1000
900 900
800 800
700 700
600 600
500 500
400 400
300 300
200 200
10000
150 150
1000
1500
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
7000
8000
9000
150
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 70
60 Maximum single-pole trip times 60
50 at 25c based on nema ab-4 2009 50
40 40
E 30
20
30
20
15 15
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
Time in seconds
4 4
3 3
2 2
1.5 1.5
1 1
.9 .9
.8 .8
.7 .7
.6 .6
.5 .5
.4 .4
.3 .3
.2 20 A .2
.15 .15
15 A
.1 .1
.09 .09
.08 .08
.07 .07
.06 .06
.05 .05
Maximum clearing time
.04 .04
(at 50 Hz) (at 60 Hz)
.03 .03
1 cycle
.02 .02
1 cycle (50 Hz)
.015 (60 Hz) .015
1/2 cycle
.01
.009 1/2 cycle (50 Hz)
.01
.009
.008 .008
.007 (60 Hz) .007
.006 .006
.005 .005
1.5
10
8000
9000
10000
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
150
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
1500
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
7000
1
4
5
6
7
8
9
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9

25 15
30 20
E-2 Life is On | Schneider Electric Multistandard protection catalogue - 02/2017


DB421649.eps
100
1.5
10
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
1
4
5
6
7
8
9
BD, BG, BJ, BK MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
10000 10000
8000 8000
7000 7000
4000 4000
BD, BG, BJ, BK 25–30 600Y 1, 2, 3, 4
3000 3000
1500 1500
1000 1000
900 900
800 800
700 700
600 600
500 500
400 400
300 300
200 200
10000
150 150
1000
1500
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
7000
8000
9000
150
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 70
40 40
30
20
30
20
E
15 15
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
Time in seconds
4 4
3 3
2 2
1.5 1.5
1 1
.9 .9
.8 .8
.7 .7
.6 .6
.5 .5
.4 .4
.3
30 A .3
.2 25A .2
.15 .15
.1 .1
.09 .09
.08 .08
.07 .07
.06 .06
.05 .05
.04 .04
(at 50 Hz) (at 60 Hz)
.03 .03
1 cycle
.02 .02
1 cycle (50 Hz)
.015 (60 Hz) .015
1/2 cycle
.01
.009
1/2 cycle (50 Hz)
.01
.009
.008 .008
.007 (60 Hz) .007
.006 .006
.005 .005
1.5
10
8000
9000
10000
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
150
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
1500
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
7000
1
4
5
6
7
8
9
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9

25
30


DB421596.eps
100
1.5
10
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
1
4
5
6
7
8
9
10000 10000 BD, BG, BJ MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
8000 8000
7000 7000
6000 6000
CIRCUIT BREAKER INFORMATION
5000 5000
Circuit Breaker Continuous Maximum Number
4000 4000 Prefix Ampere Rating AC Voltage of Poles
BD, BG, BJ 35–50 600Y 1, 2, 3, 4
3000 3000
2000 2000
during coordination studies.
1500 1500 All time/current characteristic curve data is based on 40°C ambient cold start.
1000 1000
900 900
800 800
700 700
600 600
500 500
400 400
300 300
200 200
150 150
10000
1000
1500
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
7000
8000
9000
150
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 70
60
Maximum single-pole trip times 60
40 40
E
30 30
20 20
15 15
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5
Time in seconds
5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1.5 1.5
1 1
.9 .9
.8 .8
.7 .7
.6 .6
.5 .5
.4 .4
.3 45 A, 50 A .3
.2 40 A .2
.15 .15
35 A
.1 .1
.09 .09
.08 .08
.07 .07
.06 .06
.05 .05
.04 Maximum clearing time .04
.03
(at 50 Hz) (at 60 Hz) .03
.02 1 cycle .02

1 cycle
.015 (50 Hz) .015
(60 Hz)
.01
.009
1/2 cycle .01
.009
.008 1/2 cycle .008
.007
(50 Hz) .007
.006
(60 Hz) .006
.005 .005
1
4
5
6
7
8
9
1.5
10
8000
9000
10000
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
150
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
1500
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
7000

45 35
50 40


DB421597.eps
100
1.5
10
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
1
4
5
6
7
8
9
10000 10000 BD, BG, BJ MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
8000 8000
7000 7000
6000 6000
5000 5000
Circuit Breaker Continuous Maximum Number
4000 4000 Prefix Ampere Rating AC Voltage of Poles
BD, BG, BJ 60–100 600Y 1, 2, 3, 4
3000 3000
2000 2000
1500 1500 All time/current characteristic curve data is based on 40°C ambient cold start.
1000 1000
900 900
800 800
700 700
600 600
500 500
400 400
300 300
Maximum single-pole trip times
at 25c based on nema ab-4 2009
200 200
150 150
10000
1000
1500
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
7000
8000
9000
150
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 70
60 60
50 50
40 40
E
30 30
20 20
15 15
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
Time in seconds
4 4
3 3
2 2
1.5 1.5
1 1
.9 .9
.8 .8
.7 .7
.6 .6
.5 .5
.4 .4
.3 .3
.2
70 A, 80 A, 100 A .2
.15 60 A .15
.1 90 A .1
.09 .09
.08 .08
.07 .07
.06 .06
.05 .05
.04 .04
(at 50 Hz) (at 60 Hz)
.03 .03
1 cycle
.02 .02
1 cycle (50 Hz)
.015 (60 Hz) .015
1/2 cycle
.01 .01
.009 1/2 cycle (50 Hz) .009
.008 .008
.007 (60 Hz) .007
.006 .006
.005 .005
1.5
10
8000
9000
10000
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
150
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
1500
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
7000
1
4
5
6
7
8
9
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9

90 70
100 80 60


DB421598.eps
100
1.5
10
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
1
4
5
6
7
8
9
10000 10000
BD, BG, BJ MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
8000 8000
7000 7000
4000 4000
BD, BG, BJ 110–125 600Y 1, 2, 3, 4
3000 3000
1500 1500
1000 1000
900 900
800 800
700 700
600 600
500 500
400 400
at 25c based on nema ab-4 2009

200 200
10000
150 150
1000
1500
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
7000
8000
9000
150
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 70
60 60
50 50
40 40
E 30
20
30
20
15 15
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
Time in seconds
4 4
3 3
2 2
1.5 1.5
1 1
.9 .9
.8 .8
.7 .7
.6 .6
.5 125 A .5
.4 .4
110 A
.3 .3
.2 .2
.15 .15
.1 .1
.09 .09
.08 .08
.07 .07
.06 .06
.05 .05
.04 .04
(at 50 Hz) (at 60 Hz)
.03 .03
1 cycle
.02 .02
1 cycle (50 Hz)
.015 (60 Hz) .015
1/2 cycle
.01
.009
1/2 cycle (50 Hz)
.01
.009
.008 .008
.007 (60 Hz) .007
.006 .006
.005 .005
1.5
10
8000
9000
10000
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
150
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
1500
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
7000
1
4
5
6
7
8
9
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9

110
125

PowerPact Multistandard thermal-magnetic trip
circuit breakers
B-Frame 125 A
I²t
DB421646.eps
.9
.8
*Based on typical values obtained throughout the circuit breaker development and UL test programs.
.7
Typical* Let-Through I²t (Amperes² Seconds x 106)
.6 600 Y / 347 V
J
J
.5 G 480 V
G
D
.4 D
.3
J
240 V
G
D
.2
E
.1
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 200
Available Short Circuit Current (RMS Symmetrical Amperes x 103)

PowerPact Multistandard thermal-magnetic trip
circuit breakers
B-Frame 125 A
Ip
DB421647.eps
60
Maximum available peak current

50
at 15% Power Factory
40
Typical* Peak Let-Through Current (Amperes x 103)
30 Maximum available peak current

at 25% Power Factory
480 V
J
20
J
600 Y / 347 V 240 V
J G G
D D
D
10
E 7
6
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 200

Distribution system
Plates for mounting on busbars Short-circuit withstand capability
Determining the spacing between busbar supports

(LA9ZX01495 and LA9ZX01485), according to Short-circuit strength diagram according
IEC 60439-1 [1] to UL845 (LA9ZX01508)
80 30
DB421608.eps
DB421609.eps
70 25
30 x 5, 10
60 20
12, 20 x 5,
30 x 10 12, 20 x 10
kÂ 50 kÂ 15
30 x 5
12 x 10
40 and 20 x 10 10
12 x 5
30 and 5
15 x 5,
20 x 5,
25 x 5
20 20
200 300 400 500 600 200 300 400 500 600
Spacing between Spacing between
busbar supports (mm) busbar supports (mm)
[1] Depending on the short-circuit current.
Load resistance of busbar assemblies in IEC applications E

For an ambient temperature of 35 °C and a busbar temperature of 65 °C
Cross section mm2 12 x 5 15 x 5 20 x 5 25 x 5 30 x 5 12 x 10 20 x 10 30 x 10
Permissible current A 200 250 320 400 450 360 520 630
In the event of changes in climatic conditions, the following curve indicates the correction factor K2 to be applied.
2.2
DB421610.eps
0 Example: In normal operating conditions, a tinned

2.1 5 busbar of 30 x 10 can permanently withstand 630 A.
10
2.0 15
20 For a load of 800 A, the correction factor K2 to be
1.9 25 applied will be 1.3 (800/630). As a result, the
30 ° C temperature rise in the busbars will reach 82.5 °C.
1.8 Ambient
35 temperature
1.7 40
45
1.6 50
55
1.5
60
1.4 65
1.3
Factor K2
1.2
1.1
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 125
Busbar temperature (° C)


Catalogue numbers
Circuit Breakers.................................................................................F-2
Electrical accessories........................................................................F-6
Connection accessories....................................................................F-7
Insulation accessories and rotary handles.......................................F-8
Locking and sealing accessories......................................................F-9
Other chapters
Dimensions.................................................................................................C-1
Glossary.....................................................................................................G-1
Multistandard protection catalogue - 02/2017 Life is On | Schneider Electric F-1

Catalogue numbers
Circuit Breakers
PowerPact B-Frame 125 A unit-mount thermal-magnetic circuit breakers (277 V AC) single phase rated
With factory sealed trip unit (suitable for reverse connection)
B-Frame, 125 A, 1P, 277 V AC 50/60 Hz with EverLink™ connectors
Current rating Fixed AC Interrupting rating
DB419294.eps
at 40 °C (A) magnetic trip (A) Standard (80 %) rated

Hold Trip D - 18 kA G - 35 kA J - 65 kA
15 400 600 BDL16015 BGL16015 BJL16015
OFF 20 400 600 BDL16020 BGL16020 BJL16020
25 400 600 BDL16025 BGL16025 BJL16025
30 400 600 BDL16030 BGL16030 BJL16030
35 400 600 BDL16035 BGL16035 BJL16035
40 400 600 BDL16040 BGL16040 BJL16040
45 400 600 BDL16045 BGL16045 BJL16045
50 480 720 BDL16050 BGL16050 BJL16050
60 640 960 BDL16060 BGL16060 BJL16060
70 640 960 BDL16070 BGL16070 BJL16070
80 800 1200 BDL16080 BGL16080 BJL16080
90 1000 1500 BDL16090 BGL16090 BJL16090
100 1000 1500 BDL16100 BGL16100 BJL16100
110 1000 1500 BDL16110 BGL16110 BJL16110
125 1000 1500 BDL16125 BGL16125 BJL16125
B-Frame, 125 A, 1P, 277 V AC 50/60 Hz with compression lug/busbar connectors

DB419661.eps

15 400 600 BDF16015 BGF16015 BJF16015
OFF 20 400 600 BDF16020 BGF16020 BJF16020
25 400 600 BDF16025 BGF16025 BJF16025
30 400 600 BDF16030 BGF16030 BJF16030
F 35
40
400
400
600
600
BDF16035
BDF16040
BGF16035
BGF16040
BJF16035
BJF16040
45 400 600 BDF16045 BGF16045 BJF16045
50 480 720 BDF16050 BGF16050 BJF16050
60 640 960 BDF16060 BGF16060 BJF16060
70 640 960 BDF16070 BGF16070 BJF16070
80 800 1200 BDF16080 BGF16080 BJF16080
90 1000 1500 BDF16090 BGF16090 BJF16090
100 1000 1500 BDF16100 BGF16100 BJF16100
110 1000 1500 BDF16110 BGF16110 BJF16110
125 1000 1500 BDF16125 BGF16125 BJF16125
F-2 Life is On | Schneider Electric Multistandard protection catalogue - 02/2017

Catalogue numbers
Circuit Breakers
PowerPact B-Frame 125 A unit-mount thermal-magnetic circuit breakers (480 V AC) Delta rated
DB419295.eps
em
tion syst
Connec
OF
OFF
15 400 600 BDL26015LU BGL26015LU BJL26015LU
nection
Con
syst

em


DB419662.eps

Connec
tion syst
em
15 400 600 BDF26015 BGF26015 BJF26015
OF
OFF
20 400 600 BDF26020 BGF26020 BJF26020
25 400 600 BDF26025 BGF26025 BJF26025
30 400 600 BDF26030 BGF26030 BJF26030
35 400 600 BDF26035 BGF26035 BJF26035
F
Con
nection
syst
em
40 400 600 BDF26040 BGF26040 BJF26040

45 400 600 BDF26045 BGF26045 BJF26045
50 480 720 BDF26050 BGF26050 BJF26050
60 640 960 BDF26060 BGF26060 BJF26060
70 640 960 BDF26070 BGF26070 BJF26070
80 800 1200 BDF26080 BGF26080 BJF26080
90 1000 1500 BDF26090 BGF26090 BJF26090
100 1000 1500 BDF26100 BGF26100 BJF26100
110 1000 1500 BDF26110 BGF26110 BJF26110
125 1000 1500 BDF26125 BGF26125 BJF26125

Catalogue numbers
Circuit Breakers
DB418789.eps

Everl
em
syst
nection
Con
SD

OF
OFF
em
syst
nection
Con

DB419660.eps

Con
nection
syst
em
SD
15 400 600 BDF36015 BGF36015 BJF36015

OF
20 400 600 BDF36020 BGF36020 BJF36020

25 400 600 BDF36025 BGF36025 BJF36025
30 400 600 BDF36030 BGF36030 BJF36030
F
Con
nection
35 400 600 BDF36035 BGF36035 BJF36035

syst
em
40 400 600 BDF36040 BGF36040 BJF36040

45 400 600 BDF36045 BGF36045 BJF36045
50 480 720 BDF36050 BGF36050 BJF36050
60 640 960 BDF36060 BGF36060 BJF36060
70 640 960 BDF36070 BGF36070 BJF36070
80 800 1200 BDF36080 BGF36080 BJF36080
90 1000 1500 BDF36090 BGF36090 BJF36090
100 1000 1500 BDF36100 BGF36100 BJF36100
110 1000 1500 BDF36110 BGF36110 BJF36110
125 1000 1500 BDF36125 BGF36125 BJF36125

Catalogue numbers
Circuit Breakers
DB419296.eps
Everl at 40 °C (A) magnetic trip (A) Standard (80 %) rated

nection
syst
em
SD
Con

OF
OFF

syst
nection
Con
em


DB419663.eps

nection
syst
em
SD
Con
15 400 600 BDF46015 BGF46015 BJF46015

OF
20 400 600 BDF46020 BGF46020 BJF46020

OFF
25 400 600 BDF46025 BGF46025 BJF46025

30 400 600 BDF46030 BGF46030 BJF46030
F
Con
35 400 600 BDF46035 BGF46035 BJF46035

nection
syst
em
40 400 600 BDF46040 BGF46040 BJF46040

45 400 600 BDF46045 BGF46045 BJF46045
50 480 720 BDF46050 BGF46050 BJF46050
60 640 960 BDF46060 BGF46060 BJF46060
70 640 960 BDF46070 BGF46070 BJF46070
80 800 1200 BDF46080 BGF46080 BJF46080
90 1000 1500 BDF46090 BGF46090 BJF46090
100 1000 1500 BDF46100 BGF46100 BJF46100
110 1000 1500 BDF46110 BGF46110 BJF46110
125 1000 1500 BDF46125 BGF46125 BJF46125

Catalogue numbers
Electrical accessories
Auxiliary contacts (changeover)
Standard OF or SD LV426950
DB418804.eps
Pre-wired OF [1] LV426951

DB418805.eps
Pre-wired SD [1] LV426952
Voltage releases
Standard Voltage MX MN
DB418808.eps
AC 24 V 50/60 Hz LV426841 LV426801

48 V 50/60 Hz LV426842 LV426802
110...130 V 50/60 Hz LV426843 LV426803
220...240 V 50 Hz LV426844 LV426804
208...240 V 60 Hz
277 V 60 Hz LV426844 LV426805
380...415 V 50 Hz LV426846 LV426806
440...480 V 60 Hz LV426846 LV426807
DC 24 V DC LV426841 LV426801
48 V DC LV426842 LV426802
125 V DC LV426843 LV426803
250 V DC LV426844 LV426815
Pre-wired [1] Voltage MX MN
DB418809.eps
AC 24 V 50/60 Hz LV426861 LV426821

48 V 50/60 Hz LV426862 LV426822
110...130 V 50/60 Hz LV426863 LV426823
220...240 V 50 Hz LV426864 LV426824
208...240 V 60 Hz
F 277 V 60 Hz
380...415 V 50 Hz
LV426864
LV426866
LV426825
LV426826
440...480 V 60 Hz LV426866 LV426827
DC 24 V DC LV426861 LV426821
48 V DC LV426862 LV426822
125 V DC LV426863 LV426823
250 V DC LV426864 LV426835
Time delay unit for undervoltage release (MN)

MN 48 V 50/60 Hz with fixed time delay
DB421893.eps
Composed of: MN 48 V DC LV426802

Delay unit 48 V 50/60 Hz LV429426
MN 220-240 V 50/60 Hz with fixed time delay
Delay unit 220-240 V 50/60 Hz LV429427
MN 48 V DC/AC 50/60 Hz with adjustable time delay
Delay unit 48 V DC/AC 50/60 Hz 33680
MN 110-130 V DC/AC 50/60 Hz with adjustable time delay
Delay unit 100-130 V DC/AC 50/60 Hz 33681
MN 220-250 V DC/AC 50/60 Hz with adjustable time delay
Delay unit 200-250 V DC/AC 50-60 Hz 33682
[1] Cable: 1 meter long - AWG 18 - 480 V UL certified.

Catalogue numbers
Connection accessories
Connection accessories
EverLink lug connectors
For 1 pole LV426972
DB418794.eps
For 2 poles with control wire terminal LV426973

l
Ever

Compression lug / busbar connection kits Qty per kit
B-Frame terminal nut insert-metric with screws (BD/BG/BJ) M6 2 LV426962
DB418791.eps
3 LV426963
Mechanical lug connection kits Qty per kit

Al lugs for use with Al or Cu wires (BD/BG/BJ) 2.5 - 70 mm² 2 LV426966
DB418793.eps
(14 - 2/0 AWG) 3 LV426967
Al lugs for 3 cables with 2 interphase barriers [*] 2.5 - 35 mm² 3 PDC3BD2
DB419664.eps
(#14 - #2 AWG)
Al lugs for 6 cables with 2 interphase barriers [*] 2.5 - 16 mm² 3 PDC6BD6
DB419665.eps
(#14 - #6 AWG)
Copper crimp lugs for copper cables Qty per kit

For cable 70² solid/stranded / 50² fine stranded [1] 3 LV426978
DB418795.eps
4 LV426979
F
For cable 6 - 1/0 AWG 2 LV426986
DB418798.eps
3 LV426987
Aluminum crimp lugs for copper or aluminum cables Qty per kit
For cable 8 - 1/0 AWG 2 LV426988
DB418798.eps
3 LV426989
Terminal extensions
Spreaders from 27 to 35 mm pitch [1] 3 poles 1 set LV426940
DB418861.eps
4 poles 1 set LV426941
Torque limiting breakaway bits Qty per kit

9 N.m - Green 6 LV426990
DB418799.eps
8 LV426991
5 N.m - Yellow 6 LV426992
8 LV426993
[1] Supplied with 2 or 3 interphase barriers.
*
[ ] Available Q3 2017.

Catalogue numbers
Insulation accessories and rotary handles
Insulation accessories
Long terminal shields
Used with compression lug / busbar connectors or mechanical lugs Qty per kit
DB418801.eps
Long terminal shield IP40 2 poles 1 LV426911

3 poles 1 LV426912
4 poles 1 LV426913
Interphase barriers
Used with compression lug / busbar connectors or mechanical lugs
DB419666.eps
Interphase barriers 6 LV426920
Rear insulation screen

Rear insulation screen 2 poles 2 LV426921
DB419667.eps
3 poles 2 LV426922
4 poles 2 LV426923
Rotary handles
Direct
Standard black handle LV426930
DB418802.eps
Red handle on yellow bezel LV426931
Door mounted
F Standard black handle IP54 LV426932
DB421601.eps
Red handle on yellow bezel IP54 LV426933

Open door shaft operator LV426937

DB421894.eps
Laser tool GVAPL01

DB421895.eps
Side mounted
Standard black handle IP54 LV426935
DB421602.eps
Universal handle
Black handle IP54 LV426997
DB421896.eps
Red handle on yellow font IP54 LV426998

Red handle on yellow font IP65 LV426999

Catalogue numbers
Locking and sealing accessories
Locking systems
Handle padlocking device [1] Removable (lock OFF only) 29370
DB418803.eps
Fixed (lock OFF or ON) LV426905

DB419875.eps
Fixed (lock OFF only) LV426906

DB421603.eps
Sealing accessories
Bag of accessories LV429375
DB419668.eps
[1] Rotary handle has integral padlocking capability.

Catalogue numbers

Glossary
Accessories .............................................................................. G-2

Circuit breaker characteristics (IEC 60947-2).............. G-2
Components.............................................................................. G-4
Controls....................................................................................... G-5
Discrimination / Cascading.................................................. G-5
Environment.............................................................................. G-6
Harmonics.................................................................................. G-7
Measurements.......................................................................... G-7
Protection................................................................................... G-8
Relays and auxiliary contacts............................................. G-8
Switchgear ................................................................................ G-8
Trip units..................................................................................... G-9
Other chapters
Dimensions.................................................................................................C-1
Multistandard protection catalogue - 02/2017 Life is On | Schneider Electric G-1

Glossary
For each major section (Accessories, Switchgear, etc.) and for each item (Adapter
for plug-in base, Connection terminal, etc.), this glossary provides:
b the reference standard
b the standardised IEC symbol
b the definition.
Text in quotation marks is drawn from the standards.
Accessories .........................................................................................
Bare-cable connector Conducting part of the circuit breaker intended for connection to power circuits.
On PowerPact, you can use Everlink lug or an aluminum part that screws to the
connection terminals of the circuit breaker. There are one or more holes (single or
multiple cable connector) for the ends of bare cables.
Connection terminals Flat copper surface, linked to the conducting parts of the circuit breaker and to
which power connections are made using bars, connectors or lugs.
Spreaders Set of three (3P device) or four (4P device) flat, conducting parts made of copper.
They are screwed to the circuit breaker terminals to increase the pitch between
poles.
Circuit breaker characteristics (IEC 60947-2)..............................

Breaking capacity Value of prospective current that a switching device is capable of breaking at a
stated voltage under prescribed conditions of use and behaviour. Reference is
generally made to the ultimate breaking capacity (Icu) and the service breaking
capacity (Ics).
Degree of protection (IP) Defines device protection against the penetration of solid objects and liquids, using
IEC 60529 two digits specified in standard IEC 60259. Each digit corresponds to a level of
protection, where 0 indicates no protection.
bb First digit (0 to 6): protection against penetration of solid foreign objects.
1 corresponds to protection against objects with a diameter > 50 mm, 6
corresponds to total protection against dust.
bb Second digit (0 to 8): protection against penetration of liquids (water).
1 corresponds to protection against falling drops of water (condensation),
8 corresponds to continuous immersion.
The enclosure of PowerPact circuit breakers provides a minimum of IP40
(protection against objects > 1 mm) and can reach IP56 (protection against dust
G and powerful water jets) depending on the installation conditions.
Degree of protection against Defines the aptitude of an object to resist mechanical impacts on all sides,
external mechanical impacts (IK) indicated by a number from 0 to 10 (standard IEC 62262). Each number
corresponds to the impact energy (in Joules) that the object can handle according
to a standardised procedure.
0 corresponds to no protection, 1 to an impact energy of 0.14 Joules, 10 to an
impact energy of 20 Joules. PowerPact provide IK07 (2 Joules) and can provide
IK08
(5 Joules) depending on the installation conditions.
Durability The term "durability" is used in the standards instead of "endurance" to express
IEC 60947-1 the expectancy of the number of operating cycles which can be performed by the
equipment before repair or replacement of parts. The term "endurance" is used for
specifically defined operational performance.
Electrical durability With respect to its resistance to electrical wear, equipment is characterised by the
IEC 60947-1 number of loaded operating cycles, corresponding to the service conditions given
in the relevant product standard, which can be made without replacement.
Frame size "A term designating a group of circuit breakers, the external physical dimensions
of which are common to a range of current ratings. Frame size is expressed in
amperes corresponding to the highest current rating of the group. Within a frame
size, the width may vary according to the number of poles. This definition does not
imply dimensional standardization."
PowerPact has four frame sizes covering 125 A, 150 A, 250 A and 600 A.
G-2 Life is On | Schneider Electric Multistandard protection catalogue - 02/2017

Glossary
Insulation class Defines the type of device insulation in terms of earthing and the corresponding
safety for the user, in one of three classes.
bb Class I. The device is earthed. Any electrical faults, internal or external, or caused
by the load, are cleared via the earthing circuit, thus ensuring user safety.
bb Class II. The device is not connected to a protective conductor. User safety is
ensured by reinforced insulation around the live parts (an insulating case and no
contact with live parts, i.e. plastic buttons, molded connections, etc.) or double
insulation.
bb Class III. The device may be connected only to SELV (safety extra-low voltage)
circuits.
The PowerPact are class II devices (front) and may be installed through the door
in class II switchboards (standards IEC 61140 and IEC 60664-1), without reducing
insulation, even with a rotary handle or motor mechanism module.
Making capacity Value of prospective making current that a switching device is capable of making
at a stated voltage under prescribed conditions of use and behaviour. Reference is
generally made to the short-circuit making capacity Icm.
Maximum break time Maximum time after which breaking is effective, i.e. the contacts separated and the
current completely interrupted.
Mechanical durability With respect to its resistance to mechanical wear, equipment is characterised by
IEC 947-1 the number of no-load operating cycles which can be effected before it becomes
necessary to service or replace any mechanical parts.
Non-tripping time This is the minimum time during which the protective device does not operate
in spite of pick-up overrun, if the duration of the overrun does not exceed the
corresponding voluntary time delay.
Pollution degree "Conventional number based on the amount of conductive or hygroscopic dust,
of environment conditions ionized gas or salt and on the relative humidity and its frequency of occurrence,
IEC 60947-1 resulting in hygroscopic absorption or condensation of moisture leading to
reduction in dielectric strength and/or surface resistivity". Standard IEC 60947-1
IEC 60664-1
distinguishes four pollution degrees.
bb Degree 1. No pollution or only dry, non-conductive pollution occurs.
bb Degree 2. Normally, only non-conductive pollution occurs. Occasionally, however,
a temporary conductivity caused by condensation may be expected.
bb Degree 3. Conductive pollution occurs, or dry, non-conductive pollution occurs
which becomes conductive due to condensation.
bb Degree 4. The pollution generates persistent conductivity caused, for instance, by
conductive dust or by rain or snow.
PowerPact meets degree 3, which corresponds to industrial applications.
Prospective short-circuit current Current that would flow through the poles if they remained fully closed during the
G
short-circuit.
Rated current (In) This is the current that the device has been certified to carry continuously within all
parameters described by the standard.
Rated impulse withstand voltage "The peak value of an impulse voltage of prescribed form and polarity which the
(Uimp) equipment is capable of withstanding without failure under specified conditions
of test and to which the values of the clearances are referred. The rated impulse
withstand voltage of an equipment shall be equal to or higher than the values
stated for the transient overvoltages occurring in the circuit in which the equipment
is fitted".
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) "The rated insulation voltage of an equipment is the value of voltage to which
dielectric tests and creepage distances are referred. In no case shall the maximum
value of the rated operational voltage exceed that of the rated insulation voltage".
Rated operational current (Ie) "A rated operational current of an equipment is stated by the manufacturer and
takes into account the rated operational voltage, the rated frequency, the rated
duty, the utilization category and the type of protective enclosure, if appropriate".
Rated operational voltage (Ue) "A value of voltage which, combined with a rated operational current, determines
the application of the equipment and to which the relevant tests and the utilisation
categories are referred. For multipole equipment, it is generally stated as the
voltage between phases".
This is the maximum continuous voltage at which the equipment may be used.

Glossary
Rated short-time withstand current "Value of short-time withstand current, assigned to the equipment by the
(Icw) manufacturer, that the equipment can carry without damage, under the test
conditions specified in the relevant product standard". Generally expressed in kA
for 0.5, 1 or 3 seconds. This is an essential characteristic for air circuit breakers. It
is not significant for molded-case circuit breakers for which the design targets fast
opening and high limiting capacity.
Service breaking capacity (Ics) Expressed as a percentage of Icu, it provides an indication on the robustness of
the device under severe conditions. It is confirmed by a test with one opening and
one closing/opening at Ics, followed by a check that the device operates correctly
at its rated current, i.e. 50 cycles at In, where temperature rise remains within
tolerances and the protection system suffers no damage.
Short-circuit making capacity (Icm) Value indicating the capacity of the device to make and carry a high current without
repulsion of the contacts. It is expressed in kA peak.
Suitability for isolation This capability means that the circuit breaker meets the conditions below.
bb In the open position, it must withstand, without flashover between the upstream
and downstream contacts, the impulse voltage specified by the standard as a
function of the Uimp indicated on the device.
bb It must indicate contact position by one or more of the following systems:
vv position of the operating handle
vv separate mechanical indicator
vv visible break of the moving contacts
bb Leakage current between each pole, with the contacts open, at a test voltage of
1.1 x the rated operating voltage, must not exceed:
vv 0.5 mA per pole for new devices
vv 2 mA per pole for devices already subjected to normal switching operations
vv 6 mA, the maximum value that must never be exceeded.
bb It must not be possible to install padlocks unless the contacts are open. Locking in
the closed position is permissible for special applications. PowerPact complies with
this requirement by positive contact indication.
Suitable for isolation with positive Suitability for isolation is defined here by the mechanical reliability of the position
contact indication indicator of the operating mechanism, where:
(see also Suitability for isolation, bb the isolation position corresponds to the O (OFF) position
bb the operating handle cannot indicate the "OFF" position unless the contacts are
page G2)
effectively open.
The other conditions for isolation must all be fulfilled:
bb locking in the open position is possible only if the contacts are effectively open
bb leakage currents are below the standardised limits
bb overvoltage impulse withstand between upstream and downstream connections.
G Ultimate breaking capacity (Icu) Expressed in kA, it indicates the maximum breaking capacity of the circuit breaker.
It is confirmed by a test with one opening and one closing/opening at Icu, followed
by a check that the circuit is properly isolated. This test ensures user safety.
Components..........................................................................................
ASIC (Application Specific Integrated Integrated circuit designed, built and intended for a specific application. It carries
Circuit) out repetitive sequences of instructions engraved in the silicon chip. For that
reason, it is extremely reliable because it cannot be modified and is not affected by
environment conditions.
Micrologic trip units use an ASIC for the protection functions. The ASIC cyclically
polls the network status at a high frequency, using the values supplied by captors.
Comparison with the settings forms the basis for orders to the electronic trip units.
Microprocessor A microprocessor is a more general purpose device than an ASIC. In Micrologic, a

microprocessor is used for measurements and it can be programmed. It is not used
for the main protection functions that are carried out by the ASIC.

Glossary
Controls..................................................................................................
CNOMO machine-tool rotary handle Handle used for machine-tool control enclosures and providing IP54 and IK08.
Direct rotary handle This is an optional control handle for the circuit breaker. It has the same three
positions I (ON), O (OFF) and TRIPPED as the toggle control. It provides IP40,
IK07 and the possibility, due to its extended travel, of using early-make and early-
break contacts. It maintains suitability for isolation and offers optional locking using
a keylock or a padlock.
Emergency off In a circuit equipped with a circuit breaker, this function is carried out by an opening
mechanism using an MN undervoltage release or an MX shunt trip in conjunction
with an emergency off button.
Extended rotary handle Rotary handle with an extended shaft to control devices installed at the rear of
switchboards or control panels. It has the same characteristics as direct rotary
handles. It offers multiple locking possibilities using a padlock or a door interlock.
Side rotary handle Rotary handle with a side shaft to control devices installed in the switchboards.
It has the same characteristics as direct rotary handles. It offers multiple locking
possibilities using a padlock.
Failsafe remote tripping Remote tripping is carried out by an opening mechanism using an MN
undervoltage release in conjunction with an emergency off button. If power is lost,
the protection device opens the circuit breaker.
Discrimination / Cascading...............................................................
Cascading /Series Ratings Cascading implements the current-limiting capacity of a circuit breaker, making it
possible to install downstream circuit breakers with lower performance levels.
The upstream circuit breaker reduces any high short-circuit currents. This makes
it possible to install downstream circuit breakers with breaking capacities less than
the prospective short-circuit current at their point of installation.
The main advantage of cascading is to reduce the overall cost of electrical
distribution equipment.
Because the current is limited throughout the circuit downstream of the limiting
circuit breaker, cascading applies to all the devices located downstream.
Current discrimination Discrimination based on the difference between the current-protection settings
of the circuit breakers. The difference in settings between two successive circuit
G
breakers in a circuit must be sufficient to allow the downstream breaker to clear
the fault before the upstream breaker trips.
Discrimination Discrimination is ensured between upstream and downstream circuit breakers if,
when a fault occurs, only the circuit breaker placed immediately upstream of the
fault trips.
Discrimination is the key to ensuring the continuity of service of an installation.
Energy discrimination This function is specific to PowerPact and supplements the other types of
discrimination.
Partial discrimination Discrimination is partial if the conditions for total discrimination are not met up to
the ultimate short-circuit current Icu, but only up to a lesser value. This value is
called the discrimination limit. If a fault exceeds the discrimination limit, both circuit
breakers trip.
Time discrimination Discrimination based on the difference between the time-delay settings of the
circuit breakers. The upstream trip unit is delayed to provide the downstream
breaker the time required to clear the fault.
Total discrimination Total discrimination is ensured between upstream and downstream circuit
breakers if, for all fault values, from overloads up to solid short-circuits, only the
downstream circuit breaker trips and the upstream circuit breaker remains closed.

Glossary
Environment...........................................................................................
EMC (Electromagnetic EMC is the capacity of a device not to disturb its environment during operation
compatibility) (emitted electromagnetic disturbances) and to operate in a disturbed environment
(electromagnetic disturbances affecting the device). The standards define various
classes for the types of disturbances. Micrologic trip units comply with annexes F
and J in standard IEC IE60947-2.
Power loss The flow of current through the Circuit breaker poles produces Joule-effect losses
Pole resistance caused by the resistance of the poles.
Product environmental profile An assessment on the impact of the construction and use of a product on
(PEP) the environment, in compliance with standard ISO 14040, Environmental
LCA: Life-cycle assessment management, life-cycle assessment (LCA), principles and framework.
For PowerPact, this assessment is carried out using the standardised EIME
ISO 14040
(Environmental Impact and Management Explorer) software, which makes
possible comparisons between the products of different manufacturers.
It includes all stages, i.e. manufacture, distribution, use and end of life, with set
usage assumptions:
bb use over 20 years at a percent load of 80 % for 14 hours per day and 20 % for ten
hours
bb according to the European electrical-energy model.
It provides the information presented below.
bb Materials making up the product: composition and proportions, with a check to
make sure no substances forbidden by the RoHS directive are included.
bb Manufacture: on Schneider Electric production sites that have set up an
environmental management system certified ISO 14001.
bb Distribution: packaging in compliance with the 94/62/EC packaging directive
(optimised volumes and weights) and optimised distribution flows via local centres.
bb Use: no aspects requiring special precautions for use. Power lost through Joule
effect in Watts (W) must be < 0.02 % of total power flowing through the circuit
breaker. Based on the above assumptions, annual consumption from 95 to 200
kWh.
bb End of life: products dismantled or crushed. For PowerPact, 81 % of materials
can be recycled using standard recycling techniques. Less than 2 % of total weight
requires special recycling.
Product environmental profile Environmental indicators are also frequently used for the PEP (sheet available on
(PEP) request for PowerPact):
bb Depletion of natural resources
G Environmental indicators
bb Depletion of energy
bb Depletion of water
bb Potential for atmospheric warming (greenhouse effect)
bb Potential for stratospheric ozone depletion
bb Creation of atmospheric ozone (ozone layer)
bb Acidification of air (acid rain)
bb Production of hazardous waste.
RoHS directive European directive 2002/95/EC dated 27 January 2003 aimed at reducing or
(Restriction of Hazardous substances) eliminating the use of hazardous substances. The manufacturer must attest to
compliance, without third-party certification. Circuit breakers are not included in
the list of concerned products, which are essentially consumer products.
That not withstanding, Schneider Electric decided to comply with the RoHS
directive.
PowerPact products are designed in compliance with RoHS and do not contain
(above the authorised levels) lead, mercury, cadmium, hexavalent chromium or
flame retardants (polybrominated biphenyls PBB and polybrominated diphenyl
ether PBDE).
Safety clearances When installing a circuit breaker, minimum distances (safety clearances) must be
maintained between the device and panels, bars and other protection systems
installed nearby. These distances, which depend on the ultimate breaking
capacity, are defined by tests carried out in accordance with standard IEC 60947-
2.

Glossary
Temperature derating An ambient temperature varying significantly from 40 °C can modify operation of
magnetic or thermal-magnetic protection functions. It does not affect electronic trip
units. However, when electronic trip units are used in high-temperature situations,
it is necessary to check the settings to ensure that only the permissible current for
the given ambient temperature is let through.
Vibration withstand Circuit breakers are tested in compliance with standard IEC 60068-2-6 for the
IEC 60068-2-6 levels required by merchant-marine inspection organisations (Veritas, Lloyd's,
etc.):
bb 2 to 13.2 Hz: amplitude of ±1 mm
bb 13.2 to 100 Hz: constant acceleration of 0.7 g.
WEEE directive European directive on managing the waste of electrical and electronic equipment.
(Waste of Electrical and Electronic Circuit breakers are not included in the list of concerned products.
Equipment) However, PowerPact products respect the WEEE directive.
Harmonics..............................................................................................
Current harmonics Non-linear loads cause harmonic currents that flow in the 50 Hz (or 60 Hz)
distribution system. Total harmonic current is the sum of sinusoidal AC currents for
which the rms values can be measured and broken down into:
bb the fundamental current at the 50/60 Hz frequency of the distribution system, with
an rms value of IH1
bb harmonic currents with whole, odd multiples (3, 5, 7, etc.) of the 50/60 Hz
frequency, called the third-order, fifth-order, etc. harmonics. For example, IH3, the
third-order harmonic at 150/180 Hz, IH5, the fifth-order harmonic at 250/300 Hz, etc.
The presence of harmonics in the system must be monitored and limited because
it results in temperature rise, currents in the neutral (caused by the third-order
harmonics and multiples), malfunctions of sensitive electronic devices, etc.
Micrologic E trip units take into account harmonics up to order 15 in the THDI and
THDU calculations.
Non-linear load Systems producing harmonics are present in all industrial, commercial and
residential sectors. Harmonics are caused by non-linear loads. A load is said to
be non-linear when the current drawn does not have the same waveform as the
supply voltage. Typically, loads using power electronics are non-linear.
Examples of non-linear loads include computers, rectifiers, variable-speed drives,
arc furnaces and fluorescent lighting.
Total harmonic distortion of current
(THDI)
THDI characterises the distortion of the current wave by harmonics.
It indicates the quantity of harmonics in the resulting waveform. It is expressed in
G
percent.
The higher the THDI, the more the current is distorted by harmonics.
THDI should remain below 10 %. Above that level, there is said to be harmonic
pollution that is considered severe when it rises above 50 %.
Total harmonic distortion of voltage THDU characterises the distortion of the voltage wave by harmonics.
(THDU) It indicates the quantity of harmonics in the resulting waveform. It is expressed in
percent.
The higher the THDU, the more the system voltage is distorted by harmonics. It is
advised not to exceed 5 % for low-voltage systems.
Voltage harmonics For each current harmonic IHk, there is a voltage harmonic UHk of the same order
k, where the resulting voltage is the sum of the two waves.
The voltage wave is therefore distorted with respect to the standard sinusoidal
wave.

Glossary
Measurements......................................................................................
Overvoltage category Standard IEC 60664-1 stipulates that it is up to the user to select a measurement
(OVC - Overvoltage category) device with a sufficient overvoltage category, depending on the network voltage
IEC 60947-1. Annex H and the transient overvoltages likely to occur.
Four overvoltage categories define the field of use for a device.
bb Cat. I. Devices supplied by a SELV isolating transformer or a battery.
bb Cat. II. Residential distribution, handheld or laboratory tools and devices
connected to standardised 2P + earth electrical outlets (230 V).
bb Cat. III. Industrial distribution, fixed distribution circuits in buildings (main low
voltage switchboards, rising mains, elevators, etc.).
bb Cat. IV. Utility substations, overhead lines, certain industrial equipment.
Protection...............................................................................................
Instantaneous protection I (Ii) This protection supplements Isd. It provokes instantaneous opening of the device.
The pick-up is fixed (built-in). This value is always lower than the contact-repulsion
level.
Long-time protection L (Ir) Protection function where the Ir pick-up determines a protection curve similar to the
thermal-protection curve (inverse-time curve I2t). The curve is generally determined
on the basis of the Ir setting which corresponds to a theoretically infinite tripping
time (asymptote) and of the point at 6 Ir at which the tripping time depends on the
rating.
Magnetic protection (Im) Short-circuit protection provided by magnetic trip units (see this term). The pick-up
setting may be fixed.
Neutral protection (IN) The neutral is protected because all Circuit breaker poles are interrupted. The
setting may be that used for the phases or specific to the neutral, i.e. reduced
neutral (0.5 times the phase current) or OSN (oversized neutral) at 1.6 times the
phase current. For OSN protection, the maximum device setting is limited to 0.63
In.
Thermal protection (Ir) Overload protection provided by thermal trip units (see this term) using an inverse-
time curve (I2t).
G Relays and auxiliary contacts...........................................................

Auxiliary contact "Contact included in an auxiliary circuit and mechanically operated by the
IEC 60947-1 switching device".
Break contact "Control or auxiliary contact which is open when the main contacts of the
IEC 60947-1 mechanical switching device are closed and closed when they are open".
Make contact "Control or auxiliary contact which is closed when the main contacts of the
IEC 60947-1 mechanical switching device are closed and open when they are open".
Relay (electrical) "Device designed to produce sudden, predetermined changes in one or more
IEC 60947-1 electrical output circuits when certain conditions are fulfilled in the electrical input
circuits controlling the device".
Relay module with static output Output of a relay made up of a thyristor or triac electronic component. The low
interrupting capacity means that a power relay is required. This is the case for the
SDx outputs.
Switchgear ............................................................................................
Circuit breaker "Mechanical switching device, capable of making, carrying and breaking currents
IEC 60947-2 under normal circuit conditions and also making, carrying for a specified time
and breaking currents under specified abnormal circuit conditions such as those
of short circuit". Circuit breakers are the device of choice for protection against
overloads and short-circuits. Circuit breakers may, as is the case for PowerPact,
be suitable for isolation.

Glossary
Circuit breaker utilisation category The standard defines two utilisation categories, A and B, depending on breaker
IEC 60947-2 discrimination with upstream breakers under short-circuit conditions.
bb Category A. Circuit breakers not specifically designed for discrimination
applications.
bb Category B. Circuit breakers specifically designed for discrimination, which
requires a short time-delay (which may be adjustable) and a rated short-time
withstand current in compliance with the standard.
PowerPact 125 to 600 circuit breakers are category A, however, by design,
they provide discrimination with downstream devices (see the Complementary
technical information guide).
Contactor "Mechanical switching device having only one position of rest, operated otherwise
IEC 60947-1 than by hand, capable of making, carrying and breaking currents under normal
circuit conditions including operating overload conditions". A contactor is
provided for frequent opening and closing of circuits under load or slight overload
conditions. It must be combined and coordinated with a protective device against
overloads and short-circuits, such as a circuit breaker.
Contactor utilisation categories The standard defines four utilisation categories, AC1, AC2, AC3 and AC4
IEC 60947-4-1 depending on the load and the control functions provided by the contactor. The
class depends on the current, voltage and power factor, as well as contactor
withstand capacity in terms of frequency of operation and endurance.
Current-limiting circuit breaker "A Circuit breaker with a break-time short enough to prevent the short-circuit
IEC 60947-2 current reaching its otherwise attainable peak value".
Disconnector "Mechanical switching device which, in the open position, complies with the
IEC 60947-3 requirements specified for the isolating function". A disconnector serves to isolate
upstream and downstream circuits. It is used to open or close circuits under
no-load conditions or with a negligible current level. It can carry the rated circuit
current and, for a specified time, the short-circuit current.
Trip units.................................................................................................
Magnetic release Release actuated by a coil or a lever. A major increase in the current (e.g. a short-
circuit) produces in the coil or the lever a change in the magnetic field that moves
a core. This trips the circuit breaker operating mechanism. Action is instantaneous.
The pick-up setting may be adjustable.
Reflex tripping PowerPact circuit breakers have a patented reflex-tripping system based on the
energy of the arc and that is independent of the other protection functions. It
operates extremely fast, before the other protection functions. It is an additional
safety function that operates before the others in the event of a very high short-
G
circuit.
Release Device, mechanically connected to a mechanical switching device (e.g. a circuit

IEC 60947-1 breaker), which releases the holding means and permits the opening or the
closing of the switching device. For circuit breakers, releases are often integrated
in a trip unit.
Shunt trip (MX) This type of release operates when supplied with current. The MX release
provokes Circuit breaker opening when it receives a pulse-type or maintained
command.
Thermal-magnetic trip unit Trip unit combining thermal protection for overloads and magnetic protection.
Thermal release Release in which a bimetal strip is heated by the Joule effect. Above a
temperature-rise threshold that is a function of the current and its duration (I2t
curve = constant, which is representative of temperature rise in cables), the
bimetal strip bends and releases the Circuit breaker opening mechanism. The
pick-up setting may be adjustable.
Undervoltage release (MN) This type of release operates when the supply voltage drops below the set
minimum.

PowerPact TM
Multistandard
PowerPact ™
Multistandard
The PowerPact Multistandard circuit breakers are designed to protect
electrical systems from damage caused by overloads and short
circuits. Multistandard circuit breakers are available with either
thermal-magnetic or Micrologic electronic trip units. L-frame circuit
breakers are available with Micrologic electronic trip unit.
Multistandard circuit breakers with thermal-magnetic trip units contain
individual thermal (overload) and instantaneous (short circuit) sensing
elements in each pole. The amperage ratings of the thermal trip
elements are calibrated at 104 °F (40 °C) free air ambient temperature.
Per the National Electric Code® (NEC®) and the Canadian Electrical
Code, standard circuit breakers may only be applied continuously at up
to 80 % of their rating. Circuit breakers rated for 100 % operation are
available but require specially-designed enclosures and 194 °F (90 °C)
rated wire.

Monitoring and
management
PowerPact is a single device, which contains a monitoring unit
to control energy consumption and power.
Integrated monitoring
> The new PowerPact range incorporates
-10 %
Monitoring consumption
Micrologic electronic trip units in the circuit can reduce energy costs
breaker, offering both: by as much as 10 %.
• an accurate power monitoring unit,
• a highly reliable protective device.
> A Micrologic electronic tripping device

combines next-generation sensors:
• an "iron" sensor for the power supply to
the electronics,
• an "air" sensor (Rogowski coils) for
measurement, guaranteeing high
accuracy.
> These electronic systems are designed

to withstand high temperatures (105 °C),
ensuring reliability under severe operating
conditions.
> The originality lies in how PowerPact

measures, processes and displays data,
either directly on screen, on the switchboard
front panel, or via a monitoring system.

Accessibility of information… …for power monitoring
To keep costs under control and ensure > Together with power monitoring software, the
service continuity, relevant information must be PowerPact Modbus communication interface
available in real time: provides operators with a parameter set and
> a kilowatt-hour meter helps optimise costs tools that make system monitoring very easy.
and their allocation, Supervision software
> Operators have real-time data to control
> harmonic distortion rate shows the quality of energy availability, to monitor power supply
electrical supply, quality, to optimise consumption of different
applications or zones, reducing load peaks and
> alarm notification secures operational control continuously supplying priority loads, and to
and maintenance planning, draw up maintenance schedules.
> event logs and tables, activated continuously, > A software utility (RSU) allows protection
ensure the installed equipment base operates and alarm configuration, in addition to testing
correctly, so energy efficiency is maximized. communications with all installed devices.
Measurement functions are controlled Protection functions are electronically An ASIC (Application-Specific
by an additional microprocessor. managed independently of measurement Integrated Circuit) is common
functions. to all trip units, which boosts
immunity to conducted
ASIC or radiated interference
and increases reliability.

PowerPact
Multistandard
Applications
PowerPact Multistandard circuit breakers offer high performance and a
wide range of interchangeable trip units to protect most applications.
Electronic trip units provide highly accurate protection with wide setting
ranges and can integrate measurement, metering and communication
functions.
They can be combined with the front display module (FDM) to provide
functions similar to a power meter.
With Micrologic circuit breakers

Direct access to energy management
The new generation PowerPact with Micrologic circuit breakers set the
standard with direct access to energy management.
Integrated metering enhances their protective functions.
For the first time, Schneider Electric users can monitor energy from 15 A to
600 A, offering new performance in a remarkably compact device.
> Smart - A meter in every breaker

> Safe - Combines safety and performance in one compact device
> Simple - Easy to select, install, and use.
Increased Safety and Energy

energy protection measurement
availability and control

Flexible configurations
The PowerPact Multistandard circuit breakers may be configured with lugs, bus bar connections, rear connections...
> Field installable accessories and trip units

Devices with the Micrologic electronic trip
unit provide adjustable protection settings
for greater system flexibility. In addition to
electronic protection, Micrologic trip units allow
users to monitor both energy and power.
Through direct access to in-depth information I1
C
I2
I2
I3
I3
vC
C
I4
I4
I5
I5
C
C
I6
I6
+24V
0V
and networking using open protocols,

C
I1 Eth2
+
24VDC Eth1
PowerPact circuit breakers with Micrologic trip

A1
T2
O3 T1
34
O2 33
24
O1 23
14
13
units let operators optimize the management of

their electrical installations.
3.2
Micrologic
In)
li (x
6 Ir
tr @
lr (A)
2500
1250
250A lm
ln
Far more than a circuit breaker, these

circuit breakers are a measurement and
communication tool ready to meet energy-
efficiency needs through optimized power
requirements, increased energy availability,
and improved installation management. +
24VDC
I1
I1
C
C
I2
I2
I3
I3
vC
C
I4
I4
I5
I5
C
C
I6
I6
Eth1
Eth2
+24V
0V
A1
T2
O3 T1
34
O2 33
24
O1 23
14
13
Ø5...8
Buildings Datacentre Oil and gas Water

Catalogue numbering...
...thermal magnetic circuit breaker

NHDF36020TW
N H D F 3 6 020 TW
Terminations Poles
F Busbar 3
Breaking L Lugs 4 Voltage
capacity 600 V AC
D - 18kA @ 440V Amperage
G - 35kA @ 440V 15 - 600 A
J - 65kA @ 440V
Frame L - 100kA - 440V Terminal nut
H: H - Frame metric
J: J - Frame
L: L - Frame
Example
> C
ustomer needs 20 A breaker 18 kA / 440 V AC
Ordered Qty
1. With metric terminal nuts
NHDF36020TW 1
2. With english terminal nuts

NHDF36020TW 1
S37444 replace in field 2
3. With mechanical lugs
NHDL36020 1

...electronic trip unit
NHDF36020U31XTW
N H D F 3 6 060 U31X TW
Poles
Terminations 3
F Busbar 4 Voltage
L Lugs 600 V AC
Breaking Amperage
capacity 15 - 600 A
D - 18kA @ 440V Trip unit
G - 35kA @ 440V U31 LI standard
J - 65kA @ 440V protection
L - 100kA - 440V U53 LSI plus energy
Frame management
H: H - Frame
J: J - Frame Terminal nut
L: L - Frame metric
Example
> C
ustomer needs 20 A breaker 18 kA / 440 V AC
Ordered Qty
1. With standard trip unit and metric terminal nuts
NHDF36060U31XTW 1
2. With standard trip unit and mechanical lugs

NHDL36060U31X 1
3. With energy trip unit and metric terminal nuts
NHDF36060U53XTW 1
4. With energy trip unit and mechanical lugs

NHDL36060U53X 1

Energy management
using the Enerlin’X System
Use the Enerlin’X communication system to connect your building
to real savings in three steps:
Measure
Embedded and stand-
alone metering & control
Connect Save
> Integrated communication > Data-driven energy efficiency
interfaces actions
> Ready to connect to > Real-time monitoring and control
energy management > Access to energy and site
platforms information through on-line
services
Smart Panels connect you to energy savings

Measure
Enerlin’X communication
systems mean visible
information
Grouping most of the electrical protection,
command and metering components, the
switchboards are now significant sources
CLOUD
of data locally displayed and sent via
communication networks.
connect
Enerlin’X communication
systems use reliable,
simple-to-install-and-use
displays, and Ethernet and
Modbus interfaces
Information is safely transmitted through
the most efficient networks: Information is
safely transmitted through the most efficient
networks:
• Modbus SL inside switchboards, between
components,
• Ethernet, on cable or WiFi, inside the
building and connecting switchboards and
computers,
• Ethernet or GPRS, for access to on-line
services by Schneider Electric,
Save • Energy experts, no matter where they are
located, can now provide advise based on
the updated data of the building.
CLOUD
On-site real-time
monitoring and control
The FDM128 touch screen display connected
to the Ethernet:
• shows essential electrical information and
alarms concerning the electrical network,
• allows control (open, close, reset…)
of various equipment, On-line Energy
The FDM128 touch screen provides real-time
value checking and control, directly on the front Management services
panel of the main switchboard. StruXureWare Energy Operation
On a PC display with common browser: automates data collection using an open,
• shows monitoring web pages hosted into scalable, and secure energy management
the local Ethernet interface, information system.
• alarm events generate automatic email With the help of the Schneider Electric energy
notifications, management services team, data is turned
• allows control (open, close, reset…) into information to enable customers to
of various equipments. understand their facilities’ performance on an
The data is displayed graphically or recorded ongoing basis.
into files for optimizing the use of energy in the Energy Operation leverages companies’
building. current investments in their existing systems,
As an example, the data can help validate the and can be used to communicate advanced
change of temperature settings, time scheduling results and performance to a broad audience
in a Building Management System or other for a shared understanding throughout an
automated devices. organization.

Enerlin’X Communication
System Components
PowerPact Circuit Br eakers with Micrologic Trip Units
DB418902.eps
PowerPact Circuit Breakers

with Micrologic Trip Units
Ammeter E
> Micrologic 5 E selective protection.
.2o E
5
.9 5 .9 6
1 9 4. .9 7
> 10
o l
>30 9 3. .9 8
.9 2
% Ir 1
Io ) x
(
3
ic g
.9
> 0A Ir 4
5
3 6
.
2 5 8
M ic r
2 10
Isr ) x
.
1 5
d(I
Displays
FDM121
PB103360.eps
> One-to-one front display module

> See page A-18 for more information.
FDM128
PB111801-19_r.eps
> One-to-eight front display module

> See page A-19 for more information.
Communication
> PowerPact and Compact circuit breakers in
screen 2b.eps
a communication network
> I/O application module
> IFE: Ethernet interface module
> IFM: Modbus interface module.
PB103798_9.eps
DB416829.eps
DB416830.eps
I/O Module IFE Module IFM Module
See page 94 for more information.

PowerPact Multistandard General contents
2
Functions and characteristics A-1
Installation recommendations B-1
Dimensions and connections C-1
Wiring diagrams D-1
Additional characteristics E-1
Catalogue numbers F-1
Glossary G-1

PowerPact Multistandard Functions and characteristics
Introduction
General characteristics of the PowerPact range A-2
Circuit breakers A-3
Characteristics and performance of PowerPact circuit breakers A-4
PowerPact Multistandard trip units A-6
PowerPact trip units A-7
Overview of trip units for PowerPact A-8
Protection of distribution system

Micrologic 1.3 M electronic trip units for instantaneous protection only
(L-Frame circuit breakers only) A-10
Micrologic 2.2 M and 2.3 M Electronic trip units A-11
Micrologic 3 trip units A-12
Micrologic 5 E trip units A-14
Micrologic 5 E "Energy" A-16
Power Meter functions A-18

Operating-assistance functions characteristics A-21
PowerPact H-, J-, and L-frame circuit breakers
Energy Management A-23
Switchboard-display functions
Micrologic E trip unit with COM option (ULP) A-24
FDM121 Connections
Communication components and connections A-26
Switchboard-display functions
Micrologic E trip unit with COM Ethernet gateway A-28
FDM128 Connections
Communication components and connections A-30
Enerlin’X communication system

Products overview A-31
Communication
Communication wiring system A-33
Overview of functions A-34
IFE Ethernet interface A-35

IFM Modbus communication interface A-37
I/O application module A-39
Communication A-41
Communications modules, IFM and IFE A-41
Electrical Asset Manager Configuration Engineering tool A-42

Accessories for Micrologic trip units A-44
Accessories and auxiliaries A-46
Overview of PowerPact H- and J- frame A-46
Overview of PowerPact L- frame A-47
Device installation A-48
Insulation of live parts A-51
Selection of auxiliaries for PowerPact 150 / 250 A H-Frame and J-Frame A-52
Selection of auxiliaries for PowerPact 400 / 600 A L-Frame A-54
Installation recommendations Indication contacts A-56
> B-1 Remote tripping A-58
Dimensions
Rotary handles A-59
> C-1
Wiring diagrams Motor mechanism A-60
> D-1 Locks A-61
Additionals characteristics Sealing accessories A-62
> E-1
Catalogue numbers Distribution system A-63
> F-1 Plates for mounting on 60 mm busbar A-63
Glossary Busbar support A-64
> G-1 Choice of mounting plates A-65

Functions Introduction
and characteristics General characteristics of the PowerPact
range
Codes and standards

DB413678.eps
H- and J-frame circuit breakers, automatic switches and electronic motor circuit
protectors are manufactured and tested in accordance with the following standards.
Note: apply circuit breakers according to guidelines detailed in the National Electric Code
(NEC) and other local wiring codes.
Codes and standards (Domestic)

PowerPact Multistandard PowerPact Multistandard
circuit breakers switches
UL 489 (1) UL 489 (3)
IEC 60947-2 IEC 60947-3
CSA 22.2 No. 5 (2)

CSA C22.2C No. 5 (4)
Federal Specification W-C-375B/GEN Federal Specification W-C-375B/GEN
NEMA AB1 NEMA AB1
NMX J-266 NMX J-266
CCC CE Marking
Characteristics indicated on the faceplate label:
CE Marking -
A. Circuit breaker type
B. Circuit breaker disconnector symbol (1) PowerPact H- and J frame circuit breakers are in UL File E10027. PowerPact L-frame
C. Performance levels circuit breakers are in UL File E63335.
D. Standards (2) PowerPact H- and J frame circuit breakers are in CSA File LR40970. PowerPact L-frame
E. Ue: Operating voltage per IEC circuit breakers are in CSA File LR.
F. Icu: Ultimate breaking capacity per IEC (3) PowerPact H- and J frame switches are in UL File E87159.
G. Ics: Service breaking capacity per IEC (4) PowerPact H- and J frame switches are in CSA File LR32390.
H. Uimp: Rated impulse withstand voltage per IEC
I. Ui: Insulation voltage per IEC
J. Certification marks
Note: when the circuit breaker is equipped with an extended

rotary handle, the door must be opened to view the faceplate.

Circuit breakers
Dual-break rotating contacts

DB413166.eps
DB413167.eps
All PowerPact Multistandard circuit breakers are equipped with dual-break rotating
contacts that reduce the amount of peak current during a short circuit fault. This
reduces the let-through currents and enhances equipment protection.
Reduced let-through currents
The moving contact has the shape of an elongated “S” and rotates around a
floating axis. The shape of the fixed and moving contacts are such that the
repelling forces appear as soon as the circuit reaches approximately 15 times In.
Due to the rotating movement, repulsion is rapid and the device greatly limits
short-circuit currents, whatever the interrupting level of the unit. The fault current
is extinguished before it can fully develop. Lower let-through currents provide less
peak energy, reducing the required bus bar bracing, lowering enclosure pressure,
and delivering improved series or combination ratings.
Internal operating mechanism
PowerPact Multistandard circuit breakers have an over-center toggle mechanism
providing quick-make, quick-break operation. The operating mechanism is also
trip-free, which allows tripping even when the circuit breaker handle is held in the
DB413168.eps
“ON” position.
Internal cross-bars provide common opening and closing of all poles with a single
operating handle.
All PowerPact circuit breakers have an integral push-to-trip button in the cover to
manually trip the circuit breaker. This should be used as part of a regular preventive
maintenance program.
Handle position indication
The circuit breaker handle can assume any of three positions, ON, tripped or OFF
as shown.
The center tripped position provides positive visual indication that the circuit
breaker has tripped.
The circuit breaker can be reset by first pushing the handle to the extreme “OFF”
Push-to-Trip position. Power can then be restored to the load by pushing the handle to the “ON”
position.
Current limiting
DB413169.eps
The current limiting attributes of PowerPact Multistandard circuit breakers provide

greater protection for downstream devices by limiting the let-through current in the
event of a fault. The current-limiting capabilities of HJ, LJ, LL and JJ frame circuit
ON breakers are documented with Underwriters Laboratories and Canadian Standards
Tripped Association. These current-limiting circuit breakers ship with a label that identifies
them as UL/CSA current limiting circuit breakers. (The HD/HG, LD/LG and JD/JG
OFF circuit breakers do not carry the UL current lmiting label).
The trip curves with let-through data are available in the trip curve section in this
catalog.
Please note that as let-through curves for UL Listed/CSA Certified current-limiting
circuit breakers, these curves are maximum let-through values.

and characteristics Characteristics and performance of
PowerPact circuit breakers
Circuit breaker ratings

PB111138_L33.eps
The interrupting rating is the highest current at rated voltage the circuit breaker is
designed to safely interrupt under standard test conditions. Circuit breakers must
be selected with interrupting ratings equal to or greater than the available short-
circuit current at the point where the circuit breaker is applied to the system (unless
it is a branch device in a series rated combination). Interrupting ratings are shown
on the front of the circuit breaker.
Reverse feeding of circuit breakers
The standard unit-mount Multistandard circuit breakers have sealed trip units and
may be reverse fed.
Circuit breaker
Circuit breaker type
PowerPact H-frame. Number of poles
Amperage range (A)
UL 489 circuit breaker ratings
UL/CSA/NOM 240 V AC
PB111141_l33.eps
(kA rms) 480 V AC

600 V AC
IEC 947-2 circuit breaker ratings
Ultimate breaking capacity 220/240 V AC
(Icu) (kA rms) 380/415 V AC
440/480 V AC
500/525 V AC
Service breaking capacity % Icu
(Ics)
Insulation voltage Vi
Impulse withstand voltage Vimp
Operational voltage Ve
Sensor rating In
Utilization category -
PowerPact J-frame.
Operations (Open-Close Cycles)
Without current
With current
Protection and measurements
PB111143_L35.eps
Overload/short-circuit Thermal-magnetic
protection Electronic
Display / I, V, f, P, E, THD measurements / interrupted-current measurement
Options Front display module (FDM121)
Operating assistance
Counters
Histories and alarms
Metering Com
Device status/control com
Dimensions / Weight / Connections
Dimensions 3P Height
(unit mount) Width
mm. (in)
Depth
Weight 3P - kg (lb.)
Connections / Terminations Unit mount
Rear connection
PowerPact L-frame. Plug-In
Optional lugs

150 A H-Frame 250 A J-Frame 400 A L-Frame 600 A L-Frame
HD HG HJ JD JG JJ LD LG LJ LD LG LJ LL
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
15-150 70-250 70-400 200-600
25 65 100 25 65 100 25 65 100 25 65 100 125

18 35 65 18 35 65 18 35 65 18 35 65 100
14 18 25 14 18 25 14 18 25 14 18 25 50
25 65 100 25 65 100 25 65 100 25 65 100 125

18 35 65 18 35 65 18 35 65 18 35 65 100
18 35 65 18 35 65 18 35 65 18 35 65 100
14 18 25 14 18 25 14 18 25 14 18 25 50
100 % 100 % 100 % 100 %
750 V AC 750 V AC 750 V AC 750 V AC

8 kV AC 8 kV AC 8 kV AC 8 kV AC
690 V AC 690 V AC 690 V AC 690 V AC
150 A 250 A 400 A 600 A
A A A A
4000 5000 5000 5000

4000 1000 1000 1000
b b b b b b - - - - - - -
b b b b b b b b b b b b b
163 (6.4) 191 (7.5) 340 (13.38) 340 (13.38)

104 (4.1) 104 (4.1) 140 (5.51) 140 (5.51)
86 (3.4 ) 86 (3.4) 110 (4.33) 110 (4.33)
2.2 (4.8) 2.4 (5.3) 6.0 (13.2) 6.2 (13.7)
b b b b
b b b b
b b b b
b b b b

and characteristics PowerPact Multistandard trip units
Thermal-magnetic or electronic trip unit ?

Thermal-magnetic trip units protect against overcurrents and short-circuits using
tried and true techniques. For applications requiring installation optimization and
energy efficiency, electronic trip units offering more advanced protection functions
combined with measurements.
Trip units using digital electronics are faster as well as more accurate. Wide setting
ranges make installation upgrades easier. Designed with processing capabilities,
Micrologic trip units can provide measurement information and device operating
assistance. With this information, users can avoid or deal more effectively with
disturbances and can play a more active role in system operation. They can
manage the installation, anticipate events and plan any necessary servicing.
Accurate measurements for complete protection

PowerPact Multistandard circuit breakers devices offer excellent measurement
accuracy from 15 amperes on up to the short-circuit currents. This is made possible
by a new generation of current transformers combining “iron-core” sensors for self-
powered electronics and “air core” sensors (Rogowski coils) for measurements.
The protection functions are managed by an ASIC (Application Specific Integrated
Circuit) component that is independent of the measurement functions. This
independence ensures immunity to conducted and radiated disturbances and a
high level of reliability.
Numerous security functions

Torque-limiting screws
The screws secure the trip unit to the circuit breaker. When the correct tightening
torque is reached, the screw heads break off. Optimum tightening avoids any risk
of temperature rise. A torque wrench is no longer required.
“Ready” LED for a continuous self-test
The LED on the front of the electronic trip units indicates the result of the self-test
running continuously on the measurement system and the tripping release. As long
as the green LED is flashing, the links between the CTs, the processing electronics
and the tripping mechanism are operational. The circuit breaker is ready to protect.
A minimum current of 15 to 50 A, depending on the device, is required for this
indication function.
A patented dual adjustment system for protection functions
Available on Micrologic trip units, the system consists of:
bb an adjustment using rotary switches sets the maximum value
bb an adjustment using the keypad or made remotely, fine-tunes the setting. This
setting may not exceed the first one. It can be read directly on the Micrologic trip
unit screen, to within one ampere and a fraction of a second.

PowerPact trip units
Available trip units

bb PowerPact™ H-, J-, and L-Frame circuit breakers offer a range of thermal-
magnetic and Micrologic™ electronic trip units. Thermal-magnetic trip units are
designed to open automatically under overload or short circuit. H-frame and
J-frame thermal-magnetic circuit breakers contain individual thermal (overload) and
instantaneous (short circuit) sensing elements in each pole.
bb Micrologic electronic trip units provide intelligent operation, with wide setting
ranges make installation upgrades easier. Designed with processing capabilities,
Micrologic trip units can provide measurement information and device operating
assistance to supply all of the information required to manage the electrical
installation and optimize energy use.
Micrologic trip units offer excellent measurement accuracy, using a new generation
of current transformers combining “iron-core” sensors for self-powered electronics
and “air-core” sensors (Rogowski coils) for measurements. The protection functions
are managed by an ASIC component that is independent of the measurement
functions. This independence ensures immunity to conducted and radiated
disturbances and a high level of reliability.
An LED on the front of the electronic trip units indicates the result of the self-test
running continuously on the measurement system and the tripping release. When
the green LED is flashing, the links between the CTs, the processing electronics
and the Mitop release are operational. The circuit breaker is ready to protect.
A minimum current of 15 to 50 A, depending on the device, is required for this
function.
The dual adjustment for protection functions on Micrologic 5 consists of:
vv an adjustment using rotary switches sets the maximum value
vv an adjustment, made using the keypad or remotely, fine-tunes the setting.
This setting may not exceed the first one. It can be read directly on the Micrologic
screen, to within one ampere and a fraction of a second.
Understanding the names of Micrologic electronic trip units

Protection Frame Measurements Applications
3: LI H- and J-frame Distribution

5: LSI
DB404432.eps
DB112155.eps
L: Long time L-frame

S: Short time
I: Instantaneous
DB112156.eps
DB404431.eps
Note: all the trip units have a transparent sealable cover that protects access to the adjustment rotary switches.

and characteristics Overview of trip units for PowerPact
TM thermal-magnetic trip units can be used on Thermal-magnetic trip units

PowerPact H and J-frame circuit breakers with t
DB413170.eps
interrupting levels D/G/J.
Thermal-magnetic trip units are available in factory
sealed.
0 ln li l
H-Frame Trip Curve

(ln) Fixed threshold thermal protection
against overload.
(li) Fixed threshold instantaneous protection
against short circuits.
Circuit breaker and trip units
PowerPact H- and J-Frame Distribution Protection
Thermal-Magnetic T-M
Distribution Protection
SI
Micrologic 2.2 M and 2.3 M
DB413680.eps
1300A
DB413067.eps
DB112024b.eps
DB417770.eps
100A
ln lt
H - non adjustable
1250 2500
DB413068.eps
250A
ln lm
Trip Unit
J - adjustable
PowerPact L-Frame Distribution Protection

Thermal-Magnetic T-M
Distribution Protection
SI
N/A Micrologic 2.3 M
2.3M
DB112024c.eps
50
Micrologic
DB417769.eps
270
250 290
230 310
210 330
190 348
FLA (A) Class. Isd (x FLA)
FLA Isd
Settings and indications

DB112037.eps
Trip Unit Adjustment and reading

Pick-up set in amps using dials
Non-adjustable time delay

1250 2500
DB413069.eps
250A
ln lm
ln lm(= Ii)
Distribution Protection LI Distribution Protection

LSI + Energy Monitoring
Micrologic 3.2 Micrologic 5.2E
DB413018.eps
DB112026.eps
3.2
Micrologic
lr (A) tr @ 6 Ir li (x In)
Distribution Protection LI Distribution Protection

LSI + Energy Monitoring
Micrologic 3.3 Micrologic 5.3E
DB413019.eps
DB112027.eps
DB416929.eps
DB111366.eps
Alarm History 2/3

DB112039.eps
DB112041.eps
Total reactive 20.12.2011
Power
S1-1 - Lighting/Level1
Date: 07 May 2007 Quick view Energy
Time: 10:28:03.01 PM Measures

Ep 11 318 kWh
Alarm history
Eq 257 kVArh
ESC OK
Control
Es 13 815 kVAh
Maintenance
ESC 6/7
Adjustment and reading Adjustment and reading

FDM121 FDM128
Pick-up set in amps with fine adjustment Pick-up set in amps
Connection to switchboard display unit
using dials
Non-adjustable time delay
DB111367.eps
DB416928.eps
ETH1 ETH2
DB112019.eps
DB112042.eps
IFE
ETH1 LK/10-100/ACT
ETH2 LK/10-100/ACT
Module Status
Modbus-SL
Network Status
IFM IFE
T
Front indications Fine adjustment via keypad

DB112040.eps
DB112043.eps
0.5
Test connector Adjustable time delays

Self test
DB112019.eps
Communication to Modbus
Front indications
DB112040.eps
Test connector
Self test

Functions Protection of distribution system
and characteristics Micrologic 1.3 M electronic trip units for
instantaneous protection only (L-Frame
circuit breakers only)
Micrologic 1.3 M trip units are used in 3-device
DB112092b.eps
motor-feeder solutions on PowerPact L-frame circuit
breakers with performance levels G/J/L.
They provide short-circuit protection for motors up to
250 kW at 400 V.
Micrologic 1.3 M trip units provide instantaneous protection only, using electronic
technology.
They are dedicated to 600 A 3-pole (3P 3D) circuit breakers or 4-pole circuit
breakers with detection on three poles (4P, 3D). They are especially used in 3-pole
versions for motor protection.
Circuit breakers equipped with Micrologic 1.3 M trip units, without thermal
protection, are used in certain applications to replace automatic switches.
Micrologic 1.3 M trip units are available on PowerPact L-frame circuit breakers only.
They also provide the benefits of electronic technology:
bb accurate setting
bb tests
bb "Ready" LED.
Circuit breakers with a Micrologic 1.3 M trip units are combined with an overload
relay and a contactor.
Protection settings are made using a rotary switch.
Protection version
Three pole (3P) : three pole frame circuit breakers equipped with detection on all
three poles.
Indicators
The green “Ready” LED blinks slowly when the electronic trip unit is ready to
provide protection. It indicates the trip unit is operating correctly.
Note: all the trip units have a transparent sealable cover that protects access to the adjustment
rotary switches.
Micrologic 1.3 M
Ratings (A) In at 40 °C (1) 400 600
Circuit breaker PowerPact L-frame b b
S Short time protection
Pick-up (A) Isd adjustable directly in amps
accuracy ±15 % There is a very short delay to let 9 settings: 2000, 2400, 2800, 9 settings: 3000, 3600, 4200,
through motor starting currents 3200, 3600, 4000, 4400, 4800 A 4800, 5400, 6000, 6600, 7200 A
Time delay (ms) tsd non-adjustable
Non-tripping time 20
Maximum break time 60
I Instantaneous protection
Pick-up (A) Ii non-adjustable 4800 7200
accuracy ±15 % Non-tripping time 0
Maximum break time 30 ms
(1) Motor standards require operation at 40 °C. Circuit breaker rating are derated to take this requirement into account.

Micrologic 2.2 M and 2.3 M Electronic trip
units
Micrologic 2.2 M and 2.3 M trip units provide built-in
DB112024b.eps
thermal and instantaneous protection. They are used
in 2-device motor-feeder solutions on PowerPact
H-, J- and L-frame circuit breakers with performance
levels J/L.
They provide protection for motors up to 315 kW at
Circuit breakers with Micrologic 2.2M/2.3 M trip unit include protection similar to an
400 V against:
inverse-time overload relay. They are combined with a contactor.
b short-circuits
Protection settings are made using a rotary switch.
b overloads with selection of a trip class (5, 10 or 20)
b phase unbalance. Overloads (or thermal protection)
Long-time protection and trip class (FLA).
bb Inverse-time thermal protection.
bb Against overloads with adjustable pick-up FLA.
bb Settings are made in amperes. The tripping curve for the long-time protection,
which indicates the time delay tr before tripping, is defined by the selected trip
class.
Trip class
The class is selected as a function of the normal motor starting time:
bb class 5: starting time less than 5 s
bb class 10: starting time less than 10 s
bb class 20: starting time less than 20 s.
For a given class, it is necessary to check that all motor-feeder components are
sized to carry the 6 x FLA starting current without excessive temperature rise
during the time corresponding to the class.
Short-cicuits
bb Short-time protection (Isd):
vv provides protection with an adjustable pick-up Isd.
vv there is a very short delay to let through motor staring currents.
bb Non-adjustable instantaneous protection (Ii):
vv instantaneous protection with non-adjustable pick-up (Ii).
Phase unbalance or phase loss (Iunbal)
This function opens the circuit breaker if a phase unbalance occurs:
bb that is greater than the 30 % fixed pick-up Iunbal
bb following the non-adjustable time delay tunbal equal to:
vv 0.7 s during starting
vv 4 s during normal operation.
Phase loss is an extreme case of phase unbalance and leeds to tripping under the
same conditions.
Indicators
Front indicators
bb The green “Ready” LED blinks slowly when the electronic trip unit is ready to
bb Red alarm LED for motor operation goes ON when the thermal image of the
rotor and stator is greater than 95 % if the permissible temperature rise.
Remote indicators using SDTAM module
PowerPact H-, J- and L-frame devices with a Micrologic 2 M trip unit can be
equipped with an SDTAM module dedicated to motor applications for:
bb a contact to indicate circuit breaker overload
bb a contact to open the contactor. In the event of a phase unbalance or overload,
this output is activated 400 ms before circuit breaker tripping to open the contactor
and avoid circuit breaker tripping.
This module takes the place of the shunt trip (MN)/undervoltage trip (MX) coils and
an auxiliary switch (OF) contact.
SDTAM remote indication relay module with its terminal block.
Note: all the trip units have a transparent sealable cover that protects access to the adjustment
rotary switches.
H-frame (150 A), J-frame (250 A) and L-frame (600 A) Electronic motor protector circuit breakers (Ul
ratings) - Two device solutions (1)
Electronic trip Frame Sensor rating Trip unit Full load amperes Isd (x FLA) J interrupting
unit type range (FLA) cat. no. (1)
Standard (2) H-frame 150 2.2 M 58-130 5-13 x FLA NHJL36150M38X
J-frame 250 114-217 5-13 x FLA NJJL36250M38X
L-frame 400 2.3 M 190-348 5-13 x FLA NLJL36400M38X
600 312-520 5-13 x FLA NLJL36600M38X
(1) Two-device solutions (these electronic motor protector circuit breakers include short-circuit and overload protection): 1 electronic motor circuit protector with a
Micrologic 2.2 M electronique trip unit, plus, and 1 contactor.
(2) The standard trip unit offers Class 5, 10 and 20 and phase unbalance or phase loss protection.
(3) For references with metric terminals nuts

Functions
and characteristics
Micrologic 3 trip units
Micrologic 3 trip units can be used on PowerPact
DB413020.eps
3.2
Multistandard circuit breakers with performance levels Micrologic
D/G/J/L.
They provide:
bb standard protection of distribution cables
bb indication of:
vv overloads (using LEDs)
vv overload tripping (using the SDx relay module).
Circuit breakers equipped with Micrologic 3 trip units can be used to protect
distribution systems supplied by transformers.
Protection
bb Settings are made using the adjustment rotary switches.
bb Overloads: Long time protection (Ir)
PB103377.eps
bb Inverse time protection against overloads with an adjustable current pick-up Ir

set using a rotary switch and an adjustable time delay tr.
Indicators
Front indicators
bb Orange overload pre-alarm LED: steady on when I > 90 % Ir.
bb Red overload LED: steady on when I > 105 % Ir.
Remote indicators
An overload trip signal can be remotely checked by installing an SDx relay module
inside the circuit breaker. This module receives the signal from the Micrologic
electronic trip unit through an optical link and makes it available on the terminal
block. The signal is cleared when the circuit breaker is reclosed.
See page A-44.

Micrologic 3
Ratings (A) In at 40 °C (104°F) (1) 60 100 150 250 400 600
Circuit breaker H-frame b b b - - -
J-frame - - - b - -
L-frame - - - b b b
Micrologic 3.2 / 3.3
L Long-time protection
Pick-Up (A) Ir Value depending on sensor rating (In) and setting on rotary switch
tripping between In =60 A Ir = 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 60
1.05 and 1.20 Ir
In = 100 A Ir = 35 40 45 50 60 70 80 90 100
In = 150 A Ir = 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 125 150
In = 250 A Ir = 70 80 100 125 150 175 200 225 250
In = 400 A Ir = 125 150 175 200 225 250 300 350 400
In = 600 A Ir = 200 225 250 300 350 400 450 500 600
Time delay (s) tr 0.5 1 2 4 8 16
accuracy 0 to 1.5 x Ir 15 25 50 100 200 400
-20 %
6 x Ir 0.5 1 2 4 8 16
7.2 x Ir 0.35 0.7 1.4 2.8 5.5 11
Thermal memory 20 minutes before and after tripping
I Instantaneous
Pick-up (A) Ii x In 1.5 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 15
accuracy ±15 % Non-tripping time 10 ms
Maximum break 50 ms for I > 1.5 Ii
time
(1) If the trip units are used in high-temperature environments, the Micrologic trip unit setting must take into account the thermal limitations of the circuit breaker.
See the temperature derating information on page B-7.

Functions
and characteristics
Micrologic 5 E trip units
On a fault trip, the type of fault (Ir, Isd, Ii, Ig), the Indicators
phase concerned and the interrupted current are
displayed. An external power supply is required. Front Indicators
Isd Fault
DB413171.eps
bb Orange overload pre-alarm LED stays on when I > 90 % Ir.
bb Red overload LED stays on when I > 105 % Ir.
Remote Indicators
An SDx relay module installed inside the circuit breaker can be used to remote the
following information:
bb overload trip
Fault Phase Interrupted Current
bb overload prealarm.
This module receives the signal from the Micrologic electronic trip unit through
Display of interrupted current.
an optical link and makes it available on the terminal block. The signal is cleared
when the circuit breaker is closed.
These outputs can be reprogrammed to be assigned to other types of tripping or
that protects access to the adjustment rotary switch. The module is described in
detail in the section dealing with accessories.
PB103377.eps
Note: all the trip units have a transparent lead-sealable cover.

Micrologic 5 trip unit
Ratings (A) In at 40 °C (104°F) (1) 60 100 150 250 400 600
Circuit H-frame b b b - - -
breaker J-frame - - - b - -
L-frame - - - - b b
L Long-time protection
Pick-up (A) Ir rotary switch Value depending on the trip unit rating (In) and setting on rotary switch
tripping In = 60 A Ir = 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 60
between 1.05 and
In = 100 A Ir = 35 40 45 50 60 70 80 90 100
1.20 Ir
In = 150 A Ir = 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 125 150
In = 250 A Ir = 70 80 100 125 150 175 200 225 250
In = 400 A Ir = 125 150 175 225 225 250 300 350 400
In = 600 A Ir = 200 225 250 350 300 400 450 500 600
keypad setting Fine adjustment in 1 A steps below maximum value set on rotary switch
Time delay (s) tr = keypad setting 0.5 1 2 4 8 16
accuracy 0 to -20 % 1.5 x Ir 15 25 50 100 200 400
6 x Ir 0.5 1 2 4 8 16
7.2 x Ir 0.35 0.7 1.4 2.8 5.5 11
Thermal memory 20 minutes before and after tripping
S Short-time protection
Pick-up (A) Isd keypad setting 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 6 6.5 7 7.5 8.5 9.5
accuracy Fine adjustment in 0.5 x Ir steps using the keypad
±10 %
Time delay tsd = keypad I2t Off 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
(s) setting I2t On - 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
Non-tripping time 20 80 140 230 350
Maximum break time 80 140 200 320 500
I Instantaneous
Pick-up (A) Ii = In x rotary 60 A 1.5 2 .3 4 6 8 10 12 15
accuracy switch 100 A 1.5 2 .3 4 6 8 10 12 15
±15 %
150 A 1.5 2 .3 4 6 8 10 12 15
250 A 1.5 2 .3 4 5 6 8 10 12
400 A 1.5 2 .3 4 5 6 8 10 12
600 A 1.5 2 .3 4 5 6 8 10 11
Non-tripping time 10 ms
Maximum break time 50 ms for I > Ii
(1) If the trip units are used in high-temperature environments, the Micrologic trip unit setting must take into account the thermal limitations of the circuit breaker.

Functions
and characteristics
Micrologic 5 E "Energy"
Micrologic 5 E (Energy) trip units can be used on The capabilities of Micrologic 5 E trip units come into full play with the front display
PowerPact Multistandard circuit breakers with module. When the two are connected using a simple cable with RJ45 connectors,
performance levels D, G, J. They all have a front the combination offers full Power Meter capabilities and all the measurements
display module. They offer basic LSI protection required to monitor the electrical installation.
(Micrologic 5 trip unit). They also offer measurement,
alarm and energy values. Measurements
Current measurements
Measurement bb Phase and neutral currents IA, IB, IC, IN.
DB413172.eps
Display bb Average current of the 3 phases Iavg.

Settings
bb Highest current of the three phases Imax.
Maintenance
bb Maximum and minimum current measured.
35
bb Current unbalance between phases.
30 40 Ig tg
6.2E
Voltage measurements
25 45
20 50
15 60
3
4
6
8
10
bb Phase-to-phase (V) and phase-to-neutral (U) voltages.
bb Average voltages Vavg, Uavg.
2 12
1.5 15
Ii (x In)
bb Ph-Ph (V) and Ph-N (U) voltage unbalance.

bb Frequency measurements.
bb Frequency (f).
Power-quality indicators
bb Total harmonic distortion (THD) for current and voltage
Power measurements
bb Active, reactive and apparent power, total and per phase.
bb Power factor and cos φ.
bb Maximum and minimum.
bb For all I, V, f, P, E measurements.
Demand current and power measurements
bb Demand values, total and per phase.
bb Maximum demand.
bb Energy metering.
bb Active, reactive and apparent energy, total and per phase.
Operating and maintenance assistance

Indicators, alarms and histories
bb Fault types.
bb Alarms for high/low thresholds linked to I, V, f, P, E measurements.
bb Trip, alarm and operating histories.
bb Time-stamped tables for settings and I, V, f, P, E maximum values.
Maintenance indicators
bb Operation, trip and alarm counters.
bb Operating hours counter.
bb Contact wear.
bb Load profile and thermal image.
Communication network
Modbus with add-on module
Protection
bb Settings can be adjusted in two ways, using the rotary switches and/or the
keypad.
bb The keypad can be used to make fine adjustments in 1 A steps below the
maximum value defined by the setting on the rotary switch.
bb Access to setting modifications using the keypad is protected by a locking
function displayed on the screen and controlled by a microswitch.
bb The lock is activated automatically if the keypad is not used for 5 minutes.
bb Access to the microswitch is protected by a transparent, sealable cover.
bb With the cover closed, it is still possible to display the various settings and
measurements using the keypad.
Overloads: long-time protection (Ir)
Inverse time protection against overloads with an adjustable current pick-up Ir is
set using a rotary switch or the keypad for fine adjustments. The time delay tr is set
using the keypad.
Short-circuits: short-time protection (Isd)
Short-circuit protection with an adjustable pick-up Isd and adjustable time delay
tsd, with the possibility of including a portion of an inverse time curve (I2t On).
Short-circuits: instantaneous protection (Ii)
Instantaneous protection with adjustable pick-up Ii.

Automatic Molded Case Switches
(Functions/Protection)
An automatic switch can be used to open and close a circuit under normal
PB113866.eps
operating conditions. They are similar in construction to circuit breakers, except

PB113867.eps
that the switches open instantaneously at a factory-set, non-adjustable trip point

calibrated to protect only the molded case switch.
Molded case switches are intended for use as disconnect devices only. UL489
requires molded case switches to be protected by a circuit breaker or fuse
of equivalent rating. Molded case switches are labeled with their appropriate
withstand ratings.
The withstand rating of a switch is defined as the maximum current at rated voltage
that the molded case switch will withstand without damage when protected by a
circuit breaker with an equal continuous current rating. PowerPact™ H-, J-, and
L-frame automatic switches are available in unit mount, I-Line™, plug-in and
drawout versions.
They use the same accessories and offer the same connection possibilities as the
circuit-breaker versions. They may be interlocked with another switch or circuit
breaker to form a source-changeover system. Switches are Listed under UL file
E103740 and Certified under CSA file LR88980.
Automatic Switch Protection

The automatic switch can make and break its rated current. For an overload or
a short-circuit, it must be protected by an upstream device, in compliance with
installation standards. Due to their high-set instantaneous release PowerPact H-,
J- and L-frame automatic switches are self-protected.
Frame H-Frame J-Frame L-Frame (1)

Withstand rating "L" "L" "L"
Ampere rating (A) 150 250 400 600
DB413113.eps
DB413114.eps
DB413112.eps
2500
1250
A
1300
150A li
250A lm
ln ln
UL489 Poles 3P 3P 3P 3P
Catalogue number NHLL36000S15 NJLL36000S25 NLLL36000S40X NLLL36000S60X
Withstand ratings 240 V AC 125 kA 125 kA 125 kA 125 kA
480 V AC 100 kA 100kA 100kA 100kA
600 V AC 50 kA 50 kA 50 kA 50 kA
250 V DC 20 kA 20kA - -
AC trip point 2250 A 3125 A 4800 A 6600 A
Rated voltage (AC) - - 600 600
IEC 60947-3 Rated insulation voltage (V AC) 750 750 750 750
Rated impulse withstand voltage (kV) 8 8 8 8
Rated operational voltage AC 690 525 690 690
DC - 500 - -
Rated operational current (Ie) AC 525 V 400 600
Making capacity (kA peak) 7.1 8.5
Short-time withstand current Icw (kA rms) 5 6
(kA rms) Duration(s) 1 1
(1) Standard lug terminal wire range: AL66LS52K3; 2 AWG-500 kcmil Al/Cu.

Functions
and characteristics
Power Meter functions
In addition to protection functions, Micrologic A/E trip Display functions

units offer all the functions of Power Meter products as Micrologic Trip Unit LCD
well as operating assistance for the circuit breaker.
The user can display all the protection settings and the main measurements on the
LCD screen of the trip unit.
Micrologic A/E trip unit measurement functions are bb Micrologic A trip unit: instantaneous rms current measurements
made possible by the Micrologic trip unit’s intelligence bb Micrologic E trip unit: voltage, frequency and power measurements and energy
and the accuracy of the sensors. They are handled metering, in addition to the measurements offered by Micrologic A.
by a microprocessor that operates independent of To make the display available under all conditions and increase operating comfort,
protection functions. an external power supply is recommended for Micrologic A trip unit. It is required to:
bb display faults and interrupted current measurements
bb use all the functions of Micrologic E trip unit (such as metering of low power and
DB417771.eps
energy values)
bb ensure operation of the communication network.
The external power supply can be shared by several devices. For description,
see page A-29.
FDM121 Display Unit (One to One)

The FDM121 switchboard display unit can be connected to a communication
(COM) option (Breaker Communication Module [BSCM]) using a circuit breaker
ULP cord to display all measurements on a screen. The LCD screen is 3.78 x
3.78 in. (96 x 96 mm). The FMD121 display unit requires a 24 Vdc power supply.
The COM option (BSCM) unit is supplied by the same power supply via the
5 .2 E
.9 5 .9 6
0 .9 4 .9 7
>11
>30 .9 3 .9 8
.9 2
% Ir 1
.9 Io )
>30
A Ir ( x
circuit breaker ULP cord connecting it to the FDM121. See page A-24 for more
4
M icor lo g ic
5
3 6
2 .5 8
2 10
1 .5 x Ir )
Is d (
information.
DB125911.eps
DB112131.eps
DB112132.eps
Trip Unit Main Menu I V 4/7
I1 310 A I2 315 A
Quick view
402 V % 100 120
U1
Metering
% % 398 V % 100 120
Control I3 302 A IN 23 A U2
Alarms 401 V % 100 120
U3
Services % %
ESC OK ESC ESC
FDM121 Display: FDM121 Display: FDM121 Display:

Navigation Current Voltage
DB112133.eps
DB112134.eps
PQS E
P 64 kW Ep 14397 kWh
Q 38 kVar Eq 8325 kVarh
S 51 kVA Es 13035 kVAh
ESC ESC
FDM121 Display: FDM121 Display:

Power Consumption

FDM128 Display Unit (One to Eight)
The FDM128 display unit uses an IFE Ethernet interface for low-voltage circuit
breakers.
DB418897.eps
DB418898.eps
DB418899.eps
20.12.2011 12:00:05 20.12.2011 12:00:05
S1-1 - Lighting/Level1 S1-1 - Lighting/Level1

Quick view I U-V PQS E Quick view I U-V PQS E
I Current VL L
VL-L
Measures Measures
Alarm history
I1 431 A Alarm history
V12 406 V
I2 385 A V23 415 V
Control
I3 426 A Control
V31 409 V
Maintenance IN 2 A Maintenance
ESC 1/10 ESC 1/10
FDM128 Display: FDM128 Display: FDM128 Display:

Navigation Current Voltage
DB418900.eps
DB418901.eps
20.12.2011 12:00:05 20.12.2011 12:00:05
S1-1 - Lighting/Level1 S1-1 - Lighting/Level1
Quick view I U-V PQS E Quick view I U-V PQS E

PQS E cumul
Measures Measures Reset
Alarm history
Ptot 127 kW Alarm history
EpIn 165 kWh
Qtot 13 kVAr EpOut 45 kWh
Control
Stot 129 kVA Control
Maintenance Maintenance
ESC 1/12 ESC 1/3
FDM128 Display: FDM128 Display:

Power Consumption
For all FDM, in addition to the information displayed on the Micrologic trip unit LCD,
the FDM screen shows demand, power quality, and maximum/minimum ammeter
values along with histories and maintenance indicators.
Measurements function
Instantaneous RMS measurements
The Micrologic trip unit continuously displays the RMS value of the highest current
of the three phases and neutral (Imax). The navigation buttons can be used to
scroll through the main measurements.
In the event of a fault trip, the trip cause is displayed.
The Micrologic A trip unit measures phase, neutral, and ground fault currents.
Micrologic E trip units offer voltage, power, frequency, and energy metering in
addition to the measurements provided by Micrologic A trip units.
Maximum / Minimum ammeter
Every instantaneous measurement provided by Micrologic A/E trip units can be
associated with a maximum/minimum ammeter. The maximum for the highest
current of the three phases, neutral, and demand current can be reset using the
Micrologic trip unit keypad, FDM display unit, or the communication system.
Energy metering
The Micrologic E trip units also measures the energy consumed since the last reset
of the meter. The active energy meter can be reset using the Micrologic trip unit
keypad, the FDM display unit, or the communication system.
Demand and maximum demand values
Micrologic E trip units also calculate demand current and power values. These
calculations can be made using a block or sliding interval that can be set from five to
sixty minutes in steps of one minute. The window can be synchronised with a signal
sent through the communication system. Whatever the calculation method, the
calculated values can be recovered on a PC through the communication network.
Ordinary spreadsheet software can be used to provide trend curves and forecasts
based on this data. They provide a basis for load shedding and reconnection
operations used to adjust consumption to the subscribed power.
Power quality
The Micrologic E trip unit calculates power quality indicators taking into account the
presence of harmonics up to the fifteenth harmonic, including the total harmonic
distortion (THD) of current and voltage.

Functions Power Meter functions
and characteristics
PB111138_L25.eps
PB103360_r2.eps
PB111801-21_r.eps
Micrologic 5 trip unit integrated Power Meter functions Type Display
A E Trip Unit Front Display
LCD Module
Display of protection settings
Pick-ups (A) and delays All settings can be displayed Ir, tr, Isd, tsd, Ii, lg, tg b b b
Measurements
Instantaneous rms measurements
Currents (A) Phase and neutral IA, IB, IC, IN b b b b
Average of phases Iavg = (IA + IB + IC) / 3 b b - b
Highest current of the 3 phases and neutral Imax of IA, IB, IC, IN b b b b
Ground fault % Ig (pick-up setting) b b b b
Current unbalance between phases % Iavg - b - b
Voltage (V) Phase-to-phase VAB, VBC, VCA - b b b
Phase-to-neutral UAN, UBN, UCN - b b b
Average of phase-to-phase voltages Vavg = (VAB + VAC + VBC) / 3 - b - b
Average of phase-to-neutral voltages Uavg = (UAN + UBN + UCN) / 3 - b - b
Ph-Ph and Ph-N voltage unbalance % Vavg and % Uavg - b - b
Phase sequence 1-2-3, 1-3-2 - b b b (3)
Frequency (Hz) Power system f - b b b
Power Active (kW) P, total/per phase - b b b
Reactive (kVAR) Q, total/per phase - b b b
Apparent (kVA) S, total/per phase - b b b
Power factor and cos φ (fundamental) PF and cos φ, total and per phase - b - b
Maximum, minimum (MAX/MIN)
Associated with instantaneous rms Reset with Micrologic trip unit or front b b - b
measurements display module
Energy metering
Energy Active (kWh), reactive (kVAR), Total since last reset - b b b
apparent (kVA) Absolute or signed mode (1)
Demand and maximum demand values
Demand current (A) Phases and neutral Present value on the selected window - b - b
Maximum demand since last reset b - b
Demand power Active (kWh), reactive (kVAR), Present value on the selected window - b - b
apparent (kVA) Maximum demand since last reset - b - b
Calculation window Adjustable from 5 to 60 minutes - b - (2)
in 1 minute steps
Power quality
Total harmonic Of voltage with respect to rms value THDU, THDV of the Ph-Ph and Ph-N - b - b
distortion THD (%) voltage
Of current with respect to rms value THDI of the phase current - b - b
(1) Absolute mode: E absolute = E out + E in; Signed mode: E signed = E out - E in.
(2) Available through the communication network only.

Measurement accuracy of the entire measurement system, including the sensors:
bb Current: ±1 %.
bb Voltage: ±0.5 %.
bb Power and energy: ±2 %.
bb Frequency: ±0.1 %.

Operating-assistance functions
characteristics
Micrologic trip unit alarms with time-stamping

PB103364.eps
Alarm types
The user can assign an alarm to all Micrologic A or E trip unit measurements or
events:
bb up to 12 alarms can be used together:
vv one alarm is predefined and activated automatically:
Micrologic 5 trip unit: overload (Ir)
vv thresholds, priorities and time delays can be set for ten other alarms.
DB125911.eps
Main Menu
bb the same measurement can be used for different alarms to precisely monitor
Quick view
Metering
certain values, e.g. the frequency or the voltage
Control bb alarms can also be assigned to various states: phase lead/lag, four quadrants,
Alarms phase sequence
Services bb selection of display priorities, with screen displaying a window showing high
ESC OK
priority alarm
bb alarm time-stamping.
FDM121 display: navigation.

Alarm settings
Alarms cannot be set using the keypad or the front display module. They are set
through the communication network with the PC. Set-up includes the threshold,
priority, activation delay before display and deactivation delay. It is also possible to
DB413152.eps
DB413153.eps
Alarm History 2/3 Alarm History 2/3

reprogram the standard assignment for the two SDx relay outputs to user-selected
Total reactive Over maximum
Power Current unbalance alarms.
Date: 07 May 2011 Date: 10 Nov 2011 Alarm reading
Time: 10:28:03.01 PM Time: 06:35:08.04 AM
Remote alarm indicators:
ESC OK ESC OK
bb reading on the front display module or on a PC through the communication network
bb system remote indicators using SDx relay with two output contacts for alarms
bb Micrologic trip unit built-in LCD display.
Over power alarm. Phase unbalance alarm. Histories and event tables
Micrologic A and E trip unit have histories and event tables that are always active.
Three types of time-stamped histories
DB413154.eps
DB413155.eps
Alarm History 2/3 Alarm History 3/3

bb Tripping due to overruns of Ir, Isd, Ii, Ig: last 17 trips
Under voltage Under voltage
Pick-up Drop-out bb Alarms: last 10 alarms
Date: 05 Nov 2011 Date: 05 Nov 2011
bb Operating events: last 10 events.
Time: 02:31:03.61 AM Time: 02:32:26.12 AM
Each history record is stored with:
ESC OK ESC OK
bb indicators in clear text in a number of user-selectable languages
bb time-stamping: date and time of event
bb status: pick-up / drop-out.
Two types of time-stamped event tables
Alarm pick-up and drop-out examples of operating-assistance
screens of the FDM121 display unit. bb Protection settings
bb Minimums / maximums
Display of alarms and tables
The time-stamped history and event tables may be displayed on a PC through the
communication network.
Embedded memory
Micrologic A and E trip units have a non-volatile memory that saves all data on alarms,
histories, event tables, counters and maintenance indicators even if power is lost.
Micrologic A and E trip units have indicators for, among others, the number of
operating cycles, contact wear and operating times (operating hours counter) of the
PowerPact H-, J-, and L-frame circuit breakers.
It is possible to assign an alarm to the operating cycle counter to plan maintenance.
The various indicators can be used together with the trip histories to analyze the
level of stresses the device has been subjected to. The information provided by the
indicators cannot be displayed on the Micrologic trip unit LCD. It is displayed on the
PC through the communication network.
Management of installed devices

Each circuit breaker equipped with a Micrologic 5 trip unit can be identified using
the communication network:
bb serial number
bb firmware version
bb hardware version
bb device name assigned by the user.
This information together with that previously described provides a clear view of the
state of the installed devices.
Note: please refer to page A-21 for more details on display formats.

Functions Operating-assistance functions
and characteristics
characteristics
PB111138_L25.eps
PB111801-21_r.eps
PB103360_r2.eps
Micrologic 5 trip unit operating assistance functions Type Display
A E Trip Unit Front Display
LCD Module
Operating Assistance
Personalized alarms
Settings Up to 10 alarms assigned to all A and E measurements b b - (1)
Phase lead/lag, four quadrants, phase sequence, display priority selection - b - (1)
Display Alarms and tripping b b - (1)
Remote indicators Activation of two dedicated contacts on SDx module b b - (1)
Time-stamped histories
Trips (last 17) Cause of tripping Ir, Isd, Ii b b - (1)
(time-stamping with ms)

Alarms (last 10) b b - (1)
Operating events Event types Modification of protection setting by rotary switch - b - (1)
(last 10) Opening of keypad lock - b - (1)
Test using keypad - b - (1)
Test using external tool - b - (1)
Time setting (date and time) - b - (1)
Reset for maximum, minimum and energy meter b b b b

Time stamping Presentation Date and time, text, status b b - (1)
Time-stamped event tables

Protection settings Setting modified (value displayed) Ir tr Isd tsd Ii lg tg b b - (1)
Time-stamping Date and time of modification b b - (1)
Previous value Value before modification b b - (1)
Min/Max Values monitored IA IB IC IN Ii b b - (1)
Time-stamping Date and time of min/max record b b - (1)
Previous value Min/max value

Counter Mechanical cycles (2) Assignable to an alarm b b - (1)
Electrical cycles (2)

Assignable to an alarm
Trips One per type of trip
Alarms One for each type of alarm
Hours Total operating time (hours)
Indicator Contact wear % b b - (1)
b b
Load profile Hours at different load levels % of hours in four current ranges: 0 - 49 % In, b b - (1)
50 - 79 % In, 80 - 89 % In and u 90 % In b b
(1) Available through the communication network only.
(2) The BSCM (page A-29) is required for these functions.

PowerPact H-, J-, and L-frame
circuit breakers
Energy Management

Contact wear
Each time PowerPact H-, J-, and L-frame circuit breakers open, the Micrologic 5
trip unit measures the interrupted current and increments the contact-wear indicator
as a function of the interrupted current, according to test results stored in memory.
Breaking under normal load conditions results in a very slight increment. The
indicator value may be read on the front display module. It provides an estimation
of contact wear calculated on the basis of the cumulative forces affecting the
circuit breaker. When the indicator reaches 80 %, it is advised to replace the circuit
breaker to ensure the availability of the protected equipment.
Circuit breaker load profile
Micrologic 5 trip unit calculate the load profile of the circuit breaker protecting a
load circuit. The profile indicates the percentage of the total operating time at four
current levels (% of In):
bb 0 to 49 % In
bb 50 to 79 % In
bb 80 to 89 % In
bb u 90 % In.
This information can be used to optimize use of the protected devices or to plan
ahead for expansion.

Functions Switchboard-display functions
and characteristics Micrologic E trip unit
with COM option (ULP)
Micrologic trip unit measurement capabilities come

into full play with the FDM121 display. It connects
FDM121 switchboard display
An FDM121 display unit can be connected to ULP communication devices using a
with a circuit breaker ULP cord and displays the prefabricated cord to display all measurements, alarms, histories and event tables,
Micrologic trip unit information. The result is a true maintenance indicators, and management of installed devices on a screen.
integrated unit combining a circuit breaker and a The FMD121 display unit requires a 24 V DC power supply.
power meter. Additional operating assistance The FDM121 is a display that can be integrated with the PowerPact H/J/L/P/R or
functions can also be displayed. Masterpact NW/NT circuit breaker systems. It uses the sensors and processing
capacity of the Micrologic trip unit. It is easy to use and requires no special
software or settings. It is immediately operational when connected to the circuit
breaker by a ULP cord.
It also provides monitoring and control with the use of the I/O application module,
the motor mechanism module, or the circuit breaker communication module.
The FDM121 has a large display, but requires very little depth. The anti-glare
graphic screen is backlit for very easy reading even under poor ambient lighting
and at sharp angles.
Display of Micrologic trip unit measurements and alarms
The FDM121 is intended to display Micrologic trip unit measurements, alarms and
operating information. It cannot be used to modify the protection settings.
Measurements can be easily accessed using a menu. All user-defined alarms are
automatically displayed. The display mode depends on the priority level selected
during alarm set-up:
bb high priority: a pop-up window displays the time-stamped description of the
alarm and the orange alarm LED flashes
bb medium priority: the orange Alarm LED goes continuously on
bb low priority: no display on the screen.
All faults resulting in a trip automatically produce a high-priority alarm, without any
special settings required. In all cases, the alarm history is updated. The Micrologic
trip unit saves the information in its non-volatile memory in the event of an FDM121
power loss.
Status indications and remote control
When the circuit breaker is equipped with the Breaker Communications Module
(BSCM), the FDM121 display can also be used to view circuit breaker status
conditions:
bb O/F: ON/OFF
bb SD: trip indication
bb SDE: fault-trip indication (overload, short-circuit, ground fault).
PB103582-32.eps
PB103807-32.eps
When the circuit breaker system is equipped with the I/O application module, the
FDM121 can monitor and control:
bb cradle management
bb circuit breaker operation
bb light and load control
bb custom applications.
When the circuit breaker is equipped with the communication motor operator etc.,
the FDM121 display can also be used to control (open/close) the circuit breaker.
Two operating mode are available:
bb local mode: open/close commands are enabled from the FDM121 while disabled
FDM121 display. Surface mount accessory.
from the communication network
bb remote mode: open/close commands are disabled from the FDM121 while
enabled from the communication network.
bb A 3.78 x 3.78 x 1.18 in. (96 x 96 x 30 mm) screen requiring 0.39 in. (10 mm)
PB103581-31.eps
behind the door (or 0.79 in. [20 mm] when the 24 V power supply connector is
used)
bb White backlighting
bb Wide viewing angle: vertical ±60°, horizontal ±30°
bb High resolution: excellent reading of graphic symbols
bb Alarm LED: flashing orange for alarm pick-up, steady orange after operator reset
if the alarm condition persists.
bb Operating temperature range: +14 °F (-10 °C) to +131 °F (+55 °C)
bb CE / UL / CSA marking
bb 24 V DC power supply, with tolerances 24 V -20 % (19.2 V) to 24 V +10 % (26.4 V).
When the FDM121 is connected to the communication network, the 24 V DC can
be supplied by the communication system wiring system. Consumption is 40 mA.
Mounting
The FDM121 is easily installed in a switchboard.
bb Standard door cut-out is 3.6 x 3.6 in. (92 x 92 mm)
bb Attached using clips.
To avoid a cut-out in the door, an accessory is available for surface mounting by
Connection with FDM121 display unit.
drilling only two 0.87 in. (22 mm) diameter holes.
Connection
The FDM121 is equipped with a 24 V DC terminal block:
bb A plug-in type terminal block with two wire inputs per point for easy daisy-
chaining

1 Escape bb A power supply range of 24 V DC -20% (19.2 V) to 24 V DC +10% (26.4 V).
I
2 Down
A 24 V DC type auxiliary power supply must be connected to a single point on
the ULP system. The FDM121 display has a two-point screw connector on the
I1 310 A I2 315 A
DB112135.eps
3 OK rear panel of the module for this purpose. The ULP module to which the auxiliary
% %
I3 302 A IN 23 A 4 Up power supply is connected distributes the supply via the ULP cable to all the ULP
5 Context modules connected to the system and therefore also to Micrologic trip unit. See
wiring diagram later in this section
% %
ESC
6 Alarm LED
bb Two RJ45 jacks.
The Micrologic trip unit connects to the internal communication terminal block
on the PowerPact or Compact circuit breaker with the circuit breaker ULP cord.
Connection to one of the RJ45 connectors on the FDM121 automatically establishes
1 2 3 4 5 6 communication between the Micrologic trip unit and the FDM121 and supplies
power to the Micrologic trip unit measurement functions.
Produit Id Metering
When the second connector is not used, it must be fitted with a line terminator.
Navigation
DB112136.eps
DB112138.eps
I
Micrologic 5.3A
Serial number: P07451

U-V
Five buttons are used for intuitive and fast navigation.
Part number: LU432091
PQS
The “Context” button may be used to select the type of display (digital, bargraph,
Firmware: 1.02
E
analogue).
The user can select the display language (Chinese, English, French, German,
F - PF - cos Φ
ESC ESC OK
Italian, Portuguese, Spanish, etc.).

Screens
Main menu
Product identification. Metering: sub-menu. When powered up, the FDM121 screen automatically displays the ON/OFF status
of the device.
NonResettableEnergy 1/3 Load Profile 2/3
Quick view Alarms

DB125912.eps
DB112140.eps
EpIN 5111947 kWh 0..49% 610 H
EpOut 12345678 kWh 50...79% 15 H
80..89% 360 H
Metering Services.
90..100% 3H
ESC ESC Control
When not in use, the screen is not backlit. Backlighting can be activated by
Metering: meter. pressing one of the buttons. It goes off after three minutes.
Services.
Fast access to essential information
bb “Quick view” provides access to five screens that display a summary of essential
operating information (I, U-V, f, P, E, THD, circuit breaker ON/OFF).
Access to detailed information
bb "Metering" can be used to display the measurement data (I, U-V, f, P, Q, S, E,
THD, PF) with the corresponding min/max values
bb “Alarms” displays active alarms and the alarm history
bb “Services” provides access to the operation counters, energy and maximum
ammeter reset function, maintenance indicators, identification of modules connected
to the internal bus, and FDM121 internal settings (language, contrast, etc.)
Communication components and FDM121 connections
The FDM121 degree of protection is IP54 in front. IP54 is maintained after
switchboard mounting by using the supplied gasket during installation.

Functions FDM121 Connections
and characteristics Communication components
and connections
Communication components and connections, IFM
Modbus
A
DB417734.eps
24 V DC
B1
J
I
J
C
4.3 ft. 9.8 ft.
(1.3 m) (3 m)
D E
F
0.98 ft.
(0.35 m) G
OK
Mode
Modbus
DB418896.eps
ULP
24 V DC
A Modbus network Connections

PowerPact circuit breaker is connected to the I/O module or FDM121 display unit via
B Modbus interface the internal terminal block for the NSX cord equipped with an RJ45 connector:
B1 B1: IFM Modbus interface bb Cord is available in three lengths: 0.98 ft. (0.35 m), 4.3 ft. (1.3 m) and 9.8 ft. (3 m)
B2 B2: IFE Modbus interface
bb Lengths up to 32.9 ft. (10 m) are possible using extensions.
The FDM121 display unit and the I/O module are connected to:
C NSX cord vv the IFM Modbus interface by a communication cable with RJ45 connectors on both
D Internal terminal block for communication ends
via NSX cord or
E BSCM module vv the IFE Ethernet interface module by a communication cable with RJ45 connectors
on both ends.
F Prefabricated wiring
G Micrologic trip unit
H FDM121 display
I RJ45 cable
J Line terminator (on unused connector if applicable)
K I/O module

Communication components and connections, IFE
Ethernet
DB417735.eps
24 V DC
+24V
0V
B2
Eth2
Eth1
J
I
J
R
C
4.3 ft. 9.8 ft.
(1.3 m) (3 m)
D E
F
0.98 ft.
(0.35 m) G
OK
Mode
Ethernet
DB418896.eps
ULP
24 V DC
A Modbus network Connections

PowerPact circuit breaker is connected to the I/O module or FDM121 display unit via
B Modbus interface the internal terminal block for the NSX cord equipped with an RJ45 connector:
B1 B1: IFM Modbus interface bb Cord is available in three lengths: 0.98 ft. (0.35 m), 4.3 ft. (1.3 m) and 9.8 ft. (3 m)
B2 B2: IFE Modbus interface
bb Lengths up to 32.9 ft. (10 m) are possible using extensions.
The FDM121 display unit and the I/O module are connected to:
C NSX cord vv the IFM Modbus interface by a communication cable with RJ45 connectors on both
D Internal terminal block for communication ends
via NSX cord or
E BSCM module vv the IFE Ethernet interface module by a communication cable with RJ45 connectors
on both ends.
H FDM121 display
I RJ45 cable
K I/O module

Functions Switchboard-display functions
and characteristics Micrologic E trip unit
with COM Ethernet gateway
The Micrologic trip unit measurement capabilities are

fully utilized with the FDM128 display. The FDM128
The FDM128 display unit can be connected to a Micrologic COM option (BSCM).
display connects to Ethernet communication using the
It uses the sensors and processing capacity of the Micrologic trip unit and requires
RJ45 port and displays Micrologic trip unit information.
no special software or settings. The FDM128 is a large display, but requires very
The result is an integrated unit combining a circuit little depth. The anti-glare graphic screen is backlit for easy reading even under
breaker with a power meter. Additional operating poor ambient lighting and at sharp angles.
assistance functions can also be displayed. The FDM128 display is designed to manage up to eight devices (PowerPact
H/J/L/P/R or Masterpact NW/NT circuit breakers).
Display of Micrologic trip unit measurements and trips
The FDM128 is intended to display Micrologic 5 trip unit measurements, trips, and
operating information. It cannot be used to modify the protection settings.
bb Measurements may be easily accessed using a menu
bb Trips are automatically displayed
bb A pop-up window displays the time-stamped description of the trip.
Status indications
When the circuit breaker is equipped with the COM option (BSCM) (including its
set of sensors) the FDM128 display can also be used to view circuit breaker status
conditions:
bb O/F: ON/OFF
bb SDE: Fault-trip indication (overload, short-circuit, ground fault)
bb PF: ready to close
bb CE, CD, CT cradle management with I/O application module.
Remote control
When the circuit breaker is equipped with the COM option (BSCM) (including
connection to a communicating motor operator), the FDM128 display can also be
used to operate (open/close) the circuit breaker.
Two operating mode are available:
bb local mode: open/close commands are enabled from the FDM128 while disabled
from the communication network
bb remote mode: open/close commands are disabled from the FDM128 while
enabled from the communication network.
PB111801-32_r.eps
PB111802-32_r.eps
bb 4.54 x 3.40 in. (115.2 x 86.4 mm) with 5.7 in. (145 mm) QVGA display 320 x 240
pixels
bb Color TFT LCD, with LED backlight.
bb Wide viewing angle: vertical ±80°, horizontal ±70°.
bb High resolution: excellent reading of graphic symbols.
bb Operating temperature range: +14 °F (-10 °C) to +131 °F (+55 °C)
bb CE / UL / CSA marking
bb 24 V DC power supply, -10%/+20% (limit 20.4 - 28.8 V DC)
FDM128 display. Surface mount accessory.
bb Consumption 6.8 W.
Mounting
The FDM128 is easily installed in a switchboard.
bb Standard door hole Ø 0.87 in. (22 mm)
bb The FDM128 degree of protection is IP65 at the touch screen cover. IP54 is
maintained after installation by using the supplied gasket.
PB111805-32_r.eps
Connection
The FDM128 is equipped with:
bb A 24 V DC terminal block:
vv with a power supply range of 24 V DC (limit 20.4 - 28.8 V DC)
vv secures to the FDM128 display unit using a 2-point screw connector on the rear
panel of the module.
bb One RJ45 Ethernet jacks.
The Micrologic trip unit connects to the internal communication terminal block on
the PowerPact circuit breakers through the circuit breaker ULP cord and Ethernet
connection through the IFE.

Navigation
DB414405.eps
DB414407.eps
A touch screen is used for intuitive and fast navigation.
20.12.2011 12:00:05 20.12.2011 12:00:05
Quick view Product ID Information Reset all

Quick view Energy

The user can select the display language (Chinese, English, French, German,
Measures
Counter
Operation xxx
Measures
Ep 11 318 kWh Italian, Portuguese, Spanish, etc.).
Alarm history Alarm history
Eq 257 kVArh
Screens
Trip SDE xxx
Control
Close command xxx
Control
Es 13 815 kVAh
Maintenance Maintenance
ESC 3/3 ESC 6/7 Main menu
Product identification. Metering: meter.

Quick view Alarms
Metering Maintenance
DB414408.eps
Control
20.12.2011 12:00:05
Quick view Product ID Information Reset all

Load profile
Measures
Alarm history
0 to 49%
Control
50 to 79%
80 to 89% When not in use, the screen is automatically shifted to low back-lighting.
Fast access to essential information
Maintenance 90 to 100%
ESC 2/3
bb “Quick view” provides access to five screens that display a summary of essential
operating information (I, U-V, f, P, E, THD, circuit breaker ON / OFF).
Services. Access to detailed information
bb "Metering" can be used to display the measurement data (I, U-V, f, P, Q, S, E,
THD, PF) with the corresponding min/max values
bb “Alarms” displays the trip history
bb “Maintenance” provides access to the operation counters, energy and maximum
ammeter reset function, maintenance indicators, identification of modules connected
to the internal bus and FDM128 internal settings (language, contrast, etc.).

Functions FDM128 Connections
and characteristics Communication components
and connections
Communication components and FDM128 connections

The FDM128 degree of protection is IP65 at the touch screen cover. IP54 is
maintained after installation by using the supplied gasket.
Connections
PowerPact circuit breaker is connected to the I/O module or
FDM121 display unit via the internal terminal block for the
NSX cord equipped with an RJ45 connector:
bb Cord is available in three lengths: 0.98 ft. (0.35 m), 4.3 ft.
(1.3 m) and 9.8 ft. (3 m)
bb Lengths up to 32.9 ft. (10 m) are possible using
extensions.
The FDM121 display unit and the I/O module are connected to: Communication components and connections
vv the IFM Modbus interface by a communication cable with
RJ45 connectors on both ends
or
vv the IFE Ethernet interface module by a communication
DB417735bis.eps
cable with RJ45 connectors on both ends.
Ethernet
24 V DC
+24V
0V
B2
Eth2
Eth1
4.3 ft. 9.8 ft.

(1.3 m) (3 m) J
I
J
R
0.98 ft. H
(0.35 m)
DB418896.eps
D E
F
G
OK
Mode
A FDM128
B IFE Modbus interface
C NSX cord Ethernet
D I nternal terminal block for communication ULP
via NSX cord 24 V DC
E BSCM module
H FDM121 display
I RJ45 cable
K I/O module

Enerlin’X communication system
Products overview
Enerlin'X communication system provides access Ethernet has become the universal link between switchboards, computers and
to status, electrical values and devices control using communication devices inside the building. The large amount of information which
Ethernet and Modbus SL communication protocols. can be transferred makes the connection of Enerlin'X digital system to hosted web
services of Schneider Electric a reality. More advantages are offered to integrators
thanks to configuration web pages available remotely or on the local Ethernet network.
Modbus SL is the most widely used communication protocol in industrial networks.

It operates in master-slave mode. The devices (slaves) communicate one after
the other with a gateway (master).
G G
G G
H D
F
B
Ethernet
Modbus SL
ULP is a fast communication link dedicated
ULP
to circuit breaker monitoring and control.

Functions Enerlin’X communication system
and characteristics
Products overview
Enerlin'X communication devices and displays

Name Function Port Bin. Analog. Bin.
Input Input Output
(to device) (to server)
Com'X 200 Energy Server Modbus Master Ethernet cable 6 2 -

with Ethernet Gateway® + WiFi
A function
FDM128 Ethernet LCD colour - Ethernet - - -

touch screen
B
FDM121 LCD display for ULP - - - -

C circuit breaker
IFE Ethernet interface Modbus Master Ethernet - - -

interface + & Gateway® & ULP
gateway
D IFE Ethernet interface for ULP Ethernet - - -
interface circuit breakers
IFM Modbus interface ULP Modbus Slave - - -

for circuit breakers
E
I/O Input/Output application ULP ULP 6 1 1

module for circuit breakers

Communication
Communication wiring system
Wiring system ULP

The wiring system is designed for low-voltage power switchboards. Installation
requires no tools or special skills.
The prefabricated wiring ensures both data transmission (Modbus protocol)
and 24 V DC power distribution for the communications modules on the Micrologic
control units.
PB108180.eps
G
A
E
F
C
Q
H
I P
L
K P L N D
A BCM ULP: Breaker Communication Module with ULP port L IFE: Ethernet interface LV434010 or LV434011
B Micrologic control unit M External 24 V DC power supply module
C Breaker ULP cord 0.35 m LV434195 N IFM: Modbus-SL interface TRV00210
1.3 m LV434196
O Com'X 200
3m LV434197
P ULP cable 0.3 m TRV00803
D Modbus cable 0.6 m TRV00806
1m TRV00810
E Ethernet cable 2m TRV00820
F FDM121: Front Display Module TRV00121 3m TRV00830
5m TRV00850
G FDM128: Front Display Module LV434128
H Smart Link A9XMSB11 Q NSX cord 0.35 m LV434200
1.3 m LV434201
I Acti9 3m LV434202
Ethernet ULP
J ULP line terminators TRV00880
Modbus 24 V DC
K Input/Output interface LV434063

Functions
and characteristics
Overview of functions
Available information and functions
PB103364.eps
Micrologic trip units for 3 poles, PowerPact circuit breakers.
Available functions Micrologic type

Status indications
ON/OFF (O/F) E
Spring charged CH E
Ready to close E
Fault-trip SDE E
Connected / disconnected / test position CE/CD/CT (CCM only) E
Controls
MX1 open E
XF close E
Measurements
Instantaneous measurement information E
Averaged measurement information E
Maximeter / minimeter E
Energy metering E
Demand for current and power E
Power quality
Operating assistance
Protection and alarm settings
Histories E
Time stamped event tables
Maintenance indicators E
BSCM module
Functions
The optional BSCM Breaker Status & Control Module
is used to acquire device status indications and
control the communicating remote-control function.
It includes a memory used to manage the
maintenance indicators.
Status indications
Embedded trip unit and communication module Indication of device status:
Micrologic trip unit O/F, SD and SDE.
All PowerPact circuit breakers are equipped with Maintenance indicators
The BSCM module manages the following indicators:
PB103364.eps
a Micrologic trip unit. This adjustable unit is mainly

designed for tripping the circuit breaker in case of bb mechanical operation counter
necessity and monitoring the downstream circuit. bb electrical operation counter
Alarms may be programmed for remote indications. bb history of status indications.
Electrical measurements, operation data for predictive It is possible to assign an alarm to the operation
maintenance, are provided for local display or distant counters.
monitoring. Controls
The module can be used to carry out communicating
remote control operations: (open, close and reset) in
different modes (manual, auto).
PB103786.eps
Mounting
The BSCM module can be installed on all PowerPact.
It simply clips into the auxiliary contact slots. It
occupies the slots of one O/F contact and one
SDE contact. The BSCM is supplied with 24 V DC
power automatically via the NSX cord when the
BSCM module. communication system is installed.

IFE Ethernet interface
IFE interface, IFE interface + gateway description

PB112059-55.eps
Introduction
The IFE interface and IFE interface + gateway enable LV circuit breakers
as Masterpact NT/NW, Compact NSX or Powerpact to be connected to an Ethernet
network.
IFE interface: ref. LV434010

Provides an Ethernet access to a single LV circuit breaker.
Function
Interface - one circuit breaker is connected to the IFE interface via its ULP port.
IFE interface + gateway: ref. LV434011

Provides an Ethernet access to one or several LV circuit breakers.
Functions
bb Interface - one circuit breaker is connected to the IFE interface via its ULP port.
bb Gateway: several circuit breakers on a Modbus network are connected via
IFE interface, ref.: LV434010 the IFE interface + gateway master Modbus port.
IFE interface, IFE interface + gateway features

bb Dual 10/100 Mbps Ethernet port for simple daisy chain connection.
bb Device profile web service for discovery of the IFE interface, IFE interface +
gateway
DB416830.eps
on the LAN.
bb ULP compliant for localization of the IFE interface in the switchboard.
bb Ethernet interface for Compact, Masterpact and Powerpact circuit breakers.
bb Gateway for Modbus-SL connected devices (IFE interface + gateway only).
bb Embedded set-up web pages.
bb Embedded monitoring web pages.
bb Embedded control web pages.
bb Built-in e-mail alarm notification.
Mounting
The IFE interface, IFE interface + gateway are DIN rail mounting devices. A stacking
accessory enables the user to connect several IFMs (ULP to Modbus interfaces) to
an IFE interface + gateway without additional wiring.
24 V DC power supply
IFE interface + gateway, ref.: LV434011 The IFE interface, IFE interface + gateway must always be supplied with 24 V DC.
The IFMs stacked to an IFE interface + gateway are supplied by the IFE interface +
gateway, thus it is not necessary to supply them separately. It is recommended to
use an UL listed and recognized limited voltage/limited current or a class 2 power
supply with a 24 V DC, 3 A maximum.
DB406743.eps
IFE interface, IFE interface + gateway firmware update

The firmware can be updated using:
bb FTP
bb customer engineering tool.
Required circuit breaker communication modules
The connection to IFE interface or IFE interface + gateway requires a
communication module embedded into the circuit breaker:
bb Compact NSX: NSX cord and/or BSCM module
The insulated NSX cord is mandatory for system voltages greater than 480 V AC.
When the second ULP RJ45 connector is not used, it must be closed with an ULP
terminator (TRV00880).
Network communication interface
Characteristic Value
Type of interface module Modbus RTU, RS485 serial connection
Modbus TCP/IP Ethernet
Transmission Modbus RS485 Transfer rate: 9,600...19,200 Baud
Medium Double shielded twisted pair
Impedance 120 Ω
Ethernet Transfer rate : 10/100 Mbps
Medium STP, Cat5e, straight cable
Structure Type Modbus, Ethernet
Method Master/Slave
Device type Modbus Master
Ethernet Server
Turnaround time Modbus 10 ms
Ethernet 1 ms
Maximum length of cable Modbus 1000 m
Ethernet 100 m
Type of bus connector Modbus 4-pin connector
Ethernet RJ45 (Shielded)

Functions IFE Ethernet interface
and characteristics
General characteristics
Environmental characteristics
DB417466.eps
24VDC
Conforming to standards UL 508, UL 60950, IEC 60950, 60947-6-2
Certification cUIUs, GOST, FCC, CE
Ambient temperature -20 to +70 °C (-4 to +158 °F)
Relative humidity 5–85 %
ETH1 ETH2
Level of pollution Level 3
Flame resistance ULV0
Mechanical characteristics
Shock resistance 1000 m/s2
Resistance to sinusoidal vibrations -5 Hz < f < 8.4 Hz
Electrical characteristics
A B Resistance to electromagnetic Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-3
discharge
I J K Immunity to radiated fields 10 V/m
Immunity to surges Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-5
ETH1 ETH2
Consumption 120 mA at 24 V input
Physical characteristics
Dimensions 72 x 105 x 71 mm (2.83 x 4.13 x 2.79 in.)
IFE
IFE-XX.YY.ZZ (factory set)
Mounting DIN rail
ETH1 LK/10-100/ACT
Weight 182.5 g (0.41 lb)
ETH2 LK/10-100/ACT
C Degree of protection of the installed IO bb On the front panel (wall mounted enclosure):
Module Status D IP4x
Modbus-SL
Network Status
E bb Connectors: IP2x
bb Other parts: IP3x
T LV434011
F Connections Screw type terminal blocks
Technical characteristics - 24 V DC power supply
Power supply type Regulated switch type
R
Rated power 72 W
Input voltage 100–120 V AC for single phase
200–500 V AC phase-to-phase
H G PFC filter With IEC 61000-3-2
Output voltage 24 V DC
Power supply out current 3A
Note: it is recommended to use an UL listed/UL listed recognized limited voltage/Limited current
or a class 2 power supply with a 24 V DC, 3 A maximum.
IFE web page description

Monitoring web page
Real time data 67 bb
Device logging bb
Control web page
Single device control bb
Diagnostics web page
Statistics bb
L Device information bb
IMU information bb
A Ethernet 1 and Ethernet 2 communication port. Read device registers bb
B 24 V DC power supply terminal block. Communication check bb
C Ethernet communication LEDs: Maitenance web page
bb yellow: 10 Mb Maintenance log bb
bb green: 100 Mb. Maintenance counters bb
D Module status LED: Setup web page
bb steady off: no power
Device localization/name bb
bb steady green: device operational
bb steady red: major fault Ethernet configuration (dual port) bb
bb flashing green: standby IP configuration bb
bb flashing red: minor fault Modbus TCP/IP filtering bb
bb flashing green/red: self-test. Serial port bb
E Network status LED: Date and time bb
bb steady off: not power/no valid IP address E-mail server configuration bb
bb steady green: connected, valid IP address Alarms to be e-mailed bb
bb steady orange: default IP address
Device list bb
bb steady red: duplicated IP address
bb flashing green/red: Self-test. Device logging bb
Device log export bb
F Sealable transparent cover.
SNMP parameters bb
G ULP status LED.
Documentation links bb
H Test button (accessible closed cover).
Preferences bb
I Locking pad.
Advanced services control bb
J Modbus traffic status LED (LV434011 only). User accounts bb
K Device name label. Web page access bb
L ULP ports.

IFM Modbus communication
interface
Function
A IFM - Modbus communication interface - is required for connection of a Masterpact
or Compact to a Modbus network as long as this circuit breaker is provided with
a ULP (Universal Logic Plug) port. The port is available on respectively a BCM ULP
or BSCM embedded module.
The IFM is defined as an IMU (Intelligent Modular Unit) in the ULP connection System
documentation.
Once connected, the circuit breaker is considered as a slave by the Modbus master.
Its electrical values, alarm status, open/close signals car be monitored or controlled
by a Programmable Logic Controller or any other system.
Characteristics
ULP port
IFM Modbus communication interface. 2 RJ45 sockets, internal parallel wiring.
Ref.: TRV00210. bb Connection of a single circuit breaker (eventually via its I/O application module).
bb A ULP line terminator or an FDM121 display unit must be connected to the second
RJ45 ULP socket.
The RJ45 sockets deliver a 24 VDC supply fed from the Modbus socket.
Built-in test function, for checking the correct connection to the circuit breaker
and FDM121 display unit.
Modbus slave port

bb Top socket for screw-clamp connector, providing terminals for:
vv 24 VDC input supply (0 V, +24 V)
vv Modbus line (D1, D2, Gnd).
bb Lateral socket, for Din-rail stackable connector.
Both top and lateral sockets are internally parallel wired.
bb Multiple IFM can be stacked, thus sharing a common power supply and Modbus
line without individual wiring.
bb On the front face:
vv Modbus address setting (1 to 99): 2 coded rotary switches
vv Modbus locking pad: enables or disable the circuit breaker remote control
and modification of IFM parameters.
bb Self adjusting communication format (Baud rate, parity).
DB417545.eps
6
5
B
4 7
3 8
2 9
1 0
6
5
4 7
3 8
2 9
1 0
C
D
Test E
I H G
A M
odbus screw clamp E ULP activity LED.
connector.
F Test button.
B M
odbus address
G Mechanical lock.
switches.
H ULP RJ45 connectors.
C Modbus traffic LED.
I Stacking accessory
D Modbus locking pad.
connection.

Functions IFM Modbus communication
and characteristics
interface
Technical characteristics
IFM Modbus communication interface
Dimensions 18 x 72 x 96 mm
Maximum number of stacked IFM 12
Degree of protection Part projecting beyond IP4x
of the installed the escutcheon
module Other module parts IP3x
Connectors IP2x
Operating temperature -25...+70 °C
Power supply voltage 24 V DC -20 %/+10 % (19.2...26.4 V DC)
Consumption Typical 21 mA/24 V DC at 20 °C
Maximum 30 mA/19.2 V DC at 60 °C
Certification
CE IEC/EN 60947-1
UL UL 508 - Industrial Control Equipment
CSA No. 142-M1987 - Process Control
Equipment
bb CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 0-M91 -
General requirements - Canadian Electrical
Code Part
bb CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 14-05 -
Industrial Control Equipment
Simplified IFM installation

Staking IFM
DB406714.eps
DB417491.eps
Stacking accessories Up to 12 stacked IFM
Stacking an IFE interface + gateway with IFMs

HRB49218-01_p49.eps

I/O application module
Description
The I/O input/output application module for LV breaker is part of an ULP system
DB416829.eps
with built-in functionalities and applications to enhance the application needs. The
ULP system architecture can be built without any restrictions using the wide range
of circuit breakers.
The I/O application is compliant with the ULP system specifications.
Two I/O application module can be connected in the same ULP network.
The ranges of LV circuit breakers enhanced by the I/O are:

bb Masterpact NW
bb Masterpact NT
bb Compact NS1600b-3200
bb Compact NS630b-1600
bb Compact NSX100-630 A.
I/O input/output interface for LV breaker resources

The I/O application module ressources are:
bb 6 digital inputs that are self powered for either NO and NC dry contact or pulse
counter
bb 3 digital outputs that are bistable relay (5 A maximum)
bb 1 analog input for Pt100 temperature sensor.
Pre-defined applications
Pre-defined application adds new functions to the IMU in a simple way:
bb selection by the application rotary switch on the I/O, defining the application with
pre-defined input/output assignment and wiring diagram.
bb no additional setting with the customer engineering tool required.
The resources not assigned to the pre-defined application are free for additional
user-defined applications:
bb cradle management
bb breaker operation
bb light and load control
bb custom.
User-defined applications
User-defined applications are processed by the I/O in addition to the pre-defined
application selected.
The user-defined applications are available depending on:
bb the pre-defined application selected
bb the I/O resources (inputs and outputs) not used by the application.
The resources required by user-defined applications are assigned using the
customer engineering tool:
bb protection
bb control
bb energy management
bb monitoring.
Mounting
The I/O is a DIN rail mounting device.
Application rotary switch

The application rotary switch enables the selection of the pre-defined application.
It has 9 positions and each position is assigned to a pre-defined application.
The factory set position of the switch is pre-defined application 1.
4 5 6
Setting locking pad
DB416827.eps
3 7
2 The setting locking pad on the front panel of the I/O enables the setting of the I/O
8
1 9 by the customer engineering tool.
DB416828.eps
DB416828.eps

Functions I/O application module
and characteristics
Environmental characteristics
DB417467.eps
Conforming to standards UL 508, UL 60950, IED 60950, 60947-6-2

Certification cUIUs, GOST, FCC, CE
Ambient temperature -20 to +70 °C (-4 to +158 °F)
Relative humidity 5–85 %
Level of pollution Level 3
I1 C I2 I3 C I4 I5 C I6
Flame resistance ULV0
Mechanical characteristics
Shock resistance 1000 m/s2
Resistance to sinusoidal -5 Hz < f < 8.4 Hz
vibrations
Electrical characteristics
A B
Resistance to electromagnetic Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-3
discharge
Immunity to radiated fields 10 V/m
Immunity to surges Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-5
24VDC I1 C I2 I3 C I4 I5 C I6 Consumption 165 mA
Physical characteristics
Dimensions 71.7 x 116 x 70.6 mm (2.83 x 4.56 x 2.78 in.)
C
Mounting DIN rail
4 5 6
M 3 7 I1
AI D Weight 229.5 g (0.51 lb)
2 8
Degree of protection of the bb On the front panel (wall mounted enclosure): IP4x
1 9 I2
APP
I3 O1
L
installed IO bb IO parts: IP3x
I4 O2 E
I5
O3
bb Connectors: IP2x
I6 F Connections Screw type terminal blocks
K T
G Technical characteristics - 24 V DC power supply
J IO LV434063 Power supply type Regulated switch type
Rated power 72 W
Input voltage 100–120 V AC for single phase
200–500 V AC phase-to-phase
PFC filter With IEC 61000-3-2
O1 O2 O3 A1
13 14 23 24 33 34 T1 T2
Output voltage 24 V DC
Power supply out current 3A
Note: it is recommended to use an UL listed/UL listed recognized limited voltage/Limited current
I H or a class 2 power supply with a 24 V DC, 3 A maximum.
Digital inputs
Digital input type Self powered digital input with current limitations as per
IEC 61131-2 type 2 standards (7 mA)
Input limit values at state 1 19.8–25.2 V DC, 6.1–8.8 mA
13 14 23 24 33 34 T1 T2
(close)
Input limit values at state 0 0–19.8 V DC, 0 mA
(open)
Maximum cable length 10 m (33 ft)
1
Note: for a length greater than 10 m (33 ft) and up to 300 m (1,000 ft), it is mandatory to use a
2 shielded twisted cable. The shield cable is connected to the IO functional ground of the IO.
Digital outputs
Digital output type Bistable relay
Rated load 5 A at 250 V AC
O N Rated carry current 5A
Maximum switching voltage 380 V AC, 125 V DC
Maximum switch current 5A
A 24 V DC power supply terminal block.
Maximum switching power 1250 VA, 150 W
B Digital input terminal block: 6 inputs, 3 commons and 1 shield.
Minimum permissible load 10 mA at 5 V DC
C 6 input status LEDs.
Contact resistance 30 mΩ
D Analog input status LED.
Maximum operating frequency bb 18000 operations/hr (Mechanical)
E 3 output status LEDs.
bb 1800 operations/hr (Electrical)
F I/O identification labels.
Digital output relay protection External fuse of 5 A or less
G Sealable transparent cover. by an external fuse
H Analog input terminal block.
Maximum cable length 10 m (33 ft)
I Digital output terminal blocks.
Analog inputs
J ULP status LED.
The IO analog input can be connected to a Pt100 temperature sensor
K Test/reset button (accessible with cover closed).
Range -30 to 200 °C -22 to 392 °F
L Setting locking pad.
Accuracy ±2 °C from -30 to 20 °C ±3.6 °F from -22 to 68 °F
M Application rotary switch: 1 to 9.
±1 °C from 20 to 140 °C ±1.8 °F from 68 to 284 °F
N Switch for IO addressing (IO 1 or IO 2). ±2 °C from 140 to 200 °C ±3.6 °F from 284 to 392 °F
O ULP connectors. Refresh interval 5s 5s

Communication
Communications modules, IFM and IFE
All PowerPact devices can be equipped with the Four functional levels
communication function via a prewired connection The PowerPact can be integrated in a Modbus or Ethernet communication
system and a Modbus or Ethernet network interface. environment. Four functional levels can be used separately or combined.
The interface can be connected directly or via the Communication of status indications
FDM121 switchboard display unit. Four functional This level is compatible with all Compact NSX circuit breakers, whatever the trip
levels can be combined to adapt to all supervision unit, and with all switch-disconnectors. Using the BSCM module, the following
requirements. information is accessible:
bb ON/OFF position (O/F)
bb trip indication (SD)
bb fault-trip indication (SDE).
Communication of commands
Also available on all circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors, this level
(communicating remote control) can be used to:
bb open
bb close
bb reset.
Communication of measurements with Micrologic 5 E
This level provides access to all available information:
bb instantaneous values E
bb demand values E
bb maximeters/minimeters E
bb energy metering E
bb demand current and power E
bb power quality E.
Communication of operating assistance with Micrologic 5 E
bb protection and alarm settings E
bb time-stamped histories E
bb event tables E
bb maintenance indicators E.
Modbus principle
The Modbus RS 485 (RTU protocol) system is an open bus on which
communicating Modbus devices (Compact NS with Modbus COM, Power Meter
PM700, PM800, Sepam, Vigilohm, Compact NSX, etc.) are installed. All types of
PLCs and microcomputers may be connected to the bus.
Addresses
The Modbus communication parameters (address, baud rate, parity) are entered
using the keypad on the Micrologic E. For a switch-disconnector, it is necessary to
use the Electrical Asset Manager or RSU (Remote Setting Utility) Micrologic utility.
Number of devices
The maximum number of devices that may be connected to the Modbus bus
depends on the type of device (Compact with Modbus COM, PM700, PM800,
Sepam, Vigilohm, Compact NSX, etc.), the baud rate (19200 is recommended), the
volume of data exchanged and the desired response time. The RS 485 physical
layer offers up to 32 connection points on the bus (1 master, 31 slaves).
A fixed device requires only one connection point (communication module on the
device). A drawout device uses two connection points (communication modules on
the device and on the chassis).
The number must never exceed 31 fixed devices or 15 drawout devices.
Length of bus
The maximum recommended length for the Modbus bus is 1200 meters.
Bus power source
A 24 V DC power supply is required (less than 20 % ripple, insulation class II).
Ethernet principle
Ethernet is a data link and physical layer protocol defined by IEEE 802 10 and 100
Mbps specifications that connects computer or other Ethernet devices. Ethernet is
an asynchronous Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision detection (referred
as CSMA/CD) protocol. Carrier Sense means that the hosts can detect whether
the medium (coaxial cable) is idle or busy. Multiple Access means that multiple
hosts can be connected to the common medium. Collision Detection means a
host detects whether its transmission has collided with the transmission of another
host (or hosts). IFE Ethernet interface can be connected to a PC or a laptop over
Ethernet. The maximum length of Ethernet cable is 100 meters. IFE Ethernet
interface + gateway provides a Modbus TCP/IP gateway over Ethernet to enable
Modbus TCP communication from a Modbus TCP master to any Modbus slave
devices connected to it. The maximum active Modbus TCP client connection is
twelve.
IFE Ethernet interface has an embedded web server (web page).
The Modbus RS 485 (RTU protocol) system is an open bus on which
communicating Modbus devices (Compact NS with Modbus COM, Power Meter
PM700, PM800, Sepam, Vigilohm, Compact NSX, etc.) are installed. All types of
PLCs and microcomputers may be connected to the bus.

Functions Electrical Asset Manager
and characteristics
Configuration Engineering tool
Introduction
Electrical Asset Manager is a software application that helps the user to manage a
Capture1b.eps
project as part of designing, testing, site commissioning, and maintenance of the

project life cycle.
It enables the user to prepare the settings of the devices offline (without connecting
to the device) and configure them when connected with the devices.
Also it provides lot of other value added features for the user to manage the project
such as, safe repository in cloud, attach artifacts to each device or at the project
level, organize devices in switchboard wise, manage a hierarchical structure of the
installation etc.
Compatible devices (configuration and device management)

Electrical Asset Manager is compatible with the following devices:
bb Compact NSX100-630 (IEC)
bb PowerPactTM (UL) circuit breaker
Capture2b.eps
bb Compact NS630b-3200 (IEC)

bb Masterpact NT/NW (IEC and UL) circuit breaker
bb Acti9 Smartlink.
bb Compatible devices (Device Management in the project)
bb Switch disconnectors (Compact NSX, Masterpact & PowerPact Family)
bb Third party devices.
References:
Electrical Asset Manager software package can be downloaded from our website
www.schneider-electric.com.
Features
Electrical Asset Manager supersedes the Schneider Electric customer engineering
Capture3b.eps
tools such as Remote setting Utility (RSU) and Remote Control Utility (RCU) with
additional features.
Electrical Asset Manager supports the connection of Schneider Electric
communicable devices to:
bb create projects by device discovery, selection of devices, and import Bill of
Material (BOM)
bb monitor the status of protection and IO status
bb read information (alarms, measurements, parameters)
bb check protection discrimination between two devices
bb upload and download of configuration or settings in batch mode to multiple
devices.
bb carry out commands and tests
Capture4b.eps
bb generate and print device settings report and communication test report
bb manage multiple devices with electrical and communication hierarchy model
bb manage artifacts (project documents)
bb check consistency in settings between devices on a communication network
bb compare configuration settings between PC and device (online)
bb download latest firmware.
Electrical Asset Manager enables the user to avail the advanced features of the
software once the project is saved in Schneider Electric cloud.

Functions
Offline Mode
Capture5b.eps
A project can be built in offline mode through 2 different ways:

bb through BOM file import
bb through Device Selection.
Additionally, the user can open an existing project and modify the settings offline.
The user can do the discrimination curve check and firmware compatibility check
for devices in the project.
Online Mode
A project can be built in online mode through device discovery also other than the
methods possible through offline method.
Once the project is built, the following functions can be performed in addition to the
functions available in offline mode:
bb compare the device parameters with project parameters
bb load parameters from project to the device and vice versa
Capture6b.eps
bb firmware downloads to the device

bb monitor the measurement, maintenance, device status and I/O status
bb control functions.
User Interface
Electrical Asset Manager software provides fast direct access to the project and the
devices in the project through different tabs.
bb Project: to provide the project information including customer details, project
references and to add project artifacts (documents related to the project).
bb Configuration: to build up the tree structure of the project architecture ; to have a
table view of the devices added in the project ; to set the parameters of the devices
; to transfer the device settings ; to view the tripping curves; to attach device
artifacts and to download the latest firmware, to do the communication test for all
Capture7b.eps
the devices and generate the test report.

bb Monitoring: this allows the user to monitor the real time values of different
devices through different sub tabs namely Monitoring, Logs and Control.
bb Reports: report tab allows you to generate and print a report of the project
settings from the report tab. The user details and project characteristics are
automatically filled with the details entered in the Project page.
Capture8b.eps

Functions Accessories for Micrologic
and characteristics
trip units
External Neutral Current Transformer (ENCT)

PB103799-24.eps
The external neutral current transformer is a sensor required for a three-pole circuit
breaker in a system with a distributed neutral to measure the neutral current in
order to:
bb protect the neutral conductor
bb protect against ground faults.
This current transformer can be connected to Micrologic 5 trip unit. The transformer
24 V DC Terminal block rating must be compatible with that of the circuit breaker.
PB101026-32A.eps
24 V DC power-supply terminal block

The Micrologic 5 trip unit display is operational when current is flowing through the
circuit breaker.
To power the Micrologic 5 trip unit when the trip unit is not connected to an
FDM121 or to the communication network, a 24 V DC power-supply terminal block
can be installed only on Micrologic 5 trip unit. When used, it excludes connection of
an NSX cord.
External 24 V DC
Power-Supply Module.
External 24 V DC power-supply module
An external 24 V DC power supply is required for installation in a communication
network, whatever the type of trip unit.
On installations without a communication network, the power supply is available as
an option for Micrologic 5 trip unit in order to:
bb modify settings when the circuit breaker is open
bb display measurements when the current flowing through the circuit breaker is low
(15 to 50 A depending on the rating)
bb maintain the display of the cause of tripping and interrupted current.
A single external 24 V DC supply may be used for the entire network, depending on
the number of devices in the communication network.
The required characteristics are:
bb output voltage: 24 V DC ±5 %
bb ripple: ±1 %.
Total consumption
To determine the required output current of the 24 V DC power supply, it is
necessary to sum up the currents consumed by the different loads supplied:
Power requirements Power requirements at 24 V DC
Module
Micrologic 5 trip unit 40 mA
BSCM module 10 mA
FDM121 Module 40 mA
Modbus communication interface module 60 mA
NSX cord V > 480 V AC 30 mA
SDx Module 20 mA
For installation recommendations, see page A-56.
Pocket Tester
PB103790-20.eps
The pocket tester connects to the Micrologic trip unit test connector. It powers up
the Micrologic trip unit and the Ready LED. It supplies the screen, allows settings
to be made using the keypad, and provides thermal memory inhibit functions.
Pocket Tester. The pocket tester runs off of two Alkaline AA batteries.
Battery Module
PB103833-18.eps
The battery module is a back-up supply for the external power-supply module. The
input/output voltages are 24 V DC and it can supply power for approximately three
hours (100 mA).
Battery Module.

Cable
NSX Cord
DB404418.eps
PB103789-24.eps
length
Micrologic trip units are connected to the Modbus communication interface module
(IFM) or front display module through the internal terminal block for the NSX cord
equipped with an RJ45 connector.
The NSX cord is available in three cable lengths:
bb 1.3 m (4.27 ft)
bb 3 m (9.84 ft).
NSX Cord, NSX Cord, Lengths up to 10 m (32.8 ft) are possible using extensions.
V y 480 V. V > 480 V. bb For voltage V y 480 V, available in 3 prefabricated lengths: 0.35 m, 1.3 m
and 3 m.
bb For voltages V > 480 V, a special 1.3 m cable with an insulation accessory
DB404419.eps
is required.
bb A set of cables with RJ45 connectors is available to adapt to different distances
between devices.
Isolation Module
for NSX Cord,
with V > 480 V.

Functions Accessories and auxiliaries
and characteristics Overview of PowerPact H- and J- frame
DB417738.eps
Cable connectors Rear connectors

Interphase barriers
NSX cord BSCM module Modbus interface
Sealable terminal shields
I6
C
I5
I4
vC
I3
I2 +24V
C 0V
I1
I6
C
I5
I4
C
I3
I2
C
I1 Eth2
+ C
24VD Eth1
A1
O1
I1
A1
T2
O3 T1
34
O2 33
24
O1 23
Indication contact
14
13
I/O IFE
Voltage release
SDx module
FDM128 FDM121
3.2
logic
Micro
In)
li (x
6 Ir
tr @
lr (A)
Micrologic 3.2 trip unit
Direct rotary handle Extended rotary handle
Micrologic 5.2E trip unit
2500
1250
250A lm
ln
Thermal-Magnetic TM
Escutcheon Motor mechanism

DB417739.eps
Overview of PowerPact L- frame
Interphase barriers
Cable connectors Rear connectors
NSX cord BSCM module
I6
C
I5
I4
vC
I3
I2 +24V
C 0V
I1
I6
C
I5
I4
C
I3
I2
C
I1 Eth2
+ C
24VD Eth1
A1
O1
I1
A1
T2
O3 T1
34
O2 33
24
O1 23
14
13
Modbus interface I/O IFE
Indication contact
Voltage release
SDx module
FDM128 FDM121
Micrologic 3.3 trip unit
OK
Direct rotary handle

Mod
Micrologic 5.3E trip unit
Ø5...8
Escutcheon Extended rotary handle Motor mechanism

and characteristics Device installation
The standard lugs can be removed for the installation of compression-type lugs or
bus connections.
All lugs are UL Listed/CSA Certified for their proper application and marked for use
with aluminum and copper (Al/Cu) or copper only (Cu) conductors. Lugs suitable
for copper and aluminum conductors are made of tin-plated aluminum.
Mounting
H-, J-, and L-frame circuit breakers may be mounted vertically, horizontally or flat
on their back without any derating of characteristics.
Unit-mount H- and J-frame circuit breakers are supplied with two mounting screws,
unit-mount L-frame circuit breakers are supplied with four mounting screws. These
mounting screws are inserted through mounting holes molded into the circuit
breaker case and threaded into the mounting enclosure, rails or through the panel
door for flush mounting.
A DIN rail mounting bracket (cat. no. S29305) is available for the H- and J-frame
circuit breakers.
Note: DIN rail mounting is not compatible with motor operated applications.
Unit-mounting options
H-, J-Frame circuit breakers (2 mounting screws)
DB404421.eps
DB404422.eps
DB404423.eps
Mounting on rails. Mounting on backplate.
Flush mounting.
L-Frame circuit breakers (4 mounting screws)

DB404424.eps
DB404425.eps
DB404426.eps
push
to
trip
push
to
trip
push
to
trip
Mounting on rails. Mounting on backplate. Flush mounting.
Rear connection
DB413057.eps
For connection of bus bars or cables with compression lugs. Rear connections
are easily installed on the circuit breaker terminals. The same connection may be
installed flat, edgewise or at a 45° angle. All combinations are possible. The circuit
breaker is mounted on a backplate.
DB413174.eps
Horizontal. Vertical. 45° Angle.

DB413173.eps
One long and two short.

Mechanical lug kits
DB413026.eps
Unit-mount H-, J-, and L-frame circuit breakers can be ordered with mechanical
line and load side lugs. The standard lugs can be removed for the installation of
compression-type lugs or bus connections. All lugs are UL Listed/CSA Certified for
their proper application and marked for use with aluminum and copper (Al/Cu) or
copper only (Cu) conductors. Lugs suitable for copper and aluminum conductors
are made of tin-plated aluminum. Lugs suitable for use with copper conductors only
are made of copper.
Mechanical lugs PowerPact Multistandard lay on top of the circuit breaker terminals
and can be installed without the use of any tools. The lugs are held in place with
DB413027.eps
DB413021.eps
DB413022.eps
snap features built into the insulating retainer and are secured with the clamp force
applied to the wire binding screw.
Mechanical lugs are sold either factory installed or as field installable kits.
15/150 A lug. 15/175 A lug. 200/250 A lug.

Mechanical lug kits for H-Frame and J-Frame circuit breakers
Al lugs for use with Al or Cu wire

Circuit breaker application Number of wires Qty
DB413023.eps
DB413024.eps
DB413025.eps
Standard Ampere Optional Ampere per lug and wire range per kit
rating rating
HD, HG, HJ 15-150 A (1) 14-3/0 AWG Al or Cu 3
JD, JG, JJ 150-175 A 4-4/0 AWG Al or Cu 3
JD, JG, JJ 200-250 A JD, JG, JJ 150-175 A 3/0-350 kcmil Al or Cu 3
400 A lug. 600 A lug. 600 A lug.

Mechanical lug kits for L-Frame circuit breakers
Al lugs for use with Al or Cu wire
DB416076.eps
Circuit breaker application Number of wires per lug Qty

Ampere rating Poles Unit mount and wire range (1) per kit
250 3 b (1) 2 AWG - 500 kcmil Al 3

400/600 3 b (2) 2/0 AWG - 500 kcmil Al or Cu 3
Terminal shield.
400/600 3 b (2) 3/0 AWG - 500 kcmil Al or Cu 3
(1) For control wire installation, use an 8-32 x 1/4 in. screw (not provided) into tapped control
wire hole in lower left hand corner of lug.

and characteristics
Busbar connections
DB413058.eps
The H-, J- and L-frame circuit breakers may be equipped with captive nuts and
screws for direct connection to bars or to compression (crimp) lugs
For H- and J-frame, these are readily field-installable, simply by removing the
mechanical lug and replacing with the appropriate terminal nut. They are also
available factory-installed.
For L-frame, the mechanical lug can be removed, leaving the threaded nut insert
intact.
Terminal nuts for busbar connection of H-Frame and J-Frame circuit

breakers
DB413175.eps
Description Frame Tap Qty Torque

per kit
H-Frame terminal nut insert-english HD/HG/HJ 1/4-20 2 9–10.2 N•m
H-Frame terminal nut insert-english HD/HG/HJ 1/4-20 3 (80-90 lb-in)
H-Frame terminal nut insert-metric HD/HG/HJ M6 2
J-Frame terminal nut insert-english JD/JG/JJ 1/4-20 2 9–10.2 N•m
(80-90 lb-in)
DB413679.eps
J-Frame terminal nut insert-english JD/JG/JJ 1/4-20 3

J-Frame terminal nut insert-metric JD/JG/JJ M8 2
B Bar dimensions
DB413177.eps
Dimension A B C D E
H-Frame 6.4 mm 3.2-9.5 mm 12.7 mm 7.6 mm 7.6 mm
(0.250 in.) (0.125 - 0.375 in.) (0.50 in.) (0.3 in.) (0.3 in.)
J-Frame 7.9 mm 3.2-5 mm 12.7-1.1 mm 15.9 mm 9.5 mm
(0.3125 in.) (0.125 - 0.375 in. ) (0.50-0.75 in.) (0.625 in.) (0.375 in.)
D
L-Frame 10 mm 3-10 mm 32 mm (1.35 13 mm 16 mm
AØ (0.4 in.) (0.11 - 0.39 in.) in) (0.51 in.) (0.64 in. )
= =
E
C
DB413059.eps
Control
Wire Voltage takeoff (control wire terminals) for mechanical lugs
Hole
and terminal nuts
Description Frame
Mechanical lug
Control wire terminal for H-Frame lugs HD/HG/HJ
Control wire terminal for J-Frame lugs JD/JG/JJ/JL
Busbar connection
Mechanical Lug Control
Wire Terminal Control wire terminal for H-Frame nut HD/HG/HJ
Control wire terminal for J-Frame nut JD/JG/JJ/JL
Control tape takeoff L-Frame
DB413060.eps
DB112724.eps
Busbar Control Wire Control tape takeoff.

Terminal.

Phase barrier or terminal shield extension Terminal shields and phase barriers
DB404427.eps
past end of circuit breaker B see table

Used with Description Dimension B Qty
per
inch mm kit
H- and J-Frame Short lug Frame Max. wire
mechanical lugs shield size
H-Frame 60 A 3 AWG 0.50 12.7 1
Extremity of
molded case H-Frame 150 A 3/0 AWG 0.50 12.7 1
w/mechanical J-Frame 350 kcmil 0.24 6.1 1
lugs
H- and Long lug H-Frame long lug shield 2.24 56.9 1
J-Frame power shield J-Frame long lug shield 1.68 42.7 1
distribution
B See table connectors and
compression
lugs
L-Frame Terminal shield (3P) - 1
DB413127.eps
DB413128.eps
H-Frame short lug shield. J-Frame short lug shield.

DB413178.eps
DB413179.eps
L-Frame short lug shield. L-Frame short compression

connector shield.

and characteristics Selection of auxiliaries for PowerPact
150 / 250 A H-Frame and J-Frame
Standard
All PowerPact Multistandard circuit breakers and automatic switches have slots for
the electrical auxiliaries.
4 indication contacts
bb 2 ON/OFF (OF1 and OF2)
bb 1 trip indication (SD)
bb 1 fault-trip indication (SDE)
1 remote-tripping release
bb either 1 MN undervoltage release
Remote indications
Circuit breakers equipped with Micrologic trip units may be equipped with a fault-
trip indication to identify the type of fault by installing:
1 indication module with two outputs (see page A-56)
bb either an SDx module with Micrologic 3.x / 5 E
This module occupies the slots of one OF contact and an MN/MX release.
All these auxiliaries may be installed with a motor operator.

The following table indicates auxiliary possibilities depending on the type of trip
unit.
Micrologic 3
Standard auxiliary possibilities based on trip unit
Motor Operator
DB413061.eps
SD SDE
OF1 OF2 OF2
SD SDE OF1
MN /
MX MN /
MX 3.2 olog ic
Micr
4 5
3 6
.9 5 .9 6 Is d
2 .5 8 Ir
10 .9 4 .9 7
>1 2
0 16017
5 10
>3 .9 3 .9 8
140 200 1 .5
r
% I .9 2 1
(x Ir )
125 225 Is d
0A .9
>3
110 250 Io )
100
Ir ( x
)
Io ( A
Micrologic 5
Standard auxiliary possibilities Remote indications via SDx
based on trip unit
Motor Operator Motor Operator
DB404233.eps
24 V DC
OF1 OF2 Supply
SD SDE or Terminal
SDx
MN / Block
MX
The SDx uses the OF1 and MN/MX slots.

External connection is made via a terminal block in the OF1 slot.
The 24 V DC supply provides for the Micrologic 5 display when the device is OFF or under low-load conditions.

Selection of auxiliaries for PowerPact
150 / 250 A H-Frame and J-Frame
bb Communication networks require specific auxiliaries.
bb Communication of status indications:
vv 1 BSCM module
vv 1 NSX cord (internal terminal block) for both communication and 24 V DC supply
to the BSCM.
bb Communication of status conditions is compatible with a standard motor
operator.
bb Communication of status indications and controls requires, in addition to the
previous auxiliaries:
vv 1 communicating motor operator connected to the BSCM.
Communication of measurements is available on Micrologic 5. The system consists
of:
to the Micrologic.
bb Communication of measurements is compatible with a standard or
communicating motor operator.
bb Communication of status indications, controls and measurements is available on
Micrologic 5.
The system consists of:
vv 1 BSCM module
to the BSCM and the Micrologic
bb Installation of SDx is compatible with communication network.
Micrologic 3
Communication network auxiliary possibilities based on trip unit
Motor Operator Communicating

DB413062.eps
Motor Operator
BSCM BSCM
NSX
or Cord
NSX
Cord
Micrologic 5
Communication of measurements with Communication of status indications, controls and
or without FDM121 display measurements with or without FDM121 display
DB404213.eps

Motor Operator
NSX BSCM
Cord or NSX
Cord

and characteristics Selection of auxiliaries for PowerPact
400 / 600 A L-Frame
Standard
All PowerPact Multistandard circuit breakers and automatic switches have slots for
the electrical auxiliaries.
5 indication contacts
bb 3 ON/OFF (OF1, OF2 and OF3)
bb 1 trip indication (SD)
bb 1 fault-trip indication (SDE)
1 remote-tripping release
bb either 1 MN undervoltage release
Remote indications
Circuit breakers equipped with Micrologic trip units may be equipped with a fault-
trip indication to identify the type of fault by installing:
1 indication module with two outputs (see page A-56)
bb either an SDx module with Micrologic 3.x / 5 E
This module occupies the slots of one OF contact and an MN/MX release.
All these auxiliaries may be installed with a motor operator.

The following table indicates auxiliary possibilities depending on the type of trip
unit.
Micrologic 3
Standard auxiliary possibilities based on trip unit
DB413063.eps
OF1,
OF2, SD
OF1 SD OF3
OF2 SDE
OF3 SDE
Reserved
MN / Reserved
MX MN /
MX
3.2 rolo gic
Mic
4 5
3 6
.9 5 .9 6 Is d
2 .5 8 Ir
10 .9 4 .9 7
0 >1 2 10
16017
5
>3 .9 3 .9 8
140 200 1 .5
r
% I 225
.9 2 1
(x Ir )
125 Is d
0A .9
>3
110 250 Io )
100 Ir ( x
)
Io ( A
Micrologic 5
Standard auxiliary possibilities Remote indications via SDx
based on trip unit
Motor Operator Motor Operator
DB404232.eps
Rotary Handle
OF1 SD
OF2
24 V DC
OF3 SDE or Supply
Reserved
Terminal
MN / SDx
MX Block
External connection is made via using a terminal block in the reserved slot.
The 24 V DC supply provides for the Micrologic 5 display when the
device is OFF or under low-load conditions.

Selection of auxiliaries for PowerPact
400 / 600 A L-Frame
bb Communication networks require specific auxiliaries.
bb Communication of status indications:
vv 1 BSCM module
vv 1 NSX cord (internal terminal block) for both communication and 24 V DC
supply to the BSCM.
bb Communication of status conditions is compatible with a standard motor
operator.
bb Communication of status indications and controls requires, in addition to the
previous auxiliaries:
Communication of measurements is available on Micrologic 5. The system
consists of:
supply to the Micrologic.
bb Communication of measurements is compatible with a standard or
communicating motor operator.
bb Communication of status indications, controls and measurements is available
on Micrologic 5.
The system consists of:
vv 1 BSCM module
supply to the BSCM and the Micrologic
bb Installation of SDx is compatible with communication network.
Micrologic 3
Communication network auxiliary possibilities based on trip unit
DB413180.eps
Motor Operator
NSX NSX
Cord Cord
or
BSCM BSCM
Micrologic 5
Communication of status indication Communication of status indications, controls
and measurements with or without FDM121 display
DB404234.eps
Motor Operator
NSX
or Cord
NSX BSCM
Cord

and characteristics Indication contacts
Accessory connections
DB413689.eps
Electrical accessories are fitted with numbered terminal blocks for wires with the
following maximum size:
bb 1.5 mm2 (16 AWG) for auxiliary switches (OF1 or OF2), and shunt trip (MX) or
undervoltage trip (MN)
bb 2.5 mm2 (14 AWG) for the motor operator.
Auxiliary switch wiring exits fixed mounted devices through a knock-out in the front
Auxiliary Switch (OF) /
Alarm Switch (SD).
cover.

Auxiliary indication contacts provide remote information of the circuit breaker status
DB413182.eps
and can thus be used for indications, electrical locking, relays, etc.
Applications Open/Closed-Auxiliary switches (OF)
bb Indicates the position of the circuit breaker contacts.
Trip indication-alarm switch (SD)
bb Indicates that the circuit breaker has tripped due to an overload, short circuit or
ground fault, the operation of a shunt trip or undervoltage trip or the “push-to-trip”
Overcurrent Trip Switch button.
Actuator (SDE). bb Resets when the circuit breaker is reset.
Overcurrent trip switch (SDE)
bb Indicates that the circuit breaker has tripped due to an overload, short circuit or
ground fault.
bb Resets when the circuit breaker is reset.
bb The above switches are also available in low-level versions (with gold flash
plating) capable of switching very low loads (e.g., for controlling PLCs or electronic
circuits).
Rotary Handle Indicator: CAO (early-break) and CAF (early-make)
bb Fitted in the rotary handle module (see page A-59).
bb The auxiliary switch (OF), alarm switch (SD), and overcurrent trip switch (SDE)
indication contacts snap into cavities behind the front accessory cover of the circuit
breaker.
bb One model serves for all indication functions depending on where it is fitted in
bb The overcurrent trip switch (SDE) in a circuit breaker equipped with a thermal-
magnetic trip unit requires the SDE actuator.
Standards
bb The internal accessories comply with requirements of Underwriters
Laboratories® Inc. (UL®).
bb UL 489 and Canadian Standard Association C22.2 No. 5-02 Standards.
bb All internal accessories are Listed for field installation per UL file E103955 and
Certified under CSA file LR 69561.
bb Auxiliary indicator contacts comply with UL 489, CSA C22.2
No. 5-02 and IEC 60947-5 Standards. “Low-level” indicator contacts are not UL
Recognized.
Note: see page A-65 for drawout options.
Electrical characteristics of auxiliary contacts

Contacts Standard Low level
Types of contacts All OF, SD, SDE, SDV
Rated thermal current (A) 6 5
Minimum load 100 mA at 24 V DC 1 mA at 4 V DC
Utilisation cat. (IEC 60947-5-1) AC12 AC15 DC12 DC14 AC12 AC15 DC12 DC14
Operational 24 V AC/DC 6 6 6 1 5 3 5 1
current (A) 48 V AC/DC 6 6 2.5 0.2 5 3 2.5 0.2
110 V AC/DC 6 5 0.6 0.05 5 2.5 0.6 0.05
220/240 V AC 6 4 - - 5 2 - -
250 V DC - - 0.3 0.03 5 - 0.3 0.03
380/440 V AC 6 2 - - 5 1.5 - -
480 V AC 6 1.5 - - 5 1 - -
660/690 V AC 6 0.1 - - - - - -

SDx is a relay module with two outputs. It send SDx module

different signals depending on the type of fault. It may The SDx module remotely monitors the trip or alarm conditions of PowerPact
not be used together. Multistandard circuit breakers equipped with electronic protection.
An SDx relay module installed inside the circuit breaker can be used to remote the
overload trip signal.
PB103377.eps
This module receives the signal from the Micrologic electronic trip unit through an
optical link and makes it available on the terminal block. The signal is cleared when
the circuit breaker is closed.
These outputs can be reprogrammed to be assigned to other types of tripping or
alarm (see page A-56).
The SDx module may be used in 400 Hz systems for voltages from 24 to 440 V.
The SD2 output, available on all Micrologic trip units, corresponds to the overload-
trip indication.
The SD4 output, available on Micrologic 5, is assigned to:
bb overload pre-alarm (Micrologic 5)
These two outputs automatically reset when the device is closed (turned ON).
For Micrologic 5, the SD2 and SD4 outputs can be reprogrammed to be assigned
to other types of tripping or alarm.
It is possible to assign a function output characteristics:
bb latching with a time delay. Return to the initial state occurs at the end of the time
delay
bb permanent latching. Return to the initial state takes place through the
communication function.
SDx module with terminal block.
Static outputs: 24 - 415 V AC / V DC; 80 mA max.
Output characteristics
Output reset can be:
bb manual by a pushbutton included in the wiring diagram
bb automatic after an adjustable time delay (1 to 15 minutes) to take into account
the motor-cooling time.
Static outputs: 24 - 415 V AC / V DC; 80 mA max. a (+) 24 - 415 V.

and characteristics Remote tripping
Shunt trip (MX) and undervoltage trip (MN)

044313_20_SE.eps
A voltage release can be used to trip the circuit breaker using a control signal.
Applications shunt trip (MX)
bb Trips the circuit breaker when the control voltage rises above 70 % of its rated
voltage.
bb Impulse type u 20 ms or maintained control signals.
bb AC shunt trips are suitable for ground-fault protection when combined with a
MX or MN voltage release.
Class I ground-fault sensing element.
bb Continuous duty rated coil.
Undervoltage trip (MN)
bb Trips the circuit breaker when the control voltage drops below a tripping
threshold.
bb Drops out between 35 % and 70 % of the rated voltage.
bb Continuous duty rated coil.
bb Circuit breaker closing is possible only if the voltage exceeds 85 % of the rated
voltage. If an undervoltage condition exists, operation of the closing mechanism
of the circuit breaker will not permit the main contacts to touch, even momentarily.
This is commonly called “Kiss Free”.
bb Accessories are common to H-, J-, and L-frame circuit breakers and snap into
cavities under the front accessory cover of the circuit breaker.
bb Each terminal may be connected by one 1.0 - 2.5 mm2 (18 - 14 AWG) stranded
copper wire.
Standards
bb The circuit breaker must be reset locally after being tripped by shunt trip (MX) or
undervoltage trip (MN).
bb Tripping by the shunt trip or undervoltage trip has priority over manual (or motor
operator) closing; in the presence of a standing trip order such an action does not
result in any closing, even temporarily, of the main contacts.
bb Endurance: 50 % of the rated mechanical endurance of the circuit breaker.
Characteristics
AC DC
Rated voltage (V) 24, 48, 120, 208/277, 12, 24, 30, 48, 60, 125,
380/480, 525, 600 250
Power Pickup (shunt trip) < 10 VA <5W
requirements Seal-in (undervoltage < 5 VA <5W
trip)
Clearing time (ms) < 50 < 50

Rotary handles
Direct rotary handles

DB413078.eps
Installation
The directly mounted rotary operating handle replaces the circuit breaker front
accessory cover (secured by screws).
Operation
The direct rotary handle maintains:
bb indication of three positions: I (ON), Tripped and O (OFF)
bb access to the “push-to-trip” button
bb visibility of, and access to, trip unit settings
bb the circuit breaker may be locked in the OFF position by using one to three
padlocks (not supplied).
Models
Directly mounted rotary operating handle. bb Standard with black handle.
Variations
Accessories transform the standard direct rotary handle for the following situations:
bb motor control centers (MCCs):
vv opening of door prevented when circuit breaker is on
vv closing of circuit breaker inhibited when door is open
bb machine tool control; complies with CNOMO E03.81.501N; degree of protection
IP54
bb early make or early break contacts may be installed into direct mount rotary
handle.
Standards
The directly-mounted rotary operating handle is UL Listed under file E103955 and
CSA Certified under file LR 69561.
Extended rotary handle

DB413079.eps
Installation
The door-mounted (extended) rotary operating handle is made up of:
bb a unit that replaces the front accessory cover of the circuit breaker (secured by
screws)
bb an assembly (handle and front plate) on the door that is always secured in the
same position, whether the circuit breaker is installed vertically or horizontally
bb an adjustable extension shaft
bb the handle mechanism can be used in NEMA 3R and 12 enclosure applications.
Door mounted rotary operating handle.
Operation
The door mounted operating handle makes it possible to operate circuit breakers
installed in enclosure from the front. The door mounted operating handle maintains:
bb indication of the three positions OFF (O), ON (I) and tripped
bb visibility of and access to trip unit settings when the door is open
bb degree of protection: IP40 as per IEC 529.
Defeatable interlock prevents opening of door when circuit breaker is on.
The circuit breaker may be locked in the off position by using
one to three padlocks, padlock shackle diameter 5–8 mm (0.19–0.31 in.); padlocks
are not supplied; locking prevents opening of the enclosure door.
Shaft lenght
The shaft length is the distance between the back of the circuit breaker and the
door:
bb maximum shaft length is 600 mm (24 in.)
bb extended shaft length must be adjusted.
Models
bb Standard with black handle.
Variations
For drawout configurations, the extended rotary handle is also available with a
telescopic shaft containing two stable positions.
Standards
The door-mounted rotary operating handle is UL Listed under file E103955 and
CSA Certified under file LR 69561.

and characteristics Motor mechanism
When equipped with a motor-mechanism module, PowerPact circuit breakers

DB413682.eps
feature very high mechanical endurance as well as easy and sure operation:
bb all circuit-breaker indications and information remain visible and accessible,
including trip-unit settings and indications
bb suitability for isolation is maintained and padlocking remains possible
bb double insulation of the front face.
A specific motor mechanism is required for operation via the communication
function. This communicating motor mechanism must be connected to the
BSCM module to receive the opening and closing orders. Operation is identical to
that of a standard motor mechanism.
Applications
PowerPact with motor mechanism. bb Local motor-driven operation, centralised operation, automatic distribution
control.
bb Normal/standby source changeover or switching to a replacement source to
ensure availability or optimise energy costs.
bb Load shedding and reconnection.
bb Synchrocoupling.
Operation
The type of operation is selected using the manual/auto mode selection switch (7).
A transparent, lead-seal cover controls access to the switch.
Automatic
When the switch is in the "auto" position, the ON/OFF (I/O) buttons and the
charging lever on the mechanism are locked.
bb Circuit-breaker ON and OFF controlled by two impulse-type or maintained
1 2 3 signals.
bb Automatic spring charging following voluntary tripping (by MN or MX), with
DB413681.eps
standard wiring.
bb Mandatory manual reset following tripping due to an electrical fault.
Manual
0OFF discharged When the switch is in the "manual" position, the ON/OFF (I/O) buttons may be
4 used. A microswitch linked to the manual position can remote the information.
bb Circuit-breaker ON and OFF controlled by 2 pushbuttons I/O.
bb Recharging of stored-energy system by pumping the lever 8 times.
bb Padlocking in OFF position.
Installation and connections

All installation (fixed, plug-in/withdrawable) and connection possibilities are
OFF ON maintained.
Motor-mechanism module connections are made behind its front cover to
integrated terminals, for cables up to 2.5 mm².
8 7 6 5
Optional accessories
bb Keylock for locking in OFF position.
1 Position indicator
(positive contact indication)
bb Operations counter for the Powerpact L-frame, indicating the number of ON/OFF
2 Spring status indicator (charged, discharged) cycles. Must be installed on the front of the motor-mechanism module.
3 Manual spring-charging lever
4 Keylock device (optional)
Locking device (OFF position), using 1 to 3 padlocks,
Characteristics
shackle diameter 5 to 8 mm, not supplied Motor mechanism MT100 to MT630
5 I (ON) pushbutton
Response time (ms) opening < 600
6 O (OFF) pushbutton
closing < 80
7 Manual/auto mode selection switch. The position of this
switch can be indicated remotely. Operating frequency cycles/minute max. 4
8 Operation counter (Powerpact L-frame) Control voltage (V) DC 24/30 - 48/60 - 110/130 -
250
AC 50/60 Hz 48 (50 Hz) - 110/130 -
220/240 - 380/440
Consumption DC (W) opening y 500
closing y 500
AC (VA) opening y 500
closing y 500

Locks
Padlocking systems can receive up to three padlocks with diameters of 5-8 mm

DB413080.eps
DB413081.eps
(0.19-0.31 in.); padlocks not supplied.
Device Description
Handle padlocking device (1) Removable (lock OFF only)
Fixed (lock OFF or ON)
Fixed (lock OFF only)
Interlocking (not UL listed) Mechanical for circuit breakers with rotary handles
Mechanical for circuit breakers with toggles
Toggle locking using padlocks and an accessory: Key locking Provision and 2 locks keyed alike Ronis and Profalux
(1) Rotary handle has integral padlocking capability.
Removable device Fixed device attached to the
case.
DB404456.eps
DB404457.eps
DB413082.eps
Removable attachment. Fixed padlock attachment.

Rotary-handle locking using a keylock.
DB413083.eps
DB413084.eps
Rotary-handle locking using a padlock or a keylock.

DB413085.eps
DB413086.eps
Ø5...8
auto auto
u u
man man
Motor-mechanism locking using a padlock or a keylock.

and characteristics Sealing accessories
Outgoing-circuit identification
DB413087.eps
Powerpact H- J- and L-framecan be equipped with label holders supplied in sets

of ten (cat. no. LV429226).
They are compatible with escutcheons.
Identification accessories. Sealing accessories

Sealing accessories are available. Each bag of accessories contains all the parts
required for the types of sealing indicated below.
DB115033.eps
A bag contains:
bb 6 sealing accessories
bb 6 lead seals
bb 0.5 m of wire
bb 2 screws.
Sealing accessories.
Types of seals and corresponding functions

Toggle control
DB413088.eps
DB413089.eps
Rotary handle
DB413090.eps
DB413091.eps
Motor mechanism
DB413092.eps
DB413093.eps
DB413094.eps
auto auto auto

u u u
man man man
Types of seals Front-cover fixing screw Trip-unit transparent cover Motor-mechanism

transparent cover
Protected operations bb front removal bb modification of settings bb access to manual/auto
bb access to auxiliaries bb access to test connector. mode selection switch:
bb trip-unit removal. depending on its position,
manual (1) or automatic
operation is not possible.
(1) In this case, local

operation is not possible.
For unit-mount or plug-in installation

bb Front-panel escutcheons for toggle handles secures to the panel from the front.
DB413095.eps
push
to
trip

Distribution system
Plates for mounting on 60 mm busbar
Description
The PowerPact mounting plate system for busbars simplifies the installation of
components used in your electrical installations.
Power distribution is performed by a busbar.
The mounting plates are fitted directly on this busbar, by snap-on mounting, thus
implementing electrical connection.
This system offers numerous benefits:

bb space saving in switchboards
bb fast, safe and reliable electrical and mechanical connection
bb easy connection
bb protection for users against electric shocks by direct contacts (IP20) by using
covers
bb equipment flexibility and modularity
bb increased equipment availability: easier maintenance
bb power supply without drilling (connectors) from 1.5 to 120 mm2.
The 3P busbar
The busbar interaxis is 60 mm. Depending on the cross section of the bars, the
busbar can withstand a maximum current of 630 A.
Note: the bars forming the busbar are not part of the PowerPact offer. They are not
supplied by us. Their selection depends on the maximum current needed for your
installation (see next page).
Support for 3P busbar (1)

3
DB404460.eps
For applications having to comply with the IEC standard, use the LA9ZX01495
support.
The mounting plates (2)

60 mm These allow mounting of the power feeder components consisting of:
bb PowerPact 100-250 A
bb PowerPact 250 and 400-630 A.
Accessories
1
6 Accessories complete the offer:
5 bb covers (3) for 5 and 10 mm bars
2
bb end covers (4)
1 bb a base plate (5)
4
bb 1P connectors (6), 3P connectors on mounting plate
bb a spring terminal 3P connection module.

Functions Distribution system
and characteristics Busbar support
DB403873-LIN.eps
LA9ZX01495 (IEC)
Bar dimensions compatibility mm 12 x 5 15 x 5 20 x 5 25 x 5 30 x 5 12 x 10 20 x 10 30 x 10
Max. rated operating current A 200 250 320 400 450 360 520 630
Min. peak permissible rated kA 30 30 30 30 45 35 35 53
current
Distance max. between 2 mm 570 570 570 570 570 570 570 570
busbars supports
Degree of protection IP 20 (with cover LA9ZX01244 or LA9ZX01245)
Thermal resistance °C 125
LA9ZX01495 Rated current frequency Hz 50/60
Rated insulation voltage V 690
Rated operating voltage V 690
LA9ZX01508 (UL)
DB403876.eps
Bar dimensions compatibility mm 12 x 5 20 x 5 30 x 5 12 x 10 20 x 10 30 x 10

Rated operating current A 150 362 500 300 564 630
Ieff (RMS) surge current kA 18 18 22 - 25 18 18 22 - 25
SCCR 250 A 480 V AC kA 65 - - 65 - -
(protected by 250 A 600 V AC 25 - - 25 - -
Compact NSX 400 A 480 V AC - 65 65 - 65 65
circuit breaker) 400 A 600 V AC - 35 35 - 35 35
500 A 480 V AC - - 65 - - 65
600 A 600 V AC - - 35 - -
600 A 480 V AC - - 50 - - 50
600 A 600 V AC - - 25 - - 25
LA9ZX01508 SCCR 400 A 480 V AC 100 100 100 100 100 100
(protected by
fuses Class J 500 A 480 V AC - - 100 - - 100
or T ...)
500 A 600 V AC - - 100 - - 100
Distance max. between mm 400 800 800 400 800 800

2 busbars supports (busbar
protected)
Degree of protection IP 20 (with cover LA9ZX01244 or LA9ZX01245)
Thermal resistance °C 125
Rated current frequency Hz 50/60
Rated operating voltage V 600

Choice of mounting plates
Characteristics of busbar mounting plates

Type of mounting plate LA9ZA32600
Degree of protection as IP 20
DB403885.eps
per IEC 60529

Rated insulation voltage V 690
Permissible current A 25
100-250
400-630
Peak rated current kA 50
SCCR (UL) with mm² The reinforced breaking capacity due to cascading in circuit
Compact NSX circuit breaker combination is maintained
breaker protection
LA9ZA32600

PowerPactT Multistandard Installation
recommendations
Operating conditions B-2
Power supply and weights B-3
Safety clearances and minimum distances B-4
Installation example B-5
Control wiring B-6
Temperature derating B-8

Dimensions C-1
Wiring diagrams D-1
Additionals characteristics E-1
Glossary G-1

Installation Operating conditions
recommendations
(m) Altitude derating

DB413104.eps
2000
Altitude does not significantly affect the characteristics of PowerPact Multistandard
circuit breakers circuit breakers up to 6560 ft (2000 m). Above this altitude, it is
necessary to take into account the decrease in the dielectric strength and cooling
capacity of air.
The following table gives the corrections to be applied for altitudes above 6560 ft
(2000 m).
The breaking capacities remain unchanged.
Altitude (m) 2000 3000 4000 5000
(6560 ft) (9840 ft) (13120 ft) (16400 ft)
Dielectric withstand voltage 3000 V 2500 V 2100 V 1800 V
Insulation voltage Vi 800 V 700 V 600 V 500 V
Maximum operational voltage Ve 690 V 590 V 520 V 460 V
Average current capacity (A) In x 1 0. 0.96 0.93 0.9
at 40 °C (104 °F)
Vibrations
DB413105.eps
PowerPact Multistandard devices resist mechanical vibration.

Tests are carried out in compliance with standard UL489 SA and SB for the levels
required by merchant-marine inspection organizations (Veritas, Lloyd’s, etc.):
PowerPact™ Multistandard circuit breaker meet IEC 60068-2-6 for vibration:
bb 2.0 to 25.0 Hz and amplitude ±1.6 mm
bb 25.0 to 100 Hz acceleration ±4.0 g.
PowerPact L-frame circuit breaker meet IEC 60068-2-6 for vibration:
bb 2.0 to 13.2 Hz and amplitude 0.039 in. (1 mm)
bb 13.2 to 100 Hz constant acceleration.
Excessive vibration may cause tripping, breaks in connections or damage to
mechanical parts.
Electromagnetic disturbances
DB413106.eps
PowerPact Multistandard devices are protected against:

bb overvoltages caused by circuit switching
bb overvoltages caused by an atmospheric disturbances or by a distribution-system
outage (such as from failure due to lightning)
bb devices emitting radio waves (radios, walkie-talkies, radar, etc.)
bb electrostatic discharges produced directly by users.
PowerPact Multistandard devices have successfully passed the electromagnetic-
compatibility tests (EMC) defined by the following international standards:
bb IEC/EN 60947-2: Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear, part 2: circuit
breakers:
vv annex F: Immunity tests for circuit breakers with electronic protection
vv annex B: Immunity tests for residual current protection
bb IEC/EN 61000-4-2: Electrostatic-discharge immunity tests
bb IEC/EN 61000-4-3: Radiated, radio-frequency, electromagnetic-field immunity
tests
bb IEC/EN 61000-4-4: Electrical fast transient/burst immunity tests
bb IEC/EN 61000-4-5: Surge immunity tests
bb IEC/EN 61000-4-6: Immunity tests for conducted disturbances induced by
radiofrequency fields
vv CISPR 11: Limits and methods of measurement of electromagnetic disturbance
characteristics of industrial, scientific and medical (ISM) radio-frequency
equipment.
These tests ensure that:
bb no nuisance tripping occurs
bb tripping times are respected
Tropicalization
The materials used in PowerPact Multistandard circuit breakers will not support the
growth of fungus and mold.
PowerPact circuit breakers have passed the test defined below for extreme
atmospheric conditions.
Dry cold and dry heat:
bb IEC 68-2-1-dry cold at -55 °C
bb IEC 68-2-2-dry heat at +85 °C.
Damp heat (tropicalization)
bb IEC 68-2-30–damp heat (temperature + 55 °C and relative humidity of 95 %).
bb IEC 68-2-52 level 2 - salt mist.

Power supply and weights
Power from the top or bottom

DB413184.eps
PowerPact Multistandard circuit breakers with factory-sealed trip units can be

supplied from either the top or the bottom without any reduction in performance.
This capability facilitates connection when installed in end-use equipment.
All connection and insulation accessories can be used on circuit breakers supplied
either from the top or bottom.
3.2 olog ic
Micr
4 5
3 6
. 9 5 .9 6 Is d
2 .5 8 Ir
10 .9 4 .9 7
0 >1 2 10
>3 16017
5
.9 3 .9 8
140 200 1 .5
r
% I .9 2 1
( x Ir
)
125 225 Is d
0A .9
>3
110 250 Io )
100
Ir ( x
)
Io ( A
Weight
The table below presents the weights of the circuit breakers and the main
accessories, which must be summed to obtain the total weight. The values are
valid for all performance categories.
Type of device Circuit breakers Base Cradle Motor operator
H-frame, 100 A 3P 2.05 kg (4.52 lb) 0.8 kg (1.75 lb) 2.2 kg (4.85 lb) 1.2 kg (2.65 lb)
H-frame, 150 A 3P 2.2 kg (4.85 lb) 0.8 kg (1.75 lb) 2.2 kg (4.85 lb) 1.2 kg (2.65 lb)
J-frame, 250 A 3P 2.4 kg (5.29 lb) 0.8 kg (1.75 lb) 2.2 kg (4.85 lb) 1.2 kg (2.65 lb)
L-frame, 600 A 3P 6.19 kg (13.65 lb) 2.4 kg (5.29 lb) 2.2 kg (4.85 lb) 2.8 kg (6.17 lb)

Installation Installation in equipment
recommendations Safety clearances and minimum
distances
General rules
When installing a circuit breaker, minimum distances (safety clearances) must
be maintained between the device and panels, bars and other protection devices
installed nearby. These distances, which depend on the voltage, are defined by
tests carried out in accordance with UL standards.
If installation is not checked by type tests, it is also necessary to:
bb use insulated bars for circuit-breaker connections
bb segregate the busbars using phase barriers.
For PowerPact Multistandard devices, terminal shields and interphase barriers are
recommended and may be mandatory depending on the operating voltage of the
device and type of installation (unit-mount, drawout, etc.).
Power connections
The table below indicates the connection requirements for PowerPact
Multistandard devices to ensure insulation of live parts for the various types of
connection.
bb Unit-mount devices with front connection (FC) or rear connection (RC).
bb Plug-in or drawout devices.
Connection accessories such as crimp lugs, terminal extensions (straight, right-
angle, double-L and 45°) and spreaders are supplied with interphase barriers. Long
terminal shields provide a degree of protection of IP40 (ingress).

Installation example
Safety clearance
H- and J-Frame safety clearances
u 25.4 u 25.4 Fiber insulating plate
DB413048.eps
(1)
u 1.00 u 1.00
12.7 12.7 0.8
DB413049.eps
.50 .50 .03
< 14.2
< .56
u 101.6
u 4.00
76.2
3.00
31.8
1.25
A1
Enclosure dimensions
u 101.6 W D
DB413050.eps
DB418543.eps
u 4.00
H
B1 C1
J-frame minimum enclosure insulation

79
Standard (80 %) rated 100 % rated
DB418544.eps
89 3.1
3.49 83
3.25 HD/HG/HJ/HL 15-150 A 396 x 155 x 89 mm 396 x 155 x 89 mm
15.6 x 6.12 x 3.49 in. 15.6 x 6.12 x 3.49 in.
HR 461 x 219 x 105 mm 1575 x 572 x 356 mm
476 318
18.72 18.13 x 8.63 x 4.13 in. 62 x 22.5 x 14 in.
12.5
JD/JG/JJ/JL (2) 150-250 A 476 x 155 x 89 mm 476 x 155 x 89 mm
0.8 18.72 x 6.12 x 3.49 in. 18.72 x 6.12 x 3.49 in.
0.03 JR 724 x 314 x 137 mm 1575 x 572 x 356 mm
155
6.12 28.5 x 12.38 x 5.38 in. 62 x 22.5 x 14 in.
LD/LG/LL/LL 250-600 A 901 x 305 x 113 mm 901 x 305 x 113 mm
35.48 x 12.00 x 4.45 in. 35.48 x 12.00 x 4.45 in.
LR 1030 x 350 x 110 mm 1030 x 350 x 110 mm
40.5 x 13.75 x 4.33 in. 40.5 x 13.75 x 4.33 in.
(1) If dimension A < 0.56 in., attach fiber insulating plate, not provided, to enclosure cover.
(2) Minimum enclosure insulation required if circuit breaker side < 4.13 in. (105 mm) from
metal.

Installation Control wiring
recommendations
Recommended maximum cable lengths (1)

Power supply 12 V DC 24 V DC 48 V DC
voltage (V DC)
Cable cross-section 1.5 mm² 2.5 mm² 1.5 mm² 2.5 mm² 1.5 mm² 2.5 mm²
(16 AWG) (14 AWG) (16 AWG) (14 AWG) (16 AWG) (14 AWG)
Undervoltage V source 15 m - 160 m - 640 m -
trip (MN) 100 % (49 ft) (525 ft) (2100 ft)
V source 7m - 40 m - 160 m -
85 % (23 ft) (131 ft) (525 ft)
Shunt trip V source 60 m - 240 m - 960 m -
(MX) 100 % (197 ft) (787 ft) (3150 ft)
V source 30 m - 120 m - 480 m -
85 % (98 ft) (394 ft) (1575 ft)
Motor V source - - 10 m 16 m 65 m 110 m
operator 100 % (33 ft) (213 ft) (361 ft)
V source - - 2m 4m 17 m 25 m
85 % (6.6 ft) (56 ft) (82 ft)
(1) The indicated length is that of each of the two wires.
Modbus
ULP connection system between Micrologic,
DB417740.eps
24 V DC
FDM121 module and Modbus interface
The ULP (Universal Logic Plug) wiring system used by H-, J- and L-frame circuit
breakers for connection through the Modbus network requires neither tools nor
settings. The prefabricated cables are used for both data transfer and distribution
of 24 V DC power. Connectors on each component are identified by ULP symbols,
ensuring total compatibility between each component.
Available cords
All connections are made with prefabricated cords:
bb NSX cord for connection of the internal terminal block to the Modbus interface or
the FDM 121 display via an RJ45 connector. The cord is available in three lengths,
0.35 m, 1.3 m and 3 m
bb ULP cords with RJ45 connectors at each end for the other connections between
components. The cord is available in six lengths, 0.3 m, 0.6 m, 1 m, 2 m, 3 m and
5 m. For greater distances, two cords can be interconnected using the RJ45
female/female accessory.
Maximum length of 10 m between 2 modules and 30 m in all.
A line terminator must be fitted to all components with an unused RJ45 connector.
24 V DC power supply module

DB417772.eps
An external 24 V DC power supply is required for installations with communication

24 V DC 24 V DC
networks, regardless of the type of trip unit.
Battery On installations without communication networks, the power supply is available as
an option for Micrologic 5 to:
bb modify settings when the circuit breaker is open (OFF position)
bb display measurements when the current flowing through the circuit breaker is low
bb maintain the display of thecause of tripping.
To determine power requirements of devices, see page A-44.
Power supply, without the communication function,

using the terminal block with a backup battery.
DB417741.eps
24 V DC Modbus
Downstream ULP wiring

for 24 V DC supply
Power supply, without the communication function,

using the Modbus interface.

Wiring
DB417743.eps
Ethernet
J 24 V 24 V DC 24 V DC Micrologic 5 without the communication function
DC Modbus The external 24 V DC supply is connected through the circuit breaker terminal
A A
B block.
A +24V
0V
Use of a 24 V DC battery provides backup power for approximate 3 hours
C K I Eth1
Eth2
I (100 mA) in the event of an interruption in the external supply.

C D
Micrologic 5 with the communication function
+24V
0V
I +24V
0V Eth2
The external 24 V DC supply is connected through the Modbus interface using a

Eth1
Eth2
Eth1
I five-pin connector, including two for the power supply. Stacking accessories (see
I I I3
C
I4
I5
C
I6
page 29) can be used to supply a number of interfaces by fast clip-on connection.
I2
C
I1
The 24 V DC power is distributed downstream by the ULP (Universal Logic Plug)

I6
C
I5
I4
C
I3
I2
C
I1
K
+
24VDC
K K communication cables with RJ45 connectors. This system ensures both data
K transfer and power distribution to the connected modules.
I6
C
I3
I2
C A1
I1
T2
O3 T1
34
I6 I6 O2 33
C C 24
I5 23
O1
I3 14
I2 I2
13
C
L
C
G
I1 I1
+
24VDC
Recommendations for 24 V DC wiring

I6
C
I5
I2
C
I1
+
24VDC
A1
bb Do not connect the positive terminal to ground.
bb Do not connect the negative terminal to ground.
T2
T1
O2
24
O1 23
14
13
M
A1
T2
T1
O2
24
O1 23
14
13
E bb The maximum length for each conductor (±) is 10 m (33 ft).

M bb For connection distances greater than ten metres, the plus and minus
F L L conductors of the 24 V DC supply must be twisted to improve EMC.
H bb The 24 V DC conductors must cross the power cables perpendicularly. If this is
F H
difficult or impossible, the plus and minus conductors must be twisted.
Modbus
Each PowerPact Multistandard circuit breaker equipped with Micrologic 5 and
an FDM121 display is connected to the Modbus network using the Modbus com
OK OK
Mode Mode
module. Connection of all the circuit breakers and other Modbus devices in the
equipment to a Modbus bus is made much easier by using a Modbus RJ45 junction
A FDM121 (TRV00121) J FDM128 (LV434128)
block installed in the equipment.
B IFE master (LV434011) K ULP cable
Recommendations for Modbus wiring:
C IFE (LV434010) L Breaker ULP cord bb the shielding may be grounded on one end only
D IFM (TRV00210) M NSX cord bb the conductors must be twisted to improve immunity (EMC)
E I/O application module bb the Modbus conductors must cross the power cables perpendicularly.
Ethernet
(LV434063)
Example
F Masterpact NT/NW Modbus
A unit-mount PowerPact L-frame circuit breaker equipped with a Micrologic can
G Compact NS630b-3200
have a maximum Ir setting of:
H PowerPact bb 400 A up to 50 °C (122 °F)
I ULP termination bb 380 A up to 60 °C (140 °F).
(TRV00880)

Installation Temperature derating
recommendations PowerPact equipped with
thermal-magnetic trip units
PowerPact™ Multistandard circuit breakers may be used between -25 °C and

+70 °C (-13°F and 158°F). For temperatures higher than 104°F (40 °C) inside the
enclosure, devices must be derated.
Circuit breakers should be put into service under normal ambient, operating-
temperature conditions.
The permissible storage-temperature range for PowerPact™ Multistandard circuit
breakers in the original packing is -50 °C and +85 °C (-58°F (1) and 185°F).
Temperature derating for H-Frame trip unit thermal

protection-long-time
t
Temperature Rating (A) In
DB413188.eps
(1)
°C °F 60 to 150
-10 14 23 30 38 46 53 60 68 76 88 103 112 123 137 160 180 221
0 32 21 28 36 43 49 56 63 71 83 97 107 117 131 151 171 207
10 50 20 26 33 40 46 52 59 66 77 90 101 111 126 141 161 194
20 68 18 24 31 37 42 48 54 62 72 84 96 105 120 132 152 180
0 ln li l
30 86 17 22 28 34 39 44 50 56 66 77 88 98 110 121 139 165
H-Frame trip curve 40 104 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 125 150
(ln) F ixed threshold thermal protection against overload. 50 122 12 17 21 25 30 34 38 43 53 62 72 80 86 95 109 131
(li) Fixed threshold instantaneous protection against short
circuits. 60 140 9 14 17 20 24 28 31 35 46 53 63 70 72 80 93 111
(1) Shaded areas indicate temperature rerated values, non-shaded areas inside an enclosure
are standard circuit breaker ampere ratings at 40 °C (104°F).
Temperature derating for J-Frame trip unit thermal protection-

long-time
t
Temperature Rating (A) In
DB413189.eps
(1)
°C °F 250
-10 14 221 264 289 330 377
0 32 207 247 273 310 354
10 50 194 230 256 290 330
0 l 20 68 180 213 240 270 307
ln lm
30 86 165 194 220 248 279
40 104 150 175 200 225 250
J-Frame trip unit 50 122 131 150 176 193 214
(ln) F
ixed threshold thermal protection against overload.
(lm) Adjustable instantaneous protection against short circuits. 60 140 111 124 151 160 177
(1) Shaded areas indicate temperature rerated values, non-shaded areas inside an enclosure
are standard circuit breaker ampere ratings at 40 °C (104°F).
PowerPact™ Multistandard circuit breakers equipped with electronic trip units.

Electronic trip units are not affected by variations in temperature. If the trip units are
used in high-temperature environments, the Micrologic setting must nevertheless
take into account the temperature limits of the circuit breaker.
Changes in temperature do not affect measurements by electronic trip units.
bb The built-in CT sensors with Rogowski coils measure the current.
bb The control electronics compare the value of the current to the settings defined
for 40 °C (104°F).
Because temperature has no effect on the CT measurements, the tripping
thresholds do not need to be modified.
However, the temperature rise caused by the flow of current combined with the
ambient temperature increases the temperature of the device. To avoid reaching
the thermal withstand value, it is necessary to limit the current flowing through the
device, that is the maximum Ir setting as a function of the temperature.
The table below indicates the maximum long-time (LT) protection setting Ir (A)
depending on the ambient temperature.
(1) -40 °F (-40 °C) for Micrologic trip units with an LCD screen.

PowerPact equipped with electronic
trip units
Derating circuit breakers with Micrologic trip units

Type of Rating Temperature
device 40 °C 45 °C 50 °C 55 °C 60 °C 65 °C 70 °C
(104 °F) (113 °F) (122 °F) (131 °F) (140 °F) (149 °F) (158 °F)
H-Frame
Unit-mount, 60 A No derating
plug-in or 100 A No derating
drawout
150 A No derating
J-Frame
Unit-mount 250 250 250 250 245 237 230 225
Plug-in or 250 250 245 237 230 225 220 215
drawout
L-Frame
Unit-mount 400 400 400 400 390 380 370 360
Plug-in 400 400 390 380 370 360 350 340
or drawout
Unit-mount 600 600 600 600 585 570 550 535
Plug-in 600 570 550 535 520 505 490 475
or drawout
Example. A unit-mount PowerPact L-frame circuit breaker equipped with a Micrologic can have
a maximum Ir setting of:
bb 400 A up to 122 °F (50 °C)
bb 380 A up to 140 °F (60 °C).

PowerPact Multistandard Dimensions

PowerPact H-Frame circuit breakers C-2
PowerPact J-Frame circuit breakers C-4
PowerPact H- and J-Frame circuit breaker door cutouts C-6
PowerPact L-Frame circuit breakers C-8
PowerPact L-Frame circuit breaker handles

and handle operators C-11
PowerPact L-Frame circuit breaker connectors C-15
Dimensions and mounting

External modules C-16
FDM121 switchboard display C-17
FDM128 switchboard display C-18
Wiring diagrams D-1

Glossary G-1

Dimensions PowerPact H-Frame
circuit breakers
15/150 A Busbar PowerPact H-Frame 150 A 3P circuit breaker
DB413029.eps
DB413030.eps
A
A1
X X
C1
C2 B
C3 B1
Z
Y
A A1 B B1 C1 C2 C3
mm 162.6 81.3 52.4 104.7 82.4 87.4 110.8
inch 6.40 3.20 2.06 4.12 3.24 3.44 4.36
15/150 A lug-lug PowerPact H-Frame 3P circuit breaker

DB413032.eps
DB413031.eps
A
A1
X X
C1
C2 B
C3 B1
Z
Y
A A1 B B1 C1 C2 C3
mm 162.6 81.3 52.4 104.7 82.4 87.4 110.8
inch 6.40 3.20 2.06 4.12 3.24 3.44 4.36

15/150 A rear connected PowerPact H-Frame 3P circuit breaker
DB413034.eps
DB413033.eps
A
A1
X X
C4 C1
B
C5 C2
B1
C3
Z
Y
A A1 B B1 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5
mm 94 188 52.4 104.7 82.4 87.4 110.8 52.4 97.4
inch 3.70 7.40 2.06 4.12 3.24 3.44 4.36 2.06 3.84
Rotary handle detail (PowerPact H-Frame circuit breaker)

DB413036.eps
DB413035.eps
A
A1
X X
C1
C2 B
C3 B1
C4
Z Y
A A1 B B1 C1 C2 C3 C4
mm 162.4 81.2 52.4 104.7 82.4 87.4 122.4 155.4
inch 6.40 3.20 2.06 4.12 3.24 3.44 4.82 6.12

Dimensions PowerPact J-Frame
circuit breakers
150/250 A busbar PowerPact J-Frame 3P circuit breaker

DB413038.eps
DB413037.eps
A
A1
X X
C1 B
C2
B1
C3
Z Y
A A1 B B1 C1 C2 C3
mm 95.5 191 52.4 104.7 82.4 87.4 127
inch 3.76 7.52 2.06 4.12 3.24 3.44 5.00
150/250 A lug-lug PowerPact J-Frame 3P circuit breaker

DB413040.eps
DB413039.eps
A
A1
X X
C1 B
C2
B1
C3
Z Y
A A1 B B1 C1 C2 C3
mm 95.5 191 52.4 104.7 82.4 87.4 127
inch 3.76 7.52 2.06 4.12 3.24 3.44 5.00

150/250 A rear connected PowerPact J-Frame 3P circuit breaker
DB413042.eps
DB413041.eps
A
A1
X X
C4 C1
B
C5 C2
B1
C3
Z
Y
A A1 B B1 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5
mm 101.6 203.2 52.4 104.7 82.4 87.4 126.9 52.3 97.5
inch 4.00 8.00 2.06 4.12 3.24 3.44 5.00 2.06 3.84
Rotary handle detail (PowerPact J-Frame circuit breaker)

DB413044.eps
DB413138.eps
A1
X X
A2
C1 B
C2
B1
C3
C4 Y
Z
A1 A2 B B1 C1 C2 C3 C4
mm 191 104.5 52.4 104.7 82.4 87.4 122.4 155.4
inch 7.52 4.11 2.06 4.12 3.24 3.44 4.82 6.12

Dimensions PowerPact H- and J-Frame
circuit breaker door cutouts
PowerPact H- and J-Frame circuit breaker toggle handle door cutout

Cutout A Cutout B Cutout C
DB413209.eps
DB413210.eps
DB413211.eps
DB413208.eps
A
B
C1 C2 C3
X X X X
C
R1 R2
P5 Y Y Y
P6
Z
P7
C1 C2 C3 P5 P6 P7 R1 R2
mm 76.2 106 127.5 74.4 83.8 88.9 29 108
inch 3.00 4.17 5.02 2.93 3.30 3.50 1.14 4.25
PowerPact H- and J-Frame circuit breaker toggle handle with escutcheon door cutout
For toggle
DB413213.eps
X M3
M2
A1 D1 D2
Y
A1 D1 D2 M2 M3
mm 102 3.5 6.5 142 115
inch 4.01 0.13 0.25 5.59 6.10

PowerPact H- and J-Frame circuit breaker fixed rotary handle cutout
DB413212.eps
S3 A18
A20
X X X
A19
S4
S5 max.
S2
S1 P1 B10
Y B11
B12
Z
Y
A18 A19 A20 B10 B11 B12 P1 S1 S2 S3 S4 S5

mm 9 60 120 9.25 69 120 125 100 50 100 41 1–3
inch 0.35 2.36 4.72 0.36 2.72 4.72 4.92 3.94 1.97 3.94 1.61 0.04–0.12
PowerPact H- and J-Frame circuit breaker door mounted rotary handle cutout
M M Fixed or Plug-In Mounted
DB413215.eps
10
0.39
X
47
R1
1.85
Z
75
60° 2.95
A18
X
60°
37.5
1.48
37.5 B10
1.48 75
2.95
Y
R1 min R1 max A18 B10 D1
mm 171 600 9 9.25 75
inch 6.73 23.62 0.35 0.36 2.95

Dimensions PowerPact L-Frame
circuit breakers
PowerPact L-Frame fixed mounted electronic trip circuit breaker

DB404447.eps
A3
A2
X X
A2
push
to
trip A3
C1 B
C2 B1
C3 Y
Z
A2 A3 B B1 B2 C1 C2 C3
mm 143.5 200 70 140 185 95.5 110 168
inch 5.65 7.87 2.76 5.51 7.28 3.76 4.33 6.61
PowerPact L-Frame circuit breaker mounting

K1 K1
DB413146.eps
DB413145.eps
K1
K K1
V K
G1 G5 G1
X X
G G4 G T
∅T
∅ T4
Y
Y
G G1 G4 G5 K (1) K1 T T4 (2) V (3)

mm 100 200 113.5 227 22.5 45 6 32 35
inch 3.93 7.87 4.46 8.93 0.88 1.77 0.23 1.25 1.38
(1) For 2 pole circuit breaker, the middle holes are not required.
(2) For rear connected circuit breakers only.
(3) V is y 0.78 inch. (20 mm) on C-frame circuit breakers with secondary disconnecting blocks.

Front panel cutouts for PowerPact L-Frame fixed
Cutout A Cutout B Cutout C
DB413142.eps
DB413143.eps
C1 C3 C3
X X X X h
C
C2 C2 ∆
B/C R R2
R4(3P)
R1 R5(4P)
P5 Y Y Y
P6
Z
C C1 C2 C3 P5 P6 R R1 R2 R4 R5 Δ
mm 41.5 116 92.5 184 107 112 31.5 63 71.5 143 188 100 + (5 x h)
inch 1.63 4.56 3.64 7.24 4.21 4.40 1.24 2.48 2.81 5.62 7.40 3.93 + (5 x h)
PowerPact L-Frame circuit breaker front panel cutouts for toggle boot and escutcheon
With toggle boot With escutcheon Door hinge point
DB413144.eps
C21 C7
X X X
h
C20 C6
∆
R12 R6
R13 R7
P6
Y Z Y
C6 C7 C20 C21 P6 R6 R7 R12 R13 Δ

mm 53 146 46.5 46.5 12 46.5 93 63 126 100 + (5 x h)
inch 2.08 5.74 1.83 1.83 4.40 1.83 3.66 2.48 4.96 3.93 + (5 x h)

Dimensions PowerPact L-Frame
circuit breakers
PowerPact L-Frame circuit breaker mounting through a backplate

Plug-in base Cradle
DB413140.eps
DB413139.eps
K1 K2 K1 K2
K K K K
G11 G13 G11 G13

X X X X
G10 G12 G10 G12
T K5 K5 T K11 K11
K6 K7 K12 K13
Y Y Y Y
G10 G11 G12 G13 K K1 K2 K5 K6 K7 K11 K12 K13

mm 150 300 137 274 22.5 45 90 71.5 143 188 91.5 183 91.5
inch 5.90 11.8 5.39 10.7 0.88 1.77 3.54 2.81 2.81 7.4 7.40 3.60 7.20
PowerPact L-Frame circuit breaker mounting on rails (plug-in base or cradle)

DB413141.eps
K21
U K20
G21 X
G20
∅T Y
G20 G21 K20 K21 T U

mm 75 150 50 100 3 35
inch 2.95 5.90 8.97 1.96 0.11 1.38

PowerPact L-Frame circuit
breaker handles and handle
operators
PowerPact L-Frame circuit breaker motor operators

DB413147.eps
A17
A15 X X X
A14 A16
C4 B8 B8
C5/C6 B9 B9
B B
B1 B2
Z Y Y
C5: without keylock

C6: with keylock
A14 A15 A16 A17 B B1 B2 B8 B9 C4 C5 C6

mm 40 123 52 100 70 140 185 61.5 123 215 256 258
inch 1.57 4.84 2.05 3.94 2.76 5.51 7.28 2.42 4.84 8.46 10.08 10.16

Dimensions PowerPact L-Frame circuit
operators
PowerPact L-Frame circuit breaker rotary-operating handles

B10
DB413149.eps
I
60°
A15 X X X
A14 60°
O
A18
B8 B8
B9 B9
C7
B B
C8/C9 B1 B2
Z Y Y
C8: without keylock
C9: with keylock
A14 A15 A18 B B1 B2 B8 B9 B10 C7 C8 C9

mm 40 123 24.6 70 140 185 61.5 123 5 145 179 188
inch 1.57 4.84 0.97 2.76 5.51 7.28 2.42 4.84 0.20 5.71 7.05 7.40

PowerPact L-Frame motor-control center circuit breaker direct rotary-operating handle
DB413148.eps
A18
A20
S3 X X
X
A19
S4
S5 max.
P1 B10
S2
B11
S1 B12
Z
Y Y
A18 A19 A20 B10 B11 B12 P1 S1 S2 S3 S4 S5

mm 24.6 83 160 5 85 160 149 145 75 145 51 1–3
inch 0.97 3.27 6.30 0.20 3.35 6.30 5.87 5.71 2.95 5.71 2.01 0.04–0.12
PowerPact L-Frame circuit breaker extended rotary handle mounting

M M Fixed or Plug-In Mounted
DB413135.eps
10
0.39
X
47
R1
1.85
Z
75
60° 2.95
A18
X
60°
37.5
1.48
37.5 B10
1.48 75
2.95
Y
R1 min R1 max R2 min R2 max A18 B10 D1
mm 195 600 272 600 24.6 5 100
inch 7.68 23.62 10.71 23.62 0.97 0.20 3.94

Dimensions PowerPact L-Frame circuit
operators
PowerPact L-Frame circuit breaker front-panel escutcheons

For toggle
DB413157.eps
X M3
M2
A1 D1 D2
Y
A1 D1 D2 M2 M3
mm 102 3.5 6.5 115 142
inch 4.01 0.13 0.25 6.10 5.59

PowerPact L-Frame circuit
breaker connectors
PowerPact L-Frame circuit breaker fixed-mounted connections

DB413150.eps
P13 G4 G5 K1 P13
mm 113.5 227 45 526
inch 4.46 8.93 1.77 1.02
G4
X X
G5
Z K1 K1
Y
PowerPact L-Frame circuit breaker front connections

Front connections Busbar connection
M10 screws
Z
DB413064.eps
DB413159.eps
0.55
14
4.46
113.5
X
Z
Z
1.83
46.5
0.55
14
4.46 4.46
113.5 113.5
X X
PowerPact L-Frame circuit breaker rear connections

DB413065.eps
DB413160.eps
0615
4.46
1.18 113.5
30 1.99/50 (*)
4.52/115 (**) X
Z
0.31
8
(*) Short RC : 1.96/50
(**) Long RC : 4.52/115

Dimensions Dimensions and mounting
and connections External modules
I/O (Input/Output) application module

DB416699.eps
DB416700.eps
24VDC I1 C I2 I3 C I4 I5 C I6
I1 A1
I2
I3 O1
I4 O2
I5 O3 45 92
I6
84.8 115
IO LV434063
O1 O2 O3 A1
13 14 23 24 33 34 T1 T2
72 63.6
71
IFM - Modbus-SL interface
DB416701.eps
DB416702.eps
45 92
85 105
18 66
73
IFE - Ethernet interface

DB416697.eps
DB416698.eps
ETH1 ETH2
IFE
IFE-XX.YY.ZZ (factory set)
ETH1 LK/10-100/ACT
45 92
ETH2 LK/10-100/ACT
Module Status
84.8 105
Modbus-SL
Network Status
T LV434011
72 63.6
71
Com’X 200
DB417076.eps
DB417077.eps
90 45 85 106
144 63
69

Dimensions
DB114991.eps
DB114992.eps
96
X
96
Y
Mounting
Through panel
DB416963.eps
DB114993.eps
DB118545.eps + 0.8
X 92 0
X
+ 0.8
10.6 92 0
20.7 23
Y
Z
On panel
2 Ø22.5
DB114996.eps
DB115121.eps
DB115122.eps
DB115270.eps
16.5
X 99.3
+ X
- 0.5
32
19
+0.3
15 37 20 13 2 Ø22.5
-
+
- 1.5
33
Z
17
99.3
Y
Connector (optional).

Dimensions and Dimensions and mounting
connection FDM128 switchboard display
Dimensions
DB416703.eps
DB416736.eps
129
X
163
Mounting
On panel
1.5...6
DB416704.eps
DB416737.eps
DB416738.eps
100
X
30.6
17.5
39
+0
Ø 22,5 -0,30
DB416739.eps
DB416740.eps
100
100 100
100
+0
30 -0,20

PowerPact Multistandard Wiring diagrams

Dimensions C-1
Wiring diagrams D-2
PowerPact
Communication D-5
SDx module with Micrologic D-7

Glossary G-1

Wiring diagrams Wiring diagrams
Unit-mount circuit breakers

Power Micrologic trip unit Remote operation
3P NSX cord
DB404454.eps
NSX cord
62-1.eps
LA LB LC
a (220/240 V)
+ -
+ -
BSCM
HL
HL
B4
auto 0 I
manu
I
A1
V
a
3P
LA LB LC
I V

Unit-mount circuit breakers

Indication contacts
DB404453.eps
Open Closed Fault Fault Closed Open
102
104
134
124
32
22
12
82
84
92
94
34
24
14
WH
RD
YE
VT
OF3 OF2 OF1 SDE SD CAF2 CAF1 CAO1
WH
RD
GY
131
31
21
121
101
81
91
11
The diagram is shown with circuits de-energized, relays Remote operation

in normal position, and all devices open, connected, and MN Undervoltage Release
charged. or
MX Shunt Release
Terminal connections shown as O must be connected by the customer.
Indication contacts
OF2/OF1 Device ON/OFF Auxiliary Switches
OF3 Device ON/OFF Auxiliary Switches (L-Frame)
SDE Overcurrent Trip Switch
(short-circuit, overload, ground fault, earth leakage)
SD Alarm Switch
CAF2/CAF1 Early-Make Contact (rotary handle only)
CAO1 Early-Break Contact (rotary handle only)
Micrologic trip unit E

E Communication
H (WH), L(BL): data
-(BK), +(RD): 24 Vdc power supply

RD: Red VI: Violet
WH: White GY: Gray
YE: Yellow OR: Orange
BK: Black BL: Blue
GN: Green

SDx module with Micrologic trip unit

Symbols Connection
SD1, SD3: SDx Module Power Supply Vac (+) 24–415 V
64-1.eps
SD2: Output 1 (80 mA max.)
SD4: Output 2 (80 mA max.) STD PAL Ir
or output 1 or SDG
SD2 SD4 or output 2
SD3 SD2 SD4
Micrologic 3 SDT -
SDx
Micrologic 5 SDT or Output 1 PAL Ir or Output 2
Terminal connections shown as O must be connected by the
customer. Q
Note: The diagram is shown with circuits de-energized, relays

in normal position, and all devices open, connected, and
charged.
SD1
Vac (-)
Operation
tr at 6 Ir
64-2.eps
> 105 % Ir
> 90 % Ir
I
PAL Ir
SDG
SDT
Circuit breaker Circuit breaker

trip order reset
I: charge current
PAL Ir: thermal overload pre-alarm
SDG: ground-fault signal
SDT: thermal-fault signal
Q: circuit breaker

Wiring diagrams PowerPact
DB417742.eps
Communication
Ethernet
J
24 V DC
Modbus
A A A
24 V DC
24 V DC B
+24V
0V
I I I
K Eth2
C Eth1
C +24V
0V
D
K +24V
0V
Eth1
Eth2
Eth2
Eth1
I
I I
I6
C
I5
I4
C
I3
I2
C
I1
I6
C
I5
I4
C
I3
I2
C
I1
+
DC
24V
A1
K
K O1
O2
O3
K dule
IO Mo
E
I6
C
I5
I4
C
I3
I2
C A1
I1
T2
O3 T1
34
I6 I6 O2 33
C C 24
I5 23
O1
I3 14
I2 13
C I2
C
I1 I1
+
DC
24V
I6
C
I5
I3
I2
C
I1
+
DC
24V
dule
IO Mo
A1
T2
T1
O2
24
O1 23
14
13
A1
T2
T1
M
O2
24
O1 23
14
13
F
L L L M
F G H H
OK OK
e e
Mod Mod
A FDM121 (TRV00121) E I/O application module (LV434063) I ULP termination (TRV00880) K ULP cable
B IFE master (LV434011) F Masterpact NT/NW J FDM128 (LV434128) L Breaker ULP cord
C IFE (LV434010) G Compact NS630b-3200 M NSX cord
D IFM (TRV00210) H PowerPact Ethernet

Modbus

Communication
121
FDM
DB417744.eps
24VDC
I/O
application
module
ULP cable
NSX cord
OK
e
Mod
Modbus-SL Ethernet
24 V DC 24 V DC
24VDC
ETH1 ETH2
IFM IFE
ULP Termination ULP Termination

OR

SDx module with Micrologic
The diagram is shown with circuits de-energised, Connection

all devices open, connected and charged and
a (+) 24 à 415 V
DB115711.eps
relays in normal position.
STD PAL Ir
or output 1 or SDG
or output 2
SD3 SD2 SD4
Symbols
SDx
SD1, SD3: SDx-module power supply
SD2: output 1 (80 mA max.)
Q
SD4: output 2 (80 mA max.)
SD2 SD4
SD1
Micrologic 3 SDT -
Micrologic 5 SDT or output 1 PAL Ir or output 2
Terminals shown in red O must be connected by the customer.
a (-)
Operation
tr at 6 Ir
DB115712.eps
> 105 % Ir
> 90 % Ir
I
PAL Ir
SDG
SDT
Circuit breaker Circuit breaker

trip order reset
I: Charge Current
PAL Ir: Thermal Overload Pre-Alarm
SDG: Ground-Fault Signal
SDT: Thermal-Fault Signal
Q: Circuit Breaker

PowerPact Multistandard Additionals characteristics

Dimensions C-1
Wiring diagrams D-1
PowerPactTM H-, J-, and L-Frame Circuit Breakers

H-Frame 15–35 A (HD, HG, HJ, and HL) Thermal-Magnetic Trip E-3
J-Frame 150–250 A (JD, JG, JJ, JL, and JR) Thermal-Magnetic Trip E-7
H-Frame 150 A Typical Peak Let-Through Curves E-8
H-Frame 150 A Typical I2t Let-Through Curves E-9
J-Frame 250 A Typical Peak Let-Through Curves E-10
J-Frame 250 A Typical I2t Let-Through Curves E-11
H-Frame UL Listed Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker E-12
H-Frame UL Listed Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker E-13
J-Frame UL Listed Current -Limiting Circuit Breaker E-14
J-Frame UL Listed Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker E-15
Micrologic 3.2 Electronic Trip Unit Long Time Trip Curve E-16
Micrologic 3.2S Electronic Trip Unit Long Time / Short Time Trip Curve E-17
Micrologic 3.2/3.2S/5.2A/5.2E/6.2A/6.2E Electronic Trip Unit
Instantaneous Trip Curve E-18
Micrologic 5.2A/5.2E/6.2A/6.2E Electronic Trip Unit Long Time Trip Curve E-19
Micrologic 5.2A/5.2E/6.2A/6.2E Electronic Trip Unit Short Time Trip Curve E-20
Micrologic 6.2A/6.2E Electronic Trip Unit Ground Fault Trip Curve E-21
Micrologic 6.2A/6.2E Electronic Trip Unit Ground Fault Trip Curve E-22
Micrologic 2.2 M Electronic Trip Unit Overload Trip Curve E-23
Micrologic 3.2 and 3.2-W Electronic Trip Unit Long-Time Trip Curve E-24
Micrologic 3.2S and 3.2S-W Electronic Trip Unit Long Time /
Short Time Trip Curve E-25
Micrologic 3.2, 3.2-W, 3.2S, 3.2S-W, 5.2A, 5.2A-W, 5.2E, 5.2E-W, 6.2A,
6.2A-W, 6.2E, and 6.2E-W Electronic Trip Curve Instantaneous Trip Curve E-26
Micrologic 5.2A, 5.2A-W, 5.2E, 5.2E-W, 6.2A, 6.2A-W, 6.2E, and 6.2E-W
Electronic Trip Unit Long Time Trip Curve E-27
Electronic Trip Unit Short Time Trip Curve E-28
Micrologic 6.2A, 6.2A-W, 6.2E, and 6.2E-W Electronic Trip Unit
Ground Fault Trip Curve E-29
Micrologic 3.3 and 3.3-W Electronic Trip Unit Long Time Trip Curve E-31
Micrologic 3.3, 3.3-W, 3.3S, and 3.3S-W Electronic Trip Unit
Instantaneous Trip Curve E-33
6.3A-W, 6.3E, and 6.3E-W Electronic Trip Unit Instantaneous Trip Curve E-34
Micrologic 5.3, 5.3A-W, 5.3E, 5.3E-W, 6.3A, 6.3A-W, 6.3E, and 6.3E-W

Micrologic 1.3 M Electronic Trip Unit Instantaneous Trip Curve E-37
Micrologic 3.3 and 3.3W Electronic Trip Unit Long Time Trip Curve E-39
Micrologic 3.3S and 3.3S-W Electronic Trip Unit Long Time /
Short Time Trip Curve E-40
6.3A-W, 6.3E, and 6.3E-W Electronic Trip Unit Instantaneous Trip Curve E-41
Micrologic 6.3A, 6.3A-W, 6.3E, and 6.3E-W Ground-Fault Trip Curve E-44
Micrologic 1.3 M Electronic Trip Unit Instantaneous Trip Curve E-45
L-Frame 600 A Typical Peak Let-Through Curves E-46
L-Frame 600 A Typical I2t Let-Through Curves E-47
L-Frame UL Listed Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker E-48
L-Frame UL Listed Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker E-49
L-Frame Circuit Breaker Reflex Tripping E-49
Distribution system
Plates for mounting on busbars E-50

Glossary G-1

Additionals characteristics PowerPactTM H-, J-, and L-Frame
Circuit Breakers
H-Frame 15–35 A (HD, HG, HJ, and HL) Thermal-Magnetic Trip

MULTIPLES OF RATED CURRENT
DB419316.eps
100
1.5
10
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
HD, HG, HJ, HL MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
1
6
7
8
9
10000 10000
9000 9000
CHARACTERISTIC TRIP CURVE NO. 50-1

8000 8000
7000 7000
6000 6000
5000 5000

Circuit Breaker Continuous Ampere Maximum Number
3000 3000
2000 2000
Prefix Rating AC Voltage of Poles
1500 1500 HD, HG, HJ, HL 15–35 600 2, 3
1000
900
1000
900
800
700
800
700
600 600
500 500
400 400
All time/current characteristic curve data is based on 40 °C ambient
300 300
cold start. Terminations are made with conductors of appropriate length
200 200
and ratings.
150 150
10000
1000
1500
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
7000
8000
9000
150
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 70
MAXIMUM SINGLE-POLE TRIP TIMES 60
60
AT 25°C BASED ON NEMA AB-4 2003
50 50
40 40
30 30
20 20
15 15
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
TIME IN SECONDS
5 5
4
4
TIME IN SECONDS
3 3
2 2
1.5 1.5
1 1
.9 .9
.8 .8
.7 .7
.6 .6
.5 .5
.4 .4
.3 30 A, 35 A .3
25 A
.2 .2
20 A
.15 .15
15 A
.1 .1
.09 .09
.08 .08
.07 .07
.06 .06
.05 .05
.04 .04
MAXIMUM CLEARING TIME
(AT 50 Hz) (AT 60 Hz)
.03 .03
.02 1 CYCLE .02
1 CYCLE (50 Hz)

.015
.015
(60 Hz)
.01 1/2 CYCLE .01

.009 .009
.008
1/2 CYCLE (50 Hz) .008
.007 (60 Hz) .007
.006 .006
.005 .005
1
1.5
6
7
8
9
10
8000
9000
10000
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
150
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
1500
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
7000

TM
35 25 15
30 20

Circuit Breakers

DB419317.eps
100
1.5
10
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
1
6
7
8
9
10000 10000
9000 9000
8000
7000
8000
7000
6000 6000
5000 5000
4000 4000
3000 3000 Circuit Breaker Continuous Ampere Maximum Number
2000 2000
HD, HG, HJ, HL 40–60 600 2, 3
1500 1500

1000
900
1000
900 The EZ-AMP overlay feature at the bottom of the page should be used
800
700
800
700 during coordination studies.
600 600
500 500 All time/current characteristic curve data is based on 40 °C ambient

400 400
300 300 and ratings.
200 200
150 150
10000
1000
1500
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
7000
8000
9000
150
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 70
60 MAXIMUM SINGLE-POLE TRIP TIMES 60
50 50
40 40
30 30
20 20
15 15
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
TIME IN SECONDS
5 5
4
4
TIME IN SECONDS
3 3
2 2
1.5 1.5
1 1
.9 .9
.8 .8
.7 .7
.6 .6
.5 .5
.4 .4
.3 50 A .3
45 A
.2 .2
40 A
.15 .15
60 A
.1 .1
.09 .09
.08 .08
.07 .07
.06 .06
.05 .05
.04 .04
(AT 50 Hz) (AT 60 Hz)
.03 .03
.02 1 CYCLE .02
1 CYCLE (50 Hz)

.015
.015
(60 Hz)
.01 1/2 CYCLE .01

.009 .009
.008
1/2 CYCLE (50 Hz) .008
.007 (60 Hz) .007
.006 .006
.005 .005
1
1.5
6
7
8
9
10
8000
9000
10000
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
150
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
1500
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
7000

TM
60 45
50 40

Circuit Breakers

DB419318.eps
100
1.5
10
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
1
6
7
8
9
10000 10000
9000 9000
8000
7000
8000
7000
6000 6000

5000 5000
4000 4000
3000 3000
2000 2000
HD, HG, HJ, HL 70–100 600 2, 3
1500 1500

1000
900
1000
900
800
700
800
700
600 600

400 400 cold start. Terminations are made with conductors of appropriate length
MAXIMUM SINGLE-POLE TRIP TIMES
200 200
150 150
10000
1000
1500
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
7000
8000
9000
150
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 70
60 60
50 50
40 40
30 30
20 20
15 15
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
TIME IN SECONDS
5 5
TIME IN SECONDS
4
3 3
2 2
1.5 1.5
1 1
.9 .9
.8 .8
.7 .7
.6 .6
.5 .5
90 A, 100 A
.4 .4
.3 70 A, 80 A .3
.2 .2
.15 .15
.1 .1
.09 .09
.08 .08
.07 .07
.06 .06
.05 .05
.04 MAXIMUM CLEARING TIME .04
(AT 50 Hz) (AT 60 Hz)

.03 .03
.02 1 CYCLE .02
1 CYCLE (50 Hz)

.015
.015
(60 Hz)
.01 1/2 CYCLE .01

.009 .009
.008
1/2 CYCLE (50 Hz) .008
.007 (60 Hz) .007
.006 .006
.005 .005
1
1.5
6
7
8
9
10
8000
9000
10000
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
150
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
1500
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
7000
TM
90 70
Curve No. 0050TC0403
100 80 June 2004
Drawing No. 48095-050-03

Circuit Breakers

DB419319.eps
100
1.5
10
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
1
6
7
8
9
10000 10000
9000 9000
8000
7000
8000
7000
6000 6000

5000 5000
4000 4000
3000 3000
2000 2000
HD, HG, HJ, HL 110–150 600 2, 3
1500 1500

1000
900
1000
900
800
700
800
700
600 600

400 400 cold start. Terminations are made with conductors of appropriate length
MAXIMUM SINGLE-POLE TRIP TIMES
200 200
150 150
10000
1000
1500
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
7000
8000
9000
150
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 70
60 60
50 50
40 40
30 30
20 20
15 15
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
TIME IN SECONDS
5 5
4 4 TIME IN SECONDS
3 3
2 2
1.5 1.5
1 1
.9 .9
.8 .8
.7 .7
.6 .6
.5 .5
150 A
.4 .4
125 A
.3 .3
110 A
.2 .2
.15 .15
.1 .1
.09 .09
.08 .08
.07 .07
.06 .06
.05 .05
.04 MAXIMUM CLEARING TIME .04
(AT 50 Hz) (AT 60 Hz)

.03 .03
.02 1 CYCLE .02
1 CYCLE (50 Hz)

.015
.015
(60 Hz)
.01 1/2 CYCLE .01

.009 .009
.008
1/2 CYCLE (50 Hz) .008
.007 (60 Hz) .007
.006 .006
.005 .005
1
1.5
6
7
8
9
10
8000
9000
10000
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
150
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
1500
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
7000
TM
150 110
125

Circuit Breakers
J-Frame 150–250 A (JD, JG, JJ, JL, and JR) Thermal-Magnetic Trip
100
1.5
10
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
DB419320.eps
6
7
8
9
10000 10000
9000 9000
8000
7000
8000
7000
JD, JG, JJ, JL, JR MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
6000 6000 CHARACTERISTIC TRIP CURVE NO. 50-5
5000 5000
4000 4000
3000 3000

2000 2000 Prefix Rating AC Voltage of Poles
1500 1500
JD, JG, JJ, JL, JR 150–250 600 2, 3
1000 1000
900
900
800 800 The EZ-AMP overlay feature at the bottom of the page should be used
700 700
500 500

300
MAXIMUM SINGLE-POLE TRIP TIMES 300
and ratings.
200 200
150 150
10000
1000
1500
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
7000
8000
9000
150
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 70
60 60
50 50
40 40
30 30
20 20
15 15
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
TIME IN SECONDS
5 5
TIME IN SECONDS
4
3 3
2 2
1.5 1.5
1 1
.9 LIMITS LOW LIMITS HIGH .9
.8 SETTING SETTING .8
.7 .7
.6 .6
.5 .5
.4 .4
.3 .3
.2 .2
.15 .15
MAGNETIC TRIP
.1 ADJUSTMENT RANGE .1
.09 .09
.08 .08
.07 .07
.06 .06
.05 .05
.04 .04
(AT 50 Hz) (AT 60 Hz) .03
.03
.02 1 CYCLE .02
1 CYCLE (50 Hz)

.015
.015
(60 Hz)
.01 1/2 CYCLE .01

.009 .009
.008
1/2 CYCLE (50 Hz) .008
.007 (60 Hz) .007
.006 .006
.005 .005
1
1.5
6
7
8
9
10
8000
9000
10000
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
150
200
300
400
600
700
800
900
2000
3000
4000
5000
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
500
1000
1500
6000
7000

TM
225
175
250
200
150

Circuit Breakers
H-Frame 150 A Typical Peak Let-Through Curves

electronic molded case circuit breakers
powerpact tm h-frame current limiting circuit breakers
150 a frame at 240, 480 and 600 v, 3Ø
15-150 A
DB419321.eps
Ip
60
Maximum
Available
50 Peak Current
at 15% Power Factor
40
R
Maximum 480 V
30 Available
R
Peak Current 600 V
at 25% Power Factor L
L
J
20 R
G L 240 V
J J
G
G
D D
D
10
6
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 200

Circuit Breakers
H-Frame 150 A Typical I2t Let-Through Curves

powerpact tm H-frame current limiting circuit breakers
150 a frame at 240, 480 and 600 v, 3Ø
15-150 A
DB419322.eps
I2 t
2
Typical* Let-Through I2t (Amperes2 Seconds x 106)
.9 R
L
600 V
.8
L R
.7 J J 480 V
.6 G
G
D
.5
L R
D J 240 V
G
.4
.3
.2
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 200

Circuit Breakers
J-Frame 250 A Typical Peak Let-Through Curves

powerpact tm J-frame current limiting circuit breakers
250 a frame at 240, 480 and 600 v, 3Ø
15-150 A
DB419323.eps
Ip
60
Maximum
Available
50 Peak Current
at 15% Power Factor
40
R
480 V
Maximum R
30 Available 600 V
Peak Current L
at 25% Power Factor L
J
L R
J J
20 G 240 V
G
G
D
D
D
10
6
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 200

Circuit Breakers
J-Frame 250 A Typical I2t Let-Through Curves

powerpact tm J-frame current limiting circuit breakers
250 a frame at 240, 480 and 600 v, 3Ø
150-250 A
DB419324.eps
I2t
2
R
L 600 V
1
L R
.9 J J 480 V
.8
G
G
.7 D
.6
D
L R
J
.5 240 V
G
.4 D
.3
.2
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 200

Circuit Breakers
H-Frame UL Listed Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker

thermal-magnetic molded case circuit breakers
h-frame® current limiting circuit breakers
H 150 a frame at 240, 480 and 600 v, 3Ø
HJ, HL AND hr 15-150 A
DB419325.eps
Ip
60000
*Based on maximum values obtained throughout the circuit breaker development and UL test programs.
50000
40000 480 V 3Ø
Maximum* Peak Let-Through Current (Amperes)
600 V 3Ø
30000
240 V 3Ø
20000
10000
9000
8000
7000
6000
5000
6000
7000
8000
9000
20000
30000
40000
50000
60000
70000
80000
90000
100000
150000
200000
10000
Availability (RMS Symmetrical Amperes)

Circuit Breakers
H-Frame UL Listed Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker

h-frame® current limiting circuit breakers
H 150 a frame at 240, 480 and 600 v, 3Ø
HJ, HL AND hr 15-150 A
DB419326.eps
I2 t
2.0
Maximum* Let-Through I2t (Amperes2 Seconds x 106)
600 V 3Ø
1.0
.9
480 V 3Ø
.8
.7
.6
240 V 3Ø
.5
.4
.3
.2
5000
6000
7000
8000
9000
20000
30000
40000
50000
60000
70000
80000
90000
100000
150000
200000
10000

Circuit Breakers
J-Frame UL Listed Current -Limiting Circuit Breaker

J-frame® current limiting circuit breakers
J 150 a frame at 240, 480 and 600 v, 3Ø
JJ, jL AND jr 150-250 A
DB419327.eps
Ip
60000
50000
480 V 3Ø
40000
Maximum 600 V 3Ø
Available
Peak Current
at 15% Power Factor
30000
240 V 3Ø
20000
10000
9000
8000
7000
6000
5000
6000
7000
8000
9000
20000
30000
40000
50000
60000
70000
80000
90000
100000
150000
200000
10000

Circuit Breakers
J-Frame UL Listed Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker

J-frame® current limiting circuit breakers
J 250 a frame at 240, 480 and 600 v, 3Ø
JJ, jL AND jr 150-250 A
DB419328.eps
I 2t
2.0
600 V 3Ø
480 V 3Ø
1.0
.9
.8
.7
240 V 3Ø
.6
.5
.4
.3
.2
5000
6000
7000
8000
9000
20000
30000
40000
50000
60000
70000
80000
90000
100000
150000
200000
10000

Circuit Breakers
Micrologic 3.2 Electronic Trip Unit Long Time Trip Curve

DB419329.eps
micrologictm electronic trip units

Micrologictm 3.2 Long Time Trip Curve
60 a, 100 A, 150 A H-Frame
The time-current curve information is to be used for application and coordination
purposes only.
(1) There is a thermal-imaging effect that can act to shorten the long-time delay.
The thermal imaging effect comes into play if a current above the long-time delay
pickup value exists for a time and then is cleared by the tripping of a downstream
device or the circuit breaker itself. A subsequent overload will cause the circuit
breaker to trip in a shorter time than normal. The amount of time delay reduction
is inverse to the amount of time that has elapsed since the previous overload.
Approximately 20 minutes is required between overloads to completely reset
thermal-imaging.
(2) Total clearing times shown include the response times of the trip unit, the
circuit breaker opening, and the extinction of the current.
Curves apply from -35 ºC to +70 ºC (-31 ºF to +158 ºF) ambient temperature.
16

Circuit Breakers
Micrologic 3.2S Electronic Trip Unit Long Time / Short Time Trip Curve
DB419330.eps

Micrologictm 3.2S Long Time/
Short Time Trip Curve
60 a, 100 A, 150 A H-Frame

purposes only.
thermal-imaging.

Circuit Breakers
Micrologic 3.2/3.2S/5.2A/5.2E/6.2A/6.2E Electronic Trip Unit Instantaneous Trip Curve

DB419331.eps

Micrologictm 3.2/3.2S/5.2A or E/6.2A or E
Instantaneous Trip Curve
60 a, 100 A, 150 A H-Frame

purposes only.
thermal-imaging.
(3) In = Maximum dial setting of Ir.
60 A H-Frame: In = 60 A = Max Ir setting

Circuit Breakers
Micrologic 5.2A/5.2E/6.2A/6.2E Electronic Trip Unit Long Time Trip Curve

DB419332.eps

Micrologictm 5.2A or E/6.2A or E
Long Time Trip Curve
60 a, 100 A, 150 A H-Frame

purposes only.
thermal-imaging.
16

Circuit Breakers
Micrologic 5.2A/5.2E/6.2A/6.2E Electronic Trip Unit Short Time Trip Curve

DB419333.eps

Micrologictm 5.2A or E/6.2A or E
60 a, 100 A, 150 A H-Frame

purposes only.
thermal-imaging.

Circuit Breakers
Micrologic 6.2A/6.2E Electronic Trip Unit Ground Fault Trip Curve

DB419334.eps

Micrologictm 6.2A or E
Ground Fault Trip Curve
100 A, 150 A H-Frame

purposes only.

Circuit Breakers
Micrologic 6.2A/6.2E Electronic Trip Unit Ground Fault Trip Curve

DB419335.eps

Micrologictm 6.2A or E
60 a H-Frame

purposes only.
0.4 OFF
0.3 OFF

Circuit Breakers
Micrologic 2.2 M Electronic Trip Unit Overload Trip Curve

DB419336.eps

Micrologictm 2.2M Overload Trip Curve
60 A, 100 A, 150 A H-Frame
purposes only.
(1) If overload still exists past overload relay delay, MCP will open 0.4 seconds
later.
(3) Isd minimum and maximum only shown.
(4) li = 15 x In
In = 30 A, 50 A, 100 A, 150 A, 250 A
MCP will trip < 30 ms at 15 x In

Circuit Breakers
Micrologic 3.2 and 3.2-W Electronic Trip Unit Long-Time Trip Curve
DB419337.eps

Micrologictm 3.2 and 3.2-W
250 a J-Frame

purposes only.
thermal-imaging.
16
8

Circuit Breakers
Micrologic 3.2S and 3.2S-W Electronic Trip Unit Long Time / Short Time Trip Curve
DB419338.eps

Micrologictm 3.2S and 3.2S-W
Long Time/Short Time Trip Curve
250 A J-Frame

purposes only.
thermal-imaging.

Circuit Breakers
Micrologic 3.2, 3.2-W, 3.2S, 3.2S-W, 5.2A, 5.2A-W, 5.2E, 5.2E-W, 6.2A, 6.2A-W, 6.2E, and 6.2E-W Electronic
Trip Curve Instantaneous Trip Curve
DB419339.eps

Micrologic™ 3.2, 3.2-W, 3.2S, 3.2S-W, 5.2A,
5.2A-W, 5.2E, 5.2E-W, 6.2A, 6.2A-W,
6.2E, and 6.2E-W
250 A J-Frame

purposes only.
thermal-imaging.
250 A J-Frame: In = 250 A = Max Ir setting

Circuit Breakers
Micrologic 5.2A, 5.2A-W, 5.2E, 5.2E-W, 6.2A, 6.2A-W, 6.2E, and 6.2E-W Electronic Trip Unit Long Time
Trip Curve

DB419340.eps
Micrologic™ 5.2A, 5.2A-W, 5.2E, 5.2E-W, 6.2A,

6.2A-W, 6.2E, and 6.2E-W
250 A J-Frame

purposes only.
thermal-imaging.
16

Circuit Breakers
Micrologic 5.2A, 5.2A-W, 5.2E, 5.2E-W, 6.2A, 6.2A-W, 6.2E, and 6.2E-W Electronic Trip Unit Short Time
Trip Curve

DB419341.eps

6.2A-W, 6.2E, and 6.2E-W
250 A J-Frame

purposes only.
thermal-imaging.

Circuit Breakers
Micrologic 6.2A, 6.2A-W, 6.2E, and 6.2E-W Electronic Trip Unit Ground Fault Trip Curve
DB419342.eps

Micrologic™ 6.2A, 6.2A-W, 6.2E, and 6.2E-W
250 A J-Frame

purposes only.

Circuit Breakers

DB419343.eps
Micrologic™ 2.2M Overload Trip Curve

30 A, 50 A, 100 A, 150 A H-Frame, 250 A J-Frame

purposes only.
later.
(4) li = 15 x In
In = 30 A, 50 A, 100 A, 150 A, 250 A

Circuit Breakers
Micrologic 3.3 and 3.3-W Electronic Trip Unit Long Time Trip Curve

DB419344.eps
Micrologic™ 3.3 and 3.3-W

250 A, 400 A L-Frame

purposes only.
thermal-imaging.
16

Circuit Breakers

DB419345.eps

Micrologic™ 3.3S and 3.3S-W

purposes only.
thermal-imaging.

Circuit Breakers
Micrologic 3.3, 3.3-W, 3.3S, and 3.3S-W Electronic Trip Unit Instantaneous Trip Curve

DB419346.eps
Micrologic™ 3.3, 3.3-W, 3.3S, and 3.3S-W

250 A L-Frame

purposes only.
thermal-imaging.
250 A L-Frame: In = 250 A = Max Ir setting

Circuit Breakers
Trip Unit Instantaneous Trip Curve
DB419347.eps

Micrologic™ 3.3, 3.3-W, 3.3S, 3.3S-W,
5.3A, 5.3A-W, 5.3E, 5.3E-W, 6.3A, 6.3A-W,
6.3E, and 6.3E-W
400 A L-Frame

purposes only.
thermal-imaging.

Circuit Breakers
Trip Curve
DB419348.eps

6.3A-W, 6.3E, and 6.3E-W
400 A L-Frame

purposes only.
thermal-imaging.
16

Circuit Breakers
Micrologic 5.3, 5.3A-W, 5.3E, 5.3E-W, 6.3A, 6.3A-W, 6.3E, and 6.3E-W Electronic Trip Unit Short Time Trip
Curve
DB419349.eps

6.3A-W, 6.3E, and 6.3E-W
400 A L-Frame

purposes only.
thermal-imaging.

Circuit Breakers
Micrologic 1.3 M Electronic Trip Unit Instantaneous Trip Curve

DB419350.eps
Micrologic™ 1.3M Instantaneous Trip Curve

400 A L-Frame

purposes only.

Circuit Breakers

DB419351.eps

Micrologic™ 2.3M Overload Trip Curve
400 A, 600A L-Frame

purposes only.
later.
(4) li = 12 x In
In = 400 A, 600 A

Circuit Breakers
Micrologic 3.3 and 3.3W Electronic Trip Unit Long Time Trip Curve
DB419352.eps

Micrologic™ 3.3 and 3.3-W
600 A L-Frame

purposes only.
thermal-imaging.
16

Circuit Breakers
Micrologic 3.3S and 3.3S-W Electronic Trip Unit Long Time / Short Time Trip Curve
DB419353.eps

Micrologic™ 3.3S and 3.3S-W
600 A L-Frame

purposes only.
thermal-imaging.

Circuit Breakers
Trip Unit Instantaneous Trip Curve
DB419354.eps

Micrologic™ 3.3, 3.3-W, 3.3S, 3.3S-W,
5.3A, 5.3A-W, 5.3E, 5.3E-W, 6.3A, 6.3A-W,
6.3E, and 6.3E-W
600 A L-Frame

purposes only.
thermal-imaging.

Circuit Breakers
Trip Curve
DB419355.eps

6.3A-W, 6.3E, and 6.3E-W
600 A L-Frame

purposes only.
thermal-imaging.
16

Circuit Breakers
Micrologic 5.3A, 5.3A-W, 5.3E, 5.3E-W, 6.3A, 6.3A-W, 6.3E, and 6.3E-W Electronic Trip Unit Short Time
Trip Curve
DB419356.eps

6.3A-W, 6.3E, and 6.3E-W
600 A L-Frame

purposes only.
thermal-imaging.

Circuit Breakers
Micrologic 6.3A, 6.3A-W, 6.3E, and 6.3E-W Ground-Fault Trip Curve

DB419357.eps

Micrologic™ 6.3A, 6.3A-W, 6.3E, and 6.3E-W

purposes only.

Circuit Breakers
Micrologic 1.3 M Electronic Trip Unit Instantaneous Trip Curve

Micrologic™ 1.3M Instantaneous Trip Curve
DB419358.eps
600 A L-Frame

purposes only.

Circuit Breakers
L-Frame 600 A Typical Peak Let-Through Curves

powerpact tm L-frame current limiting circuit breakers
600 a frame at 240, 480 and 600 v, 3Ø
LD, LG, LJ, LL and LR 250-600 A
peak let-through current lp
Ip
DB419359.eps
70000
Maximum
60000 Available
Peak Current R
at 15% Power Factor
Typical* Peak Let-Through Current (Amperes)
R 480 V 3Ø
600 V 3Ø
50000
L R
L 240 V 3Ø
40000
Maximum J L
Available J
Peak Current
at 25% Power Factor
J G G
30000
D
D D
20000
15000
20000
30000
40000
50000
60000
70000
80000
90000
100000
150000
200000
10000
Available Short Circuit Current (RMS Symmetrical Amperes)

Circuit Breakers
L-Frame 600 A Typical I2t Let-Through Curves

600 a frame at 240, 480 and 600 v, 3Ø
LD, LG, LJ, LL and LR 250-600 A
let-through l²p
I2 t
DB419360.eps
5
R
4 600 V 3Ø
L
R
480 V 3Ø
3
2
G G
D
R
D
L
J 240 V 3Ø
G
1
20000
30000
40000
50000
60000
70000
80000
90000
100000
150000
200000
10000
Available Short Circuit Current (RMS Symmetrical Amperes)

Circuit Breakers
L-Frame UL Listed Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker

600 a frame at 240, 480 and 600 v, 3Ø
LJ, LL and LR 250-600 A
peak let-through current lp
Ip
DB419361.eps
70000
Maximum 480 V 3Ø
60000 Available
Peak Current 600 V 3Ø
at 15% Power Factor
50000
240 V 3Ø
40000
30000
20000
15000
20000
30000
40000
50000
60000
70000
80000
90000
100000
150000
200000
10000

Circuit Breakers
L-Frame UL Listed Current-Limiting Circuit Breaker

600 a frame at 240, 480 and 600 v, 3Ø
LJ, LL and LR 250-600 A
DB419362.eps
I2 t
5
600 V 3Ø
480 V 3Ø
4
2
240 V 3Ø
1
20000
30000
40000
50000
60000
70000
80000
90000
100000
150000
200000
10000
L-Frame Circuit Breaker Reflex Tripping
20
L-Frame 600 A
L-Frame 400 A
10
t 8
(ms) 7
2 3 4 6 10 20 30 40 60 100 200
I (kA RMS)

Additionals characteristics Distribution system
Plates for mounting on busbars
Short-circuit withstand capability
Determining the spacing between busbar Short-circuit strength diagram according

supports (LA9ZX01495 and LA9ZX01485), to UL845 (LA9ZX01508)
according to IEC 60439-1 (1)
80 30
DB404428.eps
DB404429.eps
70 25
30 x 5, 10
60 20
12, 20 x 5,
30 x 10 12, 20 x 10
kÂ 50 kÂ 15
30 x 5
12 x 10
40 and 20 x 10 10
12 x 5
30 and 5
15 x 5,
20 x 5,
25 x 5
20 20
200 300 400 500 600 200 300 400 500 600
Spacing between Spacing between
busbar supports (mm) busbar supports (mm)
(1) Depending on the short-circuit current.
Load resistance of busbar assemblies in IEC applications

For an ambient temperature of 35 °C and a busbar temperature of 65 °C
Cross section mm2 12 x 5 15 x 5 20 x 5 25 x 5 30 x 5 12 x 10 20 x 10 30 x 10
Permissible current A 200 250 320 400 450 360 520 630
In the event of changes in climatic conditions, the following curve indicates the correction factor K2 to be applied.
2.2
DB404430.eps
0
2.1 5
10
2.0 15
20
1.9 25
30 ° C
1.8 Ambient
35 temperature
1.7 40
45
1.6 50
55
1.5
60
1.4 65
1.3
Factor K2
1.2
1.1
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 125
Busbar temperature (° C)
Example: In normal operating conditions, a tinned busbar of 30 x 10 can permanently withstand 630 A.
For a load of 800 A, the correction factor K2 to be applied will be 1.3 ( 800 A ). As a result, the temperature rise in the busbars will reach 82.5 °C.
630 A

PowerPact Multistandard Catalogue numbers

Dimensions C-1
Wiring diagrams D-1
H-Frame, J-Frame unit-mount circuit breaker F-2
H-Frame, J-Frame circuit breaker accessories

Unit-mount circuit breaker F-4
H-Frame, J-Frame, L-Frame unit-mount circuit breakers F-9
PowerPact automatic molded case switches F-10
L-Frame circuit breaker accessories F-12
Monitoring and control, test tools

PowerPact H- J- and L- Frame F-16
Distribution system
Busbar support and mounting plates F-18
Terminals and connection module F-19
Glossary G-1

Catalogue numbers H-Frame, J-Frame unit-mount
circuit breaker
PowerPact H-Frame 150 A unit-mount thermal-magnetic circuit breakers (480 V AC, 250 V DC)
H-Frame, 150 A, 3P, 480 V AC 50/60 Hz, 250 V DC - bus bar connectors (with metric terminal nut)
DB413112.eps

Hold Trip D - 18 kA G - 35 kA J (1) - 65 kA
15 350 750 NHDF36015TW NHGF36015TW NHJF36015TW
1300A
150A li
ln

H-Frame, 150 A, 3P, 480 V AC 50/60 Hz, 250 V DC - lug lug connectors
15 350 750 NHDL36015 NHGL36015 NHJL36015
20 350 750 NHDL36020 NHGL36020 NHJL36020
30 350 750 NHDL36030 NHGL36030 NHJL36030
40 400 850 NHDL36040 NHGL36040 NHJL36040
50 400 850 NHDL36050 NHGL36050 NHJL36050
60 800 1450 NHDL36060 NHGL36060 NHJL36060
70 800 1450 NHDL36070 NHGL36070 NHJL36070
80 800 1450 NHDL36080 NHGL36080 NHJL36080
90 800 1450 NHDL36090 NHGL36090 NHJL36090
100 900 1700 NHDL36100 NHGL36100 NHJL36100
125 900 1700 NHDL36125 NHGL36125 NHJL36125
150 900 1700 NHDL36150 NHGL36150 NHJL36150
PowerPact J-Frame 250 A unit-mount thermal-magnetic circuit breakers
J-Frame, 250 A, 3P, 480 V AC 50/60 Hz, 250 V DC - bus bar connectors (with metric terminal nut)
DB413113.eps

150 750 1500 NJDF36150TW NJGF36150TW NJJF36150TW
2500
1250
250A lm
ln

J-Frame, 250 A, 3P, 480 V AC 50/60 Hz, 250 V DC - lug lug connectors
150 750 1500 NJDL36150 NJGL36150 NJJL36150
175 875 1750 NJDL36175 NJGL36175 NJJL36175
200 1000 2000 NJDL36200 NJGL36200 NJJL36200
225 1125 2250 NJDL36225 NJGL36225 NJJL36225
250 1250 2500 NJDL36250 NJGL36250 NJJL36250
(1) UL Listed/CSA Certified as current limiting circuit breakers.

Catalogue numbers H-Frame, J-Frame unit-mount
circuit breaker
H-Frame 150 A and J-Frame 250 A electronic trip UL rated circuit breakers (480 V AC, 50/60 Hz)
PowerPact bus bar connectors (with metric terminal nut)
DB413114.eps
Electronic Trip Sensor Interrupting rating

trip unit type function rating (A) Standard (80 %) rated
D - 18 kA G - 35 kA J (1) - 65 kA
Micrologic 3.2
Standard LI 60 NHDF36060U31XTW NHGF36060U31XTW NHJF36060U31XTW
100 NHDF36100U31XTW NHGF36100U31XTW NHJF36100U31XTW
250 NJDF36250U31XTW NJGF36250U31XTW NJJF36250U31XTW
Micrologic 5.2 E
Energy LSI 60 NHDF36060U53XTW NHGF36060U53XTW NHJF36060U53XTW
250 NJDF36250U53XTW NJGF36250U53XTW NJJF36250U53XTW
PowerPact lug lug connectors
D - 18 kA G - 35 kA J (1) - 65 kA
Micrologic 3.2
Standard LI 60 NHDL36060U31X NHGL36060U31X NHJL36060U31X
100 NHDL36100U31X NHGL36100U31X NHJL36100U31X
250 NJDL36250U31X NJGL36250U31X NJJL36250U31X
Micrologic 5.2 E
Energy LSI 60 NHDL36060U53X NHGL36060U53X NHJL36060U53X
250 NJDL36250U53X NJGL36250U53X NJJL36250U53X

Catalogue numbers H-Frame, J-Frame
circuit breaker accessories
Unit-mount circuit breaker
Rear connection
3P
Description device H-Frame J-Frame
DB413116.eps
Mixed rear connection Kit S37432 S37437

Consisting of Short rear connections Set of 2 2 x (1) S37433 2 x (1) S37438
Long rear connections Set of 2 S37434 S37439
Short terminal cover S37436 S37440
Plug-in version
Kit for PowerPact H- and J-Frame 3P
Description device H- and J-Frame
DB418379.eps
Plug-in kit S29278
Withdrawable version
Kit for PowerPact H- and J-Frame 3P
DB418380.eps
Plug-in kit S29278

Cradle side plates (fixed part of chassis) LV429282
Circuit breaker side plates (moving part of chassis) LV429283
Plug-in and drawout accessories

PowerPact H- and J-Frame 3P
DB117160.eps
H-Frame shutter kit S37442

J-Frame shutter kit S37443
9-wire fixed connector (for base) LV429273
9-wire moving connector (for CB) LV429274
DB117161.eps
Support for 2 moving connectors LV429275

Extended escutcheon for toggle S29284
2 position indiciating switches (connected/disconnected) LV429287
DB117162.eps
DB115885.eps
Mechanical lug kits for H-Frame and J-Frame circuit breaker

Circuit breaker application Qty per kit
Al lugs for use with Al or Cu wire (HD/HG/HJ) 15-150 A 3 AL150HDS
DB413027.eps
Al lugs for use with Al or Cu wire (JD/JG/JJ) 150-175 A 3 AL175JD

DB413021.eps
Al lugs for use with Al or Cu wire (JD/JG/JJ) 200-250 A 3 AL250JD

DB413022.eps

Terminal nuts for busbar connection

Description Qty per kit
H-Frame terminal nut insert-english (HD/HG/HJ) 1/4-20 9-10.2 Nm 2 S37425
DB413175.eps
H-Frame terminal nut insert-english (HD/HG/HJ) 1/4-20 9-10.2 Nm 3 S37444

H-Frame terminal nut insert-metric (HD/HG/HJ) M6 9-10.2 Nm 2 S37426
J-Frame terminal nut insert-english (JD/JG/JJ) 1/4-20 9-10.2 Nm 2 S37427
J-Frame terminal nut insert-english (JD/JG/JJ) 1/4-20 9-10.2 Nm 3 S37445
J-Frame terminal nut insert-metric (JD/JG/JJ) M8 9-10.2 Nm 2 S37428
Control wire terminals for mechanical lugs and terminal nuts
Mechanical lugs Qty per kit
Control wire terminal for H-frame lugs (HD/HG/HJ) 2 S37423
DB413059.eps
Control wire terminal for J-frame lugs (JD/JG/JJ) 2 S37424
Busbar connection
Control wire terminal for H-frame lugs terminal nut (HD/HG/HJ) 2 S37429
DB413060.eps
Control wire terminal for J-frame lugs terminal nut (JD/JG/JJ) 2 S37430
(1) Order two kits (two in kit x two kits for total of four).

Terminal shields
Used with
H- and J-Frame used with mechanical lugs Qty per kit
DB416076.eps
Short lug shield H-Frame - 60 A 3 AWG 1 S37446

H-Frame - 150 A 3/0 AWG 1 S37447
J-Frame - 350 kcmil 1 S37448
H- and J-Frame used with power distribution connectors and compression lugs
DB413119.eps
Long lug shield H-Frame 1 S37449

J-Frame 1 S37450
Rotary operated handles

H- and J-Frame
Direct mounted
Standard black handle (handle only) LV429337
DB413121.eps
Standard black handle with LV429337

One early-break switch + LV429345
LV429337
Two early-make switches + LV429346
Red handle on yellow bezel (handle only) LV429339
MCC conversion accessory LV429341
CNOMO conversion accessory LV429342
Red handle on yellow bezel with LV429339
LV429339
Door mounted
Telescoping
Telescoping LV429343
Locking systems
H- and J-Frame
Handle padlocking device (1) Removable (lock OFF only) 29370
DB413122.eps
Fixed (lock OFF or ON) 29371

Fixed (lock OFF only) S37422
Locking of rotary handle Keylock adapter (keylock not included) LV429344

DB112263.eps
Keylock (keylock adapter not included) Ronis 1351B.500 41940

Keylock (keylock adapter not included) Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z 42888
Locking of motor mechanism Keylock adapter (keylock not included) LV432649

DB112264.eps
Installation accessories
Front-panel escutcheon IP40 H- and J-Frame
For toggle 29315
DB416072.eps
Lead - Sealing accessories

Bay of accessories LV429375
DB115615.eps

OF or SD or SDE or SDV 29450
DB112254.eps
OF or SD or SDE or SDV low level 29452
SDx output module for Micrologic electronic trip unit

SDx module 24/415 V AC/DC LV429532
DB112275.eps
Voltage releases
Voltage MX MN
AC 24 V 50/60 Hz LV429384 LV429404
DB111454.eps
48 V 50/60 Hz LV429385 LV429405

110-130 V 50/60 Hz LV429386 LV429406
220-240 V 50/60 Hz and 208-277 V 60 Hz LV429387 LV429407
380-415 V 50 Hz and 440-480 V 60 Hz LV429388 LV429408
525 V 50 Hz and 600 V 60 Hz LV429389 LV429409
DC 12 V LV429382 LV429402
24 V LV429390 LV429410
30 V LV429391 LV429411
48 V LV429392 LV429412
60 V LV429383 LV429403
125 V LV429393 LV429413
250 V LV429394 LV429414
MN 48 V DC 50/60 Hz
MN 48 V DC LV429412
MN 110-130 V DC 50/60 Hz
MN 125 V DC LV429413
MN 220-250 V 50/60 Hz
MN 250 V DC LV429414

Motor mechanism
Motor mechanism module supplied with SDE adapter
Voltage MT100/160 MT250
AC 48-60 V 50/60 Hz LV429440 LV431548
DB125554.eps
110-130 V 50/60 Hz LV429433 LV431540

220-240 V 50/60 Hz and LV429434 LV431541
208-277 V 60 Hz
380-415 V 50/60 Hz and LV429435 LV431542
440-480 V 60 Hz
DC 24-30 V LV429436 LV431543
48-60 V LV429437 LV431544
110-130 V LV429438 LV431545
250 V LV429439 LV431546
Communicating motor mechanism module supplied with SDE adapter
Motor mechanism module 220-240 V 50/60 Hz MTc 100/160 LV429441
MTc 250 LV431549
DB112265.eps
+
Breaker and Status BSCM LV434205
Communication Module
+
NSX cord Wire length L = 1.3 m LV434201
Wire length L = 3 m LV434202
U > 480 V AC wire length L = 0.35 m LV434204

Catalogue numbers H-Frame, J-Frame, L-Frame
unit-mount circuit breakers
PowerPact H-Frame 150 A Electronic motor protector circuit breakers (UL ratings) - Two device solutions (1)
H-Frame, 150 A, 3P, 480 V AC 50/60 Hz - bus bar connectors (with metric terminal nut)
Sensor rating (A) Full Load Amperes Range (FLA) Interrupting rating
DB413112.eps
Standard (80 %) rated

J - 65 kA
150 58 - 130 NHJF36150M38XTW
H-Frame, 150 A, 3P, 480 V AC 50/60 Hz - lug lug connectors
1300A
150A li
ln

J - 65 kA
150 58 - 130 NHJL36150M38X
(1) Two-device solutions (these electronic motor protector circuit breakers include short circuit and overload protection):
b1 electronic motor circuit protector with a Micrologic 2.2 M electronic trip unit, plus
b1 contactor.
PowerPact J-Frame 250 A Electronic motor protector circuit breakers (UL ratings) - Two device solutions (1)
J-Frame, 250 A, 3P, 480 V AC 50/60 Hz - bus bar connectors (with metric terminal nut)
DB413113.eps

J - 65 kA
250 114 - 217 NJJF36250M38XTW
J-Frame, 250 A, 3P, 480 V AC 50/60 Hz - lug lug connectors
2500
1250
250A lm
ln

J - 65 kA
250 114 - 217 NJJL36250M38X
b1 contactor.
PowerPact L-Frame 600 A Electronic motor protector circuit breakers (UL ratings) - Two device solutions (1)
L-Frame,600 A, 3P, 480 V AC 50/60 Hz - bus bar connectors (with metric terminal nut)
DB413114.eps

J - 65 kA
400 190 - 348 NLJF36400M38XTW
600 312 - 520 NLJF36600M38XTW
L-Frame,600 A, 3P, 480 V AC 50/60 Hz - lug lug connectors
J - 65 kA
400 190 - 348 NLJL36400M38X
600 312 - 520 NLJL36600M38X
b1 contactor.

Catalogue numbers PowerPact automatic molded
case switches
PowerPact automatic molded case switches

3P, 480 V AC 50/60 Hz, bus bar connector
Current rating at 40 °C (A) Trip point Interrupting rating
DB413112.eps

L - 100 kA
150 2250 A NHLF36000S15TW
250 3125 A NJLF36000S25TW
400 4800 A NLLF36000S40XTW
1300A
150A li
ln
600 6600 A NLLF36000S60XTW
PowerPact automatic molded case switches

3P, 480 V AC 50/60 Hz, lug lug connector
Current rating at 40 °C (A) Trip point Interrupting rating
DB413112.eps

L - 100 kA
150 2250 A NHLL36000S15
250 3125 A NJLL36000S25
400 4800 A NLLL36000S40X
1300A
150A li
ln
600 6600 A NLLL36000S60X

Catalogue numbers L-Frame unit-mount
circuit breaker
PowerPact L-Frame 600 A electronic trip UL rated 3P circuit breakers (480 V AC, 50/60 Hz)
With factory sealed trip unit suitable for reverse connection
PowerPact bus bar connectors (with metric terminal nut)
DB413115.eps

D - 18 kA G - 35 kA J (1) - 65 kA L (1) - 100 kA
Micrologic 3.3
Standard LI 250 A NLDF36250U31XTW NLGF36250U31XTW NLJF36250U31XTW -
400 A NLDF36400U31XTW NLGF36400U31XTW NLJF36400U31XTW NLLF36400U31XTW
Micrologic 5.3 E
Energy LSI 400 A NLDF36400U53XTW NLGF36400U53XTW NLJF36400U53XTW NLLF36400U53XTW
PowerPact lug lug connectors
D - 18 kA G - 35 kA J (1) - 65 kA L (1) - 100 kA
Micrologic 3.3
Standard LI 250 A NLDL36250U31X NLGL36250U31X NLJL36250U31X -
400 A NLDL36400U31X NLGL36400U31X NLJL36400U31X NLLL36400U31X
Micrologic 5.3 E
Energy LSI 400 A NLDL36400U53X NLGL36400U53X NLJL36400U53X NLLL36400U53X

Catalogue numbers L-Frame circuit breaker
accessories
Rear connection
3P
DB413116.eps
Description device L-Frame

Mixed rear connection kit 32477
Consisting of: Short rear connections Set of 2 2 x (1) 32475
Long rear connections Set of 2 2 x (1) 32476
Short twerminal cover 32562
Plug-in version
Kit for PowerPact L 3P
DB418379.eps
Plug-in kit LV432514
Withdrawable version
Kit for PowerPact L 3P
DB418380.eps
Plug-in kit S32514

Fixed part of chassis LV432532
Moving part of chassis LV432533
Plug-in and drawout accessories

PowerPact L 3P
DB117160.eps
Secondary disconnecting blocks - 9 wire connector LV429273

9-wire moving connector (for CB) LV432523
Support for 3 moving connectors LV432525
LV429272
DB117161.eps
9-wire disconnecting harness (fixed & moving)

2 IP4 shutters for plug-in base 32521
Extended escutcheon for toggle S32534
Locking device (not included) LV429286
DB116368.eps
2 position indiciating switches (connected/disconnected) LV429287

DB115885.eps
Mechanical lug kits for L-Frame circuit breakers

Kit comprising Al lugs for use with Al or Cu wire + terminal shield
Ampere rating Unit mount Number of wires 3P
DB413118.eps
per lug and wire range (2)

250 b (1) 2 AWG - 500 kcmil Al Set of 3 AL400L61K3
400/600 b (2) 2/0 AWG - 500 kcmil Al or Cu Set of 3 AL600LS52K3
400/600 b (2) 3/0 AWG - 500 kcmil Al or Cu Set of 3 AL600LF52K3
DB416076.eps
Kit comprising mechanical lugs and 2 interphase barriers

Aluminium connectors Set of 3 LV432479
DB416086.eps
Aluminium connectors for 2 cables Set of 3 LV432481
Control wire terminals

Busbar connection Qty per kit
Control tape takeoff (L-frame) 2 29348
DB112724.eps
(1) Order two kits (two in kit x two kits for total of four).
(2) For control wire installation, use an 8 - 32 x 1/4 in. screw (not provided) into tapped control wire hole in lower left hand corner of lug.

accessories
Terminal shields
Used with
L-Frame
DB416087.eps
Short terminal shield (3P) 1 LV432591

Long terminal shield (3P) 1 LV432593
Short terminal shield (3P) with gasket 1 LV433683

DB416088.eps
Rotary operated handles

L-Frame
Direct mounted
DB111480.eps

LV432597
MCC conversion LV432606
CNOMO conversion LV432602
Red handle on yellow bezel with LV432599
LV432599
Door mounted
Telescoping
Telescoping LV432603
Accessories for direct or extended rotary handle
Indication auxiliary 1 early-break contact LV432605
2 early-make contacts LV429346
Locking systems
L-Frame
Handle padlocking device (1) Removable (lock OFF only) 29370
DB413122.eps
Fixed (lock OFF or ON) 32631

Fixed (lock OFF only) NJPAF
Locking of rotary handle Keylock adapter (keylock not included) LV432604
Installation accessories
Front-panel escutcheon IP40 L-Frame
For toggle 32556
DB416072.eps
Lead - Sealing accessories

Bay of accessories LV429375
DB115615.eps

accessories
OF or SD or SDE or SDV 29450
DB112254.eps
OF or SD or SDE or SDV low level 29452
SDx output module for Micrologic electronic trip unit

SDx module 24/415 V AC/DC LV429532
DB112275.eps
Voltage releases
Voltage MX MN
AC 24 V 50/60 Hz LV429384 LV429404
DB111454.eps
48 V 50/60 Hz LV429385 LV429405

110-130 V 50/60 Hz LV429386 LV429406
220-240 V 50/60 Hz and 208-277 V 60 Hz LV429387 LV429407
380-415 V 50 Hz and 440-480 V 60 Hz LV429388 LV429408
525 V 50 Hz and 600 V 60 Hz LV429389 LV429409
DC 12 V LV429382 LV429402
24 V LV429390 LV429410
30 V LV429391 LV429411
48 V LV429392 LV429412
60 V LV429383 LV429403
125 V LV429393 LV429413
250 V LV429394 LV429414
MN 48 V DC 50/60 Hz
MN 48 V DC LV429412
MN 110-130 V DC 50/60 Hz
MN 125 V DC LV429413
MN 220-250 V 50/60 Hz
MN 250 V DC LV429414

accessories
Motor mechanism
Motor mechanism module
Voltage MT400-630
AC 48-60 V 50/60 Hz LV432639
DB111475.eps
110-130 V 50/60 Hz LV432640

220-240 V 50/60 Hz and 208-277 V 60 Hz LV432641
380-415 V 50 Hz LV432642
440-480 V 60 Hz LV432647
Ø5...8
auto
DC 24-30 V LV432643
u
man
48-60 V LV432644
110-130 V LV432645
250 V LV432646
Operation counter LV432648
Communicating motor mechanism module
Motor mechanism module 220-240 V 50/60 Hz MTc 400/630 LV432652
DB111476.eps
Ø5...8
auto
u
man
+
Breaker status BSCM LV434205
Communication Module
+
NSX cord Wire length L = 1.3 m LV434201
Wire length L = 3 m LV434202
U > 480 V AC wire length L = 0.35 m LV434204
Trip unit accessories
External neutral current transformer
400 - 600 A S432575
DB112733.eps

Catalogue numbers Monitoring and control,
test tools
PowerPact H- J- and L- Frame
Communication option
IFE Ethernet interface for LV breaker LV434010
LV434011
DB417415.eps
Ethernet interface for LV breakers and gateway
IFM Modbus-SL interface module TRV00210

DB111441.eps
I/O application module LV434063

DB417414.eps
User guide IFE DOCA0084EN-00

User guide I/O application module DOCA0055EN-00
Monitoring and control (remote operation)

Circuit breaker accessories
Breaker Status Control Module BSCM LV434205
DB111439.eps
ULP display module (1)

Switchboard front display module FDM121 TRV00121
FDM mounting accessory (diameter 22 mm) TRV00128
DB111440.eps
Ethernet display module

Switchboard front display module FDM128 LV434128
DB417489.eps
ULP communication module

Modbus interface Modbus SL communication interface module TRV00210
DB111441.eps
ULP wiring accessories

NSX cord L = 1.3 m (4.27 ft) V y 480 V LV434201
DB111442.eps
NSX cord L = 3 m (9.84 ft) V y 480 V LV434202

NSX cord L = 1.3 m (4.27 ft) V > 480 V AC LV434204
NSX cord L = 3 m (9.84 ft) V > 480 V LV434303
10 stacking connectors for communication interface modules TRV00217

DB115621.eps
2 Modbus line terminators VW3A8306DRC

DB115622.eps DB111443.eps
RS 485 roll cable (4 wires, length 60 m) 50965
5 RJ45 connectors female/female TRV00870

DB111444.eps DB115623.eps
10 ULP line terminators TRV00880
10 RJ45/RJ45 male cord L = 0.3 m TRV00803

10 RJ45/RJ45 male cord L = 0.6 m TRV00806
DB111445.eps
5 RJ45/RJ45 male cord L = 1 m TRV00810

2 wires RS 485 insulated repeated TRV00211
(1) For measurement display with Micrologic A and E or status display with BSCM.

Catalogue numbers Monitoring and control,
test tools
PowerPact H-Frame, J-Frame, L- Frame
Monitoring and control (remote operation)

Power supply modules
External power supply module 24-30 V DC 54440
24 V DC-1 A OVC IV 48-60 V DC 54441
DB112736.eps
100-125 V AC 54442
110-130 V AC 54443
200-240 V AC 54444
380-415 V AC 54445
Battery module
24 V DC battery module 54446
DB112729.eps
L4
L3 Inpu
t
24VDC
Output
AD 24VDC
220A
G2
G1
Test tool and software

Test tool
Pocket battery for Micrologic LV434206
DB111449.eps
0
Test
Maintenance case TRV00910

Comprising:
DB111451.eps
- USB maintenance interface

- Power supply
- Micrologic cord
- USB cord
- RJ45/RJ45 male cord
Spare USB maintenance interface TRV00911

DB111450.eps
Spare power supply 110-240 V AC TRV00915

DB111452.eps
Spare Micrologic cord for USB maintenance interface TRV00917

DB111453.eps
Software
Configuration and setting software RSU LV4ST100 (1)
Test software LTU LV4ST121 (1)
DB117158.eps
(1) Downloadable from http://www.schneider-electric.com.

Catalogue numbers Distribution system
Busbar support and mounting plates
IEC busbar supports and accessories

Sale in
DB403872.eps
DB403873-LIN.eps
ind.Q.
3-pole For 12, 15, 20, 25, 30 x 5/10 mm2 busbars 10 LA9ZX01495
End covers for 3-pole busbar support 10 LA9ZX01573
LA9ZX01573 LA9ZX01495
UL busbar supports and accessories

Sale in
DB403872.eps
DB403876.eps
ind.Q.
3-pole For 12, 20, 30 x 5/10 mm busbars 10 LA9ZX01508
Base plate 240 x 700 2 LA9ZX01515
End covers for busbar support 10 LA9ZX01573
LA9ZX01573 LA9ZX01508
Other accessories
Sale in
DB401275.eps
ind.Q.
Covers, length 1 m For 12-30 x 5 mm2 busbars Set of 10 LA9ZX01244
For 12-30 x 10 mm2 busbars Set of 10 LA9ZX01245
For PowerPact 3P circuit breakers

Ratings 600 V (UL) - 690 V AC (IEC) Sale in
ind. Q.
DB413124.eps
Mounting plate for H frame circuit breakers 100-250 A (104 x 190 x 63) 1 LA9ZA32600
Mounting plate for J frame circuit breakers 250 A (104 x 190 x 63) 1 LV429372
Mounting plate for L frame circuit breakers 400-630 A (139 x 270 x 63) 1 LV432623

Catalogue numbers Distribution system
Terminals and connection module
Terminals
Sale in
DB400227.eps
ind. Q.
One-pole for flat bars, 5 mm 270 A (I max) Capacity 4-35 mm2 50 LA9ZX01285
400 A (I max) Capacity 16-70 mm2 25 LA9ZX01287
LA9ZX01285 3P cover, width 84 mm 10 LA9ZX01413
DB400243.eps
LA9ZX01287
Terminals on mounting plate

Sale in
DB400226.eps
ind. Q.
3P, on mounting plate + cover, for 12 x 5 to 30 x 10 busbars 440 A (I max) Capacity 35-120 mm2 1 LA9ZX01243
LA9ZX01243
Connection module
Sale in
DB400240.eps
ind. Q.
3P, spring terminal connection + cover, for busbars 80 A (I max) Capacity 1.5-16 mm² 8 LA9ZX01563
of 12 x 5 to 30 x 10
LA9ZX01563
Connection by connectors
LA9ZX01285 LA9ZX01287 LA9ZX01243 LA9ZX01563
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.
Flexible wire mm2 4 35 16 70 35 120 1.5 16
Multi-strand wire mm2 4 35 16 70 35 120 1.5 16
Rigid wire mm2 4 35 – – – – 1.5 16
Tightening torque N.m ... x 5 ... x 5 ... x 5-10 ... x 5-10
Supplied Supplied
without cover without cover

PowerPact Multistandard Glossary

Dimensions C-1
Wiring diagrams D-1
Accessories G-2
Circuit-breaker characteristics (IEC 60947-2) G-2
Communication G-4
Components G-6
Controls G-6
Discrimination / Cascading G-6
Environment G-7
Harmonics G-8
Measurements G-9
Protection G-10
Relays and auxiliary contacts G-10
Switchgear G-10
Three-phase asynchronous motors and their protection G-11
Trip units G-12

For each major section (Accessories, Switchgear, etc.) and for each item (Adapter
for plug-in base, Connection terminal, etc.), this glossary provides:
b the reference standard
b the standardised IEC symbol
b the definition.
Text in quotation marks is drawn from the standards.
Accessories ..........................................................................................................
Adapter for plug-in base The adapter is a plastic component that can be installed upstream and/or
downstream of the plug-in base and enables use of all the connection accessories of
the fixed device.
Bare-cable connector Conducting part of the circuit breaker intended for connection to power circuits. On
Powerpact, it is an aluminium part that screws to the connection terminals of the
circuit breaker. There are one or more holes (single or multiple cable connector) for
the ends of bare cables.
Connection terminals Flat copper surface, linked to the conducting parts of the circuit breaker and to which
power connections are made using bars, connectors or lugs.
Spreaders Set of three (3P device) flat, conducting parts made of aluminium. They are screwed
to the circuit-breaker terminals to increase the pitch between poles.
Circuit-breaker characteristics (IEC 60947-2)........................................................

Breaking capacity Value of prospective current that a switching device is capable of breaking at a
generally made to the ultimate breaking capacity (Icu) and the service breaking
capacity (Ics).
Degree of protection (IP) Defines device protection against the penetration of solid objects and liquids, using
IEC 60529 two digits specified in standard IEC 60259. Each digit corresponds to a level of
protection, where 0 indicates no protection.
bb First digit (0 to 6): protection against penetration of solid foreign objects.
1 corresponds to protection against objects with a diameter > 50 mm, 6 corresponds
to total protection against dust.
bb Second digit (0 to 8): protection against penetration of liquids (water).
1 corresponds to protection against falling drops of water (condensation),
8 corresponds to continuous immersion.
The enclosure of Powerpact circuit breakers provides a minimum of IP40 (protection
against objects > 1 mm) and can reach IP56 (protection against dust and powerful
water jets) depending on the installation conditions.
Degree of protection against Defines the aptitude of an object to resist mechanical impacts on all sides, indicated
external mechanical impacts (IK) by a number from 0 to 10 (standard IEC 62262). Each number corresponds to the
impact energy (in Joules) that the object can handle according to a standardised
procedure.
0 corresponds to no protection, 1 to an impact energy of 0.14 Joules, 10 to an impact
energy of 20 Joules. Powerpact provide IK07 (2 Joules) and can provide IK08
(5 Joules) depending on the installation conditions.
Durability The term "durability" is used in the standards instead of "endurance" to express the
expectancy of the number of operating cycles which can be performed by the
equipment before repair or replacement of parts. The term "endurance" is used for
specifically defined operational performance.
Electrical durability With respect to its resistance to electrical wear, equipment is characterised by the
IEC 60947-1 number of on-load operating cycles, corresponding to the service conditions given in
the relevant product standard, which can be made without re replacement.
Frame size "A term designating a group of circuit breakers, the external physical dimensions of
which are common to a range of current ratings. Frame size is expressed in amperes
corresponding to the highest current rating of the group. Within a frame size, the
width may vary according to the number of poles. This definition does not imply
dimensional standardization."
Powerpact has three frame sizes covering 150 to 250 A and 400 to 600 A.

Insulation class Defines the type of device insulation in terms of earthing and the corresponding
safety for user, in one of three classes.
bb Class I. The device is earthed. Any electrical faults, internal or external, or caused
by the load, are cleared via the earthing circuit, thus ensuring user safety.
bb Class II. The device is not connected to a protective conductor. User safety is
ensured by reinforced insulation around the live parts (an insulating case and no
contact with live parts, i.e. plastic buttons, moulded connections, etc.) or double
insulation.
bb Class III. The device may be connected only to SELV (safety extra-low voltage)
circuits. The Powerpact are class II devices (front) and may be installed through the
door in class II switchboards (standards IEC 61140 and IEC 60664-1), without
reducing insulation, even with a rotary handle or motor mechanism module.
Making capacity Value of prospective making current that a switching device is capable of making at a
generally made to the short-circuit making capacity Icm.
Maximum break time Maximum time after which breaking is effective, i.e. the contacts separated and the
current completely interrupted.
Mechanical durability With respect to its resistance to mechanical wear, equipment is characterised by the
number of no-load operating cycles which can be effected before it becomes
necessary to service or replace any mechanical parts.
Non-tripping time This is the minimum time during which the protective device does not operate in spite
of pick-up overrun, if the duration of the overrun does not exceed the corresponding
voluntary time delay.
Pollution degree "Conventional number based on the amount of conductive or hygroscopic dust,
of environment conditions ionized gas or salt and on the relative humidity and its frequency of occurrence,
resulting in hygroscopic absorption or condensation of moisture leading to reduction
IEC 60947-1 in dielectric strength and/or surface resistivity". Standard IEC 60947-1 distinguishes
IEC 60664-1 four pollution degrees.
bb Degree 1. No pollution or only dry, non-conductive pollution occurs.
bb Degree 2. Normally, only non-conductive pollution occurs. Occasionally, however,
a temporary conductivity caused by condensation may be expected.
bb Degree 3. Conductive pollution occurs, or dry, non-conductive pollution occurs
which becomes conductive due to condensation.
bb Degree 4. The pollution generates persistent conductivity caused, for instance, by
conductive dust or by rain or snow. Powerpact meets degree 3, which corresponds
to industrial applications.
Prospective short-circuit current Current that would flow through the poles if they remained fully closed during the
short-circuit.
Rated current (In) This is the current that the device can carry continuously with the contacts closed
and without abnormal temperature rise.
Rated impulse withstand voltage "The peak value of an impulse voltage of prescribed form and polarity which the
(Uimp) equipment is capable of withstanding without failure under specified conditions of
test and to which the values of the clearances are referred. The rated impulse
withstand voltage of an equipment shall be equal to or higher than the values stated
for the transient overvoltages occurring in the circuit in which the equipment is fitted".
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) "The rated insulation voltage of an equipment is the value of voltage to which
dielectric tests and creepage distances are referred. In no case shall the maximum
value of the rated operational voltage exceed that of the rated insulation voltage".
Rated operational current (Ie) "A rated operational current of an equipment is stated by the manufacturer and takes
into account the rated operational voltage, the rated frequency, the rated duty, the
utilization category and the type of protective enclosure, if appropriate".
Rated operational voltage (Ue) "A value of voltage which, combined with a rated operational current, determines the
application of the equipment and to which the relevant tests and the utilisation
categories are referred. For multipole equipment, it is generally stated as the voltage
between phases".
This is the maximum continuous voltage at which the equipment may be used.

Rated short-time withstand current "Value of short-time withstand current, assigned to the equipment by the
(Icw) manufacturer, that the equipment can carry without damage, under the test
conditions specified in the relevant product standard". Generally expressed in kA for
0.5, 1 or 3 seconds. This is an essential characteristic for air circuit breakers. It is not
significant for moulded-case circuit breakers for which the design targets fast
opening and high limiting capacity.
Service breaking capacity (Ics) Expressed as a percentage of Icu, it provides an indication on the robustness of the
device under severe conditions. It is confirmed by a test with one opening and one
closing/opening at Ics, followed by a check that the device operates correctly at its
rated current, i.e. 50 cycles at In, where temperature rise remains within tolerances
and the protection system suffers no damage.
Short-circuit making capacity (Icm) Value indicating the capacity of the device to make and carry a high current without
repulsion of the contacts. It is expressed in kA peak.
Suitability for isolation This capability means that the circuit breaker meets the conditions below.
bb In the open position, it must withstand, without flashover between the upstream
and downstream contacts, the impulse voltage specified by the standard as a
function of the Uimp indicated on the device.
bb It must indicate contact position by one or more of the following systems:
vv position of the operating handle
vv separate mechanical indicator
vv visible break of the moving contacts
bb Leakage current between each pole, with the contacts open, at a test voltage of
1.1 x the rated operating voltage, must not exceed:
vv 0.5 mA per pole for new devices
vv 2 mA per pole for devices already subjected to normal switching operations
vv 6 mA, the maximum value that must never be exceeded.
bb It must not be possible to install padlocks unless the contacts are open. Locking in
the closed position is permissible for special applications. Powerpact complies with
this requirement by positive contact indication.
Suitable for isolation with positive Suitability for isolation is defined here by the mechanical reliability of the position
contact indication indicator of the operating mechanism, where:
bb the isolation position corresponds to the O (OFF) position
(see also Suitability for isolation, page bb the operating handle cannot indicate the "OFF" position unless the contacts are
G2) effectively open.
The other conditions for isolation must all be fulfilled:
bb locking in the open position is possible only if the contacts are effectively open
bb leakage currents are below the standardised limits
bb overvoltage impulse withstand between upstream and downstream connections.
Ultimate breaking capacity (Icu) Expressed in kA, it indicates the maximum breaking capacity of the circuit breaker. It
is confirmed by a test with one opening and one closing/opening at Icu, followed by a
check that the circuit is properly isolated. This test ensures user safety.
Communication......................................................................................................
Acti 9 Smartlink Ethernet Acti 9 Smartlink Ethernet collects data from Smartlink Modbus and transfers them
via the Ethernet network.
Acti 9 Smartlink Modbus Acti 9 Smartlink Modbus is used to transfer data from Acti 9 devices to a PLC or
monitoring system via the communication system: Modbus serial line.
BSCM The optional BSCM for Compact NSX is used to acquire device status indications
(Breaker status and control module) and control the communicating remote-control function. It includes a memory used to
manage the maintenance indicators. It serves as a converter between the analog
outputs of the device indication contacts (O/F, SD, SDE) and the digital
communicating functions.
Com’X 200 energy server Com’X 200 energy server is a compact, plug-and-play data logger that merges
seamlessly with the Smart Panels energy management solution. It consolidates
inputs from analog environmental sensors (e.g. temperature), digital readers (e.g.
pulsed signals from smart energy or water meters, load running hours), and energy
management equipment running over the Modbus protocol.
Designed for ease of implementation, data can be transmitted securely via Ethernet,
Wi-Fi, or GPRS to any energy management platforms. The Com’X 200 energy
server is scalable and can be easily adaptable to accommodate future upgrades.
Com’X 200 is a perfect fit with our energy management services, enabling
visualization, tracking, and analysis of energy data to support optimization of energy
performance and cost management.

Ethernet TCP/IP Ethernet is a very common network protocol and complies with IEEE standard 802.3.
(Transmission Control Protocol / Ethernet TCP/IP is the protocol that brings web functions to Ethernet networks.
Most PCs have an Ethernet 10/100 card (10 or 100 Mbit/s) for connection to the
Internet Protocol) internet. Data communicated from Compact NSX via Modbus are accessible on a
PC via a TCP/IP-Modbus gateway such as MPS100 or EGX100.
FDM121 switchboard display An FDM121 switchboard display unit can be connected to a ULP IMU using a
prefabricated cord to display all measurements, alarms, histories and event tables,
maintenance indicators, management of installed devices on a screen. The result is
a veritable 96 x 96 mm Power Meter.
The FMD121 display unit requires a 24 V DC power supply.
The FDM121 is a switchboard display unit that can be integrated in the
Compact NSX100 to 630 A, Powerpact H/J/L/P/R, Compact NS or Masterpact
systems.
FDM128 switchboard display The FDM128 is a large display, but requires very little depth. The anti-glare graphic
screen is backlit for very easy reading even under poor ambient lighting and at sharp
angles.
IFE Ethernet interface, The IFE Ethernet interface for LV circuit breaker enables an intelligent modular unit
IFE Ethernet interface + gateway (IMU), for example a Masterpact NT/NW or Compact NSX circuit breaker to be
connected to an Ethernet network.
IFM Module interface Modbus This module required for connection to the network, contains the Modbus address
(1 to 99) declared by the user via the two dials in front. It automatically adapts (baud
rate, parity) to the Modbus network in which it is installed.
It is equipped with a lock-out switch to enable or disable operations involving writing
to Micrologic, i.e. reset, counter reset, setting modifications, device opening and
closing commands, etc. There is a built-in test function to check the connections of
the Modbus interface module with the Micrologic and FDM121 display unit.
I/O application module The I/O (Input/Output) application module for LV breaker is part of an ULP system
with built-in functionalities and applications to enhance the application needs.
The ULP system architecture can be built without any restrictions using the wide
range of circuit breakers.
The I/O application module is compliant with the ULP system specifications.
Two I/O application modules can be connected in the same ULP network.
Network Set of communicating devices that are interconnected by communication lines in
order to share data and resources.
Open protocol A protocol for system communication, interconnection or data exchange for which
technical specifications are public, i.e. there are no restrictions on access or
implementation. An open protocol is the opposite of a proprietary protocol.
Protocol Standardised specification for dialog between digital components that exchange
data. It is an operating mode based on the length and structure of binary words and it
must be used by all the components exchanging data between themselves.
Communication is not possible without using a protocol.
RJ45 connector Universal, 8-wire connector that is widely used in digital communication networks.
The RJ45 connector is used to interconnect computer equipment (Ethernet,
Modbus, etc.), telephones and audiovisual equipment.
RS485 Modbus Modbus is the most widely used communication protocol in industrial networks. It
operates in master-slave mode. An RS485 multipoint link connects the master and
slaves via a pair of wires offering throughputs of up to 38400 bits/second over
distances up to 1200 m). The master cyclically polls the slaves which send back the
requested information.
The Modbus protocol uses frames containing the address of the targeted slave, the
function (read, write), the datum and the CRC (cyclical redundancy check).
SDTAM Relay module with two static outputs specifically for the motor-protection Micrologic
trip units 1 M, 2 M and 6 E-M. An output, linked to the contactor controller, opens the
contactor when an overload or other motor fault occurs, thus avoiding opening of the
circuit breaker. The other output stores the opening event in memory.
SDx Relay module with two outputs that remotes the trip or alarm conditions of
Compact NSX circuit breakers equipped with a Micrologic electronic trip unit.
Static output Output of a relay made up of a thyristor or triac electronic component. The low
switching capability means that a power relay is required.
This is the case for the SDx and SDTAM outputs.
ULP (Universal Logic Plug) Connection system used by Compact NSX to communicate information to the
Modbus interface via a simple RJ45 cable. Compatible modules are indicated by the
symbol opposite.

Components..........................................................................................................
ASIC (Application Specific Integrated Integrated circuit designed, built and intended for a specific application. It carries out
Circuit) repetitive sequences of instructions engraved in the silicon chip. For that reason, it is
extremely reliable because it cannot be modified and is not affected by environment
conditions.
Micrologic trip units use an ASIC for the protection functions. The ASIC cyclically
polls the network status at a high frequency, using the values supplied by captors.
Comparison with the settings forms the basis for orders to the electronic trip units.
Microprocessor A microprocessor is a more general purpose device than an ASIC. In Micrologic, a

microprocessor is used for measurements and it can be programmed. It is not used
for the main protection functions that are carried out by the ASIC.
Controls.................................................................................................................
Communicating motor mechanism For Powerpact remote control via the communication system, a communicating
motor mechanism is required. Except for the communication function, it is identical to
the standard motor mechanism module and connects to and controlled by the BSCM
module.
CNOMO machine-tool rotary handle Handle used for machine-tool control enclosures and providing IP54 and IK08.
Direct rotary handle This is an optional control handle for the circuit breaker. It has the same three
positions I (ON), O (OFF) and TRIPPED as the toggle control. It provides IP40, IK07
and the possibility, due to its extended travel, of using early-make and early-break
contacts. It maintains suitability for isolation and offers optional locking using a
keylock or a padlock.
Emergency off In a circuit equipped with a circuit breaker, this function is carried out by an opening
mechanism using an MN undervoltage release or an MX shunt release in
conjunction with an emergency off button.
Extended rotary handle Rotary handle with an extended shaft to control devices installed at the rear of
switchboards. It has the same characteristics as direct rotary handles. It offers
multiple locking possibilities using a keylock, a padlock or a door interlock.
Failsafe remote tripping Remote tripping is carried out by an opening mechanism using an MN undervoltage
release in conjunction with an emergency off button. If power is lost, the protection
device opens the circuit breaker.
Discrimination / Cascading....................................................................................
Cascading Cascading implements the current-limiting capacity of a circuit breaker, making it
possible to install downstream circuit breakers with lower performance levels.
The upstream circuit breaker reduces any high short-circuit currents. This makes it
possible to install downstream circuit breakers with breaking capacities less than the
prospective short-circuit current at their point of installation.
The main advantage of cascading is to reduce the overall cost of switchgear.
Because the current is limited throughout the circuit downstream of the limiting circuit
breaker, cascading applies to all the devices located downstream.
Current discrimination Discrimination based on the difference between the current-protection settings of the
circuit breakers. The difference in settings between two successive circuit breakers
in a circuit must be sufficient to allow the downstream breaker to clear the fault
before the upstream breaker trips.
Discrimination Discrimination is ensured between upstream and downstream circuit breakers if,
when a fault occurs, only the circuit breaker placed immediately upstream of the fault
trips.
Discrimination is the key to ensuring the continuity of service of an installation.
Energy discrimination This function is specific to Powerpact and supplements the other types of
discrimination.

Partial discrimination Discrimination is partial if the conditions for total discrimination are not met up to the
ultimate short-circuit current Icu, but only up to a lesser value. This value is called the
discrimination limit. If a fault exceeds the discrimination limit, both circuit breakers
trip.
Time discrimination Discrimination based on the difference between the time-delay settings of the circuit
breakers. The upstream trip unit is delayed to provide the downstream breaker the
time required to clear the fault.
Total discrimination Total discrimination is ensured between upstream and downstream circuit breakers
if, for all fault values, from overloads up to solid short-circuits, only the downstream
circuit breaker trips and the upstream circuit breaker remains closed.
Zone selective interlocking (ZSI) A number of circuit breakers with Micrologic electronic trip units are interconnected
one after another by a pilot wire. In the event of a short-time or ground fault:
bb in the absence of information from downstream, the circuit breaker directly
concerned by the fault (i.e. located just upstream of the fault) shifts to the shortest
time delay and sends a signal upstream
bb the upstream device, on receiving the signal from the downstream device,
maintains its normal time delay.
In this manner, the fault is cleared rapidly by the circuit breaker closest to the fault.
Environment...........................................................................................................
EMC (Electromagnetic compatibility) EMC is the capacity of a device not to disturb its environment during operation
(emitted electromagnetic disturbances) and to operate in a disturbed environment
(electromagnetic disturbances affecting the device). The standards define various
classes for the types of disturbances. Micrologic trip units comply with annexes F
and J in standard IEC IE60947-2.
Power loss The flow of current through the circuit-breaker poles produces Joule-effect losses
Pole resistance caused by the resistance of the poles.
Product environmental profile (PEP) An assessment on the impact of the construction and use of a product on the
LCA: Life-cycle assessment environment, in compliance with standard ISO 14040, Environmental management,
life-cycle assessment (LCA), principles and framework.
ISO 14040 For Powerpact, this assessment is carried out using the standardised EIME
(Environmental Impact and Management Explorer) software, which makes possible
comparisons between the products of different manufacturers.
It includes all stages, i.e. manufacture, distribution, use and end of life, with set
usage assumptions:
bb use over 20 years at a percent load of 80 % for 14 hours per day and 20 % for ten
hours
bb according to the European electrical-energy model.
It provides the information presented below.
bb Materials making up the product: composition and proportions, with a check to
make sure no substances forbidden by the RoHS directive are included.
bb Manufacture: on Schneider Electric production sites that have set up an
environmental management system certified ISO 14001.
bb Distribution: packaging in compliance with the 94/62/EC packaging directive
(optimised volumes and weights) and optimised distribution flows via local centres.
bb Use: no aspects requiring special precautions for use. Power lost through Joule
effect in Watts (W) must be < 0.02 % of total power flowing through the circuit
breaker. Based on the above assumptions, annual consumption from 95 to 200 kWh.
bb End of life: products dismantled or crushed. For Powerpact, 81 % of materials can
be recycled using standard recycling techniques. Less than 2 % of total weight
requires special recycling.
Product environmental profile (PEP) Environmental indicators are also frequently used for the PEP (sheet available on
Environmental indicators request for Powerpact):
bb Depletion of natural resources
bb Depletion of energy
bb Depletion of water
bb Potential for atmospheric warming (greenhouse effect)
bb Potential for stratospheric ozone depletion
bb Creation of atmospheric ozone (ozone layer)
bb Acidification of air (acid rain)
bb Production of hazardous waste.

RoHS directive European directive 2002/95/EC dated 27 January 2003 aimed at reducing or
(Restriction of Hazardous substances) eliminating the use of hazardous substances. The manufacturer must attest to
compliance, without third-party certification. Circuit breakers are not included in the
list of concerned products, which are essentially consumer products.
That not withstanding, Schneider Electric decided to comply with the RoHS directive.
Powerpact products are designed in compliance with RoHS and do not contain
(above the authorised levels) lead, mercury, cadmium, hexavalent chromium or
flame retardants (polybrominated biphenyls PBB and polybrominated diphenyl ether
PBDE).
Safety clearances When installing a circuit breaker, minimum distances (safety clearances) must be
maintained between the device and panels, bars and other protection systems
installed nearby. These distances, which depend on the ultimate breaking capacity,
are defined by tests carried out in accordance with standard IEC 60947-2.
Temperature derating An ambient temperature varying significantly from 40 °C can modify operation of
magnetic or thermal-magnetic protection functions. It does not affect electronic trip
units. However, when electronic trip units are used in high-temperature situations, it
is necessary to check the settings to ensure that only the permissible current for the
given ambient temperature is let through.
Vibration withstand Circuit breakers are tested in compliance with standard IEC 60068-2-6 for the levels
IEC 60068-2-6 required by merchant-marine inspection organisations (Veritas, Lloyd's, etc.):
bb 2 to 13.2 Hz: amplitude of ±1 mm
bb 13.2 to 100 Hz: constant acceleration of 0.7 g.
WEEE directive European directive on managing the waste of electrical and electronic equipment.
(Waste of Electrical and Electronic Circuit breakers are not included in the list of concerned products.
However, Powerpact products respect the WEEE directive.
Equipment)
Harmonics.............................................................................................................
Current harmonics Non-linear loads cause harmonic currents that flow in the 50 Hz (or 60 Hz)
distribution system. Total harmonic current is the sum of sinusoidal AC currents for
which the rms values can be measured and broken down into:
bb the fundamental current at the 50/60 Hz frequency of the distribution system, with
an rms value of IH1
bb harmonic currents with whole, odd multiples (3, 5, 7, etc.) of the 50/60 Hz
frequency, called the third-order, fifth-order, etc. harmonics. For example, IH3, the
third-order harmonic at 150/180 Hz, IH5, the fifth-order harmonic at 250/300 Hz, etc.
The presence of harmonics in the system must be monitored and limited because it
results in temperature rise, currents in the neutral (caused by the third-order
harmonics and multiples), malfunctions of sensitive electronic devices, etc.
Micrologic E trip units take into account harmonics up to order 15 in the THDI and
THDU calculations.
Non-linear load Systems producing harmonics are present in all industrial, commercial and
residential sectors. Harmonics are caused by non-linear loads. A load is said to be
non-linear when the current drawn does not have the same waveform as the supply
voltage. Typically, loads using power electronics are non-linear.
Examples of non-linear loads include computers, rectifiers, variable-speed drives,
arc furnaces and fluorescent lighting.
Total harmonic distortion of current THDI characterises the distortion of the current wave by harmonics.
(THDI) It indicates the quantity of harmonics in the resulting waveform. It is expressed in
percent.
The higher the THDI, the more the current is distorted by harmonics.
THDI should remain below 10 %. Above that level, there is said to be harmonic
pollution that is considered severe when it rises above 50 %.
Total harmonic distortion of voltage THDU characterises the distortion of the voltage wave by harmonics.
(THDU) It indicates the quantity of harmonics in the resulting waveform. It is expressed in
percent.
The higher the THDU, the more the system voltage is distorted by harmonics. It is
advised not to exceed 5 % for low-voltage systems.

Voltage harmonics For each current harmonic IHk, there is a voltage harmonic UHk of the same order k,
where the resulting voltage is the sum of the two waves.
The voltage wave is therefore distorted with respect to the standard sinusoidal wave.
Measurements.......................................................................................................
Contact wear Each time Powerpact opens, the Micrologic 5/6 trip unit measures the interrupted
current and increments the contact-wear indicator as a function of the interrupted
current, according to test results stored in memory.
Current transformer with It is made up of a coil wound around an iron frame through which a power busbar
iron-core toroid runs. The current flowing in the bar, on passing through the sensor, induces a
magnetic field that reverses for each half period. This variation in the field in turn
creates an induced current in the coil. This current is proportional to the current
flowing in the bar. It is sufficient to supply the measurement electronics.
The disadvantage of iron-core measurement current transformers (CT) is that they
rapidly saturate for currents > 10 In.
Current transformer with Rogowski It is made up of a coil without an iron frame, through which a power busbar runs. The
toroid or air-core CT output voltage at the coil terminals is proportional to the current flowing through the
bar. The result is a current transformer (CT) with a voltage output. The advantage is
that it never saturates whatever the primary current and thus enables measurement
of high currents. The output is however a very low current that is too low to supply the
measurement electronics.
For Micrologic, Rogowski CTs measure the current and a second CT, with an iron
core, provides the electrical supply.
Demand current, demand Average of the instantaneous current or power values over an adjustable fixed or
power and peak values sliding time interval. The highest value observed over the time interval is the peak
value. The time interval runs from the last reset.
Instantaneous current True rms value of the current measured by the current transformers over a sliding
time interval. Available on Micrologic 5/6 E.
Instantaneous voltage True rms value of the voltage measured by the voltage sensors over a sliding time
interval. Available on Micrologic 5/6 E.
Maximeters/minimeters Micrologic 5/6 E can record the minimum and maximum values of electrical
parameters over set time periods.
Overvoltage category Standard IEC 60664-1 stipulates that it is up to the user to select a measurement
(OVC - Overvoltage category) device with a sufficient overvoltage category, depending on the network voltage and
the transient overvoltages likely to occur.
IEC 60947-1. Annex H Four overvoltage categories define the field of use for a device.
bb Cat. I. Devices supplied by a SELV isolating transformer or a battery.
bb Cat. II. Residential distribution, handheld or laboratory tools and devices
connected to standardised 2P + earth electrical outlets (230 V).
bb Cat. III. Industrial distribution, fixed distribution circuits in buildings (main low
voltage switchboards, rising mains, elevators, etc.).
bb Cat. IV. Utility substations, overhead lines, certain industrial equipment.
Percent load Percentage of current flowing through the circuit breaker with respect to its rated
current. Micrologic 6 E-M offers this information and can sum it over the total
operating time to provide the load profile for the following ranges, 0 to 49 %,
50 to 79 %, 80 to 89 % and u 90 %.
Phase sequence The order in which the phases are connected (L1, L2, L3 or L1, L3, L2) determines
the direction of rotation for three-phase asynchronous motors. Micrologic 6 E-M trip
units provide this information.
Power and energy metering The digital electronics in Micrologic 5/6 E calculate the instantaneous power levels,
(consumption) apparent (S in kVA), active (P in kW) and (Q in kV), and integrate over a time interval
to determine the corresponding energies (kVAh, kWh kvarh). Calculations are for
each phase and for the total.
Time-stamped histories Micrologic trip units store information on events (e.g. alarms and their cause) that are
time-stamped to within a millisecond.

Protection...............................................................................................................
Ground-fault protection G (Ig) Protection function specific to electronic circuit breakers, symbolised by G (Ground).
This protection can calculate high-threshold residual earth-leakage currents (in the
order of tens of Amperes) on the basis of phase-current measurements. Micrologic
5/6 offers this protection function with adjustable pick-up Ig and time delay.
Instantaneous protection I (Ii) This protection supplements Isd. It provokes instantaneous opening of the device.
The pick-up may be adjustable or fixed (built-in). This value is always lower than the
contact-repulsion level.
Long-time protection L (Ir) Protection function where the adjustable Ir pick-up determines a protection curve
similar to the thermal-protection curve (inverse-time curve I2t). The curve is generally
determined on the basis of the Ir setting which corresponds to a theoretically infinite
tripping time (asymptote) and of the point at 6 Ir at which the tripping time depends
on the rating.
Magnetic protection (Im) Short-circuit protection provided by magnetic trip units (see this term). The pick-up
setting may be fixed or adjustable.
Neutral protection (IN) The neutral is protected because all circuit-breaker poles are interrupted. The setting
may be that used for the phases or specific to the neutral, i.e. reduced neutral (0.5
times the phase current) or OSN (oversized neutral) at 1.6 times the phase current.
For OSN protection, the maximum device setting is limited to 0.63 In.
Residual-current earth-leakage Protection provided by Vigi modules, in which the residual-current toroids directly
protection (IΔn) detect low-threshold earth-leakage currents (in the order of tens of mA) caused by
insulation faults.
Short-delay protection S (Isd) Protection function specific to electronic circuit breakers, symbolised by S (Short
delay or short time). This protection supplements thermal protection. The reaction
time is very short, but has a slight time delay to enable discrimination with the
upstream device. The short-delay pick-up Isd is adjustable from approximately 1.5 to
10 Ir.
Short-delay protection with fixed Short-delay protection, but with a fixed time delay. This function is available on
time delay So (Isd) Micrologic 2. It is symbolised by So. It ensures discrimination with downstream
devices.
Thermal protection (Ir) Overload protection provided by thermal trip units (see this term) using an inverse-
time curve (I2t).
Relays and auxiliary contacts.................................................................................

Auxiliary contact "Contact included in an auxiliary circuit and mechanically operated by the switching
IEC 60947-1 device".
Break contact "Control or auxiliary contact which is open when the main contacts of the mechanical
IEC 60947-1 switching device are closed and closed when they are open".
Make contact "Control or auxiliary contact which is closed when the main contacts of the
IEC 60947-1 mechanical switching device are closed and open when they are open".
Relay (electrical) "Device designed to produce sudden, predetermined changes in one or more
IEC 60947-1 electrical output circuits when certain conditions are fulfilled in the electrical input
circuits controlling the device".
Relay module with static output Output of a relay made up of a thyristor or triac electronic component. The low
interrupting capacity means that a power relay is required. This is the case for the
SDx outputs.
Switchgear ............................................................................................................
Circuit breaker "Mechanical switching device, capable of making, carrying and breaking currents
IEC 60947-2 under normal circuit conditions and also making, carrying for a specified time and
breaking currents under specified abnormal circuit conditions such as those of short
circuit". Circuit breakers are the device of choice for protection against overloads
and short-circuits. Circuit breakers may, as is the case for Powerpact, be suitable for
isolation.

Circuit-breaker utilisation category The standard defines two utilisation categories, A and B, depending on breaker
IEC 60947-2 discrimination with upstream breakers under short-circuit conditions.
bb Category A. Circuit breakers not specifically designed for discrimination
applications.
bb Category B. Circuit breakers specifically designed for discrimination, which
requires a short time-delay (which may be adjustable) and a rated short-time
withstand current in compliance with the standard.
Powerpact 150 to 600 circuit breakers are category A, however, by design, they
provide discrimination with downstream devices (see the Complementary technical
information guide).
Contactor "Mechanical switching device having only one position of rest, operated otherwise
IEC 60947-1 than by hand, capable of making, carrying and breaking currents under normal
circuit conditions including operating overload conditions". A contactor is provided for
frequent opening and closing of circuits under load or slight overload conditions. It
must be combined and coordinated with a protective device against overloads and
short-circuits, such as a circuit breaker.
Contactor utilisation categories The standard defines four utilisation categories, AC1, AC2, AC3 and AC4 depending
IEC 60947-4-1 on the load and the control functions provided by the contactor. The class depends
on the current, voltage and power factor, as well as contactor withstand capacity in
terms of frequency of operation and endurance.
Current-limiting circuit breaker "A circuit-breaker with a break-time short enough to prevent the short-circuit current
IEC 60947-2 reaching its otherwise attainable peak value".
Disconnector "Mechanical switching device which, in the open position, complies with the
IEC 60947-3 requirements specified for the isolating function". A disconnector serves to isolate
upstream and downstream circuits. It is used to open or close circuits under no-load
conditions or with a negligible current level. It can carry the rated circuit current and,
for a specified time, the short-circuit current.
Three-phase asynchronous motors and their protection........................................

Locked-rotor protection (Ijam) This function steps in when the motor shaft cannot or can no longer drive the load.
The result is a high overcurrent.
Long-start protection (Ilong) An overly long start means the current drawn remains too high or too low for too long,
with respect to the starting current. In all cases, the load cannot be driven and the
start must be interrupted. The resulting temperature rise must be taken into account
before restarting.
Phase-unbalance or phase- loss This protection function steps in if the current values and/or the unbalance in the
protection (Iunbal) three phases supplying the motor exceeds tolerances. Currents should be equal and
displacement should be one third of a period. Phase loss is a special case of phase
unbalance.
Starting current Start-up of a three-phase, asynchronous motor is characterised by:

bb a high inrush current, approximately 14 In for 10 to 15 ms
bb a starting current, approximately 7.2 In for 5 to 30 seconds
bb return to the rated current after the starting time.
Starting time Time after which the motor ceases to draw the starting current and falls back to the
operating current Ir (y In).
Thermal image of the rotor The thermal image models the thermal behaviour of a motor rotor and stator, taking
and stator into account temperature rise caused by overloads or successive starts, and the
cooling constants. For each motor power rating, the algorithm takes into account a
theoretical amount of iron and copper which modifies the cooling constants.
Thermal protection Protection against overcurrents following an inverse time curve I2t = constant, which
defines the maximum permissible temperature rise for the motor.
Tripping occurs after a time delay that decreases with increasing current.
Trip class The trip class determines the trip curve of the thermal protection device for a motor
IEC 60947-4-1 feeder. The standard defines trip classes 5, 10, 20 and 30. These classes are the
maximum durations, in seconds, for motor starting with a starting current of 7.2 Ir,
where Ir is the thermal setting indicated on the motor rating plate.

Under-load protection (Iund) This function steps in when the driven load is too low. It detects a set minimum phase
current which signals incorrect operation of the driven machine. In the example of a
pump, under-load protection detects when the pump is no longer primed.
Trip units................................................................................................................
Electronic trip unit (Micrologic) Trip unit that continuously measures the current flowing through each phase and the
neutral if it exists. For Micrologic, the measurements are provided by built-in current
sensors linked to an analog-digital converter with a high sampling frequency. The
measurement values are continuously compared by the ASIC to the protection
settings. If a setting is overrun, a Mitop release trips the circuit-breaker operating
mechanism.
This type of trip unit offers much better pick-up and delay setting accuracy than
thermal-magnetic trip units. It also provides a wider range of protection functions.
Magnetic release Release actuated by a coil or a lever. A major increase in the current (e.g. a
short-circuit) produces in the coil or the lever a change in the magnetic field that
moves a core. This trips the circuit breaker operating mechanism. Action is
instantaneous. The pick-up setting may be adjustable.
Reflex tripping Powerpact circuit breakers have a patented reflex-tripping system based on the
energy of the arc and that is independent of the other protection functions. It
operates extremely fast, before the other protection functions. It is an additional
safety function that operates before the others in the event of a very high short-
circuit.
Release Device, mechanically connected to a mechanical switching device (e.g. a circuit

IEC 60947-1 breaker), which releases the holding means and permits the opening or the closing
of the switching device. For circuit breakers, releases are often integrated in a trip
unit.
Shunt release (MX) This type of release operates when supplied with current. The MX release provokes
circuit-breaker opening when it receives a pulse-type or maintained command.
Thermal-magnetic trip unit Trip unit combining thermal protection for overloads and magnetic protection.
Thermal release Release in which a bimetal strip is heated by the Joule effect. Above a temperature-
rise threshold that is a function of the current and its duration (I2t curve = constant,
which is representative of temperature rise in cables), the bimetal strip bends and
releases the circuit-breaker opening mechanism. The pick-up setting may be
adjustable.
Undervoltage release (MN) This type of release operates when the supply voltage drops below the set minimum.

Notes

Notes

Schneider Electric France

Direction Marketing Communication France
Centre PLM
F-38050 Grenoble cedex 9
Tél. : 0 825 012 999
www.schneider-electric.com
©2015 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. All trademarks are owned by Schneider Electric Industries SAS or its affiliated companies.
ZZ5918-a - 06/2017

Catalogue Norme Ul

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Catalogue Norme Ul

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Multistandard protection

UL, CSA, IEC, CCC

Endorsing eco-friendly products in the industry

Schneider Electric’s Green Premium ecolabel is

Green Premium is the only RoHS

PEP: Product Environmental Profile

Green Premium ecolabel carbon emissions.

EoLI: End of Life Instructions

Multistandard protecion for OEM

Multistandard protecion for OEM

Multistandard protection catalogue - 02/2017 Life is On | Schneider Electric 3

Its new performances and the multiple choices of field installable

Multistandard protection catalogue - 02/2017 Life is On | Schneider Electric 5

Multistandard protection catalogue - 02/2017 Life is On | Schneider Electric 7

Residual Current Devices p. 30

Auxiliaries and accessories p. 43

Control panel technical guides library p. 80

Multistandard protection catalogue - 02/2017 Life is On | Schneider Electric 9

UL 489 / CSA C22.2 No 5 / IEC/EN 60947-2 / GB 14048-2

Number of Rating (A) Breaking capacity (kA rms)

10 Life is On | Schneider Electric Multistandard protection catalogue - 02/2017

Conformity with product standards

UL 486A connections for copper cables,

Rigid, flexible or with ferrule

Weight (g / oz) Dimensions (mm / inches)

In direct current 4.2 In ± 20 %

Mechanical 20,000 cycles

Multistandard protection catalogue - 02/2017 Life is On | Schneider Electric 11

UL 489 / CSA C22.2 No 5 / IEC/EN 60947-2 / GB 14048-2

Number of Rating (A) Breaking capacity (kA rms)

18 mm (0.71 in.) 25°C/77°F AIR Icu

12 Life is On | Schneider Electric Multistandard protection catalogue - 02/2017

Conformity with product standards

UL 486A connections for copper wires,

Thickness: 3 mm (0.12 in) or

Weight (g / oz) Dimensions (mm / inches)

Thermal tripping Reference temperature 25°C / 77°F

Endurance (O-C) Electrical 10,000 cycles

Multistandard protection catalogue - 02/2017 Life is On | Schneider Electric 13

UL 1077 / CSA C22.2 No 235 / IEC/EN 60947-2 /

Number of Rating (A) Breaking capacity (kA rms)

14 Life is On | Schneider Electric Multistandard protection catalogue - 02/2017

Conformity with product standards

UL 486A connections for copper cables,

Rigid, flexible or with ferrule

0.5 to 25 A 2.5 N.m (22 lb.in) 1 to 25 mm2 AWG #18 to #8

Weight (g / oz) Dimensions (mm / inches)

Curve Width in 9 mm Curve Width in 9 mm

Multistandard protection catalogue - 02/2017 Life is On | Schneider Electric 15

(=K curve) In direct current 17 In ± 20 %

Dissipated power See page 68

16 Life is On | Schneider Electric Multistandard protection catalogue - 02/2017

Number of Rating (A) Breaking capacity (kA rms)

Multistandard protection catalogue - 02/2017 Life is On | Schneider Electric 17

Magnetic tripping (Ii) B curve Between 3 and 7 In

Mechanical 20,000 cycles

Failure to match polarity during connection

Connection Without accessory

Rigid, flexible or with ferrule

IEC 60947-2 UL 486A-B

PZ2 0.5 to 25 A 2.5 N.m (22 lb.in) 1 to 25 mm2 AWG #18 to #8

Weight (g / oz) Dimensions (mm / inches)

18 Life is On | Schneider Electric Multistandard protection catalogue - 02/2017

Multistandard protection catalogue - 02/2017 Life is On | Schneider Electric 19